View
75
Download
0
Category
Preview:
Citation preview
IPIMS Background LearningDetailed Course Catalog
IPIMS Action Learning
Petroleum Online
Business Essentials
e-Learning Solutions
Operations & Maintenance
IPIMSBackground Learning Course Catalog
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview
Fundamentals of Petroleum Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_t30)
Description:
An overview of the fundamentals, introducing the primary geological factors controlling petroleum generation and
accumulation. Presents source rocks, primary and secondary migration and sealing condit ions. Provides perspective on varying
geological histories, basin configurations and economic considerations.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 10 minutes
Max: 2 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Basic Concepts of Petroleum Geology
Petroleum Generation and Maturation
Migration and Accumulation Processes
Petroleum Exploration Overview
Fundamentals of Petroleum Geology: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 1 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview
Hydrocarbon Properties (IHRDC_IPIMS_t31)
Description:
Introduces the physical and chemical propert ies of petroleum, and the terminology explorat ionists use to classify and describe
them. Explains how these propert ies affect the behavior of petroleum--it s migration, entrapment and availability to
exploitation. Outlines specific production problems when unfavorable petroleum propert ies are present.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 0 minutes
Max: 1 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Gas Propert ies and Classificat ions
Crude Oil Propert ies, Classifications and Alterations
Hydrocarbon Propert ies: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 2 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview
Subsurface Environment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t32)
Description:
Establishes the general condit ions of subsurface environments. Presents the nature and behavior of subsurface waters, fluid
pressures, geothermal factors and the fluid dynamics of sedimentary basins. Discusses how these factors can affect petroleum in
the subsurface environment. A reminder that for acquiring subsurface data, a dry hole can be as valuable as a producer.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 40 minutes
Max: 2 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Water Origins and Chemistry
Temperature and Thermal Gradient
Pressure Environments
Fluid Behavior
Subsurface Environment: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 3 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview
Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t34)
Description:
Outlines basic characterist ics of reservoir lithologies and discusses identification, measurement and evaluation of reservoir
condit ions in rocks. Considers reservoir propert ies which determine overall quality: porosity, permeability, and their
interrelationship; diagenet ic effects and reservoir continuity. Stresses the different requirements for evaluation of clast ic and
carbonate reservoirs.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 20 minutes
Max: 1 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Rock Propert ies
Diagenesis
Reservoir Continuity
Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 4 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview
Traps (IHRDC_IPIMS_t35)
Description:
Petroleum generated from source rocks moves up through permeable st rata and would be lost at the earth's surface if not
"trapped" on its way up. Describes the characterist ics of the principal trap types, how they appear on geologic sections and
maps, and how they are analyzed in terms of geologic history. Examines constraints on production imposed by variat ions in
t rapping.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 20 minutes
Max: 2 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Hydrocarbon Traps: Introduction
Structural Traps
Stratigraphic Traps
Other Trap Types
Traps: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 5 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview
Habitat of Hydrocarbons in Sedimentary Basins (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36)
Description:
Provides the format for genetic classification of sedimentary basins, drawing together the principles of the previous six modules
into the evaluat ion of the earth's plate tectonic framework. Explains identificat ion and classificat ion of sedimentary basins, their
role in forming oil and gas, and the habitats of oil and gas within them.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 20 minutes
Max: 2 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Sedimentary Basins: Overview
Cratonic Basins
Divergent Margin Basins
Convergent Margin Basins
Downwarp Basins and Tert iary Deltas
Basin Types: Review Exercises
Petroleum Characterist ics by Basin Type
Habitat of Hydrocarbons in Sedimentary Basins: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 6 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Basic Skills of the Petroleum Geologist
Geologic Cross-Sections (IHRDC_IPIMS_t37)
Description:
Teaches the construct ion of the two principal types of cross sections--structural and strat igraphic--and their extensions into
three-dimensional (fence) diagrams. Int roduces computer generation of maps and sections.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 20 minutes
Max: 1 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Cross-Section Elements
Cross-Sections in Two Dimensions
Cross-Section Diagrams in Three-Dimensions
Cross-Sections: Computer Methods
Geologic Cross-Sections: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 7 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Basic Skills of the Petroleum Geologist
Subsurface Mapping (IHRDC_IPIMS_t38)
Description:
An integrated approach to subsurface mapping, discussing downhole data, correlations between wells, and how to depict
surfaces and three-dimensional units on contour maps. Presents surface maps and geophysical or remote sensing surveys as aids
in delimit ing important st ructural and st rat igraphic relationships. Stresses proper correlation and use of borehole informat ion.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 30 minutes
Max: 1 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Lateral Correlation of Logged Data
Structural Contour Maps
Isopach and Other Subsurface Maps
Subsurface Mapping: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 8 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Basic Skills of the Petroleum Geologist
Prospect Generation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t39)
Description:
Teaches how prospects are generated, emphasizing recognit ion of previously undelineated anomalies, and that although
each prospect is unique, the general patterns of prospect generat ion are roughly similar. Presents learning basic patterns by
using the experience of others and reviewing past cases.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 20 minutes
Max: 2 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Prospect Generat ion: Basic Concepts and Definit ions
Prospect Generat ion in Front ier Regions
Model Prospects
Prospect Generat ion: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 9 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Petroleum Technology for theNon-Engineer
Drilling and Well Completion (IHRDC_IPIMS_t40)
Description:
Presents the integration of drilling and well complet ion technology in an overall development program, showing the
equipment and procedures involved as operations are carried out. Focuses on the responsibilit ies of individuals and service
companies at the drillsite.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 10 minutes
Max: 4 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Drilling Fundamentals
Rotary Drilling Rig Components
Drillst ring, Drill Bits and Drilling Fluid
Drilling Operations
Well Completion Technology
Case Histories, Drilling and Completion Programs
Drilling and Well Completion: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 10 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Petroleum Technology for theNon-Engineer
Production Technology (IHRDC_IPIMS_t41)
Description:
Describes the production technology techniques used to maximize production. Once production begins, the reservoir is only a
part of a larger system, and understanding the relat ionships among all elements--the wellbore, tubing string, art ificial lift
equipment, surface control devices, separators, t reaters, tanks and measuring devices--is crucial to economical and safe
recovery.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 40 minutes
Max: 3 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Well Completions
Surface Production Facilit ies
Production System Performance
Art ificial Lift
Production Technology: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 11 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization
Subsurface Facies Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t48)
Description:
Reviews basic parameters in defining a facies--lithology, sedimentary st ructures, paleontology, geometry and associated
environments. Discusses informat ion sources, including cores, cutt ings, well logs and seismic, and summarizes diagnost ic features
of major facies. Presents case studies on environmental diagnosis of productive sandstone and carbonate reservoirs.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 40 minutes
Max: 5 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Sedimentary Environments and Facies
Lithology
Sedimentary Structures, Geometry and Facies
Paleontology
Sources of Information
Sandstone Reservoir Facies
Carbonate Reservoir Facies
Subsurface Facies Analysis: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 12 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization
Nonmarine Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t49)
Description:
Presents basic concepts and techniques of exploration for nonmarine sandstone reservoirs. Applies common tools for examining
nonmarine sett ings--such as rivers, desert dunes and lakes-- in terms of their genesis and recognit ion in the subsurface.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 0 minutes
Max: 3 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Classification of Nonmarine Sandstones
Alluvial Fan Environments
Braided St ream Environments
Meandering Channel Alluvial Systems
Eolian Environments
Lacustrine Environments
Exercises: Identifying Reservoir Environments
Nonmarine Sandstone Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 13 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization
Marginal Marine Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t50)
Description:
Examines coastal barrier islands, shallow-marine shoals, bars and deltas, presenting deposit ional and erosional condit ions
dominant during formation. Describes diagnosis and recognit ion through use of seismic, well-log, map and core data.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 30 minutes
Max: 4 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Marginal Marine Sandstone Reservoirs
Deltaic Environments
Barrier Islands
Marginal Marine Sandstone Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 14 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization
Shelf Marine Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t51)
Description:
Describes characterist ics of shelf sand reservoirs, including elongate submarine fans, radial submarine fans and slope-apron
systems. Presents detection methods including seismic, well-log, core analysis, paleontology and production studies.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 20 minutes
Max: 1 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Shelf Marine Sandstone Reservoirs
Deposit ional Processes of Shelf Sands
Shelf Sand Deposits
Diagnosis and Detection of Shelf Sands
Petroleum Geology, Reservoir Characterist ics
Shelf Marine Sandstone Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 15 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization
Porosity Evolution in Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t52)
Description:
Describes porosity evolut ion in all sandstone reservoirs, regardless of deposit ional environment, and reviews factors that control
primary and secondary porosity. Evaluates tools and techniques used for descript ion of sandstone porosity and porosity
evolut ion. I llust rates applications of porosity evolut ion through case studies.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 50 minutes
Max: 6 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Descript ion of Sandstone Porosity
Diagenesis
Secondary Porosity
Evaluat ion Tools and Techniques
EandP Applications
Case Studies
Porosity Evolut ion in Sandstone Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 16 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization
Exploration in Carbonate Rocks (IHRDC_IPIMS_t53)
Description:
Introduces carbonates by examining formation and deposit ion, focusing on ramp and slope models and the deposit ional
sett ings within them. Presents field examples of ancient and modern carbonate deposits and their reservoir characterist ics.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 10 minutes
Max: 5 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Explorat ion in Carbonate Rocks
Carbonate Rocks Described
Analysis of Carbonate Rocks and Facies Distribution
Nonmarine Carbonate Sett ings
Coastal Sett ing
Shelf Sett ing
Shelf-Margin Sett ing
Foreslope Sett ing
Basinal Sett ing
Exploration in Carbonate Rocks: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 17 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization
Porosity Evolution in Carbonate Rocks (IHRDC_IPIMS_t54)
Description:
Demonstrates the systematic evolut ion of carbonate porosity and describes classificat ions and condit ions used for predicting
porosity dist ribut ion. Discusses deposit ional and diagenet ic models of carbonates. Field studies illustrate how to handle porosity
parameters in production planning.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 40 minutes
Max: 3 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Porosity Evolut ion in Carbonate Rocks
Diagenesis and Porosity Evolut ion
Evaluat ion of Porosity and Diagenetic History
Porosity Evolut ion and Petroleum Exploration
Porosity Evolut ion and Field Development
Porosity Evolut ion in Carbonate Rocks: Reference Section
Topic 18 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization
Evaporites and their Role in Petroleum Exploration (IHRDC_IPIMS_t55)
Description:
Describes characterist ics of evaporites and examines their relat ionship to hydrocarbon accumulations, including their role as
source beds, reservoirs, t raps and seals. Discusses evaporite mineralogy and diagenesis, as well as analysis and identification
techniques. Field examples illustrate occurrences, evaluation and significance of evaporite structures.
Duration:
Min: 5 hours 20 minutes
Max: 8 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Evaporites and their Role in Petroleum Exploration
Sabkha Deposit ional Facies and Reservoirs
Subaqueous Evaporites
Ancient Deposit ional Models
Salt Structures, Sediments and Hydrocarbons
Evaporite/Dolomite/Hydrocarbon Association
Evaporites and their Role in Petroleum Exploration: References and Addit ion
Topic 19 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization
Sequence Stratigraphy (IHRDC_IPIMS_t56)
Description:
Reviews a typical strat igraphic sequence, and examines each of its component systems t racts. Stresses the interplay between
sea level and sediment supply and how this interplay affects deposit ional geometries. Presents a methodology for interpreting
st ratigraphic sequences, incorporat ing well, seismic and biostratigraphic data. Discusses current controversies and future
trends.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 50 minutes
Max: 4 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
General Concepts
Cyclostratigraphy
The Making of a Stratigraphic Sequence
Sequence Strat igraphy
Interpretation of Strat igraphic Sequences
Conclusions and Current Controversies
Sequence Strat igraphy: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 20 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Structural Geology and GlobalTectonics
Structural Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_t57)
Description:
Introduces structural geology and its application to explorat ion programs. Presents mechanics of deformation and use of
outcrop and subsurface studies to diagnose tectonic forces. Emphasizes regional deformat ion and reviews plate tectonic
schemes and effects.
Duration:
Min: 6 hours 40 minutes
Max: 9 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Structural Features of Non-Tectonic Origin
Examples of Recent Structural Movements
Stress and St rain
Folds
Faults
Joints and Fractures
Unconformit ies
Structural Styles
Structural Geology: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 21 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Structural Geology and GlobalTectonics
Plate Tectonics and Sedimentary Basins (IHRDC_IPIMS_t58)
Description:
Presents the history and concepts of plate tectonic theory as applied to petroleum exploration. Examines tectonic processes
involved in development of sedimentary basins, and describes tectonic influences on the explorat ion concerns of source,
reservoir, t rap, maturation and migrat ion. Discusses current issues in plate tectonic theory.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 50 minutes
Max: 5 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Plate Tectonics and Sedimentary Basins
Plate Tectonics
Sedimentary Basin Parameters
Sedimentary Basin Development
Special Considerations of Plate Tectonics
Basin Classificat ion and Petroleum Prediction
Plate Tectonics and Sedimentary Basins: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 22 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Structural Geology and GlobalTectonics
Divergent Margins and Rift Basins (IHRDC_IPIMS_t59)
Description:
Applies tectonic concepts learned in GL601 and 602, focusing on petroleum habitats in divergent margin and rift basins.
Discusses theories of rift ing and its effect on sedimentation. Classifies rift basins and examines each type through present day
examples.
Duration:
Min: 5 hours 0 minutes
Max: 7 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Sedimentary Basins and Continental Margins
Petroleum Habitat
Rift ing and Basin Development
Structural Styles and Trapping Mechanisms
Nonmarine Basins in the Continental Interior
Marine Basins in the Continental Interior
Proto-Oceanic Basins
Subsided Divergent Margins
Exploration Considerations
Divergent Margins and Rift Basins: Reference Section
Topic 23 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Structural Geology and GlobalTectonics
Convergent Margin Basins (IHRDC_IPIMS_t60)
Description:
Places convergent margins in a plate tectonic sett ing and examines general characterist ics. Relates petroleum habitats to
theories of basin development. Classifies convergent margin basins and presents examples. Proposes a strategy for petroleum
exploration in convergent margin basins.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 40 minutes
Max: 6 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Convergent Margins
Basin Classificat ion and Development
Basin Development
Foreland Basins and Associated Structures
Petroleum Habitat
Convergent Tectonic Regimes
Exploration Considerations
Convergent Margin Basins: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 24 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Geochemistry
Introduction to Petroleum Chemistry (IHRDC_IPIMS_t61)
Description:
Focuses on characterist ics and chemical makeup of petroleum, tracing maturation of organic matter to petroleum.
Emphasizes development of kerogen and bitumen as transit ional steps, and explains modification of intermediate materials
during diagenesis, catagenesis, and metagenesis in response to increasing subsurface temperature. Presents examples of
source-rock studies, crude-oil correlations and crude oil-source rock parings.
Duration:
Min: 5 hours 20 minutes
Max: 8 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Petroleum
Hydrocarbon Groups
Resins
Asphaltenes
Organic Matter: Progenitor of Petroleum
Organic Matter Maturat ion
Geochemical Evaluation Overview
Source Potential (Inherent)
Source Potential (Realized): Kerogen Evaluation
Source Potential (Realized): Bitumen/ Petroleum Evaluation
Correlation Studies
Introduction to Petroleum Chemistry: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 25 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Geochemistry
Applications of Petroleum Geochemistry (IHRDC_IPIMS_t62)
Description:
Demonstrates uses and limitations of geochemical techniques and their importance in exploration and production. Presents
appropriate sample select ion and preparation, as well as analyt ical techniques used in laboratories. Reviews and integrates
basic source rock and crude oil evaluation programs into more advanced basin study and modeling programs.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 20 minutes
Max: 6 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Geochemical Analyses: Kerogen
Geochemical Analyses: Bitumen/ Petroleum
Geochemical Analyses: Analyt ical Procedures
Geochemical Analyses: Sample Types
Geochemical Analyses: Sampling Procedures
Geochemical Programs in Petroleum Exploration
Geochemistry and Basin Evaluation
Geochemical Problem Solving
Applications of Petroleum Geochemistry: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 26 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Other Geological Techniques
Photogeology and Remote Sensing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t63)
Description:
Describes the physical principles of the major remote sensing techniques, evaluating the strengths and weaknesses of each
during applicat ion. Discusses aerial photographs, Landsat images, SPOT images, and thermal infrared and radar techniques.
Includes a glossary of remote sensing terms, and interpretation projects for each technique which relate remote surveys to
other geological data.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 0 minutes
Max: 5 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Remote Sensing Fundamentals
Aerial Photographs
Satellite Images (Landsat)
Satellite Images (SPOT, Fuyo and Resource)
Thermal Infrared Images
Radar Images
Photogeology and Remote Sensing: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 27 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Other Geological Techniques
Basin Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t64)
Description:
A complete introduction to basin evolut ion and evaluation. Discusses basin formation processes, geodynamic models, source
rocks, maturation, migration, and sedimentary basin models. Presents the impact of basin models on prospect generation,
measurement of basin histories and propert ies, and the principles and application of various basin evaluation methods. Refers
to case studies for analysis and summary.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 50 minutes
Max: 6 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Basin Analysis and Petroleum Analysis
Basin Formation Processes
Geodynamic Models
Source Rocks
Maturation Processes
Sedimentary Basin Models
Prospect Generat ion
Basin Histories and Propert ies
Mathematical Basin Analysis Models
Stratigraphic Basin Analysis Models
Basin Analysis Case Studies
Basin Analysis: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 28 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Other Geological Techniques
Play Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t65)
Description:
Examines the crit ical elements of play analysis and evaluation, including play controls for structural styles and deposit ional
systems as well as the elements of reservoir, source, seal, t rap maturation and migration, and economic considerat ions.
Discusses the data requirements of play analysis and the planning and evolut ion of the play summary. Presents various
examples and case studies from both frontier and developed basins.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 0 minutes
Max: 4 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Play Analysis Int roduction
Play Elements
Play Controls
Play Analysis Methods
Risk Assessment and Analysis
Play Analysis Case Histories
Play Analysis: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 29 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Petroleum Technology for theNon-Engineer
Reservoir Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_t993)
Description:
Describes the reservoir management techniques used to maximize product ion. Once production begins, the reservoir is only a
part of a larger system, and understanding the relat ionships among all elements--the wellbore, tubing string, art ificial lift
equipment, surface control devices, separators, t reaters, tanks and measuring devices--is crucial to economical and safe
recovery.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 0 minutes
Max: 2 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Rock and Fluid Propert ies
Natural Drive Mechanisms in Petroleum Reservoirs
Improved Oil Recovery
Reservoir Simulation
Reservoir Management: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 30 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization
Deepwater Marine Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t2613)
Description:
Describes characterist ics of deepwater sand reservoirs, including elongate submarine fans, radial submarine fans and
slope-apron systems. Presents detection methods including seismic, well-log, core analysis, paleontology and production studies.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 40 minutes
Max: 3 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Deepwater Marine Sandstone Reservoirs
Sedimentation Processes
Deposit ional Systems
Subsurface Diagnosis and Detection
Sequence Strat igraphy
Petroleum Geology and Reservoir Characterist ics
Deepwater Marine Sandstone Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 31 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview
Hydrocarbon Generation and Migration (IHRDC_IPIMS_t3561)
Description:
Traces the natural condit ions leading to hydrocarbon generation and migration. Presents the effects of diagenesis and
petrogenesis on organic matter. Discusses kerogen types, physical and chemical factors that affect the maturation level and
geochemistry of petroleum, and the migration processes from petroleum source beds into the permeable carrier or reservoir
rock.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 30 minutes
Max: 2 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Generat ion and Maturation Processes
Migration Processes
Hydrocarbon Generation and Migration: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 32 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Other Geological Techniques
Basic Geostatistics (IHRDC_IPIMS_t23340)
Description:
This presentation describes both classical statist ical and geostatist ical methodologies designed to quantify qualitat ive
information. Though the material presented is not heavily mathematical, the presentation is not simplist ic. General equations
and matrix notation are used in some sections. The equat ions are presented mostly for informational purposes, because
calculations used in geostatist ics tend to be tedious and very computer-intensive. This module presents an overview of
techniques that can be used to t ransform a tradit ional geological reservoir descript ion (a surface or 3D volume) into a
mathematical reservoir.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 50 minutes
Max: 5 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Basic Geostatist ics
Classical Stat ist ical Concepts
Data Post ing and Validation
Regionalized Variables
Kriging
Data Integration
Condit ional Simulation
Public Domain Geostatist ics Programs
Case Studies
Selected Readings
Geostatist ics Glossary
Topic 33 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Petroleum Technology for theNon-Engineer
Geosteering: Fundamentals, Planning, and Implementation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36018)
Description:
GeoSteering is the application of geologic and engineering skill to direct a horizontal or extended-reach wellbore path, based
upon knowledge of the enclosing strat igraphy, with the expressed aim of maximizing wellbore exposure to the target reservoir.
This TOpic reviews valuable insights into the GeoSteering process, provided by a leading company with experience gained
over the course of steering nearly 2000 horizontal wells.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 50 minutes
Max: 4 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Directional Drilling: The Driving Force in Geosteering
Drilling Measurements and Logging Tools
Preparing the Geosteering Plan
Geosteering Practices
Case Study
Geosteering: Fundamentals, Planning, and Implementat ion: References and Add
Best Practices
Topic 34 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Other Geological Techniques
Geographical Information Systems (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36166)
Description:
This topic examines the use of Geographical Information Systems (GIS) in the oil and gas industry. Beginning with an overview of
GIS design and applications and a descript ion of Geodetic Frameworks, it examines the type of information contained in a
typical oil and gas GIS. Case studies and examples are presented relating to a variety of GIS systems, and an Appendix of
GIS-related websites is included to help users find the most up-to-date information in this important area.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 10 minutes
Max: 3 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Geographical Information Systems
GIS Design and Systems
Geodetic Frameworks
General and Background GIS Data
Exploration and Production GIS Data
Examples and Case Studies
Geographical Informat ion Systems: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 35 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Introductory Topics and SeismicSignals
Fundamentals of Exploration Geophysics (IHRDC_IPIMS_t66)
Description:
Analyzes geological situations where petroleum accumulations are possible and discusses tools used to locate and evaluate
those areas. Examines the divisions of an E&P company and the exploration decision-making process. Describes various cultural
and polit ical environments that affect explorat ion. Assumes no prior knowledge of geophysics.
Introduces reflection seismology, which accounts for 95% of the geophysical exploration effort. Examines the basic principles of
the method and discusses field work, processing, and interpretat ion. Describes the effect ive use of seismic data, as well as the
known pitfalls await ing the geophysicist.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 0 minutes
Max: 2 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Petroleum Exploration Overview
Seismic Methods
Fundamentals of Explorat ion Geophysics: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 36 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Introductory Topics and SeismicSignals
Signal Theory: A Graphical Introduction (IHRDC_IPIMS_t67)
Description:
Imparts a broad understanding of the principles of signal theory. Extensive graphics introduce Fourier series, convolut ion and
correlat ion.
Duration:
Min: 6 hours 0 minutes
Max: 8 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Waveforms
Operators
Noise
Correlation Techniques
Nonlinearity and Distort ion
Digital Representat ion of Waveforms
Signal Theory: A Graphical Introduct ion: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 37 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Introductory Topics and SeismicSignals
Seismic Pulse Generation and Transmission (IHRDC_IPIMS_t69)
Description:
Examines the earth's response to a seismic source--a response affected by compression, divergence, absorpt ion, and the
generation and part it ioning of other wave types. Explores the nature of the seismic input, its variat ions, and the interpretation
risks that attend different sources.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 40 minutes
Max: 6 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Seismic Pulse Generation and Transmission
Plane Compressional Waves
Spherical Compressional Waves
Physical Descript ion of the Seismic Method
Density and Velocity
Losses
Source Signature
Seismic Pulse Components: the Overall Picture
Shear Waves and Surface Waves
Seismic Pulse Generation and Transmission: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 38 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Introductory Topics and SeismicSignals
Seismic Reflection (IHRDC_IPIMS_t70)
Description:
Explores the causes of seismic reflection and the effects of the earth's layering. Presents the synthetic seismogram and the
vert ical seismic profile, and t ies these images to the picture yielded by the seismic section. Examines the effects of mult iples and
saturants, as well as the geological significance of seismic reflection.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 50 minutes
Max: 6 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Reflect ion and Transmission
Mult iple Reflect ion
Curved and Discont inuous Reflectors
Seismic Response of a Layer
Short Path Mult iples
Geological Meaning of Reflectors
Saturant Effects
Non-Normal Incidence and Mode Conversion
Seismic Reflection: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 39 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Introductory Topics and SeismicSignals
Geological Messages in the Seismic Trace (IHRDC_IPIMS_t71)
Description:
Explores the relat ionship between geological and seismic propert ies. Uses seismic strat igraphy to describe the seismic reflection
patterns of deposit ional environments, how to recognize source rocks, reservoir rocks and seals, and how to infer burial history,
likely saturant and geologic age.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 20 minutes
Max: 5 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Seismics and Geology
Rock Propert ies
Seismic Measurements and Geology
Reflect ion Patterns and Geology
Geological Messages in the Seismic Trace: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 40 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and FieldTechniques
Introduction to Field Work (IHRDC_IPIMS_t72)
Description:
Introduces the field aspects of reflect ion seismology, examining seismic explorat ion in the field--on land, at sea, and in between.
Describes elements of seismic operation--instruments, locations, people and steps taken by seismic crews to record high-quality
data.
Details various tasks and environments peculiar to land-oriented field work. Emphasizes use of explosive sources and safety of
operations. Stresses public relat ions due to direct impact of land work on land owners, lessees and polit ical bodies.
Analyzes field work at sea and in the transit ion zone. Examines equipment, costs and special problems, hazards, requirements
and advantages of field work in marine sett ings. Part icular attention is paid to navigational systems.
Duration:
Min: 5 hours 20 minutes
Max: 7 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Field Work
Improving the Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Mult iple Coverage in Action
Recording Instruments
The Land Seismic Source
The Land Seismic Receiver
The Seismic Record
Acquisit ion Constraints
Costs and Contracts
Marine Work
The Transit ion Zone
Mult i-Component Data
Organizat ion of the Field Crew
Safety
The Location of Seismic Lines
The Observer's Report
Introduction to Field Work: References and Addit ional Information
Introduction to Field Work: Exercises
Topic 41 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and FieldTechniques
Surveying and Mapping on Land (IHRDC_IPIMS_t75)
Description:
Describes tasks of seismic crew surveyor: laying out seismic lines and recording spatial coordinates of each source or receiver.
Emphasizes precision, accuracy and appropriate tools. Examines electronic surveying and satellite-aided posit ioning, including
Global Posit ioning System.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 0 minutes
Max: 6 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Object ives and Requirements
The Figure and Rotation of the Earth
Frames of Reference
Surveying Methods
Land Surveying in Pract ice
Satellite Posit ioning Methods
Surveying and Mapping on Land: Exercises
Surveying and Mapping on Land: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 42 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and FieldTechniques
Positioning and Mapping at Sea (IHRDC_IPIMS_t76)
Description:
I llustrates requirements and methods of navigation and posit ioning in marine seismic operations. Gives the land surveyor's
nautical counterpart the necessary background to make required measurements, computations and compensations.
I llustrates steering ship on a planned line, relat ing line to previous surveys, and ensuring that a drilling rig can return to opt imal
location.
Duration:
Min: 5 hours 10 minutes
Max: 7 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Posit ioning and Mapping at Sea
Towed Streamer Acquisit ion
Satellite Posit ioning Systems
Secondary Posit ioning Systems
Posit ioning Systems Calibration
Definit ions Controls and Checks
Navigation Data
Navigation QC and Report ing
Addit ional Exploration Posit ioning Requirements
New Developments
Supplemental Informat ion
Posit ioning and Mapping at Sea: Exercises
Posit ioning and Mapping at Sea: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 43 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and FieldTechniques
Multiple Coverage (IHRDC_IPIMS_t77)
Description:
Focuses on mult iple coverage method of obtaining field data, which is an efficient means of improving signal-to-noise ratio,
and discusses use on land and at sea. Describes combination with common-midpoint stacking to further improve the rat io.
I llustrates survey planning to maximize coverage, minimize noise and work around physical obstacles.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 30 minutes
Max: 5 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Background
The Benefits and Limitations of Mult iple Coverage
The Surface Diagram
Mult iple Coverage at Sea
Mult iple Coverage On Land
Common-midpoint Stacking
Migration and Mult iple Coverage
Vert ical Seismic Profiling
Summary and Conclusions
Mult iple Coverage: References and Addit ional Information
Exercises and Solut ions
Conceptual Quest ions
Topic 44 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and FieldTechniques
Array Design (IHRDC_IPIMS_t78)
Description:
I llustrates noise reduction in the field by using arrays to enhance signal-to-noise ratio. Harmonizes array design as a field problem
with array design as a processing problem. Introduces an easy and effective approach to array design.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 50 minutes
Max: 7 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Array Design
Factors Affecting Group Dimensions
Approaches to Array Design
Tradit ional Array Design
Field Tests Measuring Source Generated Noise
A Universal Approach to Acquisit ion
Arrays in 3D
Arrays at Sea
Array Design: References and Addit ional Information
Exercises and Solut ions
Topic 45 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and FieldTechniques
Vibroseis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t79)
Description:
Describes vibroseis--its use in the field and it s processing requirements--as an attract ive alternative to explosives in restricted
areas, now used in over half of all land operations. Discusses the mechanics of vibrator technology and the concept of pulse
compression to shape the sweep to an "impulsive" form.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 40 minutes
Max: 4 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Vibroseis in Principle
Vibroseis in Practice
Vibroseis: Exercises
Vibroseis: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 46 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and FieldTechniques
Choosing the Field Variables (IHRDC_IPIMS_t80)
Description:
Analyzes the exploration problem, the proper design of field programs, and the importance of the frequency variable.
Demonstrates how other variables depend on frequency and on each other. I llustrates how to optimize field work.
Duration:
Min: 7 hours 0 minutes
Max: 10 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction and Basic Concepts
Judgements From the Field Data
Field Variables
Experimental Shoot ing
Criteria for Choosing Field Variables
The Land Impulsive Source
The Vibroseis Source
Receivers and Recording Systems
Marine and Transit ion Zone Surveys
Conclusions
Choosing the Field Variables: References and Addit ional Information
Choosing the Field Variables: Exercises
Topic 47 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and FieldTechniques
Quality Control in the Field (IHRDC_IPIMS_t81)
Description:
Discusses quality control of land and marine operations. Presents the four major considerations of field quality control:
posit ioning, operations, record quality and report ing. Discusses crew safety and environmental concerns.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 0 minutes
Max: 4 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Quality Control in the Field
Land Surveys
Marine Surveys
Safety and Environmental Concerns
Cost Effectiveness
Quality Control in the Field: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Quality Control in the Field: Exercises
Topic 48 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation
Basic Seismic Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t90)
Description:
Introduces seismic data interpretation. Describes petroleum habitats, explorat ion economics and management decision
criteria. Outlines specific geologic features recognizable on seismic sections. Teaches how to follow events along a section, as
well as t iming, picking and mapping them. I llustrates the use of seismic sections in interpreting geologic history.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 20 minutes
Max: 2 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Seismic Sections and Geological Features
Seismic Interpretation Examples
Basic Seismic Interpretation: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 49 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation
Seismic Contouring (IHRDC_IPIMS_t91)
Description:
Introduces contouring. Describes mapping subsurface horizons by picking and t iming seismic events, finding counterparts
across faults or intrusions, and correlating between lines. Emphasizes interpolation for geologically plausible results.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 10 minutes
Max: 4 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Contouring Fundamentals
Contouring by Hand
Contouring by Machine
Interval Maps
Contour Maps: Operations
Seismic Contouring: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 50 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation
Fault Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t92)
Description:
Presents types of fault ing along with the corresponding structural sett ings. Discusses the seismic expression of faults, in part icular
diffractions and fault plane reflect ions. Presents guidelines for fault interpretation, and discusses the impact of 3-D data and
workstations.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 50 minutes
Max: 6 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Faults in Petroleum Provinces
Stress and St rain
Fault Nomenclature
Seismic Expression of Faults
Fault Data Interpretation
Structural Styles and Fault ing
Faults: 3-D and Workstation Interpretation
Fault Interpretation: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 51 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation
Velocity Interpretation and Depth Conversion (IHRDC_IPIMS_t93)
Description:
Provides an overview of the rock propert ies that affect velocity data. Presents t ime-depth conversion methods, detailing the
normalized interval velocity technique. Emphasizes the need for reliable maps when making exploration and drilling decisions.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 0 minutes
Max: 4 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Seismic Velocit ies
Normalized Interval Velocity
Well Velocit ies
Seismic Velocity Databases
Time-Depth Conversion Methods
Normalized Interval Velocity Techniques
Error Factors
Velocity Interpretation and Depth Conversion: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 52 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation
Hydrocarbon Indicators (IHRDC_IPIMS_t94)
Description:
Discusses the various hydrocarbon indicators, explaining the physical causes of the significant feature recognized on seismic.
Presents approaches in acquisit ion, processing or interpretation which may upgrade an anomaly through validation as a
hydrocarbon indicator. Examines in detail the preservation of seismic att ributes, amplituderelated and other direct indicators,
inversion techniques and the use of 3D data and workstat ions.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 30 minutes
Max: 6 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Seismic Methods and Hydrocarbon Detection
Reflect ions and Seismic Parameters
Seismic Attributes and Their Preservation
Amplitude HCIs
Amplitude Versus offset (AVO)
Seismic Modeling
3-D Seismic Data, Workstations and Hydrocarbon Indicators
Shear Waves and Other Hydrocarbon Indicators
Hydrocarbon Indicator Validation
Hydrocarbon Indicators: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 53 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation
Seismic Stratigraphic Modeling (IHRDC_IPIMS_t95)
Description:
Presents methods for extracting strat igraphic information from seismic data. Discusses acquisit ion concerns when the goal is
st rat igraphic analysis. Examines forward and inverse modeling, and AVO analysis. Presents case studies and the methods for
determining the success or failure of the methods applied.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 20 minutes
Max: 3 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Stratigraphic Prospects
Stratigraphic Seismology
Velocity and the Seismic Response
Forward Modeling
Inverse Modeling
Amplitude vs. offset Analysis
Seismic Strat igraphic Modeling: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 54 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: 3-D Seismic and Other GeophysicalMethods
Gravity and Magnetics (IHRDC_IPIMS_t96)
Description:
Examines the physical processes responsible for observed gravimetric or magnetic effects, relat ing them to specific geophysical
or geological features. Explains instruments, proper field techniques and data processing methods. Using case studies, discusses
interpretation of both surface and borehole gravity surveys as well as magnetic surveys.
Duration:
Min: 7 hours 10 minutes
Max: 9 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Gravitational Force Fields
Densit ies of Rocks
Determination of Gravity Effects on Geologic Bodies
Gravity Data: Reduct ion and Processing
Gravity Survey Design and Gravity Meters
Surface Gravity Interpretation
Borehole Gravity
Magnetic Force Fields
Magnetism of Rocks
Magnetic Anomalies and their Geological Significance
Magnetic Anomaly Signatures
Magnetic Inst ruments and Field Surveys
Magnetic Data Processing and Mapping
Magnetic Interpretat ion
Gravity and Magnetic Maps: Enhancement Methods
Gravity and Magnetics: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 55 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: 3-D Seismic and Other GeophysicalMethods
Other Geophysical Techniques (IHRDC_IPIMS_t996)
Description:
Presents in-situ velocity measurements. Integrates acoust ic-log data with velocity survey data. Describes interpretation of first
break arrival t imes and considerat ions in constructing a synthetic seismogram. Emphasizes correlation between the seismic
section and the synthetic seismogram.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 20 minutes
Max: 7 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Borehole Velocity Measurements
Synthetic Seismogram
Other Geophysical Techniques: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 56 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: 3-D Seismic and Other GeophysicalMethods
Crosswell Seismology (IHRDC_IPIMS_t5600)
Description:
Crosswell methods use seismic tomography to image the reservoir zone between two or more wells. This topic int roduces you to
crosswell techniques and helps you understand when and where to apply them.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 50 minutes
Max: 2 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Crosswell Seismology
When to Run a Crosswell Survey
Crosswell Data Acquisit ion
Crosswell Seismic Data Processing and Analysis
Crosswell Seismology Case Studies
Crosswell Seismology Exercises
Crosswell Seismology References and Addit ional Information
Crosswell Seismology Recommended Practices
Topic 57 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and FieldTechniques
Multicomponent Seismic Applications (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6105)
Description:
Provides an understanding of the value of recording mult icomponent seismic data. Describes the concepts of wave
propagation, shear wave splitt ing and amplitude variat ion with offset. Provides the basic principles of processing and
interpretation of mult icomponent data.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 40 minutes
Max: 5 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Mult icomponent Seismic Applications
Exploration Value
Theory
Shear Source Shear Receiver
Compression Source Compression Receiver
Compression Source Shear Receiver
Processing
Interpretation
Review of Best Practices
Mult icomponent Seismic Applications: References and Addit ional Information
Mult icomponent Seismic Applications: Exercises
Topic 58 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: 3-D Seismic and Other GeophysicalMethods
Vertical Seismic Profiles (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6365)
Description:
Examines VSP sources and receivers, and presents guidelines for planning and executing VSP surveys. Discusses data acquisit ion,
processing and interpretation, and methods for correlat ing VSP and seismic data. Provides examples of VSP exploration and
applicat ions.
Duration:
Min: 5 hours 0 minutes
Max: 6 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Vert ical Seismic Profiles
VSP Survey Fundamentals
VSP Survey Recording Geometries
The VSP Receiver
The VSP Source
Recording Systems
Pre-Survey Modeling
VSP Acquisit ion Practices and Concerns
VSP Processing Fundamentals
VSP Applications
Summary
Vert ical Seismic Profiles: References and Addit ional Information
Vert ical Seismic Profiles: Exercises
Topic 59 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: 3-D Seismic and Other GeophysicalMethods
3-D and 4-D Seismic (IHRDC_IPIMS_t23455)
Description:
Introduces 3-D seismic techniques used in exploration and reservoir delineation. Describes operations involved in 3-D surveys,
including field work, processing and interpretation.
Presents a comprehensive look at 3-D techniques, including acquisit ion, processing and interpretat ion. Discusses acquisit ion
methods and quality control for land and marine surveys. Addresses velocity analyses, trace binning, NMO and migration.
Examines t ime slices, chair displays and other 3-D displays. I llustrates role and capabilit ies of the workstation in 3-D
interpretation. 4-D Seismic, also known as t ime-lapse monitoring is intended to highlight the differences between successive
vintages of 3-D seismic surveys that are caused by changes in reservoir propert ies due to production.
Duration:
Min: 7 hours 0 minutes
Max: 9 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
3-D Seismic Techniques: An Overview
3-D Seismic Data Acquisit ion
3-D Seismic Data Processing
3-D Interpretation Basics
3-D Interpretation in Practice
Overview of 3-D Volume Visualization
4-D Seismic Applications
3-D and 4-D Seismic: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Exercises and Solut ions
Topic 60 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Processing
Basic Processing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36504)
Description:
Outlines seismic processing objectives and describes how the sequential steps of pre-processing, stacking and velocity analysis,
migration and post-processing are used to generate the best possible image of the subsurface from recorded field data.
Discusses the effect of each step on the overall sequence, with emphasis on the two-fold goal of improving the signal-to-noise
ratio and locating seismic reflections with respect to their t rue spat ial posit ions.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 40 minutes
Max: 2 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Basic Processing Overview
Pre-Processing and Deconvolut ion
Stacking and Velocity Analysis
Migration and Post-Processes
Basic Processing: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 61 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Processing
Initial Processes (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36535)
Description:
Describes the SEG-D and SEG-Y formats for recording and storing seismic data, along with the Observer's Reports and Field
Notes that contain essential informat ion for seismic data processing, and the init ial checks that are performed on field data.
Examines the steps involved in pre-processing seismic data, including gain recovery, de-mult iplexing, re-sampling, assigning
geometry, datum correct ions, amplitude adjustments, trace edit ing, common midpoint gather and common offset gather.
Addresses the pract ical considerat ions involved in selecting variables, establishing the processing order and reprocessing
exist ing seismic lines.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 0 minutes
Max: 2 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Field Data
Pre-Processing Flow
Practical Considerations
Init ial Processes: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 62 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Processing
Velocities (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36565)
Description:
Reviews the physical factors that influence seismic velocity. Defines the various components of seismic velocity, and introduces
the concepts of stacking velocity and normal moveout. Describes analysis procedures and the practical considerations
involved, including techniques for interpreting and refining the velocity model. Discusses velocity analysis for anisotropic media.
Provides overviews of tomographic velocity analysis and migration velocity analysis.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 50 minutes
Max: 3 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Influencing Factors
Seismic Velocit ies Definit ion
Velocity Analysis
Practical Considerations for Velocity Analysis
Interpreting and Refining the Velocity Model
Addit ional Technologies
Velocit ies: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 63 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Processing
Stacking, Filtering and Display (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36607)
Description:
Describes the process of common midpoint stacking and int roduces alternate forms of stacking. Examines the use of
two-dimensional filters in separat ing different arrivals on the basis of their characterist ic velocit ies. Discusses pre-stack and
post-stack filtering processes, and the use of band pass filters, t ime variant filters and filter panels. Reviews different methods for
displaying final record sect ions based on the needs of the seismic interpreter.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 40 minutes
Max: 3 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Common Midpoint Stacking
Alternative Forms
Velocity Filters
Final Filtering
Display
Stacking, Filtering and Display: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 64 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Processing
Seismic Migration (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36616)
Description:
Reviews the seismic reflect ion process. Examines the fundamentals of seismic migration and how geological features affect
seismic data. Discusses practical considerations in applying migration methods. Addresses the issue of seismic migration in
anisotropic media.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 30 minutes
Max: 3 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Overview of Seismic Migration
Seismic Migration Methods
Depth Migration
2D Versus 3D Migration
Seismic Migration in Anisotropic Media
Seismic Migration: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 65 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Processing
Deconvolution (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36653)
Description:
Introduces the concept of the convolut ional model and describes the use of deconvolut ion in removing coherent noise and
minimizing the effect of the wavelet on the final stack. Defines deconvolut ion parameters. Examines single-trace, determinist ic
and mult i-t race deconvolut ion methods, along with alternative methods such as maximum likelihood, minimum entropy and
L1-norm deconvolut ion. Addresses pract ical considerat ions in applying deconvolut ion methods and provides a suggested
processing scheme.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 0 minutes
Max: 5 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Basic Concepts
Single-Trace Statist ical Deconvolut ion
Determinist ic Methods
Mult i-Trace Deconvolut ion
Alternative Methods of Deconvolut ion
Practical Considerations in Deconvolut ion
Deconvolut ion: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 66 of 123
PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Processing
Static Corrections (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36726)
Description:
Examines how stat ic corrections are applied to seismic data to compensate for near-surface or water-bottom effects.
Describes long-wavelength stat ic problems and computation methods, including considerations in choosing a seismic datum
and accounting for the geology of the area. Examines determinist ic methods for deriving the near-surface velocity model.
Discusses short-wavelength stat ic corrections, including cross-correlation methods, surface-consistent methods, genetic
algorithms, cross-dip correct ions and 3-D statics. Describes layer replacement techniques of ray trace modeling and wave
equat ion datuming.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 40 minutes
Max: 5 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Basic Concepts
Long Wavelength Statics
Determinist ic Techniques for Deriving the Near Surface Velocity Models
Short Wavelength Static (Residual Static)
Layer Replacement Techniques
Static Corrections: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 67 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Equipment andOperations
Wellheads, Flow Control Equipment and Flowlines (IHRDC_IPIMS_t110)
Description:
Reviews the types and features of casing and tubing housings, Christmas tree components and flowline valves, as well as
flowline sizing, installat ions and operating procedures. Describes the basic design and operating requirements of typical
production manifolds and presents a wide variety of equipment options.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 50 minutes
Max: 5 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Casing and Tubing Head Equipment
Flow Control at the Wellhead
Flowlines
Valves, Fitt ings and Flanges
Production Manifolds
Wellheads, Flow Control Equipment and Flowlines: References and Addit ional
Topic 68 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Equipment andOperations
Fluid Separation and Treatment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t111)
Description:
Describes the functions and components of vert ical and horizontal separators and oil t reating equipment. I llust rates design
considerations, including sizing calculations, for both two-phase and three-phase flow.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 40 minutes
Max: 3 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Production Facility Overview
Separation of Produced Fluids
Treatment of Separat ion Oil
Fluid Separation and Treatment: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 69 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Equipment andOperations
Wireline Production Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_t112)
Description:
A comprehensive introduction to wireline operations. Describes each component of the basic surface equipment setup and
the typical workstring of tools, along with commonly used subsurface complet ion and production control wireline equipment.
Describes the running and pulling procedures for Baker, Camco and Otis equipment.
Duration:
Min: 5 hours 0 minutes
Max: 6 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Wireline Production Work
Wireline Surface Equipment
Wireline Tool String, Basic Components
Wireline Tubing Condit ioning Skills
Wireline Pulling Tools and Running Tools
Wireline Fishing Tools
Wireline Bailers
Wireline Specialty Tools
Wireline-Operated Completion and Production Control Equipment
Wireline Remedial Operations
Wireline Well Maintenance and Data Gathering
Wireline Operat ing Requirements
Wireline Production Operations: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 70 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Equipment andOperations
Oilfield Safety (IHRDC_IPIMS_t113)
Description:
Introduces principles and general procedures for managing emergencies, report ing and invest igating accidents, and
maintaining safety in day-to-day activit ies. Addresses hazards that are common to most oil and gas sites, emphasizing
awareness, planning and training as keys to preventing accidents.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 10 minutes
Max: 6 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Emergency Prepareness
Incident Report ing and Invest igation
Safety Hazards in Oil and Gas Production
Safe Work Practices
Safety and Control of Site Activit ies
Fire Prevent ion and Control
Oilfield Safety: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 71 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Equipment andOperations
Cased Hole Logging (IHRDC_IPIMS_t114)
Description:
Introduces the logging techniques used in cased wells. Describes various types of radioactive tools for determining lithology and
fluid saturation, acoust ic devices for well integrity logging, and a range of flow monitoring logs. Highlights each tool's operating
principles.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 0 minutes
Max: 5 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Cased Hole Logging Overview
Formation Evaluation in Cased Holes
Cement Bond Evaluation
Casing Inspection
Qualitat ive Flow Evaluat ion
Flow Rate Determination in the Wellbore
Production Logging of Mult iphase Flow in Horizontal Wells
Cased Hole Logging: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 72 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Drilling Engineering
Well Planning (IHRDC_IPIMS_t115)
Description:
Introduces the drilling procedure and provides a clear "blueprint" for the safe, efficient drilling of a well. Integrates the mud,
casing, bit , cementing and safety programs. Presents an understanding of how a well proposal is init iated and just ified
economically.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 30 minutes
Max: 5 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Well Planning Overview
Well Selection
AFE Preparat ion
Well Plan Organizat ion and Data Gathering
Well Design Considerations
Rig Design Considerations
Procedures
Drilling Contracts
Cost Reviews
Well Planning: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 73 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Drilling Engineering
Drill String Components (IHRDC_IPIMS_t116)
Description:
Introduces the tools that make up a typical drill st ring, including the kelly, the drill pipe, and the components of the bottomhole
assembly. Describes design, selection, performance and evaluation of common drill bit types. Emphasizes the general
applicat ion of various downhole tools and development of sound drilling practices.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 50 minutes
Max: 2 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Drill String Overview
Kelly
Drill Pipe
Drill Collars
Heavy Wall Drill Pipe
Bottomhole Assembly Tools
Drill String Components: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 74 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Drilling Engineering
Drilling Fluids and the Circulating System (IHRDC_IPIMS_t117)
Description:
Introduces drilling fluid types and describes field monitoring of their propert ies, along with cleaning and circulation equipment
employed at the wellsite. Emphasizes applications of drilling fluids and unique propert ies which make each fluid suitable to
control specific subsurface environments. Incorporates field footage of equipment with laboratory footage showing mud
components and test ing procedures.Summarizes environmental concerns related to use and disposal of drilling fluids. Includes
basic calculations used in drilling fluid engineering.
Duration:
Min: 5 hours 40 minutes
Max: 8 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Drilling Fluids Overview
Drilling Rig Circulating System
Drilling Fluid Components and Addit ives
Drilling Fluid Systems
Solids Control
Clay Chemist ry
Environmental Aspects of Drilling Mud Engineering
Field Tests of Drilling Fluids
Mud Engineering Calculations
Drilling Fluids and the Circulating System: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 75 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Drilling Engineering
Directional and Horizontal Drilling (IHRDC_IPIMS_t118)
Description:
Introduces basic principles of wellbore deviation and directional control. Describes features, applications, benefits and
limitat ions of various directional and horizontal well profiles. Discusses tools, planning, survey techniques and operating
practices, point ing out problems that are unique to horizontal and high-angle directional drilling.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 50 minutes
Max: 3 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Directional Drilling Overview
Deviation in Vert ical Wells
Directional Drilling Tools and Techniques
Horizontal Wells
Drilling Hydraulics in Deviated Wells
Drill String and Bit Considerat ions in Deviated Wells
Underblanced Drilling in Direct ional Wells
Directional and Horizontal Drilling: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 76 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Drilling Engineering
Drilling Problems and Drilling Optimization (IHRDC_IPIMS_t119)
Description:
Describes occurrences, preventive measures and remedial actions for common downhole drilling problems. Addresses
considerations involved in drilling abnormal pressures, working in sour gas environments and planning fishing operations.
Discusses procedures for opt imizing bit hydraulics, bit weight and rotary speed to attain minimum cost drilling. Emphasizes
importance of the mud system in meet ing well objectives.
Duration:
Min: 5 hours 10 minutes
Max: 7 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Drilling Object ives
Pressure, Hydraulics and Hole Cleaning
Abnormal Pressure Environments
Kick Detection and Control
Lost Circulation
Borehole Instability
Stuck Pipe
Fishing Operations
Hydrogen Sulfide
Drilling Optimization
Drilling Problems and Drilling Optimizat ion: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 77 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Well Completion and Stimulation
Basic Completion Design and Practices (IHRDC_IPIMS_t120)
Description:
Introduces features used to categorize well completions, emphasizing the importance of correct tubing design and
techniques. Presents downhole components common in producing wells. Outlines the major completion operations: cementing,
logging, perforating, st imulation and sand control.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 30 minutes
Max: 3 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
General Design Criteria
Basic Downhole Configurat ions
Lift Methods
Subsea Completions
Completion Productivity
Completion Planning
Topic 78 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Well Completion and Stimulation
Cementing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t121)
Description:
Covers procedures and equipment used in primary and secondary cement jobs. Reviews the basic chemistry of various bulk
cement and cement addit ives, as well as industry-standard mixing procedures. Describes surface and downhole equipment,
precise placement techniques, quality control and safe work practices.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 40 minutes
Max: 6 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Cementing
Manufacture and Classification of Oilwell Cements
Cement Test ing Procedures
Cement Addit ives
Primary Cementing Equipment
Primary Cementing Operat ions
Squeeze Cementing
Cement Plugs
Evaluat ing/Test ing the Cement Job
Fluid Flow Propert ies and Mud Displacement
Cementing: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 79 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Well Completion and Stimulation
Perforating (IHRDC_IPIMS_t122)
Description:
Describes the operation of shaped charges, as well as basic categories of perforating guns and perforating methods. Reviews
API test ing procedures, methods of predicting and maximizing perforation product ivity, equipment and operating procedures
for wireline and tubing-conveyed techniques. Emphasizes job-planning, quality control and safety guidelines.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 30 minutes
Max: 3 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Perforating
Perforating Gun Types
Perforating and Production Performance
Electric Wireline Perforating
Tubing-Conveyed Perforating
Perforating: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 80 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Well Completion and Stimulation
Acidizing and Other Chemical Treatments (IHRDC_IPIMS_t123)
Description:
Introduces safe, cost-effective acid treatment design. Covers three basic treatments: acid washing, matrix acidizing and acid
fracturing. Describes the costs and potential hazards of acidizing, and emphasizes proper just ification and care in field
procedures. Reviews fundamentals of acid chemistry and test ing and field procedures.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 20 minutes
Max: 4 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Acidizing
Acid Treating Solut ions
Addit ives in Acidizing Fluids
Matrix Acidizing
Fracture Acidizing
Divert ing Materials in Acidizing
Wellbore Cleanout and Scale Removal
Paraffins and Asphaltenes
Acidizing and Other Chemical Treatments: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 81 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Well Completion and Stimulation
Hydraulic Fracturing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t124)
Description:
Introduces three aspects of hydraulic fracture st imulation: theory, design, and execut ion. Reviews rock mechanics and fracture
modeling. Discusses hydraulic fracture st imulation treatments, including determining fracture dimensions and selecting
proppants and chemical addit ives. Presents case study of an actual fracturing job.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 0 minutes
Max: 4 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Hydraulic Fracturing Fundamentals
Hydraulic Fracturing Fluids
Proppant Agents
Acid Fracturing
Hydraulic Fracture Treatment Design and Execut ion
Hydraulic Fracturing: Emerging Technologies
Hydraulic Fracturing: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 82 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Well Completion and Stimulation
Sand Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_t125)
Description:
Covers sand control topics from rock mechanics to equipment. Emphasizes est imation and control methods. Presents
gravel-pack design and placement procedures in detail, describing surface equipment used, as well as downhole screens and
associated equipment.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 30 minutes
Max: 6 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Sand Production in Oil and Gas Wells
Completion and Production Practices
Liners and Screens
Gravel Packing
Frac-and-Pack Techniques
Consolidation Techniques
Sand Control in Wells Producing Heavy Oil
Sand Control: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 83 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Well Completion and Stimulation
Horizontal Wells: Completion and Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t126)
Description:
Introduces the deliverability equation for horizontal wells. Compares horizontal and vert ical well performance. Identifies
formation characterist ics that favor horizontal wells, and discusses methods for their determinat ion. Describes basic well
configurations and complet ion designs. Looks at practical aspects of cementing, zonal isolation, casing design and sand
control. Address guidelines for matrix acid treatments and hydraulic fracture st imulations.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 50 minutes
Max: 5 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Horizontal Wells in a Reservoir Management Strategy
Horizontal Well Completions
Matrix St imulation of Horizontal Wells
Hydraulic Fracturing of Horizontal Wells
Mult ilateral, Mult ibranched and Mult ilevel Wells
Horizontal Wells: Completion and Evaluat ion: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 84 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Other Petroleum Engineering Topics
Natural Gas Fluid Properties (IHRDC_IPIMS_t141)
Description:
Introduces basic concepts, inst rumentation and terminology used in natural gas engineering. Reviews characterist ics of
natural gas fluid systems. Describes devices for measuring temperature, pressure, volume, flow rate, density and other
propert ies, and discusses well selection, condit ioning and sampling procedures. Outlines methods for measuring mass flow rates
and determining mixed-stream composit ions.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 0 minutes
Max: 3 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Natural Gas Fluid Systems
Natural Gas Fluid Propert ies
Temperature Measurement
Pressure Measurement
Volume and Flow Rate Measurement
Gravity/ Density Measurement and Gas Composit ion
Natural Gas Fluid Sampling
Mass Flow Rate
Mixed Stream Composit ion
Natural Gas Fluid Propert ies: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 85 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Other Petroleum Engineering Topics
Risk Analysis Applied to Petroleum Investments (IHRDC_IPIMS_t142)
Description:
Introduces concepts of risk and uncertainty as they apply to the oil and gas indust ry. Describes risk analysis models, measures of
profitability and other decision-making tools. Reviews principles of probability distribution and introduces the Monte Carlo
simulat ion model. Presents procedures for running simulation models using @RISK software. Discusses the role of competit ive
bidding in the petroleum industry.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 20 minutes
Max: 4 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Risk Analysis Fundamentals
Probability Distributions
Monte Carlo Simulation Models
Competit ive Bidding
Risk Analysis Applied to Petroleum Investments: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 86 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Petroleum Production Performance
Fluid Flow and the Production System (IHRDC_IPIMS_t978)
Description:
Outlines the basic components of the producing system: reservoir, wellbore, and surface flow-control equipment. Explains the
interrelated nature of these components from the perspective of the production engineer.
Discusses inflow performance in more detail, presenting the basic methods for determining IPR curves from limited data.
Mathematics and terminology are explained for each technique.
Elaborates on vert ical lift performance, illustrat ing the flow regimes possible in vert ical tubing st rings as well as correlations for
determining pressure losses. Integrates inflow performance and vert ical lift performance for a flowing well.
Integrates the concepts introduced in the previous three modules, presenting graphical techniques for integrating inflow and
vert ical lift performance with surface-control condit ions.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 10 minutes
Max: 4 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Production Systems
Inflow Performance Relationship
Vert ical Lift Performance
Flowing Well Performance
Fluid Flow and the Production System: Reference Sect ion
Topic 87 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Petroleum Production Performance
Production Performance Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t982)
Description:
Presents the basis for graphical production-rate-extrapolation techniques. I llustrates and explains the fundamental equat ions
and smoothing procedures with examples.
Duration:
Min: 50 minutes
Max: 1 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Production Rate Decline Curves
Production Performance Evaluation: Reference Section
Topic 88 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Drilling Engineering
Drill Bits (IHRDC_IPIMS_t983)
Description:
Describes design, selection, performance and evaluation of common drill bit types. Emphasizes the general applicat ion of
various downhole tools and development of sound drilling practices.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 30 minutes
Max: 3 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Drill Bits
Bit Design (Rolling Cutter Types)
Bit Design (Fixed Cutter Types)
Bit Hydraulics
Bit Selection Criteria
Bit Grading and Evaluation
Bit Operating Guidelines
Drill Bit s: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 89 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Reservoir Engineering
Reservoir Environments and Characterization (IHRDC_IPIMS_t984)
Description:
Introduces important deposit ional environments and processes. Explains the geological, geophysical and engineering
information vital to reservoir characterization, and its use in reservoir management.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 10 minutes
Max: 4 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Sandstone Reservoir Environments
Carbonate Reservoir Environments
Reservoir Characterization
Reservoir Environments and Characterization: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 90 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Reservoir Engineering
Fundamentals of Reservoir Engineering (IHRDC_IPIMS_t986)
Description:
Introduces fluid flow and natural drive mechanisms. Describes basic reservoir engineering goals and the tools and resources
employed by reservoir engineers. Describes the behavior of gas and gas condensate reservoirs, using the real gas equation of
state and the P/Z versus cumulative production approaches. Discusses major drive mechanisms and the calculation of OIP
using material balance equations.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 30 minutes
Max: 3 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Basic Concepts in Reservoir Engineering
Reservoir Fluid Flow and Natural Drive Mechanisms
Fundamentals of Reservoir Engineering: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 91 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Reservoir Engineering
Improved Recovery Processes (IHRDC_IPIMS_t987)
Description:
Secondary Recovery: Waterflooding & Gas Injection
Introduces the fundamental principles governing the displacement of oil by water in reservoir rocks, as well as techniques for
predicting oil recovery by water and gas injection. Describes the important factors to consider in planning secondary recovery
projects.
Enhanced Recovery: Miscible Flooding
Introduces the physical and chemical processes governing the recovery of oil by miscible displacing agents. Contains extensive
discussion of methods for est imating oil recovery. Describes the considerations involved in designing a miscible flood, and
illustrates these considerat ions by reviewing a number of pilot tests and commercial projects.
Duration:
Min: 7 hours 20 minutes
Max: 12 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Secondary Recovery: Waterflooding and Gas Injection
Enhanced Recovery: Miscible Flooding
Improved Recovery Processes: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 92 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Reservoir Engineering
Reservoir Modeling and Reserves Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t989)
Description:
Reservoir Simulation
Introduces the concepts of reservoir modeling, and outlines the steps involved in a reservoir simulation study. Reviews rock
propert ies, fluid propert ies and the mathematical descript ion of fluid flow dynamics in porous media. Describes computer
methods for sett ing up a numerical model and solving flow equations. Discusses pract ical applications of reservoir modeling,
including the use of special purpose simulators.
Reserves Estimation
Introduces reserves est imation and the industry definit ions used to categorize reserves. I llustrates principal methods of
calculation: analogy/statist ical, volumetric, material balance and performance trend analogy. Presents special considerations
for est imating reserves in fractured, geopressured, heavy oil, low permeability or part ial water-drive gas reservoirs.
Duration:
Min: 7 hours 30 minutes
Max: 12 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Reservoir Simulation
Reserves Est imation
Reservoir Modeling and Reserves Evaluation: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 93 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Reservoir Engineering
Issues in Reservoir Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_t991)
Description:
Evaluation of Naturally Fractured Reservoirs
Discusses the origin and classification of natural fractures, and outlines methods for detecting and characterizing them.
Discusses how the propert ies of fractured formations affect reservoir engineering considerations. Out lines general approaches
to modeling fractured reservoirs, illustrat ing these approaches with several case studies.
Reservoir Management of Mature Fields
Introduces the concept of synergism in reservoir management, stressing an interdisciplinary approach as key to maximizing a
field's potential. Outlines data requirements and methodology for evaluating a mature reservoir. Discusses applied reservoir
management from the standpoint of increasing reserves and monitoring performance, with special emphasis on waterflooding
and enhanced oil recovery projects.
Duration:
Min: 5 hours 40 minutes
Max: 8 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Evaluat ion of Naturally Fractured Reservoirs
Reservoir Management of Mature Fields
Issues in Reservoir Management: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 94 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Well Completion and Stimulation
Completion Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t1926)
Description:
Presents downhole components common in producing wells.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 20 minutes
Max: 2 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Tubulars
Packers
Art ificial Lift Equipment
Downhole Completion Accessories
Subsurface Safety Valves (SSSVs)
Wellhead Equipment
Completion Equipment: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 95 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Other Petroleum Engineering Topics
Oil and Gas Pipelines (IHRDC_IPIMS_t5723)
Description:
This topic covers the engineering design and construction aspects of oil and gas pipelines. Discusses pipeline history, key design
considerations (including hydraulic calculations and mechanical st rength), onshore and offshore constructions pract ices, cost
est imating, current operating practices and This topic covers the engineering design and construction aspects of oil and gas
pipelines. Discusses pipeline history, key design considerations (including hydraulic calculations and mechanical strength),
onshore and offshore construct ions practices, cost est imat ing, current operating practices and potential operating problems.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 10 minutes
Max: 5 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Overview of Oil and Gas Pipelines
Hydraulics
Mechanical Design
Construction
Operations
Oil and Gas Pipelines: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 96 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Other Petroleum Engineering Topics
Integrated Reservoir Characterization (IHRDC_IPIMS_t5858)
Description:
Integrated Reservoir Characterization pulls together data and talents from a number of disciplines to opt imize field production.
This topic describes the contributions of the geologist, geophysicist, petroleum engineer, and petrophysicist as they combine
data and interpretations to build a comprehensive model of the reservoir.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 0 minutes
Max: 5 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Integrated Reservoir Characterizat ion
Assembly and Review of Exist ing Data
Data Acquisit ion
Data Analysis and Interpretation
Data Integration
Conclusion
Recommended Processes
Case Study 1 - Anasazi Field
Case Study 2 - Yibal Field
Integrated Reservoir Characterization: References and Addit ional Information
Integrated Reservoir Characterization: Exercises
Topic 97 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Facilities Design
Oil Systems and Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6433)
Description:
These presentations provide an understanding of two-phase and three-phase separators, describe how they work and what
the design procedures are for sizing them. Then, different methods and procedures are described for oil t reating and associated
equipment design. Oil desalt ing is the process of removing water-soluble salts from an oil stream. This presentat ion describes the
equipment commonly used and provides references for sizing the equipment. Crude oil or condensate stabilizat ion describes
the various processes used to stabilize a crude oil or condensate st ream, and presents a preliminary method for determining
liquid recoveries through stabilizat ion.
Duration:
Min: 5 hours 50 minutes
Max: 8 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Two Phase Separators
Three Phase Separators
Oil Treaters
Desalt ing
Crude Stabilizat ion
Oil Systems and Equipment: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 98 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Facilities Design
Gas Systems and Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6434)
Description:
Besides sales contract restrict ions, several other reasons exist for the removal of acid components from natural gas streams.
Among these are personnel safety, odor reduct ion, and fuel Btu improvement. The process of removing water vapor from a gas
st ream is called "gas dehydration. This presentation discusses conventional TEG dehydration and presents a method to size and
design the glycol dehydration equipment. Compressors are used whenever it is necessary to flow gas from a low pressure system
to a higher pressure system. This presentation provides guidelines on selecting the type of compressor to use for each
applicat ion, determining power requirements, and designing the piping system associated with the compressor.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 30 minutes
Max: 6 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Acid Gas Removal
Glycol Dehydration
Reciprocating Compressors
Gas Systems and Equipment: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 99 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Facilities Design
Water Systems and Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6435)
Description:
In production operations, it is often necessary to handle wastewater. The water must be separated from the oil and disposed of
in an environmentally safe manner. This presentation describes the equipment used to separate, t reat, collect, and dispose of
wastewater, along with procedures for designing a water treating system consist ing of skimmer tanks and vessels, plate
coalescers, flotation units, and/or disposal piles. Information about equipment selection and sizing for removing suspended
solids and dissolved gases from water is also provided.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 10 minutes
Max: 5 hours 0 minutes
Subtopics:
Treating Oil from Produced Water
Removing Solids and Dissolved Gases from Produced Water
Water Systems and Equipment: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 100 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Facilities Design
Utility Systems and Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6436)
Description:
This topic presents informat ion on fuel system design, providing guidelines for determining the facility fuel requirements and
information on select ing equipment needed to treat fuels prior to use. Technical explanations on Fired heaters and their uses,
along with guidelines for selecting and specifying a fired heater is presented. The next tutorial provides methods for determining
the amount of waste heat energy available, and presents information and procedures on the design of a waste heat recovery
system. Then, various components of refrigeration and heating systems are described, and a procedure is established for sizing
evaporator duties, condenser duties, compressor horsepower, fan horsepower and duct sizes. In the last two subtopics, a basic
understanding of reciprocating and centrifugal pumps is provided.
Duration:
Min: 8 hours 50 minutes
Max: 13 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Fuel Gas Systems
Fired Heaters and Hydrate Control
Heat Transfer Systems
Waste Heat Recovery
Heating, Vent ilat ion, and Air Condit ioning
Reciprocating Pumps
Centrifugal Pumps
Utility Systems and Equipment: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 101 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Facilities Design
Instrumentation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6437)
Description:
This presentation covers the principles of control theory and the popular methods of implementation. Pressure, temperature
and, flow measurement equipment types and their selection criteria is explained in detail. Different types and typical mounting
practices for Level Instruments is presented. Control valves are described in terms of how to select the proper type of valve,
suitable materials, and an appropriate size. Specifications and review of Safety Shutdown and Wellhead Control systems are
covered in detail.
Duration:
Min: 8 hours 0 minutes
Max: 11 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Controllers and Control Theory
Pressure Measurement and Control
Temperature Measurement and Control
Flow Measurement and Control
Level Measurement and Control
Control Valves
Safety Shutdown Systems
Wellhead Shutdown Systems
Instrumentat ion: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 102 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Facilities Design
Platform and Structural Design Considerations (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6438)
Description:
This presentation describes planning, designing, and arranging of equipment on offshore structures for the safe and efficient
production of oil and gas. General criteria is provided for designing living quarters. This content also provides the project
engineer with information for determining line size, wall thickness, and pressure rating class. Miscellaneous details to be
considered in designing a piping system also are discussed.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 10 minutes
Max: 6 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Offshore Facility Layout
Living Quarters Layout
Facilit ies Piping
Platform and Structural Design Considerations: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 103 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Drilling Engineering
Underbalanced Drilling (IHRDC_IPIMS_t23393)
Description:
This presentation covers the underbalanced drilling method, which is defined as the practice of drilling a well with the wellbore
fluid gradient less than the natural formation gradient. Besides minimizing lost circulation and increasing the penetrat ion rate,
this technique has a widely recognized benefit of minimizing the damage caused by invasion of drilling fluid into the formation.
Different underbalanced drilling equipment and techniques are discussed under this topic. The underbalanced well
classification system used by the industry and several case studies are also covered in this presentation.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 40 minutes
Max: 5 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Underbalanced Drilling
Dry Air Drilling
Nitrogen Drilling
Natural Gas Drilling
Mist Drilling
Foam Drilling
Stiff Foam Drilling
Gasified Liquids
Flow-Drilling
Snub Drilling
Underbalanced Drilling: General Issues
Case Studies
Underbalanced Drilling: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 104 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Equipment andOperations
Intelligent Completions (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36209)
Description:
As the oil indust ry matures, it must seek better and more efficient ways to exploit diminishing resources. To maximize production
and improve the economics of reservoirs, oil companies must resort to a wide range of sophist icated completion strategies. By
real-t ime data monitoring with remote-controlled sliding sleeves or variable chokes, intelligent completions help operators to
better manage production, eliminate or reduce interventions and associated production downtime, well costs and risks. This
new IPIMS topic discusses the overall evolut ion of intelligent well complet ions, and describes a variety of intelligent well
technologies that focus on measurement and control techniques to optimize oil and gas production.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 10 minutes
Max: 5 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Intelligent Completions
Fundamentals of Pressure Sensors
Fiber Opt ic Sensing and Telemetry Systems
Downhole Flow Control
Assessing Reliability
Intelligent Completions: References and Further Reading
Topic 105 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Petroleum Production Performance
Artificial Lift Methods (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36234)
Description:
Introduces the concept of art ificial lift as a means of optimizing production performance. Establishes screening and selection
criteria for the major art ificial lift methods. Describes surface and subsurface equipment, design procedures and operat ing
practices for continuous and intermittent gas lift , reciprocating rod pump, progressive cavity pump, hydraulic pump, electrical
submersible pump and plunger lift systems.
Duration:
Min: 6 hours 30 minutes
Max: 9 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Art ificial Lift Overview
Gas Lift
Reciprocating Rod Pump Systems
Progressive Cavity Pump (PCP) Systems
Hydraulic Pump Systems
Electrical Submersible Pump (ESP) Systems
Plunger Lift Systems
Art ificial Lift Methods: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 106 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Offshore Operations
Offshore Production Facilities (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36282)
Description:
Start ing with a broad look at the offshore oil and gas industry, including it s history, current scope, trends, challenges and an
overview of regulatory environments, this Topic examines the primary design considerations for offshore production facilit ies and
identifies key drivers and decision factors in offshore project development. It goes on to describe the various types of platforms,
surface components and subsea production facilit ies: their design features, equipment components operating considerat ions
and areas of applicat ion. Included are discussions of offshore pipelines, production equipment and operations, and
requirements for decommissioning and removal of offshore facilit ies. The presentation concludes with case studies of
deepwater operations in West Africa and the Gulf of Mexico.
Duration:
Min: 7 hours 20 minutes
Max: 11 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Overview Of The Offshore Petroleum Industry
Primary Design Considerations For Offshore Production Facilit ies
Development Project Drivers And Key Decision Factors
Platforms And Surface Facilit ies
Subsea Production Facilit ies
Offshore Pipelines
Offshore Production Equipment And Operations
Decommissioning And Removal Of Offshore Facilit ies
Offshore Development: Case Studies
Offshore Production Facilit ies: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 107 of 123
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Offshore Operations
Deepwater Drilling (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36797)
Description:
The term “deepwater” has always been defined in terms of where offshore technology stood at a given moment. In the early
1960s, 500-foot water depths placed a practical limit on offshore drilling capabilit ies; by 2003, the water depth record had
surpassed 10,000 feet. This Topic describes the equipment and technology that have made such advances possible. Start ing
with an overview of worldwide drilling activity, it looks at the characterist ics of deepwater environments and the challenges
they pose with respect to rig requirements and offshore project management. It goes on to discuss the systems, equipment
and considerations involved in deepwater well planning, design and construction. It then examines some of the innovat ive
solut ions to deepwater drilling challenges, ranging from riserless drilling to dual act ivity operations. Finally, it presents several
case studies to show how these solut ions have been applied in the Gulf of Mexico, offshore eastern Canada and the North Sea.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 40 minutes
Max: 7 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Deepwater Projects And Environments
Deepwater Drilling Systems And Equipment
Deepwater Well Planning And Design
Deepwater Well Const ruction
Advanced Solut ions For Deepwater Drilling Challenges
Deepwater Case Histories
Deepwater Drilling: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 108 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Wireline Well Logging
Well Log Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t26)
Description:
Explains commonly used log analysis techniques and formulas. Demonstrates the use of logging tools to evaluate porosity,
lithology and saturation. Presents computer applicat ions, methods and models and combines the various tools and
measurements in a concluding case study.
Duration:
Min: 7 hours 30 minutes
Max: 10 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Quick-Look Analysis
Fluid Saturation
Fractures
Porosity
Lithology
Interpretation Models
Computer Applications
Field Studies
Well Log Interpretation: Reference Section
Advances in Low Resist ivity Pay Evaluat ion
Topic 109 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Wireline Well Logging
Dipmeter Surveys (IHRDC_IPIMS_t27)
Description:
Introduces the standard four-arm dipmeter tool, which measures resist ivity, hole size and sonde orientation. Describes
correlat ions between recorded t races and true dips of bed boundaries. Presents characterist ic patterns from which structural
dip, fault ing, unconformit ies, bed geometry and deposit ional environment can be inferred. Also discusses the use of clustered
microresist ivity buttons to reveal bedding textures, vugs and fractures.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 50 minutes
Max: 6 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
General Principles
Computation
Dip Patterns
Interpretation Overview
Structural Dip Interpretation
Lithological Interpretation
Fault Interpretation
Reef Interpretat ion
Unconformity Interpretation
Deposit ional Interpretation
Interpretation
Dipmeter Surveys: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 110 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Rock and Fluid Sampling andAnalysis
Sampling and Analysis of Drilled Cuttings (IHRDC_IPIMS_t29)
Description:
Rock cutt ings from drill bit s can be the most reliable source of information available at a wellsite. Presents the procedures and
responsibilit ies involved in wellsite evaluation of cutt ings and cores. Emphasizes attention to quality control in the collection,
preparation, and storage of cutt ings and cores to ensure laboratory analysis accurately measures subsurface condit ions.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 10 minutes
Max: 1 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Rotary Drilling and Cutt ings Generat ion
Sample Collection and Handling
Sample Descript ion
Sampling and Analysis of Drilled Cutt ings: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 111 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Well Testing and Analysis
Fundamentals of Well Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t127)
Description:
Introduces the theory of pressure-transient analysis. I llust rates the measurement devices used to detect and record pressures
during well test ing. Presents fundamentals of well sampling and test ing.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 0 minutes
Max: 2 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Fundamentals of Well Test ing
Pressure Profiles at the Wellbore
Defining the Reservoir Model
Quantitat ive Well Test Interpretat ion
Well Test Planning and Execution
Fundamentals of Well Test ing: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 112 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Well Testing and Analysis
Gas Well Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t128)
Description:
Presents the fundamental theory and mathematical basis for determining gaswell performance from well test data. Outlines
field test ing procedures and interpretation methods.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 50 minutes
Max: 2 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Conventional and Isochronal Gas Well Tests
Addit ional Test ing Options
Special Considerations in Test ing Gas Wells
Test Procedures and Regulat ions (Examples)
Gas Well Test ing: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 113 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Well Testing and Analysis
Oil Well Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t129)
Description:
Reviews the mathematical basis for different types of well tests and interpretation procedures for well test data, including
buildup and drawdown tests, mult iple rate tests, interference and pulse test ing.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 20 minutes
Max: 2 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Basics of Pressure Transient Analysis
Log-log Analysis
Test Design
Test Analysis
Oil Well Test ing: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 114 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Well Testing and Analysis
Drillstem Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t130)
Description:
Introduces equipment and procedures for drillstem test ing. Describes basic tool assemblies and operating procedures for fixed
and floating rig test ing. I llustrates qualitat ive and quantitat ive analysis of drillstem test data.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 50 minutes
Max: 3 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Overview of Drillstem Test ing
Types of Drillstem Tests
Tool String: Convent ional DST (Open Hole)
Tool String: Other DST Types
Test ing on Floating Vessels
Pressure Recorders for DSTs
Surface DST Equipment
DST Design and Field Procedures
DST Interpretation: General Aspects
DST Interpretation: Qualitat ive Analysis
DST Interpretation: Quantitat ive Analysis
Drillstem Test ing: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 115 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Rock and Fluid Sampling andAnalysis
Mud Logging (IHRDC_IPIMS_t997)
Description:
Demonstrates the techniques of conventional mud logging during the preparation of a formation log and accompanying
event reports. Presents the rate-of-penetration curve, lithology plot, total gas curve, gas composit ion curves and descript ive
track. Also discusses the use of mud logging in overpressure recognit ion, hydrocarbon evaluation and non-hydrocarbon gas
detect ion. Summarizes computer-based data acquisit ion and measurement-while-drilling techniques.
Duration:
Min: 3 hours 20 minutes
Max: 5 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Mud Logging
Conventional Mud Logging Practices
Penetration Rate and Lithology
Gas Measurement and Analysis
Supplemental Logging Techniques and Applications
Advanced Mud Logging and Advisory Practices
Selection of Services and Equipment
Mud Logging: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 116 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Rock and Fluid Sampling andAnalysis
Coring and Core Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t998)
Description:
Introduces the equipment and procedures used in core analysis. Outlines coring program objectives and design considerations,
as well as steps taken to properly preserve representat ive reservoir samples. I llustrates both routine and special core analysis
techniques.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 30 minutes
Max: 6 hours 10 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Coring and Core Analysis
Borehole Environment
Bottomhole Coring (Coring While Drilling)
Sidewall Coring (Coring After Drilling)
Major Types of Core Analysis
Core Sample Preparation
Porosity Measurement
Permeability Measurement
Saturation Measurement
Complementary Core Information
Core Analysis Reports
Special Core Analysis
Coring and Core Analysis: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 117 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Rock and Fluid Sampling andAnalysis
Fluid Sampling and Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t999)
Description:
Reviews basic propert ies of hydrocarbon reservoir fluids and format ion water. I llustrates phase behavior, PVT propert ies, and
categorization of reservoir fluids. Describes equipment and procedures for laboratory analyses and fluid sampling including
surface and subsurface techniques. Presents correlations used to est imate reservoir fluid behavior.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 0 minutes
Max: 5 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Reservoir Fluids: Overview
Hydrocarbon Phase Behavior
Hydrocarbon Gases
Hydrocarbon Liquids
Two-Phase Systems
Formation Water
Fluid Sampling: General Considerations
Hydrocarbon Sampling
Water Sampling
Sampling: Transportation and Safety
Reservoir Fluid Analysis
Reservoir Fluid Correlations
Fluid Sampling and Analysis: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 118 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Wireline Well Logging
Borehole Imaging (IHRDC_IPIMS_t5610)
Description:
Advanced imaging technologies provide high-resolut ion information about lithology, structure, sedimentary features and
borehole condit ions. This Topic describes the operating principles, applications and limitations of acoust ic and resist ivity imaging
tools, and illustrates how you can use borehole imaging as a reservoir monitoring and characterization tool.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 10 minutes
Max: 1 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Borehole Imaging Overview
Borehole Imaging Technology
Borehole Imaging Methods
Borehole Imaging References and Addit ional Informat ion
Best Practices
Exercises and Solut ions
Topic 119 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Well Testing and Analysis
Advanced Pressure Transient Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t24035)
Description:
This presentation examines in detail the mathematical basis for well test interpretation, start ing with the concept of an ideal
reservoir model and the part ial differential equat ions used to describe single-phase and mult i-phase flow in porous media. It
discusses the use of dimensionless variables and type curves in pressure transient analysis, and describes interpretation methods
for anisotropic, hetereogenous and mult i-phase reservoirs. It also provides an overview of computer applications in pressure
transient analysis, discusses specialized well test ing procedures and their applications, and describes mathematical tools used in
pressure transient analysis, including Transformations, applications of the Superposit ion Principle, Convolut ion/Deconvolut ion
Methods, and Pressure Derivative Analysis.
Duration:
Min: 4 hours 10 minutes
Max: 5 hours 50 minutes
Subtopics:
Pressure Transient Test ing: Overview
Different ial Flow Equat ions for Pressure Transient Analysis
Dimensionless Variables and Their Applications
Type Curves
Pressure Transient Analysis in Anisotropic Reservoirs
Pressure Transient Analysis in Heterogeneous Reservoirs
Pressure Transient Analysis in Mult i-Phase Reservoirs
Pressure Transient Analysis-Computer Applications
Pressure Transient Analysis-Specialized Well Test ing Techniques
Advanced Pressure Transient Analysis: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Pressure Transient Analysis-Mathematical Tools
Well Test ing Nomenclature and Systems of Units
Topic 120 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Wireline Well Logging
Formation Evaluation Overview (IHRDC_IPIMS_t29946)
Description:
Introduces the techniques of downhole formation evaluation, comparing wireline logging to other conventional downhole
evaluation methods. Discusses wellsite logging equipment and procedures, logging tools and the scientific principles on which
they are based, and the characterist ics of the borehole and surrounding rocks. Demonstrates interpretat ion through common
"quick-look" crossplots, overlay procedures, and computer analysis.
Duration:
Min: 2 hours 20 minutes
Max: 3 hours 40 minutes
Subtopics:
Introduction to Formation Evaluation
Borehole Environment
Rock and Fluid Propert ies
Laboratory Measurements
Formation Evaluation Overview: References and Addit ional Informat ion
Topic 121 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Wireline Well Logging
Logging Equipment and Procedures (IHRDC_IPIMS_t29947)
Description:
Petrophysics, the study of rock-fluid systems, relates the physical parameters measured by well logging tools to actual reservoir
porosity, permeability and fluid saturation. Presents the commonly used logging tools--SP, gamma ray, resist ivity and
porosity--and their characterist ics and functions. Examines the interaction of rocks and fluids in both stat ic and dynamic
situations.
Duration:
Min: 1 hours 10 minutes
Max: 1 hours 30 minutes
Subtopics:
Logging Systems
Logging Procedures
Logging Equipment and Procedures: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 122 of 123
FORMATION EVALUATION: Wireline Well Logging
Well Logging Tools and Techniques (IHRDC_IPIMS_t29948)
Description:
Presents the commonly used logging tools--SP, gamma ray, resist ivity and porosity--and their characterist ics and functions
including coverage of Magnetic Resonance Logging. Examines the interaction of rocks and fluids in both static and dynamic
situations.
Duration:
Min: 7 hours 0 minutes
Max: 10 hours 20 minutes
Subtopics:
Magnetic Resonance Logs
Spontaneous Potential Log
Gamma Ray Log
Resist ivity Logs
Dielectric Logs
Density Logs
Neutron Logs
Acoust ic Logs
Special Open Hole Tools
Cased Hole Logs
Casing Inspection Logs
Production Logs
Sampling and Test ing
Well Logging Tools and Techniques: References and Addit ional Information
Topic 123 of 123
IPIMSAction Learning Course Catalog
EXPLORATION: Basin Analysis
Sedimentology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a290)
Description:
Competency Statement: Identify sedimentary rocks and processes from such information as outcrops, core reports, well logs and
cutt ings. Describe sedimentary and diagenetic processes. Define deposit ional environments and facies architecture within the
context of basin analysis. Describe the role of petrographic studies, such as XRD, SEM and thin-section analysis in sedimentology.
Learning Objective:
Use core and outcrop data to define lithofacies and deposit ional environments in terms of composit ion, texture,
geometry and sedimentary st ructure.
Use core data and well logs to construct lithostratigraphic columns, infer deposit ional environments and build geologic
cross-sections.
Review facies trends and extrapolate them to a regional scale.
Use sedimentological interpretations as a basis for building facies and net-to gross sand maps.
Assignment Instruction: As a member of the New Ventures Team, Explorat ion, your responsibility is to evaluate new exploration
opportunit ies. Your role is to understand the sedimentological development and potential of basins that Beta Exploration, Inc.
desires to explore in. In many cases you have a limited amount of data to make a recommendation with.
This learning module will allow you to use the data available in this region and interpret the deposit ional systems.
The exist ing information in this exploration area is limited. Some wells have been drilled in the past and sp and gamma logs are
available. New wells have been drilled recently and intervals of interest were cored. Gathering, defining and interpreting well
data are important tasks of explorat ion geologists to construct correlations and maps.
The base map of the region is below. The data set used for this exercise includes surface outcrop information, core descript ions
and electric logs of wells.
You will have the descript ion of grain size and texture, primary sedimentary structures, ichnofacies and other data to classify
the lithofacies and complete the facies analysis for certain wells. Addit ionally, you will calibrate cores to well logs to complete
your analysis.
Using this information, you will interpret the facies successions and deposit ional environments in each well. Subsequently you will
const ruct a correlation with 5 wells (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5) and map paleoenvironments distribution.
Finally, you will make a net sand map to observe the t rend of sandstone deposit ion.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 1 of 87
EXPLORATION: Basin Analysis
Sequence Stratigraphy (IHRDC_IPIMS_a291)
Description:
Competency Statement: Identify sequence boundaries and flooding surfaces in a chronostratigraphic framework. Determine
deposit ional environments and related facies within a chronostratigraphic framework by analyzing well logs, core samples,
outcrops and other information. Develop a model to evaluate the basin-wide distribution of source, reservoir and seal rocks.
Learning Objective:
Outline principle genetic types of deposits used in sequence st rat igraphy (e.g., normal regressive, forced regressive,
t ransgressive, and st illstand.).
Define st rat igraphic cross-sections based on sequence strat igraphy concepts.
Predict reservoir occurrences based on an understanding of the relationships between accommodation space,
sediment supply, stacking patterns and unconformit ies.
Interpret strat igraphic evolut ion in a basin.
Assignment Instruction: As a member of the Exploration team for ACME Petroleum Co., you have been selected for a sequence
stratigraphy study in the Eastern Venezuelan Basin, one of the largest oil producing basins of the world. As part of your
responsibilit ies, you will have to provide information on the continuity of reservoirs and regional seals that might be useful for the
rest of your team.
The section comprises a fluvial deltaic system deposited during the Early Miocene (18.5 my) and Middle Miocene (13.8 my). The
units deposited since the Middle Miocene, unconformably overly Cretaceous shales with high organic matter content, which
const itutes most of the source rock which for the hydrocarbons of the basin.
The geological interpretation of well logs was integrated with the biostrat igraphic and sedimentological information obtained
from core and sidewall samples. This integration allowed for the sedimentary sect ion to be subdivided into geometrical
packages bounded by unconformit ies and internal surfaces. Based on this interpretat ion third order sequences were identified.
For carrying out this exercise GR and resist ivity logs of 5 wells were used as well as information from two cores taken from Wells 1
and 4.
The figure below shows the location of the wells studied.
Wells location map.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 2 of 87
EXPLORATION: Basin Analysis
Seismic Sequence Stratigraphy (IHRDC_IPIMS_a292)
Description:
Competency Statement: Use the sequence strat igraphic framework to define seismic sequences with seismic reflection data.
Analyze system tracts and determine deposit ional environments. Predict the distribution of source, reservoir and seal from the
established sequence strat igraphy framework.
Learning Objective:
Explain key concepts of seismic sequence st rat igraphy and the techniques used to evaluate the seismic data.
Establish the major sequences and flooding surfaces for basic sequence analysis.
Integrate available well, biostratigraphic and outcrop data into the framework.
Determine deposit ional environment and facies.
Use seismic data to interpret deposit ional sequences.
Assignment Instruction: As a member of the New Ventures Team, Explorat ion, your responsibility is to evaluate new exploration
opportunit ies for Beta Exploration, Inc. As the Seismic Sequence St ratigrapher your role is to evaluate the seismic data to
provide insight to other team members on the strat igraphic section of the basin with part icular emphasis on potent ial source,
reservoir, seal and traps.
The studied area is located to the northeast of the Australian Platform. Strat igraphically, the sect ion varies from Upper Triassic
to Lower Cretaceous (Location map). The exercise is roughly based on a paper by Erskine and Vail (After Erskine and Vail: in
Bally, A. W. (editor), Atlas of Seismic St ratigraphy 1987, AAPG).
Three seismic lines were used for the exercise. In addit ion, two wells A and B support the st rat igraphic interpretation of the area.
See locat ion map below.
Four unconformit ies, as well as their correlative surfaces, bound three third order sequences including their identifiable system
tracts ident ifed from older to youngers as: I , I I and I I I . The age of the unconformit ies were determined through paleontological
data obtained from wells drilled in the area and from the global marine cycles chart. The Sequences are named SB132, SB129,
SB127 and SB126.
TD (Time Depth) plots were deived for both wells by means of synthet ic seismograms calculated from sonic logs taken in the
wells. The creation of synthet ics allows well linformation in depth to be t ied to seismic data in t ime. Thus we are able to
evaluate the same lithological intervals in the well and on the seismic line.
As a final remark, a composite strat igraphic cross sect ion, where the seismic and the well data are integrated, is provided in
order to show the result obtained in this seismic strat igraphy exercise (Integrated st rat igraphic section).
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 3 of 87
EXPLORATION: Basin Analysis
Biostratigraphy (IHRDC_IPIMS_a293)
Description:
Competency Statement: Use plant and animal fossils from cutt ings, cores or outcrops to dist inguish among rock units, determine
their ages and infer the sedimentary environment.
Learning Objective:
Describe the different classes of microfossils and their use.
Infer sedimentary environments based on occurrences, identification and classification of microfossils.
Use microfossils as a basis for est imat ing the ages of rock units.
Demonstrate the use of abundance and diversity charts.
Use microfossils as a basis for correlating rock units between two wells.
Assignment Instruction: The company Beta Exploration Inc. is planning a bid for a new block. As a member of the exploration
team, your role is to analyze the biostratigraphic information available in the area. You count on the informat ion of four wells,
which will be integrated with well-logs and the seismic profiles.
This exercise will show the importance of biostratigraphic analysis throughout the microfossil examination. You will learn about
the use of several groups of microfossils which can be used to "date" rocks (through biostratigraphy) and to interpret
sedimentary environments.
Biozones were inferred from first occurrences down hole. The ages were assigned using the zonal schemes applied to the area.
You will use the accompanying charts with equivalent zonal schemes for your analysis. This information will inable you to build a
biost ratigraphic correlation of the 4 wells.
Analyzing the microfossil indicators of deposit ional environments you will interpret the biofacies changes through the sect ion
studied and you will make a biofacies maps of the area.
The integration of biostratigraphy with other geological disciplines, such as geophysics, sedimentology, petrophysics, and
geochemistry is needed for geologicalmodeling and petroleum system studies, which in turn are essential for planning and
developing better exploration strategies
The chart 'Chronostratigraphic equivalence of the palynological zonations for northern South America and Venezuela'
(modified from Lorente et al., 1997) contains ages of stage boundaries (in Ma) according to (1) Haq et al. (1987) and (2)
Berggren et al. (1995).
You will make a chronost ratigraphic correlation between the wells using biostratigraphy.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 4 of 87
EXPLORATION: Basin Analysis
Petroleum Geochemistry (IHRDC_IPIMS_a294)
Description:
Competency Statement: Understand geochemical concept of origin and occurrence of petroleum. Describe its composit ion
and classification of oil and gas. Identify source rock based on geochemical analysis. Understand correlat ion of source rock with
subsurface hydrocarbon accumulation.
Learning Objective:
Understand composit ion and classification of oil and gas.
Understand types of kerogen, generation, expulsion and migration of petroleum.
Describe principal tools and methods for evaluation of source rock.
Interpret source rock quality and maturity.
Evaluate 1-D maturation model.
Assignment Instruction: As a member of the New Ventures Team, Explorat ion, your responsibility is to evaluate a regional
integrated geochemical study which includes source rocks evaluation, oil geochemistry and their correlation with source rocks,
reconstruction of the hydrocarbon generating area and the analysis of the geochemical modeling of a pilot well as an
example of a sedimentary basin.
The total drainage area of the basin is limited to the north and northeast by a fault , and to the south, southeast, southwest ,
west and northwest by mountains (Fig.1). The tectonic sett ing of the basin, relevant to hydrocarbon habitat, changed
through t ime and includes the evolut ionary history of the basin during Cretaceous and Cenozoic periods. The present structural
configuration of the basin began to develop since the Miocene. During the Miocene-Recent period it became an
intermontane basin in a foredeep posit ion.
In Aptian-Albian t imes, a marine transgression led to the deposit ion of thick shallow water carbonate platform and associated
sediments. During maximum transgression between the Cenomanian and the Coniacian, the sedimentat ion was typically of
pelagic and euxinic facies, represented by limestones and calcareous shales. During Paleocene towards SW and W of the basin,
clast ic sediments were deposited and in the central part the sedimentat ion occurred in a shallow marine platform. During the
lower to middle Eocene t ime, the sedimentation was mainly fluvial (SW), fluvio-deltaic to deltaic on the platform and turbidite
and flysh to the east.
Nearly 100 wells were analyzed (cores and cutt ings), and the analysis of TOC, pyrolysis, visual kerogen, UV, GC, biomarkers
(GC-MS), and TTI were determinated The important oil prone source rocks were deposited during the Cretaceous. The other
sequences in the basin (Paleocene and Eocene) show mainly gas prone type I I I organic matter with low potentials. Limestones
and calcareous shales contain organic carbon (OC) between 1.5 – 9.6% with average of 3.8%. The samples show high
concentration of extractable organic matter (>2000ppm) and hydrocarbons (>1000 ppm).
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 5 of 87
EXPLORATION: Dynamics of Deformation
Tectonics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a297)
Description:
Competency Statement: Determine global tectonic sett ing based on age and paleogeographic maps. Recognize result ing
basin and it s evolut ion. I llustrate structural styles determined by this tectonic sett ing.
Learning Objective:
Determine plate tectonic history for prospective geographic area and age.
Describe basin development and evolut ion based on tectonic sett ing.
Define potent ial structural styles based on tectonic sett ing.
Ident ify potential hydrocarbon traps result ing from a structural style.
Assignment Instruction: As a member of Acme Explorat ion, Inc., New Ventures Team, your responsibility is to evaluate new
exploration opportunit ies. The Company, has decided to explore in the Maracaibo Basin because of new leasing opportunit ies.
Your role is to provide the exploration team with an evaluation of the plate tectonics sett ing, basin development and
potent ial trapping style. Your contribution will affect many team members work because accurate understanding of the
regional tectonics will influence many of your team member's working hypotheses.
The user will learn about global plate movement and lithosphere formation. The genesis, evolut ion and st ructuring of the
Caribbean region will be highlighted. The assignment will include the tectonic evolut ion of the Maracaibo Basin. The evolut ion
of the main faults, their movement, periods of deformation and type of basin formed will be developed. General knowledge
about the different stages of the paleogeographic evolut ion of the basin as well as age of rift ing, foreland basin structuring
and passive margin phase will be addressed.
The user will also ident ify the tectonic regime of the study area and the type of fault ing present using sample seismic lines
drawings and structural map. This analysis of the main fault will allow for the identificat ion of potential hydrocarbon t raps
result ing from this st ructural style and the hydrocarbon migration routes.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 6 of 87
EXPLORATION: Dynamics of Deformation
Structural Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a298)
Description:
Competency Statement: Identify and interpret different st ructural styles in their tectonic sett ing using geologic maps, cross
sections, seismic and well log data. Analyze and predict potential trapping configurat ions based on the structural style.
Evaluate the effect of structural style on the overall petroleum system.
Learning Objective:
Use surface maps, subsurface maps, cross sections and logs to identify and interpret structural styles.
Predict the potent ial types of faults and folds associated with a structural style.
Understand key characterist ics of different types of faults and folds.
Determine different t rapping mechanisms which result from different st ructural styles.
Assignment Instruction: As a member of the New Ventures Team, Explorat ion, your responsibility is to evaluate new exploration
opportunit ies. Lake Oil Ventures Ltd, is a subsidiary of Acme Exploration Inc. The former has decided to explore in the central
part of the Maracaibo Basin because of new leasing opportunit ies. Your role is to provide the exploration team with an
evaluation of the structural sett ing and potential trapping configurations corresponding to the structural style. Addit ionally
you will evaluate the effect of structural style on the possible petroleum system present.
Your contribution will affect many of the team member’s work, because accurate understanding of the tectonic derived
st ructural style of the area will influence many of your team members’ working hypotheses.
The concept of structural style is based on comparat ive tectonics. This concept ident ifies patterns in deformation which in turn
can lead to better understanding global repetit ion of such patterns. Structural geology in it s broadest sense, examines regional
st ructural features, their interrelationships, evolut ion, and effects on sedimentation.
This means that, prior to exploration, the types of source and reservoir rock, migration paths, and hydrocarbon traps can be
predicted, or at least anticipated to a certain extent.
The user will identify the st ructural style of the study area and type of fault ing present in the sample seismic lines drawings and
st ructural map. The type of fault ing and ident ification of potential hydrocarbon traps result ing from a structural style.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 7 of 87
EXPLORATION: Dynamics of Deformation
Rock Properties and Mechanics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a296)
Description:
Competency Statement: Identify rock mechanical propert ies from core, cutt ings and electrical logs. Use analysis to address
issues related to fractures, subsurface pressures, subsidence and compaction. Illustrate an understanding of rock propert ies
that effect seismic response.
Learning Objective:
Define basic rock mechanical propert ies, describe how they are measured.
Understand the differences between laboratory measurements and in-situ propert ies.
Predict formation subsurface pressure environment and principal stress direct ions.
Define propert ies that effect seismic response and how these propert ies relate to AVO effect.
Assignment Instruction: As a specialist assigned to the Exploration New Ventures Team, your responsibility is to apply your
specialty to evaluate new exploration opportunit ies. Explorat ion team members come to you to gain insight and support in
applying rock propert ies and mechanics to exploration problems. These problems may be related to tectonics, seismic
evaluation or reservoir performance. You often have a limited data set to extrapolate from.
Rock Mechanics is a very powerful approach for reservoir descript ion and management. It provides useful and efficient links
between mechanical and acoust ical propert ies which lead to a deep understanding of the stress-st rain behavior of subsurface
beds. Used properly, together with geostatist ical concepts, it can substantially help to elaborate an accurate picture of our
geological targets.
In this assignment, you will observe laboratory data from well cores and well logs that will assist you in the calculation of the
elast ic modulus of a reservoir target. Using these characterizations together with fluid subst itut ion concepts and storage
(porosity) and transport (permeability), you will be able to est imate the acoust ic response to different saturation fluids.
In this sense, you will:
Calculate porosity and permeability from laboratory data
Use stress-strain relationships for linear elast icity to est imate the elast ic modulus
Use inversion from acoust ic logs and laboratory data to est imate the elast ic modulus
Give a very educated guess for the stress state on the subsurface
Est imate the seismic signature of fluids and porosity
Take all the quest ions as input for the subsequent quest ions. Take note of all your correct answers because you may use that
information in the next tasks.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 8 of 87
EXPLORATION: Surface Geology and Reconnaissance
Surface Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a300)
Description:
Competency Statement: Identify surface geologic units and tectonic elements with a geologic map. Demonstrate the use of
cross sections in conjunction with geologic maps.
Learning Objective:
Demonstrate ablity to read surface geological maps.
I llustrate relationship between a cross section and geological map.
Locate a part icular rock unit on a surface geology map and define that unit 's geographic dist ribut ion.
Demonstrate understanding of an outcrop descript ion and find rock units on a geological map.
Understand various cross-section preparation tehniques and factors influencing their choice.
Assignment Instruction: As a Geologist member of the New Ventures Exploration Team, your assignment is to evaluate new
exploration opportunit ies for Beta Exploration Inc.
Your task is to evaluate the surface geological information available in the sett ing of the Basin that Beta Explorat ion Inc. Needs
to explore. The other team members will integrate this information with subsurface information that will provide a better
understanding of the strat igraphy of the basin and it s petroleum system.
A surface geologic map is shown of an area located at the southern flank of the Eastern Venezuela Serrania del Interior. In this
area, essentially Cretaceous age sedimentary rocks outcrop (Location Map). The geologic map shows the geographic
distribution of the lithostratigraphic units recognized in the area through the informat ion collected from outcrops, aerial
photographs and their relat ionship with the topography.
The strat igraphy of the area is comprised by the Barranquin, Garcia and El Cantil Formations, from the Lower Cretaceous
(Barremian to Albian) and San Antonio (Campanian). The Barranquin Formation consists essentially of coarse grained quartz
sandstones, siltstones and shales of fluvial-deltaic environments, interbedded with scarce fossiliferous limestones towards the
upper section.
The Garcia Formation represents a rapid deepening of the environments, as well as deposit ion of dark, calcareous, highly
fossiliferous shales, with an est imated uniform thickness of 90 meters throughout the area.
The Cant il Format ion, is characterized by a shallowing t rend of the marine environments and carbonaceous shales. The San
Antonio Formation shows a fault contact with the previously mentioned sections, towards the south of the area.
A geologic cross sect ion in an E-W direction, allows observat ion of the st rat igraphic configuration of the Lower Cretaceous units
and their relat ionship to the topographical features.
For the most part, the Garcia Formation, given its characterist ic shaly and fossiliferous content, represents the maximum marine
flood for the Lower Cretaceous of Eastern Venezuela, and could be considered a potential source rock. The type section of the
Garcia Formation is located east of the eastern flank of the Pico Garcia, where it outcrops in a cont inuous manner.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 9 of 87
EXPLORATION: Surface Geology and Reconnaissance
Remote Sensing (IHRDC_IPIMS_a302)
Description:
Competency Statement: Demonstrate understanding of different remote sensing data and its application to explorat ion. Use
remote sensing techniques to identify geomorphological and structural characterist ics. Demonstrate knowledge of how
remote sensing can identify surface hydrocarbon anomalies.
Learning Objective:
Use satellite imagery to identify geographical and geological elements on the Earth surface.
Ident ify simple structural styles based on remote sensing data.
Use remote sensing data to locate hydrocarbon seeps.
Analyze regional structural styles from remote sensing images in order to identify potential areas for exploration.
Assignment Instruction: As a member of the Exploration team for ACME Petroleum Co., you have been assigned for a
Geomorphologic and geological interpretation study at the western edge of the Barinas-Apure basin.
Satellite Landsat images are analyzed together with various complementary data sets to evaluate their potential in the
hydrocarbon exploration process.
Within your responsibilit ies, you will have to provide information using a methodology based on photo interpretation criteria
using optical sensor LANDSAT at a 1:100,000 scale. The first step will be to identify drainage patterns based on the main
hydrography. Afterwards, a geomorphologic reconnaissance identifying valleys, terraces, alluvial fans will be conducted. From
the geological point of view, traces of layers, structural guidelines, synclines, anticlines, faults and unconformit ies will be
identified.
The study area is located at the western edge of the Barinas-Apure basin on the South American Craton.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 10 of 87
EXPLORATION: Surface Geology and Reconnaissance
Geodetic Coordinate Systems (IHRDC_IPIMS_a303)
Description:
Competency Statement: Understand the differences between coordinate systems and the variables that define them.
Recognize the need to convert data from one system to another. Determine the most appropriate cartographic system for the
area of interest.
Learning Objective:
Dist iguish between different coordinate systems.
List variables necessary to define a coordinate systems.
Ident ify strengths and weakness of different coordinate systems.
Descripe work flow to establish coordinate system of different data types.
Describe the Global Posit ioning System and how it is used in determining geodesic posit ions.
Review and convert cartographic data and maps to the most applicable geographic system.
Assignment Instruction: You are a member of the Company New Ventures Inc. In this exercise, you are going to be a team
member of two different projects. The first project is a geodetic survey to support the development of a geologic map of
Mexico. The second project is a topographic survey for shot points of a seismic lines from a survey conducted in the Eastern part
of Venezuela.
Your responsibility is to establish the Primary Control Network taking into consideration the legal and technical standards of the
two coordinate systems.This includes their t ransformation, precision, specific t ies according to client`s specifications, as well as
verify horizontal and vert ical control points.
With this exercise you will learn how to design a Geodetic Survey; defining the survey method in order to analyze and interpret
the field data that will aid in development of the corresponding maps.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 11 of 87
EXPLORATION: Surface Geology and Reconnaissance
Magnetostratigraphy, Chemostratigraphy and Radiometric Dating
(IHRDC_IPIMS_a301)
Description:
Competency Statement: Understand principles and techniques of magnetostrat igraphy, chemostratigraphy and radiometric
dating. Describe the practical application of these techniques in non-fossiliferous rock units. Explain how they provide pert inent
information in petroleum exploration.
Learning Objective:
Describe the basic principles and techniques used in magnetostratigraphy.
Describe the basic principles and techniques used in chemostrat igraphy.
Describe the basic principles and techniques used in radiometric measurements.
Demostrate an understanding of the geologic reasons to apply these techniques.
Incorporate these dating techniques with outcrop and surface geological maps.
Understand dating techniques for subsurface samples like convent ional cores.
Understand advantages and disadvantages of each dating technique.
Assignment Instruction: You work in the special studies section of a very experienced E&P Company. The role of your section is to
advise the different exploration projects/teams about frontier basins, areas, plays and prospects. Your specialty is the use of
special dating techniques and their integration into the prospecting processes.
In this assignment you will use different dating techniques (Magnetostratigraphy, Radiometry and Chemostratigraphy) in order
to provide a geo-chronologic framework for exploration of several frontier areas.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 12 of 87
EXPLORATION: Surface Geology and Reconnaissance
Gravity, Magnetic and Electromagnetic Exploration Methods (IHRDC_IPIMS_a304)
Description:
Competency Statement: Recognize uses and limitat ions of gravity, magnetics and electromagnetic (EM) methods of
exploration. List survey design criteria for each technique. Est imate the thickness of the sedimentary section of a basin using
different data types.
Learning Objective:
Describe the basic principles and tools used in gravity, magnetic and electromagnetic techniques.
Ident ify main exploration applicat ion for gravity, magnetics and electro-magnetic surveys.
Out line design considerat ions of gravity, magnetic and electromagnetic surveys.
Apply basic interpretat ion techniques to determine depth to basement.
Assignment Instruction: Potential Fields (Gravity, Magnetism and Electromagnetic) data are very often neglected as an
exploration tool.
In the early history (1900 to 1960) of the petroleum indust ry, these methods played a superb role in the discoveries of most of the
reserves already consumed worldwide. These discoveries included almost 100% of the onshore fields in Texas, California, Russia,
Iraq, Iran, Saudi Arabia and Venezuela, which are st ill under exploitation today.
Since the 90′s, integrated interpretation (using gravity, magnetism, seismic, well and outcrop data) is the common standard in
many major O&G companies.
Electromagnetic methods were the preferred tool of choice used by the Russians in the exploration and discovery of its vast
reserves until the 70`s, using either magneto-telluric or conventional arrays. Also, in the present, electrical methods are used to
detect aquifers which are of interest for water formation disposal and /or CO2 sequestrat ion.
In this Assignment, you will play the role of a Geophysical advisor to diverse E&P teams within you company. Your duties will
include:
Defining the feasibility of gravity and/or magnet ic surveys (establishing if a given geological configuration is detectable
using gravity and/or magnetic measurements)
Defining parameters for gravity data acquisit ion and processing
Interpreting gravity and/or magnetic data in order to detect and characterize causative bodies (basement and/or
within the sedimentary section), and for establish next steps in explorat ion
Interpreting Magneto-Telluric data to interpret Basement structural features
Defining the feasibility of electrical surveys (establishing if a given geological configuration is detectable using
convent ional electrical methods)
Defining parameters for acquisit ion and processing of electrical data
Interpreting electrical data in order to recommend future activit ies in either water formation disposal and /or CO2
sequestration, produced at fields present ly under explotat ion
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 13 of 87
EXPLORATION: Seismic Methods
Seismic Data Acquisition (IHRDC_IPIMS_a306)
Description:
Competency Statement: Select the most favorable seismic acquisit ion configuration for the area of interest . Select source and
receiver array for proposed survey. Evaluate trade-off between 2-D and 3-D acquisit ion for the exploration objective.
Learning Objective:
Understand the primary principles of seismic survey design.
Ident ify the basic concepts and field operat ions involved in seismic data acquisit ion.
Contrast differences between 2-D and 3-D acquisit ion.
Describe key elements of marine vs. non-marine acquisit ion.
Evaluate horizontal and vert ical seismic resolut ion.
Evaluate practical considerations in survey design.
Assignment Instruction: You are a junior member of the Geophysics E&P team for the Company Acme Inc. Your team is
presently involved in the seismic data acquisit ion process in Bass Basin, offshore Australia.
You should be acquainted with the seismic data acquisit ion methods that are one of the key activit ies in Exploration and
Production for obtaining the best possible images of the subsurface.
Seismic prospecting is actually the most widespread tool for hydrocarbon exploration. Its power is based on the ability to give
you an image of the subsurface. This information can be used to describe structurally the area of study or obtain acoust ic
(somet imes elast ic) response of the rocks and fluids contained on them. Seismic Acquisit ion represents more than 80% of the
exploration financial investment, due to this fact a good survey design is crucial not only for the quality of the image that
should be obtained but also for st rong economical reasons.
In this scenario you will make a simple 3D marine seismic survey design based on an init ial geological descript ion and some basic
seismic information. The main parameters that you need to est imate are (not necessarily in this order):
Areal extent of the survey1.
Line length2.
Migration aperture3.
Line interval4.
Group interval5.
Shot Interval6.
Vert ical and Horizontal resolut ion7.
In this case our target is at Bass basin, offshore Australia. Basin deposit ional models indicate that probable reservoir sands are
now within the oil window, giving deep unexplored port ions of the Bass basin considerable petroleum potent ial. The survey
objective is to illuminate all Paleocene formations trough the whole area with 48 fold coverage near structural traps. For this
exercise the complexit ies of shot interval est imation due to vessel speed and air-gun recovery are not taken into account.
The Assignment Pages should be done sequentially as all answers could be used as input for subsequent quest ions. So, take
notes of all your findings during the completion of this exercise.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 14 of 87
EXPLORATION: Seismic Methods
Geophysical Instrumentation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a307)
Description:
Competency Statement: Evaluate the physical mechanics of source and receivers. Describe receivers and possible receiver
configurations depending on noise. Review application of field test ing. Evaluate basic recording instrument types. Incorporate
quality control during data collection.
Learning Objective:
Describe different types of seismic sources, receivers and their applications.
Ident ify the most common types of recording instruments.
Ident ify the most common types of restrict ions that limit configurat ion of a seismic program.
Describe different data formats for the acquisit ion process.
Propose a work flow to monitor and maintain quality control over seismic acquisit ion procedures.
Assignment Instruction: Subsurface seismic imaging is based on mechanical wave’s reflect ions in the Earth interior. The basic
protocol involves wave generation and wave recording usually at surface level. In other words is like “hitt ing the earth and
wait and listen to the echo from beneath”. This apparent ly simple experiment becomes quite complex if you realice that your
target is several kilometers deep, so you need a strong and clean signal (emission and reception) to enhance your subsurface
image. The seismic information volume you will manage could easily exceed the terabyte size. Also there are plenty of noise
sources which will degrade the quality of your seismic data.
The instruments used to excite and record the Earth mechanical response must be adequate to topographic and
environmental condit ions in order to be able to perform the seismic experiment in a part icular terrain and also obtain the best
possible signal/noise rat io.
In this assignment you are working for the instrumentation department of a transnational geophysical services provider. You
have been requested to analyze an area for environmental, topographical and cultural considerations effecting a seismic
surveying and propose the best source receiver configuration according for that survey.
Specifications and descript ions for available seismic equipment are located in Reference and Field Data. It is strongly
suggested to read this material before attempting this exercise and save the informatioon on your hard drive to keep it easily
available.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 15 of 87
EXPLORATION: Seismic Methods
Seismic Survey Design (IHRDC_IPIMS_a338)
Description:
Competency Statement: Describe enviormental factors that require modification to normal marine/non-marine seismic data
acquisit ion. Include access, water depth, surface terrain, noise and obstruct ions. Indicate appropriate source, reciever or
geometries considerations for each case.
Learning Objective:
List non-conventional seismic survey types and their application.
List non-conventional source and reciever types and their application.
List source and receiver limitations for a t ransit ion zone seismic survey.
Describe possible shooting solut ions for seismic acquist ion in an exist ing field with obstruct ions.
Describe exploration reasons for shear wave acquisit ion.
Assignment Instruction: The design of a seismic survey is a complex task since it depends on several factors in addit ion to wave
propagation, such as costs: logist ics, safety regulat ions, environment and geographical sett ings. The design for a part icular
survey should take into consideration all Geological and Geophysical requirements as well as the survey environment. A
successful seismic survey design not only generates a good seismic image of the subsurface but does so economically, safely,
efficiently and in as environmentally friendly manner as possible.
In this assignment you are a E&P team seismic acquisit ion geophysicist. Your resbonsibility is to make decisions regarding the
design of three seismic surveys.
Project #1: A seismic survey in a t ransit ion zone.
Project #2: A seismic survey in an area with obstructions
Project #3: A shear wave survey in a marine environment
In this assignment you are a E&P team seismic acquisit ion geophysicist. Your resbonsibility is to make decisions regarding the
design of three seismic surveys.
Decide which seismic source and receiver type is most appropriate for a specific area.1.
Decide which operational technique is most suitable for specific areas of a transit ion zone survey.2.
Make decisions when faced with operational limitations in a transit ion zone.3.
Ident ify possible shooting solut ions when obstacles are encountered.4.
Decide between telemetry and distributed systems depending on environmental factors.5.
Ident ify important aspects of shear wave acquisit ion.6.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 16 of 87
EXPLORATION: Seismic Methods
Seismic Data Processing (IHRDC_IPIMS_a308)
Description:
Competency Statement: Design the seismic processing sequence by select ing the appropriate processing methods. Perform the
data processing and quality control, and work with the interpreter to make sure that the outcome truly reflects the geological
characterist ics of the area.
Learning Objective:
Describe the basic seismic processing sequence from pre-processing and deconvolut ion through stacking and velocity
analysis, to migrat ion and post-processes.
Understand the application of different types of deconvolut ion, velocity analyses and migration techniques.
Review processing steps in the context of the objectives of the seismic interpretation.
Assignment Instruction: As a member of the Exploration team for the Company Solut ions. Inc, you should be acquainted with
the seismic data processing methods that are one of the key activit ies in Exploration and Production for obtaining the best
processing of subsurface images.
Reflect ion Seismic Methods, as part of the seismic data processing process, are the tools of choice for hydrocarbon exploration
because they can give an image of the subsurface and its structural and (sometimes) strat igraphical features. Seismic data
processing is the cornerstone for this image generation from the raw data recorded at seismic surveys. Different processes are
applied to improve the quality of the image, not only for the purpose of interpretation but also for extract ing acoust ic and
elast ic information from seismic sections or volumes.
This module will introduce you to the basic theoretical concepts and its applications at different seismic processing stages.
During this exercise you will process a 3D onshore seismic survey. The survey area is about 500Km2 with low st ructural complexity
and one well has been drilled. The target is around 3 seconds two way travel t ime. The seismic source used was dynamite. From
previous 2D seismic informat ion, the main fault ing system is extensional with some half-graben interpreted. Your task is to go
through the QC (Quality Control) of a processing sequence applied to seismic data.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 17 of 87
EXPLORATION: Seismic Methods
Wellbore Seismic (IHRDC_IPIMS_a309)
Description:
Competency Statement: Evaluate the applicability of wellbore seismic technology to a part icular well. Determine the need for
check shot survey, synthetic seismogram, vert ical seismic profiling (VSP) and cross-well tomography. Use seismic sect ions,
petrophysics and geological informat ion to determine the wellbore seismic program.
Learning Objective:
Ident ify the applicability of a wellbore seismic program for the exploration objective.
Acquisit ion configurations for different wellbore seismic techniques.
Describe the acquisit ion and QC of the check shot survey / VSP.
Describe the generation and QC of a synthetic seismogram from well logs and check shot data.
Surface Seismic has become the tool of choice for reservoir delineation. However, the generated image is always an offset-t ime
image. In order to obtain an offset-depth image (which corresponds to a more accurate subsurface picture) several
techniques have been developed. Synthetic seismograms, Check shots and VSP (Vert ical Seismic Profile) surveys are some of
these techniques.
This assignment will introduce you in the basic steps in Synthetic Seismograms generation and its correlations with real seismic
data. Also you will develop a VSP project where the seismic-well calibration power of this technique is evidenced.
You are assigned into two different projects for the Upstream Technology Group Inc. (UTC). Their descript ions are:
1.- Synthetic Seismogram Building and Seismic-Well Calibration: In an exploratory block a 3D seismic survey has been acquired.
Only one well has been drilled (Well UTC-1X). This well has a total depth of 6390’ and GR, density and DT logs were run from
4000’ to final depth. A T-Z table was obtained using a local check shot.
2.- Zero-Offset VSP survey acquisition, processing and interpretation: An offshore exploratory block has 3D pre-stack seismic data.
A successful well has been drilled (Well UTC-1Y) and UTC wants to calibrate the seismic and the well information in order to
have a better picture of the prospecting horizons in their areal extent.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 18 of 87
EXPLORATION: Seismic Methods
2-D Seismic Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a310)
Description:
Competency Statement: Evaluate seismic sections to interpret chronostratigraphic units and structural elements. Use the
techniques of seismic interpretat ion to pick horizons and faults over an interval of interest. Tie exist ing well informat ion to the
seismic section using a synthetic seismogram. Combine the seismic interpretat ion and well data to create a seismic t ime map.
Learning Objective:
Tie well information to the seismic section using the synthetic seismogram or check shot survey.
Ident ify major reflections in the seismic data set.
Enumerate criteria for picking faults based on the regional structural style.
Describe conformable and unconformable seismic reflection geometry.
Describe the steps to complete a seismic t ime map.
Assignment Instruction: You work for an oil company who has intentions to bid for an offshore and practically unexplored area.
The Host Government has provided your company with a data pack consist ing of 160 Km of 2D seismic and two wells (see map
below). As a member of the exploration team, your work is to use this information for evaluating the hydrocarbon potential of
the area in order to decide whether to abandon further efforts or to continue with the explorat ion, provided your company
makes an attractive proposal for the area and the Host Government accepts.
Your contribution to this init iat ive is to provide the seismic interpretation of the area, mapping st ructural and st rat igraphic
features with exploration potent ial.After analysis you will propose further seismic surveys and/or reprocessing of exist ing seismic
lines as needed.
2D seismic lines and wells distribution
Data Provided:
Six 2D seismic lines
Well A Info (TD=11940 ft), Sonic log, gamma ray log, density log, check shot survey
Well B Info (TD=12585 ft)
Map with seismic lines and wells locat ion
The assignment should be done sequent ially as all answers could be used as input for subsequent quest ions. So, take notes of all
your findings during the completion of this exercise.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 19 of 87
EXPLORATION: Seismic Methods
3-D Seismic Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a339)
Description:
Competency Statement: Interprete a 3-D seismic survey using seismic sections and t ime slices to interpret horizons and faults.
Display an understanding of the use of t ime slices, horizon slices and other 3-D techniques play in 3-D interpretation.
Learning Objective:
Ident ify common horizon auto-picker parameters and their effects.
Enumerate criteria for picking faults on t ime slices.
Describe various 3-D survey display options.
Describe creation and uses of horizon slices.
List parameters for amplitude extract ion of a 3-D horizon.
Assignment Instruction: In a given deep water area (see map), there will be a bid round for exploration. Your company has
interest in the area and consequently has assigned you to evaluate the area and to provide a specialist opinion for further
investment.
Only four wells have been drilled in the basin, the results were:
Well A: dry
Well B: dry with gas shows
Well C: oil discovery well
Well D: oil and gas discovery well
The first step in your assignment is to attend to a data room, where you will analyze a dataset composed by information
gathered from the interpretat ion of two 3D seismic volumes (see map), including structural maps, t ime slices, attributes
maps/horizons.
After completion of the data room activit ies you will:
Use the information previously analyzed to present a structural and strat igraphic framework for the area
Recommend the use of certain techniques to improve the knowledge of the basin
Convey to your company management the meaning of seismic amplitudes and the character of the seismic reflect ion
data
Use the available data to propose and support potential prospects in the area;
Give advice for decisions to be taken over the area, in terms of prospect ranking
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 20 of 87
EXPLORATION: Seismic Methods
Seismic Attributes and Direct Hydrocarbon Indicators (DHIs) (IHRDC_IPIMS_a340)
Description:
Competency Statement: Evaluate seismic attribute sections to enhance conventional seismic interpretat ion. Identify the
seismic effects of a 'bright spot' anomaly and their physical cause. Describe the Amplitude Vs. Offset (AVO) effect and the
physics that govern the response. List the attributes of the Hilbert Transform and their mathmatical formulation.
Learning Objective:
List possible effects to seismic amplitude response on 'Bright Spot' prospect.
Describe AVO response and its causes.
Explain the limitat ions of AVO response.
Review Hilbert transform attributes.
Describe work flow for evaluating attribute effectiveness.
Assignment Instruction: Surface seismic has become the most important tool in hydrocarbon reservoir delineation. During the
last decades most of the effort was focused on structural imaging and hydraulic barriers descript ions. However due to the
recent advances in computational hardware and new theoretical approaches to sedimentat ion processes and wave
phenomena, seismic att ributes have taken the leading edge as hydrocarbon indicators. AVO, Amplitude analysis, Frequency
decomposit ion, Wave Attenuation and Elast ic inversion are only a few important techniques which t ransform wave
information into probabilist ic parameters to hydrocarbon discovery.
The following assignment will take you through an example of hydrocarbon indicators start ing from the QC of the seismic data
to the feasible presence of hydrocarbons using wave information.
You are a member of a reservoir characterization team working on a gas prone area. Two exploratory wells have been drilled in
the area. The first well was located over a structural high and was proved successful. The second well was located down dip
and no production was achieved from it . Both drilling plans and locations were devised using 2D conventional seismic. A new
3D seismic survey was acquired in order to have a better picture of the Gas-Water-Contact distribution and other possible
accumulations in the block using seismic attributes as hydrocarbon indicators.
The main target is the reservoir discovered by the first well at 4500’ depth (2000ms TWT approx) and other two possible
accumulations at 3500ms and 7000ms TWT in the area which have not been proven yet.
In this project you need to supervise a complete sequence of reservoir seismic attributes characterization from the seismic QC
to AVO characterization and the identification of new opportunit ies.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 21 of 87
EXPLORATION: Reservoir Description and Characterization
Petrophysical Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a313)
Description:
Competency Statement: Determine rock and fluid propert ies using open hole logs, mud logs, cutt ings and core data. Evaluate
lithology, mineralogy, fluid distribution, temperature and pressure gradients including rock quality.
Learning Objective:
Define key petrophysical propert ies and their significance.
Describe the operating principles, capabilit ies, limitations and areas of application of commonly used open hole logging
devices.
Describe basic response and limitation of each log type.
Validate log response using core and well cutt ings.
Assignment Instruction: Beta Petroleum is to drill a wildcat on a structure in the New Basin. As the Operations Geologist you will
have a significant influence on the data acquisit ion for this well including the open-hole logging program in consultation with
the Petrophysicist.
Following agreement with those involved you will specify a data acquisit ion program (mud-logging and wireline logging).
To ensure you are prepared for this assignment you will review the petrophysical principles that you have previously learnt on
training courses. As it is not clear what lithology and pore fill may be encountered, you will review the log responses to be
expected for a variety of possibilit ies.
The last part of the assignment you will witness the logging job and carry out a quick look evaluation of the logs to select WLFT
pressure and sample points plus SWS depths. Based on the information gathered you will interpret the fluid distribution in the
well and establish the basic petrophysical parameters :- clay volume, porosity and water saturation.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 22 of 87
EXPLORATION: Reservoir Description and Characterization
Interpretation of Well Logs (IHRDC_IPIMS_a314)
Description:
Competency Statement: Use electromagnetic, radioactive, acoust ic and other logs to infer strat igraphic and st ructural
characterist ics of subsurface formations. Determine basic propert ies of a potential reservior.
Learning Objective:
Describe common log responses for source, reservoir and seal units.
Describe common log patterns and their facies equivalent.
Apply basic log interpretation methods to determine porosity, permeability, fluid saturation and boundaries for reservoir
descript ion.
Make a preliminary est imate of reserves using Well 1 and analog field parameters.
Assignment Instruction: Beta Petroleum has drilled a wildcat on the Gama structure in the New Basin. The well has reached TD
and there are indications of reservoir rock and hydrocarbons from mud logs, cutt ings and side wall cores. The init ial logging run,
t riple combo, indicates a high resist ivity zone. You will analyze the logs for reservoir and seal. As part of your evaluation of the
reservoir you will determine: gross thickness, net sand, net pay, porosity, permeability and water saturation.
If possible you will use log character with other data to determine a lithofacies for the reservoir. Remember this evaluation will
directly influence whether or not an addit ional well is drilled on the structure.
On the last Assignment Page you will be asked by the VP of Exploration to use your analysis to support or reject a delineation
well.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 23 of 87
EXPLORATION: Reservoir Description and Characterization
Reservoir Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a315)
Description:
Competency Statement: Generate a geological reservoir model. Define reservoir in terms of continuity, lithology, facies
distribution, structural geometry and style. Using the petrophysical parameters developed from well log analysis, est imate the
original oil and gas volume in place.
Learning Objective:
Establish geological reservoir model define, object ives and modeling tasks.
Review reservoir architecture, reservoir propert ies and their dist ribut ion, and integrate for construction of a stat ic
geological model.
Integrate seismic horizons and facies into the geological model.
Est imate original hydrocarbons in place.
Assignment Instruction: Beta Petroleum has drilled a successful wildcat (Gama 1) and three delineation wells (Gama 2, Gama 3
and Gama 4) on the Gama structure in the New Basin.
The discovery well found gas and oil in the so called Lower Graben Sand Formation, albeit with a ODT/WUT situation. Therefore
the 1st appraisal (delineation) well (Gama 2) was aimed at defining the OWC.
All of the wells have been logged and a whole core was taken of the reservoir in Well #3 (Gama 3).
As the Exploration geologists you are aksed to develop a static reservoir model and determine the oil in place (STOIIP) for the
Lower Graben Sand Reservoir. This requires you to interpret flow units in and between the wells and assess the reservoir
propert ies across the structure. Regional knowledge indicates that the Lower Graben Sands can be sub-divided into 4 Flow
Units each with (slightly) different propert ies.
As reference, as type log, well (F2-2A) located some 8.6 km to the North-West can be used to sub-divide the objective sands in
the wells under invest igat ion.
Developing the static model requires insight into the deposit ional environment and at present you only have information from
a regional study. Therefore interpretation of the local, or prospect deposit ional environment needs to be determined from logs
taken in the 1st well (Gama 1) and subsequently verified with core data from the Gama 3 well.
Based on regional information the Lower Graben Sand in the field area is interpreted as a fluvial-deltaic to a t idal delta
deposit ional system, building out in a Northern direction.
The top of the Lower Graben Sands is picked at the occurence of the first (larger) sand beds below the (marine) shales of the
Middle Graben Shale package.
These Lower Graben Sands have been subdivided elsewhere into four "Flow Units". These Units (1 to 4) are considered successive
cycles of lower delta plain deposits, in which the reservoir sands were developed as:
• t idal distributary channel fills,
• t idal channel bars,
• channel margins and
• lagoonal backwash systems.
Using the Deposit ional Environment as referenced, a judgement will be made with regards to the reservoir continuity of the
individual permeable and non-permeable beds defining the “flow units” (i.e. the individual beds controlling the direction of fluid
flow through the reservoir into the producing wells).
Based on different relat ions in width/thickness and length/width rat ios, several cases with respect to sand body dimensions
have been considered, but the medium case is st ill considered the most reasonable in the fluvio-deltaic/t idal dist ributary, and
estuarine environment. In this scenario the width/thickness rat io is 100 and the length/width ratio is 5.
Although in the process of subsurface modelling the definit ion of “Flow Units” is an essential step, for calculating the
STOIIP this information is only relevant when est imating the average reservoir propert ies as parameters to the calculat ion.
As part of this Learning Plan the learner will need to review the depth st ructure map for the prospect reservoir as derived from
seismic, showing the overall st ructural configuration and the presence and distribution of the field faults.
The structure is faulted, displays 4 way dip-closer, and appears to be filled to spill point . The crest of the structure is found at a
depth of some 3025 m and to the northwest of the discovery well. The structure is broken up by two sets of normal faults which
form a NW-SE trending 1.5 km wide crestal graben, believed to be of Triassic age. A younger NNE-SSW t rending set breaks up
the eastern and north-eastern flanks of the field. The throw of the faults varies from 10 - 85 m. The faults are part ly sealing and
may be contributing to some compartmentalization of the field.
Wells 3 & 4 (Gama 3 & 4) were drilled on the same structure, penetrat ing what appears to be the same hydrocarbon bearing
reservoir and display similar contacts as far as can be concluded from the present data, but this needs to be verified using the
available pressure iinformation.
Wells 3 & 4 (Gama 3 & 4) were drilled on the same structure, penetrat ing what appears to be the same hydrocarbon bearing
reservoir and display similar contacts as far as can be concluded from the present data, but this needs to be verified using the
available pressure iinformation.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 24 of 87
EXPLORATION: Reservoir Description and Characterization
Reservoir Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a315)
EXPLORATION: Reservoir Description and Characterization
Reservoir Geophysics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a334)
Description:
Competency Statement: Analyze and interpret seismic and geological information for the purpose of reservoir descript ion.
Convert seismic t ime horizons to depth, based on well and seismic velocit ies. Evaluate seismic facies and their deposit ional
environment in order to produce analogs of their potential reservoirs.
Learning Objective:
Analyze seismic interpretation to determine best methodology for depth conversion.
Present Pros and Cons of different depthing approaches.
Select deposit ional model analog that best fits the regional and seismic facies characterist ics.
Evaluate seismic facies with reservoir propert ies determined from wells, to gain insight to reservoir property distribution.
Assignment Instruction: As the lead Geophysicist for Beta Petroleum's explorat ion effort in the New Basin you have developed
t ime structure maps for mult iple horizons for Structure Gama. Now four wells have been drilled and the Geologists are preparing
to develop a reservoir model for evaluation of reserves.
Your first concern is to develop a methodology for taking the known reservoir to depth. The data available are two check shot
surveys, two sonic logs and seismic velocit ies from the 2-D seismic survey of the area. An addit ional concern is the different
oil/water contact in Well 3.
Secondarily, you have noticed a seismic facies change in the reservoir in a north to south direction. Coordinate your seismic
facies analysis with the Geologist to determine a deposit ional environment and likely lithofacies. As part of this effort describe a
methodology for evaluating seismic amplitudes in the reservoir interval.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 25 of 87
EXPLORATION: Reservoir Description and Characterization
Exploration Geostatistics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a336)
Description:
Competency Statement: Use stat ist ical methods to describe the characterist ics of the hydrocarbon-bearing system. Validate
the descript ion by comparing data with reservoir analogs. Establish support ing t rends for predicting propert ies in both drilled
and non-drilled areas. Characterize dependence among mult iple variables. Describe risk and uncertainty using probabilist ic
distributions.
Learning Objective:
Apply preliminary stat ist ical analysis methods to geological data.
Apply conventional techniques to validate reservoir data and trend maps.
Demonstrate an understanding of risk and uncertainty in probablist ic distributions.
Build single model variograms for simple reservoir propert ies.
Apply basic Krigging techniques to generate representative reservoir parameter maps.
Assignment Instruction: Beta Petroleum has drilled a wildcat and three delineation wells on a st ructure in the New Basin. All of
the wells have been logged and a whole core was taken of the reservoir in Well 4. Petrophysical analysis has been completed
for all wells and is available for use.
You are to evaluate different statist ical methods for distributing reservoir propert ies. In addit ion to petrophysical data a facies
map based on the well information and seismic data is available.
As part of this process variograms will be developed for each of the reservoir propert ies. Incorporate the range of data
available: basin analog, outcrop, whole core and well log analysis into construction of the variograms. Remember that Well 3 is
anomalous due to its thin reservoir sect ion and different oil/water contact.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 26 of 87
EXPLORATION: Wellsite Geological Operations
Geological Operations and Logistics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a318)
Description:
Competency Statement: Determine the necessary resources for carrying out exploratory projects. Build a plan to address
permitt ing, environmental and safety considerations, location construction, contracts, evaluation and specialized services.
Understand the importance of the budgetary cycle and how it effects operations.
Learning Objective:
Determine resources, steps and t imeline for exploratory well.
Ident ify and address issues related to contracting for exploratory services: such as scope of work, technical evaluation,
and input for commercial evaluation.
Describe data collection program for exploratory well.
Collect and evaluate requests for exploratory well data and evaluate impact on budget.
Describe data collection program for delineation well.
Assignment Instruction: As an Operations Geologist you will develop, monitor and report on the drilling of the first exploratory
well in the New Basin. If this well is a discovery, appraisal wells will be drilled to determine the potential size of the discovery. You
will be involved in all stages of the exploratory program and report progress to management and the explorat ion team.
Your first responsibility is to coordinate the drilling plan. This includes location confirmation, permitt ing, site preparation,
coordination with drilling engineers, communicat ion with drilling contractor and coordination with contractors providing data
collection services. Construction of a t imeline for all activit ies will be crucial for successful completion of your function.
Part of this role is a budgetary function with regard to overall cost and cost of individual expenditure areas. The Exploration
Manager will look to you to develop and t rack expenditures. You need to plan for cont ingencies and have alternat ives to the
init ial drilling and evaluation program that st ill conform to the overall objectives of the well.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 27 of 87
EXPLORATION: Wellsite Geological Operations
Data Logging and Geological Information (IHRDC_IPIMS_a320)
Description:
Competency Statement: Design programs for collecting subsurface rock and fluid samples. Design mud-logging and cutt ings
program. Evaluate and select coring program. Specify requirements for measuring formation pressures and temperatures.
Determine the necessary studies to be carried out using these data.
Learning Objective:
Specify mud logging requirements including: collection intervals, sampling preparation, hydorcarbon indicators and
lithology report ing.
Design a well-cutt ing program including analysis; identify what uses these samples are used for.
Describe order and inter-relationshiip of different well evaluation techniques.
Design a coring program and specify procedures for sample collection, handling and analysis.
Define fluid sampling requirements. Specify types of equipment to be used.
Ident ify other data collection services that maybe needed for the successful evaluation.
As Operations Geologist you will develop, monitor and report on the drilling of the first exploratory well in New Basin. If this Well 1
is a discovery appraisal wells will be drilled to determine the potential size of the discovery. You will be involved in all stages of
the exploratory program and report progress to management and the exploration team.
The Operations Geologist needs to have a clear understanding of the objectives of the well and subsequent evaluation
program. Design a well logging program and other data collection programs for evaluation of this int ial wildcat well. Consider
the needs of Geologist , Geophysics and Engineer.
The first well has indicated hydrocarbons and reservior based on mud log results. What changes to your int ial data collect ion
program will you propose? What will be the order of these addit ional data? Planning has included addit ional funds for
enhanced evaluation but requests for addit ional data outstrip available funds. Describe the priorit izat ion of addit ional
evaluation data.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 28 of 87
EXPLORATION: Wellsite Geological Operations
Exploratory and Delineation Drilling (IHRDC_IPIMS_a319)
Description:
Competency Statement: Monitor drilling programs for exploratory and delineation wells. Discuss the drilling program and
understand the required equipment and procedures for each stage of well operations. Evaluate logic for wildcat location and
subsequent delineation wells.
Learning Objective:
Generate a proposal and Statement of Requirements for an exploratory or delineation well, providing input for the well
design, drilling program and evaluation.
Describe the relationship between formation evaluation requirements and the various aspects of well design and
const ruction.
Monitor and report on drilling operat ions to ensure clear communications.
Discuss trade offs between drilling 'High' or 'Off" structure for init ial wildcat.
Evaluate location of delineation well, Well 2, based on results of a wildcat discovery and economic threshold.
As Operations Geologist you will develop, monitor and report on the drilling of the first exploratory well in the New Basin. If this
well, Well 1, is a discovery appraisal wells will be drilled to determine the potential size of the discovery. You will be involved in all
stages of the exploratory program and report progress to management and the exploration team.
The Operations Geologist needs to have a clear understanding of the objectives of the well and subsequent economic
evaluation program. Based on the exist ing structure map and expected reservoir propert ies select a location that balances
chance of discovery and understanding of the reservoir size. Five other structures have been identified in the New Basin.
The first well, Well 1, has indicated hydrocarbons and reservoir based on well logs, samples and formation test ing. An updated
st ructure map and economic threshold have been developed with data from Well 1, select a second locat ion. This location
should be selected to define a commercial hydrocarbon accumulation.
The second appraisal location, Well 2, has proven to be a successful well. Logs indicate a thicker reservoir full to base. Where will
the third appraisal well be drilled to try to define a water contact?
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 29 of 87
EXPLORATION: Exploration Project Management
Exploration Project Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_a322)
Description:
Competency Statement: In this Learning Module you will be introduced to the project management stage-gate process with
specific focus on the init ial visualizat ion or exploration phase.
Learning Objective:
Upon complication of this module, the learner will be able to:
Describe the five step stage-gate process.
Determine the criteria necessary to move a prospect through the process to drilling.
Determine what data is necessary to provide a basic economic analysis of a prospect.
Apply uncertainty to determine stage-gate qualification.
Assignment Instruction: As the team lead for your integrated exploration interpretation project you are responsible for the
technical assessment quality of the project but also making sure the prospect meets commercial and company economic
goals. Because of the risks, the complexit ies and the sheer magnitudes of the investments needed to develop an oilfield, your
company has divided the analysis and decisions into discreet, sequential stages using a disciplined project management
process. In this lesson you will work through the defined process.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 30 of 87
EXPLORATION: Exploration Project Management
The Exploration Process (IHRDC_IPIMS_a323)
Description:
Competency Statement: Examine the data types and steps necessary to construct a vision of success statement thru to
prospect generation and evaluation.
Learning Objective:
The objectives of this Learning Module are to introduce the learner to:
Key steps of an exploration study.
Understand the roles science, engineering and commercial input play in the decision process.
Integrate the concepts of risk and risk sensit ivity to the decision process.
Assignment Instruction: The exploration process integrates several fields of knowledge. As the team lead in your exploration
department it is your responsibility to make sure all available data has been gathered, analyzed, and uncertaint ies have been
identified for your management team.
For this assignment you will be asked to review your prospect, determine what data has been integrated, and if uncertaint ies
exist, explore what steps you might recommend to eliminate or reduce the uncertainty impact on your decisions. You will make
a decision to part icipate in the play or not.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 31 of 87
EXPLORATION: Exploration Project Management
Value of Information (IHRDC_IPIMS_a326)
Description:
Competency Statement: Analyze the “value” of the information that will be gained by applying various technologies to a high
risk variable and then decide if it is worth the extra cost to the project.
Learning Objective:
The objectives of this Learning Module are to:
Measure the value of data vs. the cost on a project.
Determine mult iple scenarios that can accomplish the business goals and their impact on the prospects economics.
Understand the cost benefit decision process and uncertainty in making both science and business and decisions.
Assignment Instruction: The exploration team has preliminary maps over the structures associated with our concessions. The
maps are based on old vintage 2D data. Based on the available data it appears the structure is present, however the team
has assigned a high risk factor to the structure due to its structural orientat ion.
Management has pushed back on funding this new drill project unless you can convince them other wise. Your team will need
to determine the value of shoot ing a new seismic survey, it’s impact on the projects profitability and if there are other data
available that could convince management to commit the funds.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 32 of 87
EXPLORATION: Exploration Project Management
Prospect Economics and Uncertainty Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_a327)
Description:
Competency Statement: Evaluate the risk under uncertainty of an ident ified play area and apply business principles that will
lead to assigning an economic value to the proposed concessions.
Learning Objective:
The learner will be able to:
Characterize a reservoir.
Assess the impact of drilling hazards and wellbore design on prospect economics.
Use field analogies to est imate range of risked recoverable reserves.
Develop and exploratory drilling plan
Create a drilling AFE
Assignment Instruction: The exploration team has completed prospect generation for the play area of interest and are now
ready to evaluate the economics and request funding to invest in the exploratory well. In this assignment you will test the
sensit ivity of the exploration variables to understand their impact on the value of the prospect, the design criteria for drilling,
and the impact of regulatory constraints on the exploratory drilling plan. You will then const ruct an AFE to present to decision
review board to request funding.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 33 of 87
EXPLORATION: Exploration Project Management
Exploration Business Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_a342)
Description:
Competency Statement: Management is asking you for prospects that can be considered for drilling in the upcoming year. You
will evaluate a prospect based on the findings of two different exploration teams.
Learning Objective:
The Learner will be able to:
Build a business case for drilling an exploratory based on input data from your teams.
Understand the components and processes behind the process.
Apply the process to make a decision that measures value against opportunity.
Present the business case for the play identified by your explorat ion teams.
Assignment Instruction: As the manager of exploration you have asked two independent technical teams to analyze the same
area in the basin. They have each come up with a recommendation for the area that you will have to evaluate and decide
which one you want to move to FID. In this assignment you will review the input of known data, look at which team has
minimized the uncertainty and the overall value of the prospect and make recommendations to your management decision
review board.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 34 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Engineering Fundamentals
Reservoir Rock and Fluid Properties (IHRDC_IPIMS_a1)
Description:
Competency Statement: Define the propert ies of the reservoir rock/fluid system.
Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to
define the following reservoir propert ies and understand their importance in the overall reservoir development scheme:
Rock propert ies: porosity, permeability, fluid saturat ion, compressibility, anisotropy
Fluid propert ies: phase behavior, PVT relationships, density, viscosity, compressibility, formation volume factor,
gas-oil rat io
Rock/fluid interact ions: wettability, interfacial tension, capillary pressure, relat ive permeability
read and understand wellsite descript ions of recovered core material, evaluate the core handling and preservation
techniques employed, and select sample intervals for laboratory analysis
generate a procedure for preparing and analyzing selected core samples, specifying the tests to be run and the
information to be obtained; describe the laboratory techniques and perform the calculations used for determining rock
propert ies
design procedures for obtaining representat ive surface and subsurface formation fluid samples
describe procedures for generating PVT analyses of reservoir fluid samples, and interpret the result ing reports
use published correlations to est imate reservoir fluid propert ies
Assignment Instruction: In this assignment, you will define the basic rock and fluid propert ies of a recently discovered reservoir in
the Republic of Sucre.
You will be in charge of obtaining representative fluid samples and determining their Pressure-Volume-Temperature (PVT)
characterist ics. You will also design a coring and core analysis program for a new well, and use the results to define basic rock
propert ies and rock-fluid interactions.
The discovery well, Well 4E1-NE, tested at 1550 STB/D of 35 degree API oil [246 m3/D, 0.85 specific gravity], with a producing
gas-oil rat io of 680 SCF/STB [121 m3/m3] and a water cut of about three percent. It is currently on an extended product ion test.
The second well drilled in this field , Well 5C1-SW, tested all water and was subsequently suspended.
Before your company acquired these drilling blocks, a medium-sized independent had run a series of seismic surveys in the area.
Your company purchased these data, from which the Geology and Geophysics departments constructed a subsurface
contour map showing the approximate st ructure boundaries and the top of the Upper Sand.
You are now part of the interdisciplinary team charged with characterizing the reservoir and developing an optimal
exploitation strategy. Right now, you do not have much to work with—just the contour map and the well data obtained so far.
(You can access this material by clicking on the References that accompany each assignment quest ion.)
What you will need to do at this point, then, is to use the available data to try to define some basic reservoir rock and fluid
propert ies.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 40 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Engineering Fundamentals
Rock Mechanics Fundamentals (IHRDC_IPIMS_a2)
Description:
Competency Statement: Apply rock mechanics fundamentals to discribe well, reservoir and production behavior.
Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to
define the following rock mechanical propert ies under various condit ions of confining pressure, describe how these
propert ies influence wellbore stability, directional drilling considerat ions, well completion design and other aspects of
reservoir development, and know how they are measured in the laboratory:
Brinell hardness
Tensile st rength
Normal/shear stress relat ionships and failure mechanisms (Mohr circles)
Young’s modulus
Poisson’s rat io
Compressive strength
Shear st rength
Assignment Instruction: Rock mechanics is a basic element of reservoir descript ion, well design and production optimization.
Knowledge of rock mechanical propert ies is crit ical to successful reservoir management.
In this assignment, you will define rock mechanical propert ies based on an analysis of core samples from Well 2A5-NE. You will:
(1) select core samples for measuring rock mechanical propert ies
(2) est imate the overburden and pore pressuress at reservoir depth
(3) determine rock mechanical propert ies under reservoir condit ions
(4) calculate rock compressive strength, Young's Modulus and Poisson's rat io,
(5) Use a Mohr diagram to interpret the reservoir's shear stress rate
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 41 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Engineering Fundamentals
Stability and Rock Deformation Models (IHRDC_IPIMS_a3)
Description:
Competency Statement: Generate a stability and rock deformation model.
Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to
identify the presence and orientation of fracture systems in the reservoir
Assignment Instruction: To understand formation stress response, we start by measuring the mechanical propert ies of
representative core samples in the laboratory. This gives us information about the rock's strength and stability under a given set
of condit ions.
We then apply this empirical knowledge to the formation by combining our core observations with such geologic informat ion as
well logs, st ructure maps and regional outcrop studies.
In this assignment, you will review core descript ions for evidence of natural fractures and other tectonic activity. You will then
incorporate your observations with other data sources to determine the principal stress directions in the formation.
Core analysis, including rock mechanical propert ies tests, have been done on selected samples from Well 2A5-NE. Early seismic
measurements and log data from offset wells indicate that the reservoir is bounded by normal faults on the east and west .
Your object ive in reviewing this core information is to
(1) determine the formation’s principal stress directions,
(2) and find indications of tectonic activity.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 42 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Engineering Fundamentals
Reservoir Drive Mechanisms (IHRDC_IPIMS_a4)
Description:
Competency Statement: Identify and interpret production mechanisms to predict the behavior of oil, gas and gas condensate
reservoirs.
Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to
identify primary reservoir drive mechanisms (solut ion gas drive, water drive, gas cap drive) by observing production and
pressure trends.
est imate original hydrocarbons in place, using both volumetric and material balance methods, and develop a range of
est imates for technical recovery factors and reserves.
Assignment Instruction: The ult imate goal of reservoir management is to optimize economically the development and
production of hydrocarbons. This requires answers to three quest ions:
(1) How much hydrocarbon is there?
(2) How much of it is recoverable?
(3) How fast can it be recovered?
In other words, we need to determine , respectively, the oil and gas in place, the reserves, and the production rate.
Your job in this assignment scenario is to review the reservoir data that have been collected to this point and
est imate the original hydrocarbon in place using volumetric and material balance methods,
qualitat ively evaluate the reservoir drive mechanisms, and
est imate the reservoir’s primary recovery factor
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 43 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Engineering Fundamentals
Multidisciplinary Reservoir Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_a6)
Description:
Competency Statement: Contribute to the efforts of a mult idisciplinary reservoir management team, based on a general
knowledge of related disciplines.
Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to
demonstrate a basic knowledge of disciplines outside of reservoir engineering (i.e., Geology, Sedimentology,
Petrophysiscs, Geophysics, etc.), and establish a working relationship with specialists from these disciplines.
understand the role of different disciplines in the overall process of reservoir characterization and exploitation.
Assignment Instruction: Much of our reservoir data comes from disciplines outside of reservoir engineering. The init ial structure
map, for example, may be generated from seismic measurements and geological interpretation, with subsequent information
coming from well logs, cores, production data and other sources.
In this assignment, you will review the well and field data that have been gathered to date for the Upper/Middle sands, so
that you can have an idea of what tools are available for describing the subsurface environment. You will also look at how
various E&P disciplines may fit into the overall reservoir management task.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 44 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Well Logging and SubsurfaceMapping
Interdisciplinary Data Acquisition (IHRDC_IPIMS_a121)
Description:
Competency Statement: Gather, view, classify and validate the mult idisciplinary information required for conducting integrated
reservoir studies.
Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to
access PDVSA engineering and geoscience databases and identify information that is relevant to the field under study.
classify information according to discipline and what reservoir parameters it helps to define.
Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will establish general data acquisit ion requirements for an integrated
reservoir study of the Sucre field. You will consider both exist ing and potent ial data sources, and determine what information
you need to start building a reservoir model. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to determine
information needs, identify and access interdisciplinary data resources, and compile reservoir information based on the
parameters to be defined.
In this Learning Module assignment, the reservoir is in the early appraisal stage of its life. Its status at the t ime of this assignment
is as follows:
A structure contour map has been generated from seismic data and interpretat ions of regional geological data.
Well 4E1-NE, the discovery well, is currently on an extended production test.
Well 5C1-SW tested all water, and was subsequent ly suspended.
Drilling is in progress on Well 2A5-NE. A conventional coring program has been authorized, and should be gett ing
underway soon.
The reservoir management team is already at work compiling a database of reservoir information. Your job in this assignment is
to provide some ideas of what this database can contribute to the task of reservoir management, and what information
should be added to it .
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 45 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Well Logging and SubsurfaceMapping
Wireline Well Logging (IHRDC_IPIMS_a122)
Description:
Competency Statement: Select and apply the appropriate well logging tools for a part icular set of well condit ions and reservoir
study parameters.
Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to
select the appropriate logging tool(s) for evaluating a given reservoir prameter, taking into account operating
condit ions and limitat ions.
specify procedures, surface equipment, and auxiliary tools to be employed on a logging job.
Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will select and apply the appropriate tools for conducting open hole
logging surveys at Well 2A5-NE, based on well condit ions and formation evaluation objectives. By the t ime you complete this
module, you should understand the basic operating principles of commonly used logging tools and be able to determine their
areas of applicat ion.
Conductor casing has been set at Well 2A5-NE, and the surface hole is currently being drilled. Your tasks in this assignment are
to review the surface logging program, and then to select the appropriate tools for logging from Target Depth to the shoe of
the surface casing.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 46 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Well Logging and SubsurfaceMapping
Well Log Quality Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_a123)
Description:
Competency Statement: Validate the quality of information supplied by the logging service company to ensure that the data
can be used in generating a petrophysical reservoir model.
Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to
monitor the quality control of logging procedures, including calibration, correct ion and choice of scales)
Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will be in charge of well log quality control at Well 2A5-NE. By the t ime you
complete this module, you should be able to define basic survey parameters, establish log scales, monitor tool responses, and
confirm the validity of the data acquired from commonly used logging devices.
You are approaching target depth on Well 2A5-NE, and you will short ly be calling out the service company crew to log the 8
1/2 inch hole interval. Your job in this assignment is to establish some general guidelines for conducting logging operations,
review tool calibrat ions and monitor survey progress.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 47 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Well Logging and SubsurfaceMapping
Well Log Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a124)
Description:
Competency Statement: Determine reservoir rock propert ies using well log analysis.
Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to
Use log analysis to identify reservoir rock propert ies (fluid saturation, porosity, fluid contacts, permeabilit ies, bulk shale
content, net oil sand, fractures)
Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will use basic well log interpretation techniques to identify potential pay
zones, define basic reservoir propert ies and est imate the hydrocarbons in place in terms of reservoir volume per unit area. By the
t ime you complete this module, you should be able to apply log analysis methods to the task of generating a petrophysical
reservoir model.
The open hole formation evaluation program at Well 2A5-NE is in progress, and field copies of the lithology, resist ivity and
porosity logs are now available. Your job in this assignment is to review these logs and make an init ial evaluat ion of the well's
hydrocarbon potential. Your evaluation is an important first step in deciding whether to complete the well, so be sure to
carefully examine the log data.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 48 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Well Logging and SubsurfaceMapping
Subsurface Mapping (IHRDC_IPIMS_a125)
Description:
Competency Statement: Develop geological, petrophysical and sedimentological maps for use in generating a reservoir model.
Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to
generate geologic cross sections from well logs.
draw subsurface contours and construct geologic and geophysical maps.
Assignment Instruction: The original st ructure contour map for the Upper/Middle Sand reservoir was derived from seismic data
acquired from an independent operator. Since then, three wells have been drilled, and the seismic data have undergone
reprocessing and extensive addit ional interpretat ion. As a result, you now have a new base map, which shows the locat ions of
the new wells and depth markers to the top of the Upper Sand. In this assignment, you will revise the Upper Sand st ructure map
to reflect these new data (be careful--the updated map may or may not be similar to the original map!)
To complete the assignment, you will consider several addit ional formation parameters that may be conducive to subsurface
contour mapping, and consider how they could be used to describe this reservoir.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 49 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Well Logging and SubsurfaceMapping
Reserves Definitions, Reporting and Mapping (IHRDC_IPIMS_a126)
Description:
Competency Statement: Elaborate and update from the maps generated during the modeling of the reservoir, the maps
required by the Ministry of Energy and Mines in offical format, for the administrat ion and control of the reserves.
Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to
access the applications used to generate MEM maps in official formatt
generate a map using the applciations.
Assignment Instruction: The Ministry of Natural Resources is a department of the Nat ional Executive of the Republic of Sucre. Its
responsibilit ies include establishing norms and regulations for business operations in the hydrocarbon sector, in accordance with
laws established by the National Legislature.
The Ministry's organization and objectives are basically the same as those of the Ministry of Energy and Mines (MEM) in the
neighboring Republic of Venezuela, and the norms that it has established for oil and gas operations are identical to MEM
standards. For this reason, the quest ions that you are asked in this assignment use MEM standards as primary reference sources.
In this Assignment, you will review the present status of the Upper/Middle sand reservoir, determine what reports you need to
submit to the Ministry, and decide how to classify well locations and est imated hydrocarbon reserves in keeping with
established norms. You will also ensure that the symbols and conventions used in the official maps that are submitted with
these reports are consistent with Ministry standards. By the t ime you complete the Assignment, you should be able to comply
with MEM standards for report ing reserves and generating subsurface maps using accepted symbols, conventions and
nomenclature.
The current status of the Upper/Middle sand reservoir is as follows:
Well 4E1-NE, the discovery well, is on an extended production test. Permanent completion is pending.
Well 5C1-SW was suspended after well logs and a formation test indicated that it exposed the Upper Sand below the
water-oil contact.
Well 2A5-NE has been drilled and tested, and a successful open hole format ion test has been carried out.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 50 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Characterization andModeling
Compaction and Subsidence (IHRDC_IPIMS_a127)
Description:
Competency Statement: Analyze, calculate and validate compaction, subsidence and sett ling parameters to predict their
influence on the behavior of the project and their impact on recovery, using the results of this analysis to optimize exploitation
projects.
Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to
measure compact ion, subsidence parameters.
determine the significanc of these parrmeters with re determining drive mechanisms, etc.
Assignment Instruction: A sedimentary formation is the product of rock part icle deposit ion, an ongoing process in which an
underlying layer of part icles is buried and forced downward by succeeding layers. As deposit ion and burial proceed, the
underlying layer is subjected to a progressively increasing overburden pressure. This increased overburden results in
compact ion--a reduction in the thickness and bulk volume of the underlying layer.
Compaction also takes place when fluids are withdrawn from a subsurface format ion. Fluid withdrawal causes a decrease in
pore pressure, which in turn increases the grain-to-grain, or mat rix pressure of the rock part icles and causes them to compact.
The amount of compaction that occurs in a given formation depends only upon the difference between the vert ically applied
overburden pressure and the fluid, or pore pressure. Thus, the uniaxial compaction of a rock sample of thickness h can be
expressed as
DVb/ Vb = Dh/h
Depending on geological condit ions, subsurface compaction may be associated with varying degrees of subsidence, or sinking
of the ground at the surface.
Compaction and its associated effect of surface subsidence can, in certain situat ions, have significant effects on reservoir
management st rategies and field operations. In this Assignment, you will build your general understanding of these
phenomena and see how they can influence reservoir engineering decisions. You will also look at a system that has been
developed by PDVSA to describe and predict compaction and subsidence in areas where they are of part icular concern.
By the t ime you complete this assignment, you should be able to identify situations where compaction and subsidence may be
important considerations in a reservoir management strategy, and you should be able to begin using computer-based tools for
predicting compaction and subsidence under various condit ions.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 51 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Characterization andModeling
Pressure/Production Data Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_a128)
Description:
Competency Statement: Analyze and interpret pressure and production data for incorporat ion into the reservoir model.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
review and acquire well test information
validate pressure test information
prepare well test data for analysis
diagnose and interpret the pressure test
design and interpret production records; analyze production behavior
Assignment Instruction: Well 4E1-NE is the first well drilled in the Upper/Middle Sand reservoir. The well was completed with 7-inch
casing, selectively perforated and placed on an extended production test. Test ing was conducted in several stages. The first
stage, which is the subject of this assignment, involved test ing 16 feet of interval in the upper port ion of the identified pay
intervals. This test was designed to gather information on reservoir flow characterist ics, and in part icular, to determine the
nature of a nearby fault that had been identified on the structure map. Your job in this assignment is to review the data from
this init ial test and evaluate the reservoir permeability, near-wellbore effects and boundary effects.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 52 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Characterization andModeling
Flow Unit Determination (IHRDC_IPIMS_a129)
Description:
Competency Statement: Establish flow units within the reservoir.
Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to
Establish the areal and vert ical dist ribut ion of zones with similar behavior in agreement with the reservoir model.
Ident ify and delineate the rock volumes with sedimentological, petrophysical and reservoir propert ies that enable
hydraulic communication.
Assignment Instruction: Most reservoirs are not homogeneous. Rather, they exhibit complex variat ions in continuity, thickness
patterns and other propert ies, including porosity, permeability and capillary pressure. A reservoir is typically subdivided into
zones or areas based upon differences in rock propert ies. The complexity of reservoir rock imposes a challenge to geoscientists
and engineers in applying available technologies and their experience to improving oil and gas recovery.
The purpose of geological mapping is to ident ify flow units that contain oil and gas, and once they are found, to apply geologic
evidence and concepts toward achieving the most efficient development and production of these prospects. However, it is
important to remember that these geologic maps are never finished. When new wells are drilled or old wells are re-examined,
new information becomes available, and the extent and geometry of flow units must be updated. Original maps may be
based upon a few scattered control points. This means that in the early stages of geological work, a careful study of the local
area should be made.
Lithofacies maps are quite helpful in defining various reservoir rock types. The correlat ion of a number of reservoir propert ies,
including porosity and permeability, becomes much more meaningful when applied to a specific rock type.
During the production phase of a reservoir, more informat ion about flow units is obtained by t ransient well test ing and careful
monitoring of individual well performance. Reservoir pressure maps are part icularly useful for evaluating reservoir continuity. The
areal distribution of reservoir pressure in different zones as a function of t ime can help us to identify pay discontinuit ies and flow
barriers. Vert ical pressure profiles are also useful in defining the effect of vert ical permeability within a given reservoir section.
History matching of field performance, using a numerical reservoir simulator, can provide great insight into the cont inuity of flow
units and reservoir propert ies in inter-well areas where there is no measurements. In this process, the geological propert ies such
porosity, permeability and pay continuity are changed in order to match the observed field performance.
Different steps in gathering data for flow unit determination are:
In the geological phase:
General reservoir configurat ion
Fluids distribution
Continuity and thickness
Rock type, porosity and permeability cutoffs
Fluid contacts
Vert ical strat ificat ion
During the production phase:
Logging
Well performance
Well test ing
Relative permeability, capillary pressure and wettability tests
Inter-well t racers
In this assignment, you will be taking a short break from your work in the Sucre field, while the geologists on the reservoir
management team prepare an analysis of some of the information that has been gathered so far from the upper/middle
sands. During this t ime you will work on identifying the flow units within another reservoir where your company is actively
involved in the Nuri formation.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 53 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Characterization andModeling
Reservoir Simulation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a130)
Description:
Competency Statement: Apply analyt ical and numerical simulation techniques to the development, test ing and refining of a
reservoir model, and the generation of an opt imal reservoir exploitat ion plan.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
define reservoir simulation objectives
define simulator geometry and dimensions, and assign flow equations to the proposed model
define simulator grid and boundary condit ions
compile reservoir model input parameters
develop finite-difference approximations to solve the flow equations
plan numerical simulat ion computer runs and interpret the results
use simulat ion results to determine the optimum exploitat ion scheme
Assignment Instruction: A typical reservoir simulation study is conducted in four stages:
Gather all relevant reservoir data.1.
Init ialize the developed model.2.
Validate the model using a history matching process.3.
Forecast the reservoir's future behavior.4.
Once the structure, thickness, porosity and permeability maps are obtained, the data need to be discretized according to the
gridding system used. Fluid propert ies are entered into the model either using a data table or in the form of a correlation. For
mult i-phase flow problems, relat ive permeability relat ionships and capillary pressure curves also need to be obtained.
Models are typically init ialized with respect to the water/oil or gas/oil contact depths and a reference datum-level pressure
value.
For the init ialization, the simulator is run unt il the hydrostatic equilibrium of the exist ing phases is established.
Validation of the model requires a detailed production history of all wells in the reservoir. The production data should contain
information about open intervals, well st imulations and product ion rate of each phase (oil, gas, water).
After the model is history matched against the exist ing production data, it can be used to predict future reservoir behavior for
different development scenarios.
Keep in mind that these predict ions are only as good as the basic input that was entered into the model.
Your assignment here is to gather all the iso-surface maps and fit a body-centered grid on top of the reservoir structure.
You also need to collect all the PVT data that will be used during the simulation.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 54 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Surveillance
Data Acquisition (IHRDC_IPIMS_a161)
Description:
Competency Statement: Acquire and analyze the necessary data for optimizing reservoir surveillance.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to acquire and analyze pressure data, PVT
reports, production records, injection records, production tests, fluid sampling, injectivity tests, and other information for the
purpose of monitoring reservoir behavior.
Assignment Instruction: Reservoir surveillance is a process of identifying, gathering and interpreting the information needed to
effectively manage the reservoir and maximize economic hydrocarbon recovery. This process become more and more crit ical
as a field passes through the various phases of primary, secondary and enhanced recovery.
In this assignment, you will plan a data acquisit ion program for the Upper/Middle Sands that includes the following elements:
Present and future object ives1.
Data requirements2.
Data sources3.
Acquisit ion methods4.
Interpretation of collected data5.
By the t ime you complete this assignment, you should be able to acquire and analyze pressure data, PVT reports, production
records, injection records, production tests, fluid sampling, injectivity tests, and other information for the purpose of monitoring
reservoir behavior.
The explorat ion/appraisal program for this reservoir is currently in its third year. So far, four wells have been drilled: 4E1-NE,
5C1-SW (suspended), 2A5-NE and 5A1-SW.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 55 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Surveillance
Geologic/Seismic Integration (IHRDC_IPIMS_a162)
Description:
Competency Statement: Integrate mult idimensional seismic information and geological data to optimize the processes of
reservoir monitoring and exploitation.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to establish a basis for integrating
geophysical and geological data and incorporating them into the reservoir surveillance program.
Assignment Instruction: Reservoir surveillance is a process of gathering and analyzing the information necessary to control
operations and maximize the economic recovery of hydrocarbons. Geologists and geophysicists play a key role in this process,
from early explorat ion and appraisal to the mature stages of production.
In this assignment, you will consider how various geological and geophysical tools can be used for reservoir monitoring, and
determine their applicability to the surveillance program for the Upper/Middle Sands.
By the t ime you complete this assignment, you should be able to establish a basis for integrating geophysical and geological
data and incorporating them into the reservoir surveillance program.
The explorat ion/appraisal program for this reservoir is currently in its third year. So far, four wells have been drilled: 4E1-NE,
5C1-SW (suspended), 2A5-NE and 5A1-SW.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 56 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Surveillance
Geological Model Updating (IHRDC_IPIMS_a163)
Description:
Competency Statement: Update the geological model of the reservoir.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to apply informat ion from newly acquired
well logs, core samples and other data sources to refine the geological model of the reservoir, including its structure, strat igrapy,
dimensions and boundaries.
Assignment Instruction: The geological model is a basic element of any reservoir descript ion. It characterizes such parameters as
reservoir structure, strat igraphy and dimensions based on logs, core analyses and other data. These parameters are essential to
est imating hydrocarbon-in-place and reserves potential.
In this assignment, you will review available information from the Upper/Middle Sands and compare it with the present
geological model. You will then revise the geological model as necessary. Based on your interpretations, you will develop
important insights into the reservoir cont inuity and deposit ional environment, and establish or confirm the reservoir limits.
By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to apply information from well logs, core samples and other data
sources to refine the geological model of the reservoir, including its st ructure, st rat igrapy, dimensions and boundaries.
The explorat ion/appraisal program for the Upper/Middle Sands has been completed, and the reservoir is currently entering its
first development year. Wells drilled and evaluated to date are 4E1-NE, 5C1-SW (suspended), 2A5-NE, 5A1-SW and 5A2-SE.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 57 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Surveillance
Petrophysical Model Updating (IHRDC_IPIMS_a164)
Description:
Competency Statement: Update the petrophysical model of the reservoir.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to use well logs, cores, correlations and
other tools to establish the distribution of petrophysical propert ies in the reservoir.
Assignment Instruction: Reservoir quality is determined primarily by the distribution of petrophysical propert ies such as porosity
and permeability, pore size distribution and pore geometry, and the presence of pore-filling materials that may have an effect
on productivity or hydrocarbon recovery efficiency. Other important factors, such as relative permeability and capillary
pressure relat ionships, are related to rock wettability and capillary pressure effects. Thus, in order to fully describe reservoir
quality, it is necessary to have a knowledge of the composit ion and characterist ics of the reservoir fluids, as swell as the rock
pore system.
In this assignment, you will determine reservoir propert ies for input into the Upper/Middle Sands petrophysical model. By the
t ime you complete this assignment, you should be able to use well logs, cores, correlat ions and other tools to establish the
distribution of petorphysical propert ies in the reservoir.
The explorat ion/appraisal program for the Upper/Middle Sands has been completed, and the reservoir is currently entering its
first development year. Wells drilled and evaluated to date are 4E1-NE, 5C1-SW (suspended), 2A5-NE, 5A1-SW and 5A2-SE.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 58 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Surveillance
Reservoir Model Updating (IHRDC_IPIMS_a165)
Description:
Competency Statement: Update the reservoir model.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
Incorporate new production data (selective & different ial) into the reservoir model, along with new information from
well/core analyses.
Refine the reservoir model based on differences between predicted and actual pressure and product ion data.
Assignment Instruction: A preliminary reservoir model of the Upper/Middle Sands was generated during the
exploration/appraisal period. In this assignment, you will review the most current available data and history-match the
reservoir’s actual performance with that predicted by the original model. Based on the results of the history match, you may
choose to modify one or more of the following parameters:
Data summary
Grid data
Thickness data
Porosity data
Permeability data
Saturation data
With this updated reservoir model, you can test different exploitation scenarios to determine which one results in the optimal
economic recovery.
The field is presently under development, during which t ime it has been placed on limited production. Active wells include
4E1-NE, 2A5-NE, 5A1-SW and 5A2-SE.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 59 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Development Strategies
Economic Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a201)
Description:
Competency Statement: Use economic evaluation methods to select the most profitable project and/or exploitation strategy,
and formulate a project budget.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to apply economic evaluat ion techniques
that are necessary for analyzing proposed long-range exploitation st rategies and/or projects in the areas of reservoir, drilling
and production.
Assignment Instruction: Based on reservoir model and well performance predict ions that were generated during the
exploration/appraisal period, the reservoir management team is current ly looking at 3 potential development scenarios for the
primary recovery stage:
Case 1a Case 2a Case 3a
MDR
(Maximum Design Rate)
7500 STB/D
[1193 m3/D]
15000 STB/D
[2385 m3/D]
22500 STB/D
[3578 m3/D]
Exploration/appraisal wells to be completed 4 4 4
Addit ional wells to be drilled and completed 1 6 11
Total number of wells 5 10 15
The simulator runs used to generate these cases were based on the following assumptions:
Volumetric (closed pressure boundary) reservoir.
Production begins in the first production year at the MDR, even though the reservoir actually produced at low rates
under test condit ions during the exploration/appraisal stage.
Average init ial production per well = 1500 STB/D [apx. 240 m3/D]—under the assumed reservoir parameters, this
appears to be the maximum natural flow rate that is sustainable for a significant t ime period.
In this assignment, you will compile the available informat ion and generate net discounted cash flow predictions for each of
these cases. You will then evaluate each case in terms of its primary economic indicators, taking into account the sensit ivity of
the evaluation to uncertaint ies in the input parameters.
NOTE: An MS Excel spreadsheet, Proj_Template, has been included as a reference for this assignment. You may use this
spreadsheet to enter input parameters and run economics for each Case. If you do so, be sure to save each case as a
separate file, because you will be referring back to it as you progress through the assignment.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 60 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Development Strategies
Permitting for Well Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a202)
Description:
Competency Statement: Prepare the required permission requests for drilling, workover/recompletion, st imulation,
abandonment and well servicing operations to satisfy the established legal requirements of governmental regulatory
organizations.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to follow proper procedures for obtaining
permission to conduct drilling, workover/recompletion, st imulations, abandonment proposals and well servicing operations, in
accordance the established legal requirements of the MEM, MARNR and other official organizat ions.
Assignment Instruction: The Ministry of Natural Resources is a department of the Nat ional Executive of the Republic of Sucre. Its
responsibilit ies include establishing norms and regulations for business operations in the hydrocarbon sector, in accordance with
laws established by the National Legislature.
As is t rue for similar regulatory agencies in other countries, the Ministry of Natural Resources oversees the permitt ing of oil and
gas operations, including those that pertain to well drilling, complet ion workover and abandonment.
The Ministry's permitt ing requirements are basically the same as those of the Ministry of Energy and Mines (MEM) in the
neighboring Republic of Venezuela, and the norms that it has established for oil and gas operations are identical to MEM
standards. For this reason, the quest ions that you are asked in this assignment use MEM standards as primary reference sources.
In this learning module assignment, you will apply the permitt ing requirements of the Ministry in the following areas:
Drilling of a new well
Workover and abandonment operations
Project management as it relates to improved recovery operations, well spacing crit ieria and gas ut ilizat ion
requirements.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 61 of 87
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: ReservoirDevelopment Strategies
Health, Safety and Environment (IHRDC_IPIMS_a203)
Description:
Competency Statement: Apply the laws, regulations and norms relating to personal, environmental and industrial safety as they
apply to oil and gas operat ions.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
apply the laws, regulations and norms in matters of personal, industrial and environmental safety, with the objective of
protecting the integrity of persons, installat ions, equipment and the environment.
identify instances in which safe practices are not being followed, and take steps to correct the situation
Assignment Instruction: The reservoir is currently in its development and early production stages. Drilling, construct ion and
production activit ies are fully underway. In each of these activit ies, it is imperative to maintain safe operations, protect the
health and well-being of personnel, and preserve the environment.
In this module assignment, you will be observing drilling rig operations with an eye toward your own personal safety and that of
others at the wellsite. You will review incident descript ions from various field locations and try to determine what went wrong in
each case and how the incident could have been prevented. And you will look at several issues related to fire protection at an
upstream production facility.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 62 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Development Strategies
Reservoir Management and Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_a204)
Description:
Competency Statement: Opt imize reservoir management and control decisions using surveillance techniques, information
systems, technical indicators and financial guidelines.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to do the following:
Manage available resources (e.g., reserves, assets, personnel, budget) in order to maximize hydrocarbon reserves and
minimize recovery cost .
Make appropriate reservoir management and control decisions with the aid of surveillance techniques, information
systems and technology applications to generate pressure and production histories, maps and other key reservoir data.
Assignment Instruction: The Upper/Middle Sands have been on production for about 11 months. Fifteen wells are currently
active, and the information that you have available includes both detailed and summary reports of pressure and production
behavior. In this assignment, you will use this informat ion to refine the reservoir descript ion, improve well performance and work
toward developing an optimal exploitation strategy.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 63 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Development Strategies
Improved Recovery (IHRDC_IPIMS_a205)
Description:
Competency Statement: Evaluate the improved recovery potential of the reservoir.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
Apply basic screening criteria and determine a reservoir’s suitability for various improved recovery processes, including
waterflooding and enhanced oil recovery.
Observe waterflood performance and perform basic recovery calculations, based on a frontal advance model and
analysis of fractional flow curves.
Determine the displacement efficiency of a pilot waterflood.
Assignment Instruction: Improved recovery, in the context of this assignment, refers to processes that supplement natural
reservoir drive mechanisms. These processes are generally grouped into two main categories:
secondary recovery, which includes waterflooding and immiscible gas injection
enhanced oil recovery (EOR), which includes miscible, chemical and thermal methods.
Although individual processes vary widely in type and applicability to part icular condit ions, they have one objective in
common: to improve the displacement efficiency of hydrocarbons from the reservoir.
In this assignment, you will review the performance of the Upper/Middle Sands under primary depletion and conduct a
preliminary waterflood screening, including a pilot flood to serve as a field t rial of the process. The reservoir has been on
production for just over one year. There are currently 15 active wells.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 64 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Management Practices
Implementation of Reservoir Development Strategies (IHRDC_IPIMS_a206)
Description:
Competency Statement: Develop a st rategic scenario and budget for implementing a reservoir development scheme and
producing actual reserves.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
Use reservoir studies to develop a resource base (drilling plans, future improved recovery, information acquisit ion,
applicat ion of new technologies, facilit ies and infrastructure).
Evaluate reservoir exploitation schemes through the use of corporate management indicators
Assignment Instruction: The Upper/Middle sands project is about to complete it s ninth year (fourth production year). You have
recently concluded a twenty-month pilot waterflood in the fault block occupied by Wells 4E2-SE and 4D2-SW. In this
assignment, you will evaluate the results of this pilot project in preparation for implementing a field-wide waterflood. You will
then address the practical aspects of implement ing the full-scale project, generate a development scenario based on the
data that you have gathered during the primary production stage, and formulate a project budget.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 65 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Management Practices
Reservoir Surveillance and Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_a208)
Description:
Competency Statement: Understand and apply reservoir surveillance and control techniques to confirm the materialization of
the proposed strategies in the reservoir exploitation scheme
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
compare actual reservoir behavior to various performance predict ion tools and account for differences
evaluate the effectiveness of the exploitation st rategy
explain reasons why actual reservoir performance deviated from init ial predictions
Assignment Instruction: The Upper/Middle Sands have been on production for more than 20 years, 15 of them under waterflood.
On the basis of daily average product ion, this reservoir has already passed its economic limit, with water cuts routinely
exceeding 90 percent. But thanks to the efforts of field personnel in applying good product ion practices and bringing
operating costs down to a minimum, the field is st ill making a small profit . It remains to be seen whether this field has addit ional
potent ial through a realignment of the waterflood or implementation of enhanced oil recovery methods.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 66 of 87
RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Management Practices
Contracts (IHRDC_IPIMS_a209)
Description:
Competency Statement: Analyze scenarios, make suitable contract models and study special projects in areas of the
exploitation macro process, assuring business profitability and respecting the prevailing laws and norms of contracts.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
analyze field projects and generate contract models
evaluate contracts in terms of project profitability
Assignment Instruction: As a reservoir manager, you are certain to spend much of your t ime dealing with companies that
provide products, materials or services ranging from downhole tools to simulation software to engineering expert ise. You may
also work with research inst itut ions, government agencies, other operating companies, and even with private individuals. All of
these working relationships are governed by legal agreements, or contracts.
A contract defines the rights that each party has in a business relat ionship, the obligations that each party has toward the
other, and the legal, fiscal and operat ing terms under which these rights and obligations are maintained. When properly
drafted and negotiated in good faith, a contract works to the mutual benefit and protection of both part ies. It is important,
therefore, that you understand and be able to apply key contract provisions.
In this Learning Module, you will focus on two types of contracts: a term sheet for a Turnkey Drilling Contract with Daywork
Provisions, patterned after the International Association of Drilling Contractors’ model (IADC--1998), and a Master Agreement
for Contract Services, patterned after models developed by the IADC and the International Association of Geophysical
Contractors (IAGC).
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 67 of 87
DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling and Well CompletionPractices
Initial Well Planning (IHRDC_IPIMS_a241)
Description:
Competency Statement: Define basic drilling and well completion requirements based on reservoir management objectives.
Ident ify crit ical logist ical issues and HSE considerations. Generate budget cost est imate.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
Review an init ial well proposal and identify key drilling and complet ion object ives.
Gather and evaluate offset data and other information pert inent to the well objectives.
Document and evaluate indicators of potential drilling hazards and/or HSE risks.
Ident ify appropriate methods for predicting pore pressures, fracture pressures, and subsurface temperatures, and plot
predicted pressures and temperatures versus depth.
Determine format ion fluids to be encountered and potential contaminants.
Out line crit ical issues relating to surface locat ion, including those related to logist ics, safety and environmental
protection.
Generate a budget-level est imate of dry-hole and total well costs.
Assignment Instruction: The Asset Management Team responsible for PETROS Corporation’s port ion of the Tremont onshore field
has recently completed an appraisal of the 6th Zone reservoir, and is now preparing a development program. The team has
given you a proposed bottomhole location for the first development well, Adams 8. The target location is in Block D-4,
approximately 0.5 km [1640 ft] from the property boundary between PETROS Corporation and Apex Oil & Gas Company. The
discovery well for the 6th Zone anticline was Apex's Copley 1. Four addit ional wells (Copley 3, Adams 4, Adams 6 and Adams 7)
have either tested or are currently producing commercial quantit ies of oil; Three others (Copley 2, Stuart 1 and Adams 5) were
drilled outside of the structure boundaries and subsequently abandoned. Your tasks in this assignment are to establish the
drilling objectives for this well in keeping with the overall reservoir management strategy, and to ident ify some of the key issues
to be addressed in the well planning process.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 68 of 87
DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling and Well CompletionPractices
Well Design (IHRDC_IPIMS_a242)
Description:
Competency Statement: Define basic well design parameters, including well profile, casing points and casing/hole diameters.
Design casing strings and outline cementing requirements. Select surface equipment components. Generate preliminary cost
est imates for inclusion in AFE.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
Select a surface locat ion for a new well and establish an optimal target radius
Pick casing points and specify casing and hole diameters for each drilled sect ion
Establish a well t rajectory in keeping with overall drilling object ives
Select casing weights, grades and connect ions based on consideration of maximum load condit ions
Determine general requirements for primary cementing operations.
Specify wellhead equipment components and their working pressure rat ings.
Assignment Instruction: An init ial review of the Adams 8 well proposal served to clarify the drilling objectives, identify crit ical well
planning issues and provide some knowledge of the surface and subsurface environments. It is now t ime to start the designing
the well. The start ing point will be to finalize the surface and bottomhole locations so that you can establish a well profile. At
the same t ime, you will pick your casing points, decide on the casing and hole diameters for each interval and recommend the
working pressure ratings for the wellhead components. You will then specify the weights, grades and connections to be used
for each casing string, and outline the primary cementing requirements for the surface casing. Finally, you will provide a cost
est imate to be used in preparing the AFE for this well.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 69 of 87
DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling and Well CompletionPractices
Drilling Program Planning and Implementation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a243)
Description:
Competency Statement: Design mud program for each hole section. Establish well control precautions and procedures. Design
drill string and bottomhole assembly. Plan bit and hydraulics programs. Evaluate rig specificat ions and capabilit ies.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to:
Out line mud system specifications for individual hole sect ions based on well condit ions and drilling objectives.
Establish basic well control requirements.
Specify circulating system requirements and evaluate hydraulics practices based on offset well performance.
Review offset bit performance as a basis for developing bit selection criteria for a new well.
Provide general recommendations for the drill string configuration and design of the bottomhole assembly.
Review rig specifications and capabilit ies in the context of drilling program requirements.
Assignment Instruction: In this assignment, you will address various aspects of planning and carrying out the drilling program for
Adams 8, a new development well in the Tremont field. Your work will include designing the mud and hydraulics programs,
reviewing basic well control precautions, establishing guidelines for bit selection, and designing the drill string. Although you will
not be directly involved in reviewing bids and selecting the drilling contractor, you will be providing input regarding power
requirements, hoist ing capabilit ies and circulating system capacit ies that will be valuable in the rig selection process. Your goal
in this assignment is to develop a program that ensures safe well operations, minimizes drilling cost and meets the design
requirements of the well.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 70 of 87
DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling and Well CompletionPractices
Drilling Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a244)
Description:
Competency Statement: Monitor drilling parameters and well progress. Take steps to opt imize bit runs, mud system performance
and directional control. Ensure HSE compliance. Ant icipate drilling problems and work to minimize their impact.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to:
Optimize drilling performance through careful monitoring and analysis of well parameters.
Select bottomhole assembly configurations for various hole intervals and operating condit ions.
Oversee routine cementing operations in shallow hole intervals.
Diagnose a stuck pipe incident and out line fishing procedures.
Monitor drilling parameters for indications of abnormal pore pressure and take the approriate init ial actions in response
to a potent ial kick situation.
Assignment Instruction: The drilling crew is ready to spud Adams 8, and you are in charge of day-to-day operations. To begin this
assignment, you will approve the bottomhole assembly configuration for the surface hole interval and supervise the running
and cementing of a 13 3/8 inch [339.7 mm] casing string. Next, you will monitor the progress of the intermediate hole section
and take steps to opt imize drilling performance. Finally, you will begin drilling below the intermediate casing, paying part icular
attention to detecting a pressure transit ion zone that has already been ident ified at other 6th Zone wells. By way of caution,
note that drilling operat ions do not always proceed smoothly. Although this assignment is fairly straightforward, be prepared to
address problems that may occur.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 71 of 87
DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling and Well CompletionPractices
Well Completion Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a245)
Description:
Competency Statement: Prepare well for format ion evaluation. Ensure that logging and test ing operations proceed smoothly.
Run and cement production casing. Evaluate primary cement job and need for remedial cementing operations. Prepare well
for final completion.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to:
Prepare the well for open-hole logging operations and take steps to ensure that such operations proceed smoothly.
Alert the wellsite geologist and service company logging engineer of hole condit ions that may require modifications or
special precautions in the logging program.
Assist in planning and carrying out a drill stem test .
Determine safe operating parameters for running a production casing string.
Plan and carry out a simple single-stage primary cementing operat ion.
Use temperature surveys to determine the top of cement in the casing/hole annulus.
Out line the steps involved in preparing the well for final completion and releasing the drilling rig.
Assignment Instruction: As you approach target depth at Adams 8, your concern now shifts from opt imizing the drilling process
to preparing the well for logging, test ing and completion operat ions. Although you are not directly involved in planning the
formation evaluation program, you are responsible for monitoring hole condit ions, gett ing tools safely to bottom and in general
ensuring that operations proceed according to plan. Once these operations are completed, you will focus on the crucial task
of running and cementing the 7-inch [178 mm] production casing. At the conclusion of this assignment, the well should be
ready for a workover rig to perforate the production casing, run tubing and turn the well over to the Production Department.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 72 of 87
DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling, Workover and WellServicing
Well Planning (IHRDC_IPIMS_a41)
Description:
Competency Statement: Identify, monitor and evaluate drilling, workover, st imulation and well servicing proposals and act ivit ies
in the context of optimizing the overall reservoir exploitation scheme.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
contribute to the well planning process by understanding the reservoir engineering aspects of the proposed work and
having a knowledge of drilling, workover and well servicing fundamentals
work with the geologist and the drilling engineer to select well locations, target depths and casing points
Assignment Instruction: Long-term exploitation strategies for this reservoir are currently being considered for the Upper/ Middle
Sand reservoir. Management has appropriated funds for continued drilling, and has already approved a new well proposal for
Block 5A1-SW. In this assignment, you will recommend the target depth and radius for well 5A1-SW. You will determine what
mud weights to use during drilling, specify casing points, and decide on formation evaluation requirements. This reservoir has
been on product ion for just over two years. A total of six wells have been drilled, one of which was abandoned. Production is
currently averaging about 2000 barrels of oil per day under solut ion gas drive at well over its bubble point pressure. These wells,
although init ially designated as "Upper Sand" producers, expose both the Upper and Middle sand reservoirs.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 73 of 87
DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling, Workover and WellServicing
Well Completion Design (IHRDC_IPIMS_a42)
Description:
Competency Statement: Select the appropriate tubing and accessories for completing wells in keeping with the product ion
method required for the reservoir, and to facilitate future workover, servicing and st imulation work.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
select the proper sizes and grades of tubulars to maintain the integrity of the wellbore and handle anticipated
production
select the downhole casing and tubing accessories needed to optimize production and future well work
Assignment Instruction: Well 5A1-SW is currently in the planning stage. The well specifications established so far include target
depth and radius, well profile, mud weight requirements, approximate casing points and formation evaluation needs.
In this assignment, you will work on the well's completion design. You will select the completion type and tubing configuration,
specify the casing and tubing diameters to be used, and design the surface and product ion casing strings.
The success of your design will depend on how well it handles the anticipated product ion, compatibility of the various hole,
casing and tubing sizes, adequacy of the casing design loads, and cost.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 74 of 87
DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling, Workover and WellServicing
Drilling and Workover Fluids (IHRDC_IPIMS_a43)
Description:
Competency Statement: Select the appropriate drilling/workover fluid for meet ing well objectives and, minimizing formation
damage with no impact on the environment.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
evaluate the features, benefit s and limitations of various mud systems and addit ives, and select the one most
appropriate for a given well
specify controls on fluid propert ies in order to optimize drilling and workover operations
Assignment Instruction: Drilling and completion fluids are essential to safe and successful well operations. In this assignment, you
will select the appropriate fluids for drilling and completing Well 5A1-SW, monitor their propert ies, and recommend changes as
needed. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to evaluate the features, benefits and limitat ions of various
mud systems and addit ives, and specify controls on fluid propert ies for optimizing drilling and workover operations.
The AFE for drilling Well 5A1-SW has been approved, and operations are gett ing underway. Once drilling begins, your job will be
to closely monitor the propert ies of the mud system you have selected, and to make changes in the mud system as operating
condit ions may require.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 75 of 87
DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling, Workover and WellServicing
Drilling and Workover Hydraulics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a44)
Description:
Competency Statement: Maximize penetration rates, minimize format ion damage and ensure hole stability through the proper
applicat ion of drilling hydraulics principles.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
determine the pressure losses that occur in the rig circulating system
use basic calculation methods to determine optimal bit nozzle size, annular velocity and other rig hydraulics parameters
diagnose drilling problems result ing from poor hydraulics practices
Assignment Instruction: The objective of a drilling hydraulics program is to maximize bit life and penetration rate by efficiently
removing drilled cutt ings and by cleaning, cooling and lubricating the bit and drill string. The key to a sucessful hydraulic
program is to deliver an optimal amount of energy to the bit.
The easiest way to control and optimize drilling hydraulics is to select the appropriate bit nozzle diameters for delivering the
maximum amount of hydraulic energy to the bottom of the hole.
In assignment, you will learn to use drilling hydraulics principles to maximize penetration rates, ensure hole stability, optimize hole
cleaning characterist ics and minimize format ion damage.
By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to determine pressure losses in the rig circulating system and select
the appropriate bit nozzle diameters for optimizing hydraulic energy.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 76 of 87
DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling, Workover and WellServicing
Cementing (IHRDC_IPIMS_a45)
Description:
Competency Statement: Determine the most appropriate procedures, equipment, tools and cementing materials for assuring a
high-quality cement job.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
determine the volume, displacement and density requirements for cementing a casing st ring
select the cement addit ives appropriate to a given job
specify the casing accessories to be use on a primary cement job
outline the steps involved in cementing a string of casing
evaluate the results of a primary or squeeze cement ing operation
calculate the volumes and displacements required to set a cement plug
Assignment Instruction: In this assignment, you will determine the appropriate procedures, materials and equipment for assuring
a high-quality cement job on Well 5A1-SW. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to determine cement
volume, density and displacement requirements, select cement addit ives, specify casing accessories, outline cementing
procedures, evaluate job results, and make basic cement plug calculations.
Well 5A1-SW has been drilled to T.D., and the openhole formation evaluation program has been completed. It is now t ime to
run and cement the production string. The purpose of this primary cement job, in which cement slurry is pumped down through
the casing and up the casing-hole annulus, is to form a seal between the casing and formation, and to support the weight of
the casing string.
In this module, you will determine how much cement you need for the production casing, what materials and addit ives you
should use, what casing accessories and equipment you need, and what procedures you should follow. You will then evaluate
the success of the primary cement job and, if necessary, recommend remedial work.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 77 of 87
DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling, Workover and WellServicing
Directional, Horizontal and Multilateral Wells (IHRDC_IPIMS_a46)
Description:
Competency Statement: Contribute to the planning and design of non-conventional well completions.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
identify reservoirs that are suitable candidates for horizontal or mult ilateral wells
apply knowledge of the reservoir to a selection of the well t rajectory
select the best general completion design for a horizontal or mult ilateral well in a given reservoir
Assignment Instruction: Without directional drilling much of the world's oil and gas would be unrecoverable. Horizontal and
mult ilateral wells, which are special applications of directional drilling technology, are a proven means of improving
productivity and reducing overall development costs in certain types of reservoirs.
In this assignment, you will define basic direct ional drilling parameters and establish the trajectory for a possible re-drill of an
exist ing well. You will look at the feasibility of horizontal and mult ilateral wells from a reservoir management perspective, and
consider some of the issues involved in planning and designing these wells. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be
able to calculate a simple well t rajectory, identify candidate reservoirs for horizontal wells and select the best general
completion design for a given reservoir.
Well 5C1-SW was the second well drilled in the Upper/Middle sands. Detailed log analysis and an open hole formation test
indicated that the top of the Upper Sand at 14800 ft [4511 m] was below the oil-water contact. The well was subsequently
plugged back with cement to the surface casing and suspended
Several members of the reservoir management team have suggested re-drilling this well upstructure to Block 5B1-NE. The drilling
department will evaluate the feasibility and costs of re-drilling from below the surface casing. Your job will be to establish some
of the basic directional parameters and calculating a trajectory for this well, which will be designated 5C1-SW R/D.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 78 of 87
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: ProductionFundamentals
Production Methods (IHRDC_IPIMS_a81)
Description:
Competency Statement: Apply basic production engineering principles to optimizing the reservoir exploitation scheme.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
select the opt imal complet ion design and the proper surface and subsurface equipment for producing a flowing oil well
efficiently and economically
optimize flowing well performance based on knowledge of inflow performance, vert ical lift performance and surface
choke performance
determine when art ificial lift will be necessary in order to maintain oil production at desired levels, and select the most
appropriate lift method for a given well
specify design and equipment requirements for placing a well on art ificial lift
Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will specify the completion design for Well 5A1-SW and evaluate its
performance potential. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to opt imize flowing well performance using
nodal analysis principles, determine when art ificial lift will be necessary in order to maintain oil production, and select the best
lift method for a given set of operating condit ions.
Well 5A1-SW has been recently drilled to the Upper/Middle sands. It is to be completed by selectively perforating the 7-inch
casing, which has been cemented at a depth of 14400 ft. In this module assignment, you will review actual and est imated field
data, select the general well configuration, and specify requirements for subsurface producing equipment. You will define the
well's inflow performance relationship (IPR), determine its vert ical lift performance for various producing rates, and establish
surface flow parameters. You will then combine these analyses to define and predict the flowing well's performance. You will
also review various art ificial lift methods to determine how this well will be produced once it can no longer flow.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 79 of 87
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: ProductionFundamentals
Production Optimization (IHRDC_IPIMS_a82)
Description:
Competency Statement: Opt imize the perfomance of individual producing wells.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
analyze well behavior, using nodal analysis and interpreting historical production trends
diagnose equipment problems and/or detect production deviations
identify production problems relating to pressure decline, water, gas or sand production, low productivity, formation
damage or equipment failure
recommend actions required for optimizing production, identify candidate wells for well servicing, st imulation and/or
sand control and indicate the best method to use
Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will review the actual performance of Well 5A1-SW, as well as that of several
other wells in offsett ing fields, in an effort to optimize their production rates. By the t ime you complete this module, you should
be able to analyze well behavior using nodal analysis and historical production trends, diagnose equipment problems and/or
detect production deviations, and recommend the appropriate action for optimizing production.
Well 5A1-SW has been completed in the Upper/Middle sands, and a production and buildup tests have been completed. You
now need to see if the well's actual performance matches what was predicted before its completion. You will be looking for
ways to optimize this well's product ion under both current and future reservoir condit ions. You will also look at other wells,
including two that are currently producing using electric submersible pumps and one that is planned as a rod pump
completion, and make recommendat ions regarding their performance.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 80 of 87
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: ProductionFundamentals
Production Facilities (IHRDC_IPIMS_a83)
Description:
Competency Statement: Determine surface facility requirements for handling the gas and liquid production volumes established
for the reservoir.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
determine fluid handling and transport requirements for surface facilit ies and equipment
identify the surface facility components needed to handle the field's production, specifying their capacit ies and
pressure ratings
generate a general surface facilit ies layout showing the path of the produced fluids from the wellhead to the
transportation point (pipeline or loading rack)
Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will make preliminary recommendations regarding the surface production
facility design for the Sucre field. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to determine basic requirements for
handling produced oil, water and gas, and develop a general surface facility layout showing the path of the produced fluids
from the wellhead to the sales point.
A production forecast has been generated for the Upper/Middle sands based on extended production tests and currently
available rock and fluid data. You will decide how to use this forecast in sizing the surface facilit ies, and you will determine what
types of fluid handling, separation and treating equipment will be needed. You will also specify the path that the produced
fluids will follow through the production facility. Although your work will be of a very preliminary and general nature, it will be
instrumental in future cost analyses, budget planning, and, ult imately, selection of an optimal reservoir development scenario.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 81 of 87
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: ProductionFundamentals
Well Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_a84)
Description:
Competency Statement: Design and execute a well test.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
select candidate wells for test ing and specify test objectives
design a pressure transient test and select equipment in keeping with the stated objectives
monitor the test and interpret the results
Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will establish basic objectives and procedures for test ing new wells in the
Upper/Middle sands of the Sucre field. You will also review tests that were run in other reservoirs, and use the results of a drill
stem test (DST) to determine well deliverability parameters. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able plan,
execute, monitor and interpret a simple pressure transient test.
Formation evaluat ion of the Upper/Middle sands--including successful product ion tests of Wells 4E1-NE and 5A1-SW--has
established this reservoir's commercial hydrocarbon potential. The reservoir management team has generated est imates of oil
in place and recovery factors; it has even predicted a production schedule and outlined basic surface facility specifications.
These est imates are, however, very preliminary, and based on assumptions which may or may not prove valid over t ime. There is
st ill a good deal of appraisal and planning to be done before the reservoir moves into the development stage of its life.
Your assignment in this Learning Module is to assist in the reservoir appraisal by developing general guidelines for a well test ing
program, based on your understanding of formation evaluation objectives and test procedures. You will also be looking at DST
results from wells in other fields so that you may become familiar with basic methods of test monitoring and interpretat ion. In
later assignments, you will become more involved in the analysis of pressure transient tests, part icularly with respect to modern
interpretation methods.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 82 of 87
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: Production andOperating Practices
Flowing Well Performance and Production System Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_a281)
Description:
Competency Statement: Establish Inflow Performance Relat ionship (IPR) and determine flowing well potential. Use systems
analysis approach to predict and optimize product ion.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
Use production data to define a well's IPR and flow potential under current operating condit ions.
Predict changes in well potential result ing from declining reservoir pressures.
Evaluate the effects of various operat ing parameters on flowing well performance.
Design a single-well product ion system based on analysis of individual system components.
Select the appropriate tubing and flowline diameters for optimizing well performance.
Predict future production rates based on changing operating condit ions.
Assignment Instruction: Well TR-34 is a recently completed development well in the Main Body sands of the Firestone Field. You
have just completed an extended production test of this flowing well in preparation for tying it into the field's main production
facilit ies. In this assignment, you will t reat this well as a single product ion system extending from the reservoir to the first-stage
production separator. You will analyze the test results to determine the well's potential and the effect of various operating
parameters on its performance. You will then use your analysis to establish an optimal production rate and size the tubing and
surface flowline.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 83 of 87
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: Production andOperating Practices
Artificial Lift Methods (IHRDC_IPIMS_a282)
Description:
Competency Statement: Determine need for art ificial lift . Evaluate and design system.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
Dist inguish among the common methods of art ificial lift and understand their advantages and limitat ions.
Select the most appropriate art ificial lift method for a given set of well and economic condit ions.
Perform basic surface and subsurface design calculations for gas lift and pump-assisted systems.
Monitor art ificial lift performance .
Assignment Instruction: Art ificial lift is a means of reducing the backpressure on a well so that it can be produced at some
desired rate. This may be accomplished by reducing the density of the wellbore fluid column, as is done in gas lift , or by using a
pump to physically displace the fluids to the surface. In this Assignment, you will consider both types of art ificial lift as you
evaluate three scenarios: (1) a flowing well that has experienced a significant decline in production rate as reservoir pressure
has decreased, (2) a well that is to be incorporated into an exist ing gas lift system, and (3) the installat ion of an Electrical
Submersible Pump (ESP) at a water source well. Although these scenarios do not cover all of the art ificial lift systems and
combinations of methods that are currently available, they will give you a good idea of the issues that you must consider in
designing such a system.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 84 of 87
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: Production andOperating Practices
Well Stimulation and Sand Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_a283)
Description:
Competency Statement: Diagnose production problems related to formation damage and recommend appropriate solut ions.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
Diagnose various types of formation damage and identify st imulation candidates.
Design a matrix acid st imulation t reatment based on specific well condit ions and reservoir characterist ics.
Specify the materials, equipment and pumping schedule for a hydraulic fracturing procedure.
Apply tradit ional and modern sand control methods to optimize well productivity
Assignment Instruction: Well st imulation treatments, which are designed to restore or enhance well productivity, are of two
basic types. Mat rix t reatments are performed at pressures that are below the formation fracture pressure; they are primarily
designed to remove near-wellbore damage. Fract ure t reatments, on the other hand, are performed at pressures above the
formation fracture pressure; they are designed to open up highly conduct ive flow paths between the reservoir and the
wellbore, thereby bypassing near-wellbore damage and changing the flow patterns around the well.
Sand cont rol technolgy is built around preventing loose sand and other unconsolidated formation solids from plugging the
formation or entering the wellbore. As you will see in this assignment, st imulation and sand control technologies are in some
ways closely related, and under certain circumstances, may even overlap.
In this assignment, you will carry out preliminary design work both for a matrix acid st imulation and a hydraulic fracture
treatment, and will also select the appropriate sand control measures for a flowing production well. In each case, you will
evaluate the nature and extent of the near-wellbore damage that has made st imulat ion and/or sand control necessary.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 85 of 87
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: Production andOperating Practices
Workover Planning and Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a284)
Description:
Competency Statement: Identify workover candidates and out line procedures for accomplishing well object ives.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to
Evaluate well performance and identify workover or abandonment candidates.
Plan safe workovers using the tools and methods appropriate to individual wells.
Apply procedures and standards in accordance with recognized safe practices and regulatory requirements.
Assignment Instruction: A review of the producing wells in the Adams port ion of the Tremont Field has indicated that several
wells need attention and may be workover candidates. In this assignment, you will evaluate condit ions at these wells, take
steps to troubleshoot these condit ions, and recommend remedial action. You will also be gett ing ready to perforate the
production casing in Adams 8, a newly drilled Sixth Zone producer.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 86 of 87
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: Production andOperating Practices
Surface Production Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a285)
Description:
Competency Statement: Generate production facilit ies requirements. Promote safe practices in production operat ions.
Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to:
Review surface flowing well condit ions with the goal of optimizing production.
Describe the basic layout of an upstream producing facility and the funct ions of its major components.
Out line the general requirements for separating and treat ing produced oil as a basis for a detailed facility design.
Plan and oversee routine field maintenance work, and maintain a safe operation through proper application of good
work pract ices and the careful control of site act ivit ies.
Assignment Instruction: The Sucre field's exist ing upstream surface facilit ies are designed for primary recovery, but that is about
to change as preparations begin for a full-scale water injection project in The Upper/Middle Sands. As part of these
preparations, you will address some of the general issues involved in modifying these facilit ies. You will also be involved in
ongoing field operations; specifically, you will be responsible for safely completing repair and maintenance work on one of the
field's main production separators.
Duration:
8:00:00 hrs
Module 87 of 87
Petroleum OnlineCourse Catalog
All Sectors
Oil and Gas Industry Overview (IHRDC_PO_I1)
Description:
A comprehensive overview of the industry; learn what petroleum is, where it comes from and how it affects all of our lives on a
daily basis. Become familiar with the various phases of the Oil and Gas Value Chain – upstream, midst ream and downstream –
the key industry players, the basics of oil and gas supply, demand and pricing and the challenges that the industry faces as
demand for these important form of energy grows by 50% in the next 25 years.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Outline:
Overview
Crude Oil and Natural Gas: From Source to Final Products
Chemistry of Hydrocarbons
Origins of Crude Oil and Natural Gas
Petroleum Migration and Accumulation
Petroleum Reservoirs
Separation and Treatment of Produced Oil and Gas
Gas Handling and Processing
Crude Oil Refining
Petrochemicals
Measurement Units and Conversion Factors
Crude Oil Measurement
Oil Quality: API Gravity
Natural Gas Measurement
Gas Liquids and Petroleum Product Measurement
Energy Content and Equivalency
Thermal Energy Equivalency:
Hydrocarbon Price Equivalency:
Conversion Table and Electronic Calculator
Oil and Gas Value Chain
Upstream Sector
Negotiation of Upstream Agreements
Exploration
Field Development
Long-term Production
Wholesale Hydrocarbon Markets
Midstream Sector
Crude Transportation
Refining of Crude Oil
Midstream Natural Gas Value Chain
Gas Processing
Natural Gas Pipeline Transportation and Storage
Downstream Sector
Downstream Natural Gas Value Chain
Main Global Players in the International Petroleum Industry
OPEC
Vert ically Integrated Global Companies
World Primary Energy Markets and the Role of Hydrocarbons
Energy Supply and Demand Fundamentals
Energy Demand
Energy Supply
Crude Oil Supply, Demand and Cross-border Trade
Natural Gas Reserves
Natural Gas Supply, Demand and Cross-border Trade
Natural Gas Prices
Emerging Commodity Price
Final Thoughts
Important Oil and Gas Statistical References
Websites of Importance
Acknowledgments
Module 1 of 14
Upstream Sector
Upstream Oil and Gas Agreements (IHRDC_PO_I2)
Description:
A comprehensive overview of the industry; learn what petroleum is, where it comes from and how it affects all of our lives on a
daily basis. Become familiar with the various phases of the Oil and Gas Value Chain – upstream, midst ream and downstream –
the key industry players, the basics of oil and gas supply, demand and pricing and the challenges that the industry faces as
demand for these important form of energy grows by 50% in the next 25 years.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Outline:
Overview
Historical Perspective
Methods for Obtaining a Host Government Agreement
Four Types of Exploration Agreements
The Concession Agreement
US Offshore License Agreement
West Africa Concession Agreement
Addit ional Oil Ent it lement
Part icipation of National Oil Company: Working Interest Options
Training Commitment and Other Forms of Sustainable Development
The Production Sharing Contract
Fiscal Terms
Risk Service Agreements
Natural Gas Discoveries: Post-Discovery Negotiations
Joint Operating Agreements
Nicola Case Study
Agreement Stages
Costs During Exploration
Work Program and Relinquishment of Blocks
Field Production and Development Costs
Concession Agreement
Sandland Business Game
Summary
Glossary of Terms
Model Form for International Joint Operating Agreement
Module 2 of 14
Upstream Sector
Petroleum Geology and The Exploration Process (IHRDC_PO_I3)
Description:
Upstream agreements define the legal, business and working relationships that exist between companies that explore for and
produce oil and gas and the government agencies or private part ies that own the mineral rights. Learn how an oil and gas
lease is negotiated with a landowner in the U.S. and then analyze the two major forms of agreements used by host countries –
the Concession Agreement and the Production Sharing Contract.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Outline:
Overview
Fundamentals of Petroleum Geology
Building of Sedimentary Basins
Sedimentary Environments
Sedimentary Rock Propert ies: Porosity and Permeability
Formation of Crude Oil and Natural Gas
Petroleum Migration and Accumulation
Petroleum Reservoirs and Reservoir Traps
Reservoir Seals
Summary
The Exploration Process
Broad Surveying Techniques
Exist ing Well Data
Geophysical Surveying and the Seismic Reflection Method
Conducting a 2D Seismic Survey
Seismic Survey of the Pam Basin
3D and 4D Seismic Surveys
Economics of the Pam Basin Prospect
Summary
References
Module 3 of 14
Upstream Sector
Drilling and Well Completions (IHRDC_PO_I4)
Description:
Examine the geological condit ions that make for a good petroleum prospect, and learn why oil and gas are found in some
places and not others. Also learn the step-by-step process that exploration teams follow to identify projects, from the init ial
surface reconnaissance to the drilling of exploratory wells.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Outline:
Overview
Drilling Objectives
Surface and Subsurface Environments
Rig Counts
Drilling Technology
Phases of Well Construction
Well Planning
Init ial Steps
Authorization for Expenditure (AFE)
Environmental and Regulatory Considerations
Support and Logist ics
Drilling Rig Procurement
Drilling Contracts
Well Design
Subsurface Pressure and Temperature
Hole Sect ions
Well Trajectory
Deviation Control
Directional Drilling
Horizontal Drilling
Geosteering
Mult ilateral Wells
Drilling Operations
Rig Systems and Equipment
Hoist ing and Rotating Systems
Circulating System
Well Control System
Power Generation and Transmission System
Types of Drilling Rigs
Onshore (Land) Rigs
Offshore Rigs
Subsurface Drilling Equipment
Drill String Components
Drill Bit s
Drilling Procedures
Drilling Problems
Remote Monitoring and Operations Support
Formation Evaluation and Testing
Well Completion
Completion Design
Well St imulation
Production Tubing
Wellhead and Surface Flow Control Equipment
Summary
References
Additional Resources
Acknowledgments
Module 4 of 14
Upstream Sector
Field Development and Production (IHRDC_PO_I5)
Description:
The development and production of an oil or gas field is among the most involved and challenging business undertakings.
Learn the steps involved in field development, from its init ial planning stages, through reservoir analysis, subsurface design and
const ruction of surface facilit ies. This module also covers components of long-term production, reservoir management and
facilit ies maintenance.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Outline:
Overview
Reservoir Management Objectives
Hydrocarbons in Place
Recovery Factor
Oil and Gas Reserves
Primary Recovery
Improved Recovery
Production Schedule
Optimal Design Rate
Reservoir Description and Characterization
Reservoir Parameters
Geology and St ructure
Rock and Fluid Propert ies
Pressure and Temperature
Data Acquisit ion, Interpretation and Analysis
Geological and Seismic Interpretations
Well Logs and Core Data
Well Tests
Production Data
Integrated Reservoir Characterization
Reservoir Mapping and Reserves Evaluation
Subsurface Maps and What They Tell Us
Reserves Definitons and Classificat ions
Reserves Evaluation Methods
Uncertaint ies in Reserves Evaluation
Monte Carlo Analysis / Probablist ic Representat ion of Reserves
Reservoir Modeling
Object ives
Elements of a Simulation Study
Subsurface Development Plan
Reservoir Performance
Natural Drive Mechanisms
Improved Recovery Processes
Well Product ivity
Production System Overview
Flowing Well Performance
Art ificial Lift
Completion and Production Planning
Est imating Field Performance
Field Development Studies
Surface Development Plan
Surface Facilit ies
General Considerations
Onshore Facilit ies
Offshore Facilit ies
Economic Evaluation and Field Management
Cash Flow Analysis
Field Management Example
Cost Est imating and Scheduling
Field Management Example
Operating Cost and Financial Assumptions
Field Management Example
Health, Safety and Environmental Considerations
Health and Safety
Hazards in Field Operations
Safety in Day-to-Day Operations
Emergency Preparedness
Environment
Issues in Field Development and Product ion
Regulatory Considerat ions
Summary
References
Appendix
Module 5 of 14
Upstream Sector
Field Development and Production (IHRDC_PO_I5)
Upstream Sector
Upstream Gas: From Exploration to Wholesale Markets (IHRDC_PO_I13)
Description:
Devoted to the upstream gas value chain, this module begins with an overview of the significant gas propert ies and shows
how a gas prospect is discovered and then developed into a viable producing entity. Important topics include the est imat ion
of resources and reserves, field design process and surface facilit ies required to satisfy gas market specifications. It ends with a
summary of the nature of the wholesale gas and gas liquids markets in various countries and typical wholesale agreements.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Outline:
Overview
Basic Gas and Gas Liquid Properties and Terminology
Gas and gas liquids composit ion and propert ies
Definit ion of industry terms: LNG, LPG, NGL’s, CNG
Gas Industry Value Chain with Emphasis on the Upstream Sector
Upstream Petroleum Project Management Stages and Workflow
Background on two gas exploration prospects
Location
Landowner or Host Country Exploration Agreements
Technical Support for the Prospect
Potential Gas Markets
Demand, Timing, Sale Point, Prices and Contract Terms
Project Planning and Economics
Exploration and Field Development Plan and Schedule
Reserves, Production, Rates, CAPEX, OPEX, IRR
Permits and Authorizations Required. HSE Issues
Risk Analysis:Exploration, Development, Production, Market, Government
Partner Issues
Exploration of gas prospects
Gas Exploration Basics
Exploration Plan: Costs and Schedule
Exploration well plan, evaluation and expected costs
Results of Explorat ion
Review of Reserves
Wholesale Gas Markets and Project Market Options
Project Economics
Authorization to Move to Next Stage
Planning Gas Field Development
Review of Alternative Subsurface Development Plans
Optimization of Subsurface Development Plan
Preparing Surface Facilit ies Plan
Environmental and Social Impact Report
Sources of Project Capital: Debt and Equity
Project Partner Agreements
Finalizing Gas Sales Contract
Obtaining Government and Other Permits
Project Management Plans
Authorization to Move to Development
Development of New Discoveries
Implementing the Development Plan
Project Management Issues: Scope, Schedule, Cost, Quality, Communications, Risks and Procurement
Engineering, Procurement and Construct ion Agreement
Final Costs and Timing
Managing the Production Cycle
Managing the Field Production Life Cycle
Operations and Maintenance of Facilit ies
Monitoring Well and Reservoir Performance
Adding Wells and Compression
Reservoir Management
Managing Sales and Customer Relations
Financial and Partner Report ing
Summary of the Outcome of the Two Prospects
Summary of Case Studies and Drivers of Upstream Gas Success
References
Module 6 of 14
Upstream Sector
Upstream Gas: From Exploration to Wholesale Markets (IHRDC_PO_I13)
Midstream Sector
Marketing and Trading of Crude Oil (IHRDC_PO_I6)
Description:
Geological studies and seismic surveys can indicate an oil or gas prospect, but the only way to know if that prospect contains
oil or gas is to drill wells. Get an introduction to the basics of the rotary drilling process and learn the dramatic advances in
drilling technology that have taken place in recent years.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Outline:
Overview
Changing Nature of the Crude Oil Market
Control of the Market by the "Majors"
Shared Control
The Opec Transit ion
Price Shock of 1973
World Recession
Nationalization, Market Transformation and New Discoveries
Price Shock of 1979
Falling Demand
Market-Related Crude Pricing
Advent of Spot Markets
Crude Oil Pricing Today
Marker Crudes
Crude Oil Assay
Price Report ing
Pricing of Other Crudes
Use of the Futures Markets for Price Formation
The Role of OPEC in Price Formation
Fundamentals of a Physical Crude Oil Contract
Seller / Buyer Relationship
Tit le Transfer Arrangements / Point of Sale
Other Contract Terms
Typical Price Sett ing
Negotiation of Physical Contracts
Stages in the Negotiation of a Crude Contract
Contract Examples
Colombia Crude Sale to Unspecified End User
Sale of Crude to a Refiner in the Caribbean
Nigerian Crude Sale to Trader
Fundamentals of Financial Derivatives
Forward and Future Contracts
Crude Contracts Offered by Financial Exchanges
How a Futures Contract Works
General Features of the Oil Futures Market
Use of Derivatives in Price Risk Management
Hedges: Buy or Sell Crude Oil
SWAPS: Convert Variable Price to a Fixed Price
Options: Sett ing a Floor or Ceiling Price
Typical Players In The Petroleum Derivatives Markets
Trading of Crude Oil: Using Both Physical and Financial Contracts
Summary
References
Exhibits
Module 7 of 14
Midstream Sector
Crude Oil Transportation and Storage (IHRDC_PO_I7)
Description:
Like other commodit ies, the market determines the value of crude oil. Examine how crude oil markets and pricing are
established based on global and regional supply and demand, how organizations such as OPEC affect these markets on a
wholesale level.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Outline:
Overview
Crude Oil Pipelines
System Components
Examples of International Pipelines
Phases of Pipeline Development
Pipeline Operat ions
Pipeline Tariffs
Batching
Pipeline Maintenance
“Pigging”
Pipeline Inspection
Corrosion Prevention
Pipeline Safety
Crude Oil Storage
Temporary Storage of Crude Oil
Strategic Storage of Crude Oil
Nicola Case study: Pipeline and Storage Decisions
Oil Tankers
Tanker Sizes
Tanker Classifications
Trade Routes
Chokepoints
Demand and Supply
Development of the World Tanker Trade
Ownership and Hiring of Tankers
Tanker Rates
Worldscale Calculation
Tanker Safety
Nicola case study: Shipping Decision
Other Forms of Crude Oil Transportation
References
Acknowledgments
Module 8 of 14
Midstream Sector
Midstream Gas: Gas Processing, Transportation and Load Balancing
(IHRDC_PO_I14)
Description:
The module covers the midst ream gas value chain; essentially, the t ransportation of gas in pipelines and LNG ships and the
balancing of market swings through the use of gas storage facilit ies. The pipeline section focuses on design, operations and
tariffs, the LNG sect ion centers around the design and economics of the LNG value chain from liquefaction to receiving
terminals and the load balancing section summarizes the various options available to manage the pipeline swings between
gas supply and market demand and their typical costs.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Outline:
Overview
Gas Processing
Gas Processing Terminology
Propert ies of Natural Gas & Natural Gas Liquids
Surface Facilit ies
Key Products of Natural Gas Processing
Ethane
Propane
Iso-Butane
Normal Butane
Natural Gasoline
Gas Processing Opt ions
Gas Processing Systems
Markets for Gas Liquids
Global Supply and Demand
Natural Gas Pipelines
Gas Pipeline History and Milestones
Global Pipeline Infrastructure
North America
South America
Europe
Former Soviet Union
Asia
Australia
Pipeline Design
Wall Thickness
Composite Reinforcement
Capacity vs. Diameter
Capacity vs. Operating Capacity
Transmission System Design
Pipeline Economics Development Process
Onshore
Offshore
Pipeline Tariff Structure
Regulated Market
Deregulated Market
History of the United States
History of the United Kingdom
Liquified Natural Gas
LNG Value Chain
LNG History and Milestones
LNG Process
Liquifact ion
LNG Trains
Transporation
Regasification
LNG Economics
LNG Markets & Trade
Load Balancing & Underground Gas Storage
Load Balancing Applications
Load Duration Curve
Winter Flow Pattern
Underground Storage Options
Underground Storage Capacity & Trends
Thomas Corners Gas Storage Case Study
Surface Storage Options
LNG Peakshaving
Interruptible Customers
Pore Storage Withdrawal
Summary
References
Module 9 of 14
Midstream Sector
Midstream Gas: Gas Processing, Transportation and Load Balancing
(IHRDC_PO_I14)
Midstream Sector
Refining and Product Specifications (IHRDC_PO_I8)
Description:
Every day, some 85 million barrels of crude oil are transported from producing fields to major refining centers, many of which are
located hundreds or thousands of miles apart. Learn how, and at what cost, crude oil is t ransported in pipelines and tankers –
the two most practical and economical methods for moving large volumes of crude oil over long distances.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Outline:
Overview
Crude Oil Characteristics
Crude Oil Chemistry
Paraffins (Alkanes)
Olefins and Aromatics
Naphthenes
Heating Value of Hydrocarbons
Boiling Points of Hydrocarbons
Volume Changes during Refining
Crude Quality: API Gravity and Sulfur Content
API Gravity
Sulfur Content
Marker Crudes and Pricing Benchmarks
Crude Quality: Yield of Petroleum Fractions
The Refining Process
Crude Yields and Product Demand
Functions of a Refinery
Hydroskimming Refinery
Cracking Refinery
Deep Conversion Coking Refinery
Refinery Complexity
Non-Refined Petroleum Supply/Blend Streams
Ethanol
Bio-Diesel
Gas-to-Liquids
Refining Economics
Cost of Crude Oil and Value of Petroleum Products
Impact of Refining Complexity on Refining Margins
Impact of Refining Capacity on Refining Margins
Refinery Case Study: Addit ion 100,000 b/d Delayed Coker
Future Trends
Health, Safety and Environmental Considerations
Health and Safety
Environment
Summary
References
Module 10 of 14
Downstream Sector
Marketing & Distribution of Petroleum Products (IHRDC_PO_I9)
Description:
Once crude oil has been refined into transportation fuels, heating oil, lubricants and other products, it must be marketed and
distributed to commercial and retail customers. In this module you will learn how refined products make their way to pipelines,
terminals, service stations and other outlets where the profits are being made in this downstream sector of the industry and the
economics of the modern gasoline super-stat ion.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Outline:
Overview
Petroleum Products and Services
Fuels for Transportation and Heating
Gasoline and Diesel
Composit ion
Performance Characterist ics
Kerosene (Aviation)
Fuel Oils (Marine)
Heating Fuels
Liquefied Petroleum Gases (LPGs)
Developments in Fuels, Bio-Fuels and Fuel Cells
Non-fuel Specialty Products and Streams
Lubricants and Greases
Engine Lubricants
Transmission Lubricants
Indust rial Oils
Greases
Bitumens
Chemicals and Solvents
Other Products
The Marketplace for Petroleum Products
Retail Customers
Commercial Customers
Basics of Marketing Petroleum Products
Marketing Segmentation and Customer Focus
Retail Sector
Commercial Sector
Mobil Case Study Synopsis
Worldwide Demand and Pricing for Petroleum Products
Products Markets in Europe
Product Markets in North America
Products Markets in Asia Pacific
The Downstream Value Chain: From Refinery to Final Sale
Manufacturing of Petroleum Products
Product Transportat ion, Storage and Distribution
Import ing Products Using Product Carriers
Intermediate Bulk Storage
Regional Transportat ion, Addit ives and Branding
Product Pipelines
Barges
Rail Transportation
Truck Transportation
Market Out lets:Wholesale, Commercial and Retail
Downstream Petroleum Examples – Spain and New England
CLH Distribution System
Global’s Value Chain
Pricing Along the Downstream Value Chain
Product Market Complexity and Competit ion
Petroleum Distribution Costs and Margins
Profit Margins at the Retail Service Station
The Modern Gasoline Station
Health, Safety and Environmental Considerations
Summary
References
Module 11 of 14
Downstream Sector
Marketing & Distribution of Petroleum Products (IHRDC_PO_I9)
Downstream Sector
Downstream Gas: Gas Distribution, Marketing & Trading (IHRDC_PO_I10)
Description:
This module covers the downstream gas value chain including gas distribution, the key gas market sectors and the manner in
which gas supply is managed and sold into the retail market. Emphasis is also placed on the nature of the gas markets in
different regions of the world. The gas distribution coverage includes the design of a typical gas distribution system, the services
it provides, typical distribution tariffs and billing structure. Gas markets discussed include residential, commercial, industrial,
power generation, vehicle fuel and petrochemicals. Gas marketing and trading is introduced through the strategy that a
"typical" gas distribution company follows in managing its gas supply in an "open access" gas industry environment.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Outline:
Overview
Gas Distribution
LDC Distribution System
Regulation
Deregulat ion
LDC Supply System Model
Distribution Operations
Gas Service Functions
Technologies in Gas Distribution
LNG
Receiving & Vaporization Facility
LNG Truck
Local LNG Storage
Gas Distribution Markets
Ident ification of Markets
Major Classes of Gas Markets
Assessing Market Demand
Sources of Market Information
Gas Supply Economics
Natural Gas Pricing
Direct Markets
Power Generation
Indust rial
Retail Markets
Resident ial
Commercial
Vehicle Fuel
Petrochemicals
Power Generation
Indust rial
Gas Trading
Regulation
Deregulat ion
Convergence
"Open Access"
Henry Hub
Gas Daily Index
Basic Deal Types
Physical Gas and Measure Exposure
Hedging Fixed-Price Risk
Hedging Basis Risk
Exchange and OTC Trading
Summary
References
Module 12 of 14
Downstream Sector
Overview of Petrochemicals (IHRDC_PO_I11)
Description:
Crude oil, like other raw materials, has few practical uses in and of itself. It s value lies in the products that can be extracted
from it . Learn how crude oil is processed into commercial products through various refining processes. Also explore why some
refineries are more complex than others and what business decisions go into each day’s refinery run.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Outline:
Overview: What are Petrochemicals?
Characteristics of the Petrochemical Industry
Global Nature of the Industry
Common Specifications for most Products
Readily Available Technology
Large Scale, Capital Intensive
Key to Success
The Seven Basic Petrochemical Building Blocks
Product Families and End-Uses
Methane
Ammonia
Methanol
Gas-to-Liquids (GTL)
Olefins
Ethylene
Propylene
Butadiene
The Aromatics
Benzene
Toluene
Xylenes
Petrochemical Plant Economics
Components of Capital Investment
Owner’s Project Costs
Total Fixed Investment
Components of Product ion Costs
Variable costs
Fixed Costs
Cash Cost of Production
Depreciat ion
Total Cost of Production
Return on Capital Investment
Required Plant Gate Price
Economics of a Mega-Methanol Project
Why Invest in Petrochemical?
Price Sett ing Mechanisms
Demand Limited Scenario
Production Limited Scenario
Profitability Cycles
Major Indust ry Issues
Feedstock Costs
Globalization and International Competit iveness
Environmental Regulations
Case Studies and Project Decriptions
References
Books
Associations
Selected Petrochemical Consult ing Companies
Selected Internet Sites with Petrochemical Industry Information
Acknowledgments
Module 13 of 14
All Sectors
Oil and Gas Business Game (IHRDC_PO_I12)
Description:
Nicola, a dynamic Business Simulat ion Game, is used to integrate the subject matter of each "Content Module" to recreate the
challenge of discovering, producing, and market ing oil and gas to learn where value, in the form of financial performance, is
created along the value chain.
Duration:
2:00:00 hrs
Module 14 of 14
BusinessEssentialsCourse Catalog
Finance
Overview of Finance (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0101)
Description:
Provides background on the financial environment by familiarizing you with it s major characterist ics, definit ions, and functions.
You will learn how financial decisions fit into the world of business decision-making and how these choices pose problems,
challenges, and opportunit ies for organizations and individuals.
Duration:
4:00:00 hrs
Courses:
Types of Business Organizations
Wealth and Profit Maximization
Business Ethics and Social Responsibility
Where Does the Finance Function Fit In and What Are It s Typical Responsibilit ies?
Agency Relationships: Stockholders and Managers
Motivating Managers
The Five Key Principles of Financial Management
Financial Markets and Inst itut ions
Financing and Operations Growth
The Stock Market
The Cost of Money: Interest Rates and Required Rates of Return
Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment Re-Test
For Further Reference
Module 1 of 35
Finance
Accounting Concepts and Financial Statement Analysis (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0201)
Description:
Develops an understanding of account ing concepts and the ability to interpret major financial accounting statements and
financial management tasks. Finance is essentially a type of applied economics that makes extensive use of accounting
concepts and definit ions.
Duration:
4:00:00 hrs
Courses:
Annual Reports and Financial Statements
The Balance Sheet
The Income Statement
Retained Earnings and Statement of Cash Flows
Financial Analysis: Using Ratios
Financial Ratios and Benchmarking
Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment Re-Test
For Further Reference
Module 2 of 35
Finance
Time Value of Money Principles (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0301)
Description:
Learn the basic techniques (compounding, discounting, present and future value) used in evaluating all financial decisions,
and their cash flow implications.
Duration:
4:00:00 hrs
Courses:
Understanding Time Lines
Calculating Future and Present Values
Annuit ies and Perpetuit ies
Cash Flow Possibilit ies
Interest Rates and the Power of Compound Interest
Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment Re-Test
For Further Reference
Module 3 of 35
Finance
Risk and Return (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0401)
Description:
Reviews the many different ways to measure risk when considering a decision, each of which will produce different results. In this
module you will learn about the relationship between risk and return and explore the benefit s of diversification.
Duration:
4:00:00 hrs
Courses:
Fundamentals
Different Types of Risk
Investments and Variability of Retur
Risk and Investment Decisions
Calculating risk and rates of return
Diversificat ion and Risk
Other Concepts: CAPM, APT, VaR
Self Assessment
Self Assessment Re-Test
Module 4 of 35
Finance
Budgeting (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0501)
Description:
Learn the basics of budgeting, including the varying types of budgets, and explore the benefits of budgeting.
Duration:
4:00:00 hrs
Courses:
Budget Basics
Strategic Budgeting
The Master Budget
Operating Budgets
Managing the budget process
Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
For Further Reference
Module 5 of 35
Finance
Practical Tools for Planning and Control (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0601)
Description:
Considers the practical tools of finance and accounting for decisionmaking by organizat ions. You will learn about cost benefit
analysis, return on investment (ROI), fixed and variable costs, breakeven and CVP (cost-volume-profit) analysis, t racking and
performance measures, as well as the Balanced Scorecard and its uses.
Duration:
4:00:00 hrs
Courses:
Cost-Benefit Analysis
Return on Investment and Payback Period
Fixed and Variable Costs
Breakeven analysis and Cost Volume Profit (CVP) analysis
Breakeven analysis- An Example
Tracking and Performance
Balanced Scorecard Measurements
Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment Re-Test
For Further Reference
Module 6 of 35
Finance
Valuing Real Assets (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0701)
Description:
Addresses the use of the basic principles of finance to determine the desirability of acquiring an asset that is expected to
produce a future cash flow stream. The term capital budget ing is the name given to this process. You will also learn to conduct
a financial analysis of an asset or project under consideration.
Duration:
4:00:00 hrs
Courses:
What is Capital Budget ing?
Est imating Cash Flows
Assessing Project Risk
Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return
Useful Tools for Capital Budget ing
Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment Re-Test
For Further Reference
Course Feedback
Module 7 of 35
Communications
Effective Communication (IHRDC_BEES_COM0101)
Description:
Focuses on improving business writ ing. You will learn how to write clearly and directly for your audience.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Why Effective Communication Matters
How We Communicate
The Problem with Jargon
Factors for Effective Communication
Knowing Your Audience
Ethical Communication
Self-Assessment
Module 8 of 35
Communications
Organizing and Structuring (IHRDC_BEES_COM0201)
Description:
Reviews purposeful writ ing, as well as organizing and structuring your writ ing. You will learn how to brainstorm, conduct
research, and deal with writer's block.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Writ ing and Communicating with Purpose
Who is your audience? What is your message?
Out lining: Formal and Informal
Brainstorming Techniques
Research
Overcoming Writer's Block
Self-Assessment
Module 9 of 35
Communications
Writing Effectively (IHRDC_BEES_COM0301)
Description:
You will learn how to be a better writer and how to revise your writ ing to make it purposeful and effective.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Writ ing Concisely
Writ ing Quickly
Writ ing Quickly: Structure
Revising Your Writ ing
Revising: Jargon
Addit ional Resources: Business Writ ing
Self-Assessment
Module 10 of 35
Communications
Presentations Basics (IHRDC_BEES_COM0401)
Description:
Teaches you the basics of how to organize, st ructure and create presentations. Since many organizations use PowerPoint as a
way of communicat ing information, this module offers advice and guidance on the most effect ive and persuasive uses of
PowerPoint.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Why Effective Communication Matters
Understanding How We Communicate
Presentations: Visual Aids
PowerPoint Presentations: Graphic Rules of Thumb
PowerPoint Presentations: Creating Summary Slides
PowerPoint Presentations: Creating Summary Slides I I
Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
Module 11 of 35
Communications
Purposeful Presentations (IHRDC_BEES_COM0501)
Description:
Builds on Presentat ion Basics and helps learners organize, structure and create presentations
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Organizing your Communication
Organizing your Presentation: Forecast, Present and Echo
PowerPoint Presentations: Other Visual Considerations
PowerPoint Presentations: Creating a Presentat ion
Revising PowerPoint
PowerPoint Presentations: Creating a Presentat ion I I
Tips on Face-to-Face Presentations
Addit ional Resources: Presentations
Self-Assessment
Module 12 of 35
Human Resources Management
Introduction to Human Resource Management (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0101)
Description:
Explains Human Resource Management and discusses it s role and value in an organization. You will learn the key HRM funct ions
and concepts, its st rategic contribution to the organizat ion and understand the role of HRM planning. Ethical, cultural, polit ical
and logist ical HRM issues are also addressed.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Fundamentals
Att itudes about Human Resource Management
The Strategic Importance of HRM
HRM Vocabulary Game
Key HRM Functions and Concepts
Reading
Centralized and Decentralized HRM
HRM Planning
HRM and Ethics
Global HRM Issues
RIGS: Making the Case for HRM (mini-case)
Web Research: HR Associat ion Resources
Practice Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment
For Further Exploration
Module 13 of 35
Human Resources Management
Planning and Recruiting (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0201)
Description:
Details the role of HRM in developing an organization’s strategic plan. You will learn the benefits of HRM planning, including
effective recruitment strategies.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
HRM Planning
Mini-case: Why plan?
Effective Recruitment Ads
Avoiding Recruitment Mistakes
Mini-case: Looking for Candidates
Practice Self Assessment
Self Assessment
Module 14 of 35
Human Resources Management
Employee Selection (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0301)
Description:
Reviews how to conduct an effective job interview, reference checks and how to select appropriate pre-employment tests.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Finding the Right Person
Mini-case: Interviewing for Pacific Machine Tools
Employee Fit
Test ing Prospect ive Employees
Individual Exercise: Evaluat ing an Integrity Test
Mini-case: A Hiring Dilemma
HR Vocabulary Game
Practice Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment
Module 15 of 35
Human Resources Management
Training and Development (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0401)
Description:
Introduces the various types of training programs used to keep employee’s skills current , with an eye toward an organization’s
st rategic goals, and – through personnel development – shaping the future of the organization itself.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Training Issues
Designing an Orientation Program
Diversity Training
Mini-case: Team Building
Developing Employees
Mini-case: Const ructing a Development Plan
Web Resources
Practice Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment
Module 16 of 35
Human Resources Management
Employment Benefits (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0501)
Description:
Focuses on the benefit s that a company is legally required to offer employees. You will learn about the range of benefit s
available and what role they play in a competit ive compensation package. Issues involved in the selection and administ rat ion
of employee benefits are discussed.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Introduction to Benefits
Mini-case: Benefits Costs
Health Care Issues
Vacations and Holidays
Mini-Case: Unused Vacation Days
HR Vocabulary Game
Web Resources: Benefits
Practice Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment
Module 17 of 35
Human Resources Management
Performance Management (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0601)
Description:
Explains the value of a performance management system and discusses various types of systems. You will learn to conduct a
performance management interview and how to design a performance improvement plan.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Performance Evaluation Characterist ics
Performance Management Systems
Fair Measurements
The Appraisal Process
Handling Appraisal Results
Performance Management Solut ions
Vocabulary Game
Practice Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment
Module 18 of 35
Human Resources Management
Compensation (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0701)
Description:
Addresses the role of and the key issues in compensation systems in an organizat ion. You will learn the linkages between
compensation and motivation and the pros and cons for “pay-for-performance” systems. Competit ive pay and pay equity is
also discussed.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Compensation
Compensation and Motivation
Video: Compensation Systems
Compensation Considerations
Pay for Performance
Case Study: Commissions
Vocabulary Game
Pay Surveys and Market Compensation
Practice Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment
Module 19 of 35
Human Resources Management
Talent Management and Career Development (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0801)
Description:
Considers the crit ical value of a career development program to an organization. You will learn the five stages in the career
lifecycle and the needs of an employee at each stage. Key tools for career development are discussed and compared.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Why Career Development?
Career Life-cycle
Tools for Career Development
Generat ional Issues
Career Development Issues
Career Quest ions
Summary and Addit ional Reading
Practice Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment
Module 20 of 35
Human Resources Management
Equal Employment Opportunity (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0901)
Description:
Reviews the major employment and ant i-discrimination laws as well as the basic steps to take in dealing with discrimination
complaints. You will learn ways to develop and maintain a diverse workforce
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Equal Opportunity and Employment Issues
Mini-case: Discrimination at Pacific Machine Tools?
Mini-quiz: Discrimination
Mini-case: Making a Choice on Promotion at Pacific Machine Tools
Alternate Work Arrangements at Pacific Machine Tools
Web Research and Essay: Diversity in the Workforce
Practice Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment
Module 21 of 35
Human Resources Management
Ethics, Employee Rights, and Discipline (IHRDC_BEES_HRM1001)
Description:
Reviews the major employment and ant i-discrimination laws as well as the basic steps to take in dealing with discrimination
complaints. You will learn ways to develop and maintain a diverse workforce
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
HR and Ethics
Introducing An Ethics Code
Progressive Discipline
Staying out of Legal Trouble
Mini-case: Handling A Proposed Termination
Mini-case: Progressive Discipline
HR Vocabulary Game
Labor Relations
Practice Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment
Module 22 of 35
Human Resources Management
Employee Health and Safety (IHRDC_BEES_HRM1101)
Description:
In part icular, the oil and gas industry must pay special attention to the health and safety of its employees. This module discusses
how a company is legally responsible for protecting it s employees, as well as methods to handle substance abuse, mental illness,
and other stress-related issues employees may face on the job.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Safety and Health Issues
OSHA
Mini-case: When Employees Don't Follow the Rules
Substance Abuse
Stress Management
Mini-case: Unhappy or Dangerous?
Web Resources: Finding Help
Practice Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment
Module 23 of 35
Human Resources Management
Other HRM Issues: Work/Life Balance and Global HRM (IHRDC_BEES_HRM1201)
Description:
Introduces the issues involved with work/life balance and the role of HRM in a global environment. Both topics involve the
changing dynamics of the business world.
Duration:
2:30:00 hrs
Courses:
The Importance of Work/Life Balance
Key Work/Life Balance Issues
Assessing Att itudes Toward Work, Career, and Life
Work/Life Balance Approaches
Reading
Key Terms in Global HRM
Global HRM Issues
Global Career Development
Practice Self-Assessment
Self-Assessment
Module 24 of 35
Project Management
Introduction to Project Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0101)
Description:
This 1-module course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapters 1 and 2 of A Guide
to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will consider some of the
organizational issues surrounding project management. You will review how different organizations handle the responsibilit ies of
project management and will focus on the entity known as a project management office, or PMO. You will also learn how
organizational structure can play a key role in the success or failure of project management.
Duration:
3:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Presentation: Projects in Context: Understanding the Bigger Picture
Presentation: Stakeholders
Presentation: Project Management Office (PMO), Resources, and Influences
Presentation: Organizational St ructures
Presentation: Project Life Cycle: Understanding Phases and Project Tendencies
Best Practices: Select ing a Project Manager
Best Practices: Project Manager Candidate Profile Review
Interactive: PM Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
PMBOK® Guide Chapter 1 and 2 Quiz
Module 25 of 35
Project Management
Project Processes and Project Integration Management (Fourth Edition)
(IHRDC_BEES_PMT0102)
Description:
This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapters 3 and 4 of A Guide to the
Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will be introduced to the five
project management process groups and nine project management knowledge areas into which PMI® sorts all project
activit ies. You will also learn how processes in the Project Integrat ion Management knowledge area encourage relationships
between project processes that keep the project's activit ies co-ordinated and on track for success.
Duration:
3:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Presentation: Project Processes: An Integrated Flow
Presentation: Project Management Processes, Project Management Process Groups, and Project Management
Knowledge Areas
Exercise: Process Groups And Their Const ituent Processes
Presentation: Project Integration Management
Presentation: Project Charter and Major Project Documents
Presentation: Executing, Monitoring, and Closing Project Integration Management Processes
Presentation: Handling the Kick-Off Meeting
Interactive: Vocabulary Game
Self Assessment
PMBOK® Guide Chapter 3 Quiz
PMBOK® Guide Chapter 4 Quiz
Module 26 of 35
Project Management
Project Scope Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0103)
Description:
This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 5 of A Guide to the Project
Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will consider many of the key issues
surrounding Project Scope Management.
Duration:
3:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Presentation: Collect Requirements [
] and Define Scope [
2]
Presentation: Create Work Breakdown Structure [
3]
Presentation: Verify Scope [
4] and Control Scope [
5]
Best Practices: Project Review Reports and Meetings
Best Practices: Updating Stakeholders
Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
PMBOK® Guide Chapter 5 Quiz
Module 27 of 35
Project Management
Project Time Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0104)
Description:
This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 6 of A Guide to the Project
Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will consider how to best plan and
schedule activit ies. You will familiarize yourself with the various techniques used to calculate and analyze activity t ime
est imates, including ways to est imate the duration of activit ies.
Duration:
3:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Presentation: Defining Activit ies
Presentation: Sequencing Activit ies
Presentation: Est imating Activity Resources and Durations
Exercise: Est imat ion Using PERT and Z-Score
Presentation: Develop Schedule and the Crit ical Path Method
Exercise: Identifying the Crit ical Path
Best Practices: Crashing
Best Practices: Scheduling Pract ice
Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
PMBOK® Guide Chapter 6 Quiz
Module 28 of 35
Project Management
Project Cost Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0105)
Description:
This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 7 of A Guide to the Project
Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will consider the general approaches to
cost management, such as the methods that are used to est imate and budget for project costs. You will also learn about the
interrelationship of various cost control concepts and possible responses a project management team might make if a project
is falling behind schedule or overrunning its budget.
Duration:
3:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Presentation: Est imate Costs
Presentation: Determine Budget and the Cost Performance Baseline
Presentation: Cost Analysis and Cost Control
Exercise: Evaluating Project Status
Best Practices: Cost Est imating and Budgeting
Interactive: PM Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
PMBOK® Guide Chapter 7 Quiz
Module 29 of 35
Project Management
Project Quality Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0106)
Description:
This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 8 of A Guide to the Project
Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will learn how the project management
team ensures that a project is completed at the level of quality required by all the stakeholders. From customers to the
performing organization, there are many inputs to the process. This course will explain how the project management team can
plan for, execute, and monitor and control quality.
Duration:
3:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Presentation: Project Quality Management Overview and Plan Quality
Presentation: Planning Tools and Techniques
Presentation: Flowcharts
Presentation: Perform Quality Assurance and Perform Quality Control
Exercise: Choosing the Correct Tool
Best Practices Mini-Case: Improving Public Improvements
Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
PMBOK® Guide Chapter 8 Quiz
Module 30 of 35
Project Management
Project Human Resource Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0107)
Description:
This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 9 of A Guide to the Project
Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will learn how to acquire and negotiate
the best staff, how to define roles and responsibilit ies in project documentation, and how to employ the essent ials of good
people management.
Duration:
3:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Presentation: Project Human Resource Management
Presentation: Acquire Project Team
Presentation: Develop Project Team
Presentation: Manage Project Team
Presentation: Conflict Management
Best Practices Mini-Case: The Cycle Time Improvement Project
Best Practices: Gathering Input for Decision-Making
Best Practices: Web Resources on Group Dynamics
Best Practices Mini-Case: Selecting a Decision-Making Approach
Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
PMBOK® Guide Chapter 9 Quiz
Module 31 of 35
Project Management
Project Communications Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0108)
Description:
This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 10 of A Guide to the Project
Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will learn about how project
management teams can effectively communicate with the project's various stakeholders.
Duration:
3:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Project Communications Management and Communications Basics online
Ident ify Stakeholders online
Plan Communications and Distribute Information online
Manage Stakeholder Expectations online
Report Performance online
Best Practices: Mini-case: Confronting Communication Challenges online
Vocabulary Game online
Self-Assessment test
PMBOK® Guide Chapter 10 Quiz
Module 32 of 35
Project Management
Project Risk Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0109)
Description:
This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 11 of A Guide to the Project
Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will define the core elements of risk
management, including the risk register. You will also understand how risks are identified, priorit ized, quantified and used in
decision-making.
Duration:
3:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Presentation: Plan Risk Management
Presentation: Identify Risks
Presentation: Perform Qualitat ive Risk Management
Presentation: Perform Quantitat ive Risk Analysis
Exercise: Perform Quantitat ive Risk Analysis
Presentation: Plan Risk Responses and Monitor and Control Risks
Best Practices: Web Research
Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
PMBOK® Guide Chapter 11 Quiz
Module 33 of 35
Project Management
Project Procurement Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0110)
Description:
This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 12 of A Guide to the Project
Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will consider the various aspects of the
Project Procurement Management knowledge area.
Duration:
3:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Presentation: Plan Procurements
Presentation: Conduct Procurements
Presentation: Administer Procurements and Close Procurements
Exercise: Pinpoint ing the Procurement Process
Presentation: Contract Negotiation
Interactive: PM Vocabulary Game
Self-Assessment
PMBOK® Guide Chapter 12 Quiz
Module 34 of 35
Project Management
Project Management Practice Examination and Examination Strategies (Fourth
Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0201)
Description:
This Pract ice Exam covers the Project Management Inst itute's standard, A Guide to the Project Management Body of
Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide). The practice exam contains mult iple-choice quest ions that provide a comprehensive review of
the PMBOK® Guide.
Duration:
3:30:00 hrs
Courses:
Practice Examination 1: PMBOK® Guide Knowledge
Practice Examination 2: PMBOK® Guide Knowledge
Project Management Professional (PMP®) Exam Strategies
Introduction to the PMP® Exam
PMI's PMP® Code of Professional Conduct
Tips for PMP® Exam Test Taking
Key PMBOK® Guide Content to Memorize
Test Center Logist ics
Ending the Test
Exam Strategy Self-Assessment
Module 35 of 35
Operations& Maintenance e-Learning
Course Catalog
PROCESS OPERATIONS CURRICULUM
International Human Resources Development Corporation
Operations & Maintenance e-Learning
For The Oi l And Gas Indus t r y
Process Operations
BOILERS: Basic Principles and Types (IHRDC_OM_AOBBP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to fundamental concepts related to industrial plant boilers. After
completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic requirements for steam production and combustion and
explain how a boiler produces steam. They should also be able to ident ify three types of heat t ransfer and explain how heat
t ransfer occurs in a typical boiler. In addit ion, trainees should be able to describe how water, combust ion gases, and steam flow
through fire tube and water tube boilers.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Principles of Operation
State the basic requirements for steam production.
State the basic requirements for combustion.
Explain in general terms how a boiler produces steam.
Heat Transfer
Describe heat transfer.
State three ways in which heat t ransfer can occur in a typical boiler.
Ident ify problems that can interfere with proper heat transfer and the effect of each on boiler operation.
Boiler Types
Name two basic types of boilers.
Describe the basic differences between fire tube and water tube boilers.
Describe how water, combustion gases, and steam flow through fire tube and water tube boilers.
Subjects:
Principles of Operation
Steam Production and Combustion
Basic Boiler Operat ing Principles
Heat Transfer
Types of Heat Transfer
Heat Transfer Problems
Heat Transfer in a Boiler
Boiler Types
Fire Tube Boilers
Water Tube Boilers
Course 1 of 245
Process Operations
BOILERS: Combustion, Water and Steam (IHRDC_OM_AOBOW)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with combustion in a boiler
and the flow of air and combustion gases during boiler operation. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify
the elements needed for combust ion in a boiler, explain how fuel is delivered to the burners, and describe the parts and
operation of various types of burners. They should also be able to describe the air and gas flow path through a boiler and
describe methods used to remove part iculates and harmful gases from combustion gases. In addit ion, trainees should be able
to explain when and why vents, drains, blowdown valves, and soot blowers are used.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Combustion Equipment
Describe the parts and operation of typical gas burners, oil burners, and stokers.
Air Flow
Ident ify some devices used to improve the efficiency of boiler operations.
Explain how air flow is produced in a typical boiler.
Explain why changes in boiler load require fuel and air adjustments.
State why it is necessary to maintain a proper fuel-to-air rat io in a boiler.
Describe the parts and basic operation of a typical rotary air heater.
Explain how rotary air heaters improve efficiency of boiler operations.
Water and Steam Flow
Explain how natural circulat ion occurs in a typical water tube boiler.
Explain how controlled circulation occurs in a typical water tube boiler.
Describe an economizer, why it is used, and how it improves efficiency.
Name some devices commonly used to remove moisture from steam and how they operate.
Subjects:
Combustion Equipment
Gas Burners
Oil Burners
Stokers
Air Flow
Draft
Fuel-to-Air Ratio
Air Heaters
Water and Steam Flow
Boiler Water Circulation
Economizers
Moisture Separators
Course 2 of 245
Process Operations
CHEMISTRY: Basic Principles 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOCB1)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the composit ion of matter
and the general characterist ics of compounds, mixtures, and solut ions. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to
identify the part icles that make up an atom and describe two ways in which atoms form chemical bonds. They should also be
able to explain what compounds and mixtures are, and how they differ from one another. In addit ion, trainees should be able
to describe what a solut ion is, calculate the weights of materials in a percent-by-weight solut ion, and explain what a pH
measurement represents.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction to Chemistry
Define: material, matter, mass, element, atom, proton, neutron, and electron.
Ident ify the part icles that make up an atom.
Define: valence electron and ion.
Describe two ways in which atoms form chemical bonds.
Compounds and Mixtures
Define: compound and chemical reaction.
Define mixture.
Explain how compounds and mixtures differ from one another.
Solutions
Define: solut ion, solute, solvent, homogeneous, and concentration.
Calculate the weights of the materials in a percent-by-weight solut ion, given the weight of the solut ion and the
percentage of solute.
Explain what a pH measurement represents.
Subjects:
Introduction to Chemistry
Composit ion of Matter
Valence Electrons and Chemical Bonds
Compounds and Mixtures
Compounds
Mixtures
Solutions
Characterist ics
Percent-by-Weight
pH Measurements
Course 3 of 245
Process Operations
CHEMISTRY: Basic Principles 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOCB2)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the principles of chemical reactions, material balancing, and
organic chemistry. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to use a chemical equat ion to explain what occurs during
a chemical reaction, and how combustion reactions, replacement reactions, and neutralizat ion occur. Trainees should also be
able to define material balancing, and describe the basic steps involved in balancing the materials represented in a simple
equat ion. In addit ion, trainees should be able to explain what organic chemistry is and how some organic chemicals are
named.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Chemical Reactions
Ident ify three common types of chemical react ions.
Define: chemical equation and chemical reaction.
Use a chemical equation to explain what occurs during a simple chemical reaction.
Define endothermic and exothermic in terms of their application to chemical react ions.
Explain how a combust ion reaction, replacement reaction, and neutralization reaction occur.
Explain how the acidity or alkalinity of a liquid is measured.
Material Balancing
Explain the meaning of material balancing.
Ident ify the steps involved in balancing the materials represented in a simple equation.
Given the actual weight of one material in a reaction, use the relative weights of the atoms in the reaction to
determine the actual weights of the other materials involved.
Organic Chemistry
Define organic chemistry.
Explain how some organic chemicals are named.
Subjects:
Chemical Reactions
Chemical Equat ions
Combustion Reactions
Replacement and Neutralization Reactions
Material Balancing
Steps in Material Balancing
Relative and Actual Weights
Organic Chemistry
Basis of Organic Chemistry
Naming Organic Chemicals
Course 4 of 245
Process Operations
CHEMISTRY: Material Balancing (IHRDC_OM_AOCMB)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with using balanced chemical
equat ions to calculate the amounts of reactants and products in process reactions. After completing this unit , t rainees should
be able to explain what material balancing is, verify that a chemical equation is balanced, and use a balanced equation to
calculate the amounts of reactants and products in a reaction when the weight of one reactant is given. They should also be
able to identify two basic factors that can limit the product ion of a process system, perform material balancing for a process
system when reactant supply is the limit ing factor, and perform material balancing for a system in which a specific amount of
product is to be produced.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Chemical Equations
Explain the meaning of material balancing.
Verify that a chemical equation is balanced.
Define molecular weight and explain how to calculate the weight of a molecule.
Calculate the amounts of reactants and products in a reaction when given the weight of one reactant.
Limiting Factors
Ident ify two basic factors that can limit the production of a process system.
Convert reactant supplies expressed as total amounts into supply rates.
Determine the limit ing factor of a process system that is being operated to produce as much product as
possible.
Perform material balancing for a process system when reactant supply is the limit ing factor.
Perform material balancing for a system in which a specific amount of product is to be produced.
Subjects:
Chemical Equations
Equations
Molecular Weights
Actual Weights
Limiting Factors
Determining the Limit ing Factor
Determining Reactant Amounts
Course 5 of 245
Process Operations
CHEMISTRY: Reaction Rates (IHRDC_OM_AOCRR)
Overview:
This interactive unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the rates at which chemical
react ions occur. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe two factors that determine the rates of
react ions, and the effects of temperature, pressure, concentrat ion, and surface area on reaction rates. They should also be
able to describe how catalysts affect reaction rates and how temperature and pressure affect equilibrium react ions.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Reaction Rate Factors
Define react ion rate.
Explain how chemical reactions occur and describe two factors that determine the rates of react ions.
Describe the effects of temperature, pressure, concentration, and surface area on reaction rates.
Catalysts
Define catalyst.
Describe how adsorption catalysts work.
Explain how some catalysts can become poisoned.
Describe how catalysts work by forming an intermediate product during a reaction.
Equilibrium Reactions
Define equilibrium and equilibrium point .
Describe the effects of temperature and pressure on an equilibrium reaction.
Describe one way that products can be stabilized.
Subjects:
Reaction Rate Factors
Chemical React ions
Effects of Variables
Catalysts
Adsorption-Type Catalysts
Intermediate-Type Catalysts
Equilibrium Reactions
Equilibrium
Temperature and Pressure
Stabilizing Products
Course 6 of 245
Process Operations
COMPRESSORS: Centrifugal and Axial (IHRDC_OM_AOCCA)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the parts and operation of
centrifugal and axial compressors. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the main parts and the
general operation of single-stage centrifugal compressors, mult istage centrifugal compressors, and axial compressors. They
should also be able to describe the functions of compressor lubrication systems, seals, bearings, and common auxiliary devices.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Compressor Types
Describe the basic operation of a centrifugal compressor.
Describe the basic operation of an axial compressor.
Describe the components and operat ion of a single-stage centrifugal compressor.
Describe the components and operat ion of a mult istage centrifugal compressor.
Describe the components and operat ion of an axial compressor.
System Components
Describe the function of a compressor lubrication system.
Describe the functions of compressor seals and a seal oil system.
Describe the function of bearings.
Describe how drivers and couplings are used with compressors.
Describe the function of an aftercooler.
Describe the function of safety valves and receivers in compressor systems.
Subjects:
Compressor Types
Introduction
Centrifugal Compressors
Axial Compressors
System Components
Lubrication, Seals, and Bearings
Auxiliary Devices
Course 7 of 245
Process Operations
COMPRESSORS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOCIN)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation of compressors and compressed gas systems.
After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe two general types of compressors and the components and
operation of a typical compressed air system. They should also be able to explain the hazards and safety precautions of
compressors and compressed gas systems. In addit ion, trainees should be able to describe the functions of systems and devices
that are commonly used with compressors and compressed gas systems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Compressors and Systems
Describe two general types of compressors.
Describe some characterist ics that all compressors share.
Ident ify the components of a typical compressed air system.
Describe the operation of a typical compressed air system.
Describe hazards and safety precautions associated with compressors.
Describe hazards and safety precautions associated with compressed gas systems.
System Components
Describe the function of a filter.
Describe the function of an air cooling system and a water cooling system.
Describe the function of a lubricat ion system.
Describe the function of an oil separator.
Describe the function of a demister.
Describe the function of a dryer.
Describe the function of a receiver.
Describe the function of an unloader.
Describe the function of safety valves.
Subjects:
Compressors and Systems
Compressors
Compressed Air Systems
Compressor Hazards
System Components
Filtering, Cooling, and Lubrication
System Auxiliaries
Course 8 of 245
Process Operations
COMPRESSORS: Operation of Centrifugal and Axial Types (IHRDC_OM_AOCOC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the startup, operat ion, and
shutdown of centrifugal and axial compressors. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the general
functions of instrumentation and control devices used with centrifugal and axial compressors. They should also be able to
identify operator responsibilit ies associated with start ing up, operating, and shutt ing down centrifugal and axial compressors.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Instrumentation and Control
State the general features of instrumentation and control devices used with centrifugal and axial compressors.
Describe how instrumentation and control devices can maintain the values of a compressor's process variables.
Describe how instrumentation and control devices can keep a compressor operating within a stable operat ing
range.
Operation
Describe the general steps involved in preparing a compressor for startup.
Describe the general steps involved in warming up a compressor.
Describe the general steps in start ing gas flow to a compressor and bringing a compressor up to operating
speed.
Describe typical compressor operating checks.
Describe some of the general steps involved in a compressor shutdown.
Subjects:
Instrumentation and Control
Functions
Surge Control
Operation
Startup
Operation and Shutdown
Course 9 of 245
Process Operations
COMPRESSORS: Positive Displacement (IHRDC_OM_AOCPD)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the operation of posit ive
displacement compressors. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify the main parts and describe the
general operation of various types of reciprocating and rotary compressors. They should also be able to identify operator
responsibilit ies associated with start ing up, operat ing, and shutt ing down compressors.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Compressor Types
Ident ify the main parts of a reciprocating compressor.
Describe the general operation of a reciprocating compressor.
Ident ify different types of reciprocating compressors and describe their operation.
Ident ify the main parts of a typical rotary compressor.
Describe the general operation of different types of rotary compressors.
Compressor Operations
Describe general checks that should be made before a compressor is started.
Describe general procedures for start ing up a compressor.
Describe general checks that should be made while a compressor is running.
Describe general procedures for shutt ing down a compressor.
Describe general procedures for putt ing a portable compressor in operation.
Subjects:
Compressor Types
Reciprocating Compressors
Reciprocating Compressor Variat ions
Rotary Compressors
Compressor Operations
Pre-Startup Checks
Startup, Operation, and Shutdown
Portable Compressors
Course 10 of 245
Process Operations
DIAGRAMS: Basic Diagrams and Symbols 1 (IHRDC_OM_AODB1)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to plant system diagrams and diagram symbols. After completing
this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and describe the purpose of several kinds of system diagrams, and be able to
describe the information found on each type. Trainees should also be able to identify symbols commonly used on flow diagrams,
and how to use a flow diagram to trace the flow paths of a system.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Types of Diagrams
Ident ify and describe the purpose of equipment arrangement diagrams, elevation drawings, piping system
(flow) diagrams, piping and instrumentat ion diagrams (P&IDs), electrical diagrams, and legends.
In general terms, describe the informat ion found on each type of diagram.
Flow Diagram Symbols
Ident ify some basic symbols associated with flow diagrams.
Ident ify symbols commonly used to represent components in flow diagrams.
Describe the basic operation of the components typically found in a fluid system.
Reading Diagram Symbols
Ident ify the four basic parts of a system.
Ident ify the components of a typical fluid system and relate them to their symbols and functions.
Subjects:
Types of Diagrams
Equipment Location Diagrams
System Diagrams
Flow Diagram Symbols
Tanks, Pumps, and Valves
Actuators
Heat Exchangers
Reading Diagram Symbols
Block Diagrams
Flow Diagrams
Course 11 of 245
Process Operations
DIAGRAMS: Basic Diagrams and Symbols 2 (IHRDC_OM_AODB2)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with symbols commonly used on piping and inst rumentation
diagrams (P&IDs) and electrical one-line diagrams. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to ident ify instrument
symbols and line symbols used in P&IDs, describe the types of information typically found on a legend, and use a P&ID to locate
the components of a system. They should also be able to identify symbols used on electrical one-line diagrams.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams
Ident ify instruments using an identification chart.
Ident ify line and instrument symbols used in piping and instrumentation diagrams.
Using a System Diagram
Describe the types of information typically found on a legend.
Locate the components in a boiler fuel oil system by identifying the symbols used to represent them.
Electrical Diagrams
Ident ify symbols commonly found on one-line electrical diagrams.
Trace out a typical one-line diagram and briefly describe its connect ions.
Subjects:
Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams
Instrument Symbols
Reading a P&ID
Using a System Diagram
Legends
Using a System Diagram
Electrical Diagrams
Main Transformer Section
Load Center Section
Course 12 of 245
Process Operations
DIAGRAMS: Flow and Electrical (IHRDC_OM_AODUF)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the use of flow diagrams and electrical one-line diagrams.
After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to use a flow diagram to trace the flow of materials through a system, and
use a flow diagram and a valve lineup checklist to line up valves in a system. They should also be able to use an electrical
one-line diagram to learn the components and layout of an electrical system, and to determine how to isolate a piece of
equipment for maintenance or repair.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Using Flow Diagrams
Describe how flow diagrams can be used to become familiar with a system.
Describe how flow diagrams can be used to line up valves.
Describe the relationship between flow diagrams and valve lineup checklists.
Using Electrical Diagrams
Describe how electrical one-line diagrams can be used to learn the components and layouts of electrical
systems.
Describe how electrical one-line diagrams can be used to determine how to isolate equipment for
maintenance and repairs.
Subjects:
Using Flow Diagrams
Learning a Plant System
Lining Up Valves
Using Electrical Diagrams
Learning an Electrical System
Isolating Equipment
Course 13 of 245
Process Operations
DIAGRAMS: Piping and Instrumentation (IHRDC_OM_AODUI)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to make trainees familiar with the use of piping and instrumentat ion diagrams (P&IDs).
After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the kinds of information that can be found on a P&ID and
explain why this information is useful. They should also be able to explain how to use P&IDs to troubleshoot system problems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction
Describe the types of information provided by P&IDs and explain why this information is useful.
Describe how a P&ID can be used to become familiar with the instrumentation associated with a system.
Troubleshooting
Describe how P&IDs can be useful in t roubleshooting problems.
Subjects:
Introduction
Information on P&IDs
Learning a System
Troubleshooting
Water Treatment System Problem
De-Aerator System Problem
Course 14 of 245
Process Operations
DISTILLATION: Basic Principles (IHRDC_OM_AODBP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of the dist illat ion process. After
completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how changes in the state of matter relate to the dist illat ion process and
how these changes are affected by temperature and pressure. They should also be able to explain how a liquid mixture can be
separated into lighter and heavier components by dist illat ion, and be able to describe the basic operation of single-batch
dist illat ion systems, successive-batch dist illat ion systems, and continuous dist illat ion systems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Principles of Distillation
Explain how changes in temperature and pressure affect the boiling point of a substance.
Define dist illat ion.
Explain how changes in the state of matter relate to the dist illat ion process.
Define: sensible heat, init ial boiling point , boiling range, final boiling point, and latent heat.
Define: vapor pressure, external pressure, part ial pressure, and relat ive volatility.
Explain the relationship between vapor pressure and the following: boiling point, temperature, and external
pressure.
Distillation Processes
Explain how a liquid mixture can be separated into lighter and heavier components by dist illat ion.
Describe the characterist ics of liquid mixtures that make dist illat ion possible.
Describe the basic operation of single-batch, successive-batch, and continuous dist illat ion systems.
Subjects:
Principles of Distillation
States of Matter
Heat
Pressure
Distillation Processes
Separation of Liquid Mixtures
Batch
Continuous
Course 15 of 245
Process Operations
DISTILLATION: Basic System Components and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AODBS)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic components and operation of a typical dist illat ion
system. After completing the unit , t rainees should be able to describe the functions of the major components of a dist illat ion
system and describe how the dist illat ion process occurs in a dist illat ion tower. They should also be able to explain how refluxing
and reboiling affect product purity and how bubble caps and packing affect the dist illat ion process in dist illat ion towers. In
addit ion, trainees should be able to explain why it is important to monitor and control dist illat ion tower temperatures and
pressures.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Basic Distillation System
List and explain major equipment functions in a typical dist illat ion system.
Define overhead product, bottoms product, and boil-up.
Describe the basic operation of a dist illat ion tower.
Explain how a typical sieve-type dist illat ion tower operates.
List and explain the purpose of the three sections of a dist illat ion tower.
Define fractionat ion.
Explain how refluxing and reboiling help minimize overlap.
Define external reflux and internal reflux.
Explain how packed towers differ from dist illat ion towers using bubble caps.
Compare and contrast the operation of bubble caps and packing grids.
Temperature and Pressure
Describe adjustments made when product purity is unacceptable.
Ident ify crit ical temperature points in a dist illat ion tower.
Describe the effects of incorrect temperatures at various points in a dist illat ion tower.
Explain what a temperature gradient is and how it is measured.
Explain how temperatures can be controlled in a basic system.
Ident ify crit ical pressure points in a basic system.
Describe the effects of incorrect pressures in a system.
Subjects:
Basic Distillation System
Introduction to Dist illat ion Systems
Tower Operat ion
Refluxing and Reboiling
Bubble Caps and Packing
Temperature and Pressure
Temperature
Pressure
Course 16 of 245
Process Operations
DISTILLATION: Control Systems (IHRDC_OM_AODCS)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of operation of systems that control
dist illat ion processes. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to describe typical material balance and energy
balance control loops and explain how these control loops respond to process disturbances. They should also be able to
describe how a dist illat ion tower is operated to maintain product specifications.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Balances
Explain what is meant by material balance and identify typical variables.
Explain what is meant by energy balance and ident ify typical variables.
Describe typical material balance and energy balance control loops.
Define steady state operation and process disturbance.
Describe how a typical dist illat ion tower control system responds to a process disturbance (change in feed
composit ion).
Process Temperatures
Describe how a typical dist illat ion tower control system responds to an increase in bottom temperature.
Explain how the following condit ions affect the composit ion of a dist illat ion system's overhead and bottom
products: increase in bottom temperature, decrease in bottom temperature, and change in external reflux.
Product Composition
Explain the difference between direct and indirect composit ion measurements.
Explain what is meant by product giveaway.
Describe how a typical dist illat ion tower is operated to maintain product specificat ions.
Explain what is meant by process lag.
Subjects:
Balances
Material Balance
Energy Balance
Process Disturbances
Process Temperatures
Bottom Temperature
External Reflux
Product Composition
Product Specifications
Maintaining Specifications
Course 17 of 245
Process Operations
DISTILLATION: Operating Problems (IHRDC_OM_AODOP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the problems that can occur during the operation of
dist illat ion systems. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe problems that can occur when the amount of
reflux going back to the column is incorrect, and when the reboiler in a dist illat ion system is operated improperly.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Feed Problems
Explain the role of the feed rate in maintaining column equilibrium.
Ident ify problems that can occur when the feed rate is incorrect.
Describe condit ions that can lead to three operating problems: overloading, flooding, and puking.
Describe some mechanical causes of overloading.
Explain how to identify a flooded condit ion in a dist illat ion tower.
Explain how a liquid flood can be broken.
Explain how flooding can be prevented or controlled.
Ident ify process disturbances that can result from changes in the feed to a dist illat ion tower.
Ident ify problems that can show up during startup.
Reflux Problems
Define reflux.
Describe what can happen if the amount of reflux going back to the column is not correct.
Ident ify typical disturbances that can occur in shell and tube condensers and fin-fan condensers.
Reboiler Problems
Describe sources of heat input for a dist illat ion tower.
Explain the role of reboiler operation in maintaining column equilibrium.
Ident ify problems that can occur when the reboiler is operated incorrectly.
Ident ify typical disturbances that can occur in shell and tube reboilers and fired reboilers.
Define overfract ionation.
Subjects:
Feed Problems
Feed Control
Overloading
Other Problems
Reflux Problems
Improper Reflux
Condenser Problems
Reboiler Problems
Reboiler Purpose
Improper Operation
Overfractionation
Course 18 of 245
Process Operations
DISTILLATION: System Startup and Shutdown (IHRDC_OM_AODSS)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic procedures for start ing up and shutt ing down a
dist illat ion system. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe pre-startup checks that are commonly made
on a vacuum dist illat ion system and describe what takes place during a typical startup procedure. They should also be able to
describe general procedures for short-term, emergency, and long-term shutdowns.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Startup
Briefly describe the dist illat ion process.
State the purpose of pre-startup checks.
List pre-startup checks commonly made on a vacuum dist illat ion system.
Describe what takes place during a dist illat ion startup procedure.
Shutdown
Describe a typical short -term shutdown procedure.
Describe a typical emergency shutdown procedure.
Describe a typical long-term shutdown procedure.
Subjects:
Startup
System Overview
Pre-Startup Checks
Startup Procedures
Shutdown
Short-Term Shutdown
Long-Term Shutdown
Course 19 of 245
Process Operations
DISTILLATION: Towers, Reboilers and Condensers (IHRDC_OM_AODTR)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of operation of dist illat ion towers,
reboilers, and condensers. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the difference between a binary tower
and a mult idraw tower and explain why the physical dimensions of a tower can vary. They should also be able to explain why
vacuum dist illat ion and azeotropic dist illat ion are used, and how various types of reboilers and condensers are used in
dist illat ion systems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Towers and Processes
Describe the major difference between a binary tower and a mult idraw tower.
Describe the basic operation of a side-draw tower.
Describe three factors that affect the physical dimensions of a dist illat ion tower.
Given the name of a dist illat ion tower, describe the tower's main function.
Give three basic reasons why vacuum dist illat ion is used.
Explain what an azeotropic mixture is and identify two methods of azeotropic dist illat ion.
Reboilers and Condensers
Explain the difference between the following types of reboilers: forced versus natural circulat ion and external
versus internal.
Describe two ways that condensers can be categorized in overhead systems.
Subjects:
Towers and Processes
Mult idraw Towers
Tower Variat ions
Vacuum Towers
Azeotropic Dist illat ion
Reboilers and Condensers
Reboilers
Condensers
Course 20 of 245
Process Operations
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: AC and DC Motors (IHRDC_OM_AOEAC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the operation of electric
motors. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to explain the basic principles of motor operation and describe the
basic operation of a simple AC motor and a simple DC motor. They should also be able to identify and describe the function of
each part of a typical AC motor and a typical DC motor.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Motor Fundamentals
Explain the purpose of a motor.
Explain what is meant by motor act ion.
Explain the basic principles of motor operation.
Define the following terms: alternating current, rotor, and stator.
Describe how a simple AC motor operates.
Describe how a simple DC motor operates.
Motor Parts
Ident ify the parts of a typical AC motor and describe the function of each part.
Ident ify the parts of a typical DC motor and describe the function of each part .
Subjects:
Motor Fundamentals
Basic Motor Theory
AC Motor Fundamentals
DC Motor Fundamentals
Motor Parts
AC Motors
DC Motors
Course 21 of 245
Process Operations
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Electrical Production and Distribution (IHRDC_OM_AOEEP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the production and
distribution of electric power for use by process systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and
explain the funct ions of the major components in an electrical distribution system. In addit ion, trainees should be able to
describe general hazards associated with these systems and how to minimize the possible effects of the hazards.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Power Generation
In general terms, explain how power comes into an industrial facility from an off-site source.
List three sources of on-site power generation.
Power Distribution
Ident ify and explain the function of the major components in a typical electrical power distribution system.
Ident ify general hazards associated with electrical distribution systems.
Describe, in general terms, how to aid a vict im of electrical shock.
Describe, in general terms, how to ext inguish an electrical fire.
Subjects:
Power Generation
Off-Site Power Generation
On-Site Power Generation
Power Distribution
System Components
Safety
Course 22 of 245
Process Operations
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Motor Controllers and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOEMC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with what motor controllers do
and how they do it . Typical steps for start ing up, checking, and shutt ing down motors are also covered. After complet ing this
unit, t rainees should be able to explain how motor controllers control and protect motors. They should also be able to describe
how to start up a motor, perform operat ing checks on a motor, and shut down a motor.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Motor Controllers
Explain the purpose of a motor controller.
Describe the features of a typical AC motor controller contactor.
Describe how a motor controller can protect a motor.
Using an electrical diagram, identify the parts of a typical AC motor controller and describe the function of
each part .
State the purpose of overload devices.
Explain the difference between thermal and magnetic overload devices.
Ident ify the parts of typical overload devices and describe their operation.
Motor Operation
List typical steps for start ing up a motor.
Describe normal operating checks associated with motor operation.
List typical steps for shutt ing down a motor.
Subjects:
Motor Controllers
Fundamentals
AC Controllers
Overload Devices
Motor Operation
Startup
Operations
Switches
Course 23 of 245
Process Operations
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Transformers, Breakers and Switches (IHRDC_OM_AOEBS)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation of transformers, circuit breakers, and various
types of switches. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to explain the principles of transformer operat ion, ident ify
some of the basic components of a transformer, and describe checks that are generally made during a transformer inspection.
They should also be able to describe the general operation of a circuit breaker, explain how to reset a tripped circuit breaker
and rack out a circuit breaker, and describe the basic operation of pushbotton switches and rotary switches.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Transformers
Explain the function of a transformer.
Describe, in general terms, how a transformer works.
Ident ify and describe some of the basic components of transformers.
Describe checks that should be made when a transformer is inspected.
Breakers and Switches
Describe the general operation of a circuit breaker.
List general steps associated with resett ing a circuit breaker that has tripped.
List general steps associated with racking out a circuit breaker.
Describe the general function of a switch.
Explain how different types of pushbotton switches and rotary switches operate.
Subjects:
Transformers
Operating Principles
Transformer Components
Transformer Inspection
Breakers and Switches
Circuit Breaker Operat ion
Resett ing and Racking Out
Switches
Course 24 of 245
Process Operations
EQUIPMENT DRIVE COMPONENTS: Couplings (IHRDC_OM_AOEBP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the general operation of
equipment drive components, in part icular, couplings and clutches. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to
describe the general function of equipment drive components and some general operator checks and safety concerns related
to equipment drive components. They should also be able to identify and describe various types of couplings and a typical
clutch, as well as describe common operator checks and concerns that apply to these part icular equipment drive
components.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction
Explain what equipment drive components are and state some of their functions.
Describe general operator checks and safety concerns related to drive components.
Explain why different types of drive components may be used together in some instances.
Describe basic operating characterist ics that affect the operation of rotating equipment and define the
following terms: endplay, torque, torque surge, and shock load.
Couplings
Explain what a coupling is and describe its general function.
Ident ify and describe some commonly used fixed speed couplings.
Describe common operator checks and concerns that apply to fixed speed couplings.
Explain what a variable speed coupling is, and describe it s general function.
Define slip.
Ident ify and describe some commonly used variable speed couplings.
Describe common operator checks and concerns that apply to variable speed couplings.
Clutches
Explain what a clutch is, and its general function.
Describe one type of disc clutch.
Describe some general operator checks and concerns that apply to a typical clutch.
Subjects:
Introduction
Drive Components
Characterist ics
Couplings
Fixed Speed Couplings
Variable Speed Couplings
Clutches
Clutch Fundamentals
Operator Checks
Course 25 of 245
Process Operations
EQUIPMENT DRIVE COMPONENTS: Gear, Belt and Chain Drives
(IHRDC_OM_AOEGB)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the operation of gear drives,
belt drives, and chain drives. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the general function of gear drives,
belt drives, and chain drives, and explain how each of these equipment drive components operates to transfer power from a
driver to a piece of driven equipment. They should also be able to describe operator checks that are commonly performed on
gear drives, belt drives, and chain drives.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Gears
Explain what a gear drive is, and its general function.
Ident ify the major components of a typical gearbox.
Describe typical operator checks and concerns that apply to gear drives.
Belts and Chains
Explain what a belt is and describe its general function.
Describe typical single and mult iple V-belt drives.
Explain what a chain drive is and its general function.
Describe a typical chain drive and some common ways that chain drives are lubricated.
Describe typical operator checks and concerns that apply to belt drives.
Describe typical operator checks and concerns that apply to chain drives.
Subjects:
Gears
Function
Operator Checks
Belts and Chains
Belt Drives
Chain Drives
Operator Checks
Course 26 of 245
Process Operations
EQUIPMENT LUBRICATION: Lubricants and Bearings (IHRDC_OM_AOELB)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the types of lubricants and bearings used in indust rial
facilit ies. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how lubricants reduce frict ion, describe the
characterist ics of oil and grease, and describe applicat ions in which oils and greases are used as lubricants. Trainees should also
be able to name several solid lubricants, and give an example of a synthetic lubricant. In addit ion, trainees should be able to
describe sleeve bearings, rolling element bearings, and radial loads and thrust loads on shafts and bearings.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Oils and Greases
Define frict ion and explain how lubricants reduce it .
Define viscosity and describe the effect of temperature on it .
Define oil and explain when it is a better lubricant than grease.
Define grease and describe its consistency and how it is indicated.
Describe when grease is a better lubricant than oil.
Solids, Additives, and Synthetics
List three solid lubricants.
Explain how extreme-pressure lubricants protect gears.
Explain why lubricant oxidation is harmful.
Name two harmful substances formed from lubricant oxidation.
State a function of detergents and dispersants in lubricants.
Name a synthetic lubricant.
Bearings
Describe lubricant action in sleeve bearings.
Describe how rolling elements help reduce frict ion.
Describe thrust loads and radial loads on shafts and bearings.
Subjects:
Oils and Greases
Frict ion
Oil
Grease
Solids, Additives, and Synthetics
Solid Lubricants
Addit ives and Synthetics
Bearings
Sleeve Bearings
Rolling Element Bearings
Course 27 of 245
Process Operations
EQUIPMENT LUBRICATION: Using Lubricants (IHRDC_OM_AOEUL)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the methods and devices used to lubricate
equipment components such as bearings. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the use of hand
grease guns, pneumatic grease guns, grease cups, and centralized lubricators. They should also be able to explain the basic
operation of drip-feed oilers, oil baths, bott le oilers, ring oilers, and circulating oil systems. In addit ion, trainees should be able to
describe the use of contact seals, labyrinth seals, and mechanical seals, and to describe how valve packing is lubricated.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Lubricating with Grease
Describe two ways in which hand grease guns can be filled.
Explain why bearing housings should be checked for overheating before greasing.
Describe how to grease a bearing with a drain hole.
Describe a pneumatic grease gun.
Name two types of automatic grease lubricators.
Lubricating with Oil
List four items on a typical lubrication schedule or chart.
Name two ways that oil is dispensed from large drums.
Describe the operation of a drip-feed oiler.
Explain how an oil bath lubricates bearings and gears.
Name three ways to check oil level.
Explain how a bott le oiler maintains constant oil level.
Explain how a ring oiler works.
Describe a typical circulating oil system.
List three things to check in a circulating oil system.
Seals and Packing
State two reasons for using seals.
Define: contact seals, labyrinth seals, and mechanical seals.
Explain why a noticeable amount of leakage from a seal can be harmful.
Explain how valve packing prevents leakage.
Explain why grease guns and lubricators are used on valves.
Subjects:
Lubricating with Grease
Grease Guns
Automatic Grease Lubricators
Lubricating with Oil
Lubrication Schedules
Lubricating Devices
Circulating Oil Systems
Seals and Packing
Seals
Packing Lubrication
Course 28 of 245
Process Operations
FURNACES: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOFIN)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic concepts associated with furnace operation. After
completing the unit, t rainees should be able to ident ify the major parts of a furnace and describe, in general terms, how a
furnace produces heat. They should also be able to explain how heat transfer occurs in a furnace, and how air, combustion
gases, and process fluid moves through different types of furnaces.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Fundamentals
Ident ify the major parts of a furnace.
Ident ify the major furnace systems.
Explain how a furnace produces heat.
Combustion
State the requirements for combust ion.
Ident ify three types of heat t ransfer and how they occur in a furnace.
Furnace Flow Paths
Define draft.
Describe the basic operating principles of natural draft furnaces, forced draft furnaces, and balanced draft
furnaces.
Explain how draft is controlled in a natural draft furnace.
Explain how process fluid circulates in a furnace.
Ident ify problems associated with improper process fluid flow.
Subjects:
Fundamentals
Components
Operation
Combustion
Fundamentals
Heat Transfer
Furnace Flow Paths
Draft
Process Fluid
Course 29 of 245
Process Operations
FURNACES: Operating Conditions (IHRDC_OM_AOFOC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with general operator responsibilit ies associated with operating a
furnace. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify instrumentation used to monitor furnace temperature
control systems and process fluid control systems. They should also be able to identify condit ions that should be checked during
furnace operations, and explain how to detect and respond to abnormal condit ions.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Instrumentation and Control
Ident ify the instrumentation used to monitor furnace operating condit ions.
Describe the basic operating principles of furnace temperature control systems and process fluid control
systems.
Inspection and Adjustments
Ident ify condit ions that should be inspected during furnace operation.
Explain how to detect burner problems and make the appropriate burner adjustments.
Abnormal Conditions
Explain how to detect and respond to these furnace air flow problems: air leaks, insufficient air flow, and
afterburning.
Explain how to operate a furnace at reduced firing rates.
Explain how to detect and respond to freeze-ups in the fuel supply system and process fluid system.
Subjects:
Instrumentation and Control
Instrumentat ion and Process Variables
Control Systems
Inspection and Adjustments
Furnace Inspect ion
Burner Adjustments
Abnormal Conditions
Air Flow Problems
Fuel System Problems
Process Fluid Problems
Course 30 of 245
Process Operations
FURNACES: Startup and Shutdown (IHRDC_OM_AOFSS)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic procedures for start ing up and shutt ing down a
furnace. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe basic procedures for preparing a furnace for startup,
establishing the flow of process fluid, and lighting the burners. They should also be able to describe general considerat ions and
basic procedures associated with planned furnace shutdowns and unplanned, or emergency, furnace shutdowns.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Startup
Describe the major operator responsibilit ies involved in preparing furnace startup.
Explain how and why a furnace is purged.
Describe how to establish the flow of process fluid in a furnace.
Describe how to light gas burners, oil burners, and combinat ion burners.
Describe a typical startup procedure for natural draft and balanced draft furnaces.
Shutdown
Describe a typical planned shutdown procedure.
Ident ify furnace condit ions that may require an emergency, or unplanned shutdown.
Ident ify typical emergency shutdown systems and equipment.
Subjects:
Startup
Preparations
Establishing Flow
Lighting Burners
Shutdown
Planned Shutdown
Emergency Shutdown
Course 31 of 245
Process Operations
HEAT EXCHANGERS: Condensers and Reboilers (IHRDC_OM_AOHCR)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic operation of condensers and reboilers. After
completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the function and operation of a typical condenser, basic procedures
for start ing up and shutt ing down a condenser, and some operator checks that are typically performed during condenser
operation. They should also be able to explain the operation of kett le-type and thermosiphon reboilers, and identify some
operator responsibilit ies associated with reboiler operation.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Condensers
Describe the function of condensers.
Describe the operation of a typical condenser.
Describe the startup procedure for a typical condenser.
Describe a general condenser shutdown procedure.
Describe some checks made during the operation of a condenser.
Reboilers
Describe how a kett le-type reboiler operates.
Describe how a thermosiphon reboiler operates.
Describe some operator responsibilit ies associated with reboiler operation.
Subjects:
Condensers
Condenser Operation
Condenser Startups and Shutdowns
Operator Checks
Reboilers
Kett le-Type Reboilers
Thermosiphon Reboilers
Operator Responsibilit ies
Course 32 of 245
Process Operations
HEAT EXCHANGERS: Cooling Towers (IHRDC_OM_AOHCT)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic operation of a cooling water system and various
types of cooling towers. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how cooling occurs in a cooling tower,
and describe the general design and operation of natural-draft and mechanical-draft cooling towers. They should also be able
to describe general procedures for shutt ing down and start ing up one cell of a mult icell cooling tower. In addit ion, trainees
should be able to describe operator checks that are typically performed on cooling towers, the effects of contaminants on
cooling water, and how chemicals can be safely added to cooling water systems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction
Describe the operation of a basic cooling water system.
Describe what occurs in the tower during the cooling process.
Describe the general operation of a natural-draft cooling tower and the two types of mechanical-draft cooling
towers: induced-draft towers and forced-draft towers.
Operation
Describe a typical shutdown and startup procedure for one cell of a mult icell cooling tower.
Describe typical operator checks for cooling towers.
Chemistry
Explain what suspended and dissolved solids are and how they affect a cooling water system.
Explain how problems caused by suspended and dissolved solids can be minimized.
Explain what dissolved gases and micro-organisms are, how they affect cooling water systems, and how their
effects can be minimized.
Describe ways chemicals are added to cooling water systems.
Describe precautions when working with hazardous chemicals.
Subjects:
Introduction
Cooling Systems
Cooling Tower Design
Operation
Cell Shutdown and Startup
Operator Checks
Chemistry
Cooling Water Contamination
Chemical Addit ion
Course 33 of 245
Process Operations
HEAT EXCHANGERS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOHIN)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to basic principles of heat t ransfer and the components and
operating principles of shell and tube, and plate heat exchangers. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain
what heat is, and describe three ways that heat transfer can occur in a heat exchanger. They should also be able to describe
the basic operation and components of a shell and tube heat exchanger, and identify auxiliary equipment that is commonly
used with heat exchangers. Finally, t rainees should be able to explain how a plate heat exchanger operates and identify its
components.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Principles
Define heat.
Explain heat transfer by conduction, convection, and radiation.
Explain how heat is t ransferred in a typical heat exchanger.
Explain how various factors can affect heat transfer.
Shell and Tube
Describe the operation of typical shell and tube heat exchangers.
Explain how heat exchangers are used as coolers and heaters.
Describe the functions of the auxiliary components used with heat exchangers.
Describe the different flow paths fluids take in shell and tube heat exchangers.
Plate
Describe the basic operation of a plate heat exchanger.
Ident ify the components of a typical plate heat exchanger.
Subjects:
Principles
Heat and Heat Transfer
Heat Transfer Factors
Shell and Tube
Basic Operation
Auxiliary Equipment
Flow Paths
Plate
Operation
Components
Course 34 of 245
Process Operations
HEAT EXCHANGERS: Operation of Shell and Tube Types (IHRDC_OM_AOHOS)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the startup, operation, and shutdown of shell and tube heat
exchangers. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe general procedures for the startup and shutdown of
a shell and tube heat exchanger and ident ify some of the operator responsibilit ies associated with their operation. Trainees
should also be able to identify basic operating problems that may be associated with shell and tube heat exchangers, and
explain how they can be corrected.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Startup and Shutdown
Describe a general procedure for start ing up a shell and tube heat exchanger.
Describe a general procedure for shutt ing down a shell and tube heat exchanger.
Describe general operator responsibilit ies associated with the operation of a shell and tube heat exchanger.
Heat Exchanger Problems
Explain what fouling is and how it can be corrected.
Explain what leakage is and how it can be corrected.
Explain what air or vapor binding is and how it can be corrected.
Subjects:
Startup and Shutdown
Startup
Shutdown
Operator Responsibilit ies
Heat Exchanger Problems
Fouling
Tube Leaks
Air and Vapor Binding
Course 35 of 245
Process Operations
I & C: Automatic Process Control 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOIA1)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with automatic control of process
systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the functions of the four basic elements of an automatic
process control system and explain how a process disturbance can affect a process control system. They should also be able to
explain how feedback control and feedforward control can be used in process control systems. In addit ion, trainees should be
able to explain how resistance, capacitance, dead t ime, and lag t ime can affect a process control system.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Control Methods
State the function of a process control system.
Describe the functions of the four basic elements of an automated process control system.
Explain what a process disturbance is and how it can affect a process control system.
Describe feedback and feedforward control and explain how they can be used in a process control system.
Process Dynamics
Define resistance and capacitance.
Define dead t ime and lag t ime.
Explain how resistance, capacitance, dead t ime, and lag t ime can affect a process control system.
Subjects:
Control Methods
Automatic Control Systems
Feedback Control
Feedforward Control
Process Dynamics
Process Characterist ics
System Responses
Course 36 of 245
Process Operations
I & C: Automatic Process Control 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOIA2)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with control modes used with automatic process control systems.
After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe two-posit ion control, proport ional control, reset control, rate
control, and PID control and explain how each of these control modes works in a control system. They should also be able to
explain how proport ional band applies to a control system.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Two-Position and Proportional
Describe two-posit ion control and explain how it works in a control system.
Describe proport ional control and explain how it works in a control system.
Explain how proport ional band applies to a control system.
Reset, Rate, and PID
Describe reset control and explain how it works in a control system.
Describe rate control and explain how it works in a control system.
Describe PID control and explain how it works in a control system.
Subjects:
Two-Position and Proportional
Two-Posit ion Control
Proport ional Control
Proport ional Band
Reset, Rate, and PID
Reset Control
Rate Control
PID Control
Course 37 of 245
Process Operations
I & C: Measurement of Concentration (IHRDC_OM_AOIMC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some informat ion about analyt ical variables and to some
methods for measuring concentration in liquids and gases. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to define five
analyt ical variables that are commonly measured in plants, and explain how and why analyt ical variables are measured. They
should also be able to describe the basic operat ion of several different types of analyzers that can be used to measure liquid
and gas concentrations.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction to Analytical Measurement
State the general purpose of analyt ical measurements.
Define: concentration, density, clarity, humidity, moisture, and analyzer.
Liquid Concentration Analysis
Explain what pH measurements represent.
Explain how a pH scale is structured and how to interpret pH values.
Describe the basic operation of a typical pH analyzer and a typical electrical conductivity measuring device.
Gas Concentration Analysis
Describe the basic operation of a paramagnetic oxygen analyzer, a thermal conductivity gas analyzer, and a
chromatograph.
Subjects:
Introduction to Analytical Measurement
Analyt ical Variables
Measuring Analyt ical Variables
Liquid Concentration Analysis
What is Concentration?
pH Measurements
pH Analyzer Operation
Conductivity Measurements
Gas Concentration Analysis
Oxygen Concentration Measurement
Non-Oxygen Gas Concentration Measurement
Complex Gas Concentration Measurement
Course 38 of 245
Process Operations
I & C: Measurement of Density, Clarity and Moisture (IHRDC_OM_AOIDC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some devices that can be used to measure density, clarity, and
moisture. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to define various terms associated with density, clarity, and
moisture, and describe the basic operation of devices used to measure density, clarity, humidity, and moisture.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Density Measurement
Define density.
Explain the difference between density and specific gravity.
Describe the basic operation of a hydrometer.
Describe the use of a bubbler system to measure density.
Describe the operation of a radioactive density analyzer.
Clarity Measurement
Define clarity.
Describe the basic operation of a colorimeter, a turbidity meter, and an opacity meter.
Moisture Measurement
Define humidity and moisture.
Describe the basic operation of a sling psychrometer.
Describe the basic operation of a wet and dry bulb recording psychrometer.
Describe the basic operation of a hygrometer.
Describe the basic operation of an infrared moisture analyzer.
Subjects:
Density Measurement
Density and Specific Gravity
Hydrometers
Density Bubbler System
Radioact ive Density Analyzer
Clarity Measurement
Principles of Clarity Analysis
Colorimeter
Turbidity Meter
Opacity Meter
Moisture Measurement
Humidity and Moisture
Measuring Humidity
Measuring Moisture
Course 39 of 245
Process Operations
I & C: Measurement of Level and Flow (IHRDC_OM_AOIML)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to instruments that measure level and flow. After complet ing this
unit, t rainees should be able to explain what level is and describe the basic operation of various direct and indirect level
measurement devices. They should also be able to explain what fluid flow, flow rate, and total flow are and describe some
common examples of direct and indirect flow measurements.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Level Measurement
Define: level, cont inuous level measurement, and single-point level detection.
Describe basic operation of the following level measurement devices: plumb bob, gauge glass, float and tape,
and conductivity probes.
Describe the basic operation of these level measurement devices: pressure gauge, bubbler system, and D/P cell.
Flow Measurement
Define fluid flow, flow rate, and total flow.
List basic units of measurement for flow rate.
Describe common examples of direct flow measurement.
Describe common examples of indirect flow measurement.
Subjects:
Level Measurement
Principles of Level Measurement
Direct Level Measurement Devices
Indirect Level Measurement Devices
Flow Measurement
Principles of Flow Measurement
Direct Flow Measurement Devices
Indirect Flow Measurement Devices
Course 40 of 245
Process Operations
I & C: Measurement of Pressure and Temperature (IHRDC_OM_AOIMP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some of the fundamental aspects of process variable
measurement and to some of the basic instruments used for pressure and temperature measurement. After completing this
unit, t rainees should be able to describe the function of process instrumentat ion and how to obtain accurate readings from
instruments such as gauges, indicators, and recorders. They should also be able to explain what pressure and temperature are
and how they are expressed, and the operat ion of several pressure and temperature measuring devices.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Measuring Process Variables
State the general function of process instrumentation.
List four process variables monitored by process instrumentation.
Explain how parallax can affect an instrument reading.
Explain how to use a mult iplication factor when reading an instrument.
Describe how to read gauges, indicators, recorders, and digital meters.
Pressure Measurement
Define pressure in terms of solids, liquids, and gases.
Describe three types of scales used to indicate pressure.
List basic units of measurement for pressure.
Describe three types of manometers.
Describe the basic operation of Bourdon tube, bellows, and diaphragm pressure elements.
Describe the basic operation of a pressure transmitter.
Temperature Measurement
Explain the general relat ionship between heat and temperature.
List basic units of measurement for temperature.
Describe the basic operation of a fluid thermometer, bimetallic thermometer, thermocouple, and Resistance
Temperature Detector (RTD).
Subjects:
Measuring Process Variables
Process Variables and Inst rumentation
Reading Instruments
Pressure Measurement
Pressure and Pressure Scales
Manometers
Pressure Elements and Transmitters
Temperature Measurement
Temperature and Temperature Scales
Thermometers
Thermocouples and RTDs
Measurement of Level and Flow
Course 41 of 245
Process Operations
INDUSTRIAL MATH: Algebra (IHRDC_OM_AOIAL)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic concepts of algebra. After completing this unit,
t rainees should be able to define terms commonly associated with the use of algebra, isolate an unknown in an equat ion, and
use the processes of distribution and factoring. They should also be able to explain what rat ios and proport ions are, and the
difference between a direct proport ion and an inverse proport ion. Finally, t rainees should be able to use a calculator to solve
math problems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction to Algebra
State the difference between arithmetic and algebraic operations.
Define the terms: constant, unknown, variable, and equation.
Describe how equations are used to solve an arithmetic or algebraic problem.
Explain how to maintain an equation's balance.
Describe how the unknown in an equat ion can be isolated.
Describe the operation of dist ribut ion.
Describe the operation of factoring.
Ratios and Proportions
Explain what a ratio is and how ratios can be expressed.
Explain the difference between a direct proport ion and an inverse proport ion.
Calculators
Explain how to use a calculator.
Subjects:
Introduction to Algebra
Basic Principles
Isolating an Unknown
Distribution
Factoring
Ratios and Proportions
Calculators
Parts of a Calculator
Types of Logic
Course 42 of 245
Process Operations
INDUSTRIAL MATH: Basic Operation 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOIB1)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic principles of addit ion, subtraction, mult iplication, and
division. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how to add, subtract, and mult iply numbers in vert ical
columns, and how to do short and long division. They should also be able to explain powers of numbers and roots of numbers, as
well as shortcuts for mult iplying and dividing with mult iples of ten.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Addition and Subtraction
Define number line.
Describe the basic principles of addit ion and subtract ion.
Describe the base 10 number system.
Describe how to add and subtract numbers in vert ical columns.
Multiplication
Describe the basic principles of mult iplicat ion.
Explain how to use a mult iplication table.
Describe how to mult iply numbers in vert ical columns.
Describe a shortcut for mult iplying with mult iples of ten.
Explain powers of numbers.
Explain roots of numbers.
Division
Describe the basic principles of division.
Explain how short division is done.
Explain how long division is done.
Describe a shortcut for dividing with mult iples of ten.
Describe a shortcut for dividing with powers of numbers.
Subjects:
Addition and Subtraction
Number Line
Addit ion in Vert ical Columns
Subtraction in Vert ical Columns
Multiplication
Principles of Mult iplication
Mult iplication in Vert ical Columns
Powers and Roots
Division
Principles of Division
Long Division
Course 43 of 245
Process Operations
INDUSTRIAL MATH: Basic Operation 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOIB2)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic mathematical operations involving signed numbers,
averaging, rates, fract ions, decimals, and conversions. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to perform basic
mathematical operations with signed numbers, perform combined operations in the proper order, find the average of a group
of numbers, and calculate rates. They should also be able to add, subtract, mult iply, and divide with fract ions and decimals.
Finally, t rainees should be able to convert between fract ions, decimals, and percents; write numbers using scientific notation;
and use conversion tables.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Math Operations
Explain how to do basic math operat ions with signed numbers.
Define grouping symbols.
Explain the order in which combined operations are performed.
Explain how to calculate averages and rates.
Fractions
Explain what a fraction is, and how to add and subtract them.
Describe how to get common denominators, and what a lowest common denominator is.
Explain how to mult iply and divide fractions.
Explain how to express a fraction in simplest terms.
Explain what a mixed number is, and how to convert whole and mixed numbers to fractions.
Decimals and Conversions
Define decimal.
Describe basic math operat ions involving decimals.
Describe how to convert between fractions and decimals.
Describe how to write numbers using scientific notation.
Explain what percents are.
List how to convert between fractions, decimals, and percents.
Describe conversion tables: factor-type and equivalents-type.
Subjects:
Math Operations
Signed Numbers
Combined Operat ions
Averaging
Rates
Fractions
Add and Subtract
Mult iply and Divide
Mixed Numbers
Decimals and Conversions
Decimals
Number Conversions
Conversion Tables
Course 44 of 245
Process Operations
INDUSTRIAL MATH: Formulas, Graphs and Trends (IHRDC_OM_AOIFC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with using formulas, reading
and interpreting graphs, and detecting and analyzing trends. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain
what a formula is and how to use formulas to find areas, volumes, and volumetric flow rates. They should also be able to
describe how graphs and charts can provide information about process variables. In addit ion, trainees should be able to
describe basic procedures for detecting and analyzing trends.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Formulas
Define formula.
Describe how formulas can be used to find areas.
Describe how formulas can be used to find volumes.
Define flow rate.
Describe how to use volumetric flow rate formulas.
Graphs, Charts, and Trends
Describe how graphs can provide information about process variables.
Describe how charts can provide information about process variables.
Describe what a t rend is and explain the difference between expected trends and unexpected trends.
Describe some basic procedures for detecting a trend.
Describe some basic procedures for analyzing a trend.
Subjects:
Formulas
Area
Volume
Volumetric Flow Rate
Graphs, Charts, and Trends
Graphs
Charts
Trends
Course 45 of 245
Process Operations
ON-THE-JOB-TRAINING: Implementation and Evaluation (IHRDC_OM_AOOIE)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with on-the-job training (OJT) of
plant operators. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify qualit ies that an effective OJT instructor should
possess, and describe considerations associated with scheduling, planning for, and conduct ing OJT. They should also be able to
describe how the trainee, the instructor, and the overall OJT program can be evaluated.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Implementation
Ident ify qualit ies and characterist ics of an effective OJT inst ructor.
Ident ify some t raining strategies that an instructor can use during OJT.
Describe considerations involved in scheduling OJT.
Ident ify preparations that should be made before OJT is implemented.
Describe methods of conducting OJT.
Describe coaching skills that an instructor can use during OJT.
Evaluation
Describe how a trainee's performance can be evaluated.
Describe how on-the-job training instructors can evaluate themselves and the OJT program.
Review the main steps and principles of a typical OJT program.
Subjects:
Implementation
The OJT Instructor
Planning for OJT
OJT Methods
Evaluation
Trainee Evaluation
Program Evaluation
OJT Review
Course 46 of 245
Process Operations
ON-THE-JOB-TRAINING: Preparation (IHRDC_OM_AOOPR)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with on-the-job training (OJT) of
plant operators. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to compare OJT and classroom training, and describe the
basic steps in a formalized OJT program. They should also be able to explain how to determine specific training needs for a
trainee, and describe training materials that are commonly used for OJT.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
What is OJT?
Compare OJT and classroom training.
List advantages and disadvantages of OJT.
Ident ify the basic steps included in a formal OJT program.
Training Needs
Ident ify sources of information for analyzing an operator's job.
Explain what a job and task analysis is.
Describe how to profile the trainee and tailor training according to individual needs.
Describe how to determine training needs that are to be met specifically through OJT.
Training Materials
Explain what a performance object ive is.
Describe the use of an OJT t raining checklist .
Ident ify some t raining aids that can be used for OJT.
Subjects:
What is OJT?
OJT vs. Classroom Training
Pros and Cons
Basic Steps
Training Needs
Job and Task Analysis
Trainee Profile
Determining Training Methods
Training Materials
Object ives and Checklists
Training Aids
Course 47 of 245
Process Operations
OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITIES: Communication (IHRDC_OM_AOOCO)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic operator responsibilit ies associated with interpersonal
relationships and data collection and use. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the components of a
basic communication model and an operator's responsibilit ies for communicating with other plant personnel, customers, and
members of the surrounding community. They should also be able to describe operator responsibilit ies associated with
collecting and using written data and part icipating in effective shift changes.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Interpersonal Responsibilities
Describe the components of a basic communicat ion model.
Describe basic operator interpersonal responsibilit ies with the company, peers, supervisory personnel, personnel
in other departments, and new operators.
Ident ify the four steps in an on-the-job training program for new operators.
Describe basic operator interpersonal responsibilit ies with customers and the community.
Data Collection and Use
Describe operator responsibilit ies associated with scheduled readings, statist ical process control (SPC) charts,
sample and laboratory analysis reports and logs.
Ident ify three characterist ics of an effective relief.
Subjects:
Interpersonal Responsibilities
The Communication Model
Inside the Plant
Outside the Plant
Data Collection and Use
Written Data
Oral Data
Course 48 of 245
Process Operations
OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITIES: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOOTC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the general responsibilit ies of an operator in an indust rial
facility. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe operator responsibilit ies associated with process control,
safety, and communication. They should also be able to describe an outside operator's responsibilit ies during inspections and
routine operations, and the general responsibilit ies of a control room operator. They should also be able to describe the effects
that changing weather condit ions have on system operation.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Overview
Describe operator responsibilit ies associated with controlling a product ion process, safe operation of a facility,
and fire and accident prevention.
Explain why good communications are important in an industrial facility.
Ident ify the types of information that an oncoming operator should find out during a shift change.
Plant Operators
Describe an outside operator's responsibilit ies during inspections.
Describe an outside operator's responsibilit ies during routine operat ions.
Describe the general responsibilit ies of a control room operator.
Describe the effects of changing weather condit ions on system operat ion.
Subjects:
Overview
The Operator's Role
Plant Operators
Outside Operators
Control Room Operators
Course 49 of 245
Process Operations
OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITIES: Plant Production and Safety (IHRDC_OM_AOOPP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with operator responsibilit ies during routine plant production
operations and for ensuring safety during all phases of plant operation. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to
describe operator responsibilit ies associated with routine production dut ies, prevent ive maintenance, and troubleshooting.
They should also be able to describe operator safety responsibilit ies for normal and abnormal operations and during scheduled
startups and shutdowns. In addit ion, they should be able to describe the operator's role with respect to permit procedures and
government regulations.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Production
Describe operator responsibilit ies associated with routine product ion duties, data interpretation, waste disposal,
and vapor emissions monitoring.
Describe operator responsibilit ies associated with prevent ive maintenance.
Describe operator responsibilit ies associated with troubleshoot ing.
Safety
Describe operator safety responsibilit ies associated with normal plant condit ions.
Describe operator safety responsibilit ies associated with abnormal plant condit ions.
Describe operator safety responsibilit ies associated with scheduled plant startups and shutdowns.
Describe the operator's role in lockout/tagout procedures and confined space procedures.
Explain, in simple terms, the purposes of the following regulations: HAZCOM, HAZWOPER, and SARA I I I .
Subjects:
Production
Operator Duties
Prevent ive Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Safety
Normal and Abnormal Condit ions
Startups and Shutdowns
Permits and Regulat ions
Course 50 of 245
Process Operations
OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITIES: Trends, Maintenance and Emergencies
(IHRDC_OM_AOOIM)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic operator responsibilit ies associated with trend analysis,
equipment maintenance, and emergency situat ions. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe ways to
detect and analyze trends, explain how work orders are used, and describe how to perform some minor maintenance tasks.
They should also be able to explain how operators can prepare for emergency situations and describe operator responsibilit ies
during emergencies.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Trends
Describe how trends can be detected.
Describe a four-step approach to analyzing trends.
Maintaining Equipment
Explain the purpose of work orders.
Describe how valve packing can be adjusted.
Describe how to safely reset a t ripped circuit breaker.
Describe how to change a strainer basket in a duplex strainer.
Emergency Situations
Explain how operators can prepare for emergency situat ions.
Describe general operator responsibilit ies during emergency situations.
Describe general operator responsibilit ies during fire emergency situations.
Subjects:
Trends
Trend Detection
Trend Analysis
Maintaining Equipment
Work Orders
Operator Tasks
Emergency Situations
Preparing for Emergencies
Responding to Emergencies
Course 51 of 245
Process Operations
PIPING AND AUXILIARIES: Basic Components and Functions (IHRDC_OM_AOPAB)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the basic components commonly found in piping
systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to state the purpose of piping and pipe fitt ings, and be able to list
some common types of pipe fitt ings. They should also be able to describe devices that are used to accommodate the weight
and movement of piping, and to explain how insulation and heat tracing help to control temperatures in piping systems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Pipes and Pipe Fittings
State the purpose of piping.
State the purpose of pipe fitt ings.
Describe the following types of pipe fitt ings: nipple, coupling, union, flange, elbow, tee, Y, bell reducer, bushing,
plug, and cap.
Pipe Weight and Movement
Explain why piping moves and why this movement needs to be controlled.
State the functions of pipe hangers and supports.
State the functions of expansion joints and expansion loops.
Insulation and Heat Tracing
Explain why piping is insulated.
Describe how steam and electrical heat tracing methods work.
Subjects:
Pipes and Pipe Fittings
Pipes and Connections
Types of Pipe Fit t ings
Pipe Weight and Movement
Pipe Supports
Expansion Devices
Insulation and Heat Tracing
Insulation
Heat Tracing
Course 52 of 245
Process Operations
PIPING AND AUXILIARIES: System Components and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOPAS)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the auxiliary components commonly found in piping
systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the function and operation of rupture discs, relief valves,
safety valves, and some common types of steam traps. They should also be able to describe basic procedures for draining liquid
systems and some typical operator checks for fluid systems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Protective Devices
Describe the function and operation of a rupture disc.
Describe the function and operation of a relief valve.
Describe the function and operation of a safety valve.
Steam Traps
Describe the function of a steam trap.
Describe the operation of the following types of mechanical steam traps: float traps and inverted bucket traps.
Describe the operation of a thermostatic steam trap.
Describe some typical operator checks for steam traps.
System Operation
Describe basic procedures for draining liquid systems.
Describe basic procedures for filling liquid systems.
Describe typical operator checks for fluid systems.
Subjects:
Protective Devices
Rupture Discs
Relief Valves
Safety Valves
Steam Traps
Mechanical Steam Traps
Thermostatic Steam Traps
Operator Checks
System Operation
Draining Liquid Systems
Filling Liquid Systems
Operator Checks
Course 53 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Basic Electrical Circuits (IHRDC_OM_AOPBC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic principles associated with the parts and operation of
electrical circuits. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify the parts of a basic circuit, describe the
relationships between voltage, current, and resistance in a circuit, explain how current flows through series circuits and parallel
circuits, describe the basic operation of transformers, fuses, circuit breakers, and solenoids, and explain how voltmeters and
ammeters can help operators detect electrical problems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Basic Circuits
List the parts of a basic circuit .
Explain how Ohm's Law describes the relationships between current, voltage, and resistance in a circuit.
Explain the basic difference between series circuits and parallel circuits with respect to current flow.
Describe the basic operation of a transformer.
Explain the difference between a step-up transformer and a step-down transformer.
Protection and Indicators
State the general function of fuses and circuit breakers.
Describe the basic operation of a fuse.
Describe the basic operation of a circuit breaker.
Describe the basic operation of a solenoid.
Explain how voltmeters and ammeters can help personnel spot electrical problems before equipment damage
occurs.
Subjects:
Basic Circuits
Parts of a Circuit
Ohm's Law
Series and Parallel Circuits
Transformers
Protection and Indicators
Protective Equipment
Voltmeters and Ammeters
Course 54 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Basic Electrical Principles (IHRDC_OM_AOPBE)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of electricity and the basic operation of
electric motors. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain what electricity is, and how it can be produced by
chemical action, heat, light, and magnetic effects. They should also be able to describe the basic operation of a DC motor, a
single-phase AC motor, and a three-phase AC motor.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Electricity
Define the following terms: electrical potential, current, and voltage.
Describe three sources of electrical potential: chemical act ion, heat, and light.
List the three elements necessary to create an electrical potent ial using magnetic effects.
Recognize and describe a sine wave.
Explain the basic differences between single-phase power and three-phase power.
Electric Motors
Describe basic motor action.
Describe the principle of operation of a DC motor.
Describe the principle of operation of an AC motor.
Subjects:
Electricity
What is Electricity?
Chemical Act ion, Heat, and Light
Electricity, Magnetism, and Alternating Current
Electric Motors
Basic Motor Operation
DC Motor Operation
AC Motor Operat ion
Course 55 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Basic Principles (IHRDC_OM_AOPBP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to scientific principles associated with units of measurement and
with force and motion. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to identify fundamental units of measurement for
length, t ime, and mass, and identify fundamental units of measurement for pressure, temperature, flow, and level. They should
also be able to explain the relationship between force and motion and describe the three laws of force and motion.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Unit of Measurement
Ident ify fundamental units of measurement for length, t ime, and mass.
Ident ify fundamental units of measurement for the process variables pressure, temperature, flow, and level.
Force and Motion
Explain the relationship between force and motion.
State the three laws of force and motion.
Define inert ia.
Define acceleration.
Subjects:
Units of Measurement
Fundamental Dimensions
Process Variable Measurements
Force and Motion
Introduction
Laws of Force and Motion
Course 56 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Fluid Systems (IHRDC_OM_AOPFS)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the characterist ics, components, and operation of fluid
systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain, in general terms, what a plant system is, and what a fluid
is. They should also be able to explain the basic layout of a liquid system and describe energy conversions in a liquid system.
Trainees should also be able to describe the basic parts of a compressed air system and the basic operation of several gas and
vapor system devices.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Liquid Systems
Explain, in general terms, what a plant system is.
Explain what a fluid is.
Describe the effects of pressure changes on a static fluid.
Describe the four basic parts of a liquid system.
Describe the effects of energy conversions on a fluid under steady-state condit ions.
Describe some of the energy conversions that take place in liquid systems.
Gas and Vapor Systems
Describe the basic parts of a typical compressed air system.
Describe the operation of a jet pump.
Describe the operation of a nozzle.
Describe the operation of a condenser.
Subjects:
Liquid Systems
Systems and Fluids
Basic System Layout
Energy Conversions
Gas and Vapor Systems
Compressed Air System
Gas and Vapor System Devices
Course 57 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Forces and Machines (IHRDC_OM_AOPLM)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to scientific principles associated with applied forces and the
operation of basic machines. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to define work, power, and efficiency, and
explain the mechanical advantage of the inclined plane and the lever. They should also be able to explain the hydraulic
principle and the relationship between frict ion and the operation of machines.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Work, Power, and Efficiency
Define work and explain its relat ionship to energy.
Define power.
Explain why efficiency is important to plant operation.
Basic Machines
Define mechanical advantage.
Explain the mechanical advantage of the inclined plane.
Explain the mechanical advantage of the lever.
Explain the hydraulic principle and give examples of where it applies.
Discuss some of the effects of frict ion.
Subjects:
Work, Power, and Efficiency
Work
Power
Efficiency
Basic Machines
The Inclined Plane
The Lever
The Hydraulic Principle
Frict ion
Course 58 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Gases and Flowing Liquids (IHRDC_OM_AOPGF)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with general concepts associated with the propert ies of gases
and flowing liquids. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to describe the major propert ies of gases and explain
how these propert ies are related. They should also be able to explain how pressure can be measured and the effects of flow,
velocity, and frict ion on the head pressure of a liquid.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Gas Properties
Describe the effects of temperature and pressure on gases.
Explain how Boyle's Law and Charles' Law relate to the pressure and volume of gases.
Explain how the General Gas Law relates to temperature, pressure and volume of a gas.
Measuring Pressure
Explain how atmospheric pressure can be measured.
Describe the effects of pressure on a manometer.
Explain how various scales can be used to measure pressure.
Flowing Liquids
Define: flow, flow rate, steady-state condit ions, stat ic condit ions, head, and head pressure.
Describe the effects of flow on pressure.
Describe the effects of velocity on pressure.
Describe the effects of frict ion on pressure.
Subjects:
Gas Properties
Temperature and Pressure Effects
Gas Laws
Measuring Pressure
Atmospheric Pressure
Manometers
Pressure Scales
Flowing Liquids
Flow and Flow Rate
Effects of Flowing Liquids
Course 59 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Heat (IHRDC_OM_AOPHE)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some of the basic principles associated with heat and heat
t ransfer. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to describe some of the effects of heat, the relationship between
temperature and thermal energy, and the Law of Energy Conservat ion. Trainees should also be able to define terms sensible
heat and latent heat and to describe the effects of pressure on the temperature at which a substance undergoes a phase
change.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
What Is Heat?
Describe some of the effects of heat.
Describe the relationship between temperature and thermal energy.
Describe the Law of Energy Conservation.
Phase Changes
Define sensible heat and latent heat.
Describe the effects of pressure on the temperature at which a substance undergoes a phase change.
Subjects:
What is Heat?
Effects of Heat
Temperature and Thermal Energy
The Law of Energy Conservation
Phase Changes
Sensible Heat and Latent Heat
Temperature and Pressure
Course 60 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Heat Transfer (IHRDC_OM_AOPHT)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the fundamentals of heat transfer and the basic operation of a
typical heat exchanger. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the effects of a temperature difference
on heat t ransfer and the three modes of heat transfer. They should also be able to describe the basic operation of a shell and
tube heat exchanger and identify problems that can occur in a heat exchanger.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Heat Transfer Fundamentals
Describe the effects of temperature difference on heat t ransfer.
Define specific heat and give examples.
Recognize the formula for heat transfer.
Modes of Heat Transfer
List and describe the three modes of heat transfer.
Describe conduct ion heat transfer.
Describe natural convect ion and forced convection.
Describe how heat transfer takes place between two fluids separated by a solid boundary.
Describe what affects heat transfer between two fluids.
Describe radiation heat transfer.
Heat Exchanger Operation
Describe the general operation of a shell and tube heat exchanger.
Describe the operation of a lube oil cooler.
Describe problems that can occur in heat exchangers and explain how these problems can be minimized.
Describe the insulating effects of rust and scale buildup.
Subjects:
Heat Transfer Fundamentals
The Process of Heat Transfer
Specific Heat
Heat Transfer Formula
Modes of Heat Transfer
Conduction
Convection
Radiation
Heat Exchanger Operation
Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers
Heat Exchanger Problems
Course 61 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Process Dynamics and Measurement (IHRDC_OM_AOPPD)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the characterist ics of dynamic process operation and with
devices that are commonly used to measure process variables. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain
what resistance and capacitance are in process systems and to describe factors that affect the response of a process system
to operating changes and process disturbances. Trainees should also be able to describe devices that can be used to measure
pressure, flow, level, and temperature.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Dynamic Operation
Describe resistance and capacitance in process systems.
Describe and give examples of system characterist ics between periods of steady-state condit ions when
changes occur.
Process Variable Measurement
Describe ways that pressure can be measured.
Describe ways that flow can be measured.
Describe ways that level can be measured.
Describe ways that temperature can be measured.
Subjects:
Dynamic Operation
Resistance and Capacitance
System Response to Changes
Process Variable Measurement
Pressure Measurement Devices
Flow Measurement Devices
Level Measurement Devices
Temperature Measurement Devices
Course 62 of 245
Process Operations
PLANT SCIENCE: Solids and Liquids (IHRDC_OM_AOPSL)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic scientific principles that relate to solids and liquids.
After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the general molecular structure of solids, liquids, and gases. They
should also be able to describe specific propert ies attributed to solids and liquids.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Forms of Matter
Ident ify the three forms of matter and explain how they are structured.
Give a general descript ion of the molecular structure and the characterist ics of solids, liquids, and gases.
Compare and contrast the molecular structures of different solids.
Explain why liquids can flow.
Solids
Define mass, density, and stress.
Ident ify five types of stress and their effects on solids.
Define elast icity and temperature.
Describe the effects of temperature on solids.
Liquids
Describe how liquids seek their own level.
Define viscosity.
Describe the property of wett ing and explain why it occurs.
Describe buoyancy and explain why it occurs.
Describe specific gravity and how it relates to density.
Describe the effects of temperature and pressure on liquids.
Subjects:
Forms of Matter
Solids
Mass and Density
Stress and Elast icity
Temperature Effects
Liquids
Propert ies of Liquids
Temperature and Pressure Effects
Course 63 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT BOILERS: Abnormal Conditions and Emergencies
(IHRDC_OM_AOBAC)
Overview:
This is an interactive training module designed to familiarize trainees with some abnormal operating condit ions that a boiler
operator may encounter on the job. Specific attention is directed to typical procedures used by plants to handle these
situations and to the methods and means available to the operator to anticipate problems and to minimize the chances of
their occurring.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Common Problems
Describe typical procedures for dealing with the loss of certain boiler auxiliaries.
Describe basic procedures for dealing with leaks that occur inside and outside a boiler.
Describe how safety valves are used to protect boilers against overpressure.
Describe what boiler operators should do to deal with leaking safety valves.
Describe basic procedures for dealing with fires in coal yards, bunkers, feeders, pulverizers, and air preheaters.
Explain how equipment fires start and identify actions that operators should avoid when equipment fires occur.
Boiler Explosions
Describe some of the basic causes of boiler explosions.
Explain what operators can do to help prevent boiler explosions.
Describe some situations that can cause a loss of all boiler flame.
Describe some basic procedures for preventing a loss of all boiler flame.
Subjects:
Common Problems
Loss of Auxiliaries
Leaks
Overpressure
Equipment Fires
Boiler Explosions
Causes of Explosions
Loss of Flame
Course 64 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT BOILERS: Combustion and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOBCO)
Overview:
The requirements for combustion in a boiler are identified and described. This unit traces the air and gas flow path through a
typical boiler and describes the functions of the components in the flow path. Principles of boiler operation from an operator's
point of view are identified and described.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Combustion
List elements needed for combustion in a boiler.
Describe the parts and function of a typical burner in a boiler furnace and howthe burner helps to satisfy the
elements of combust ion in a boiler.
Describe the fuel system for a typical coal-fired boiler.
Describe a typical burner for an oil-fired boiler.
Describe a typical burner for a gas-fired boiler.
Define the following terms: fuel/air rat io, excess air, and excess oxygen.
Describe operator responsibilit ies associated with maintaining the correct fuel/air rat io.
Air and Gas
Trace the air and gas flow path through a boiler.
Explain how hot combustion gases are used to increase boiler efficiency.
Describe the basic operation of two types of air preheaters.
Describe some of the harmful effects that can be caused by combustion gas by-products.
Describe equipment commonly used to remove part iculates and harmful gases from combustion gases.
Boiler Operation
Describe the location and purpose of boiler vents.
Describe the location and purpose of boiler drains.
Explain what blowdown valves are.
State the purpose of soot blowing.
Describe the operation of a typical soot blower.
Subjects:
Combustion
Elements of Combustion
Boiler Fuel Systems
Fuel/Air Rat io
Air and Gas
Air and Gas Flow Path
Pollut ion Controls
Boiler Operation
Vents, Drains, and Blowdown Valves
Soot blowing
Course 65 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT BOILERS: Normal Operations (IHRDC_OM_AOBNO)
Overview:
This is an interactive module designed to present an overview of the basic procedures for normal operations of a drum-type
boiler. Trainees will learn what is meant by steady state condit ions and efficiency, the basic instrumentation used to monitor the
operation of a boiler, how steam temperature is controlled, and the basic procedures for ash handling.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Overview
Explain what steady state condit ions for a boiler are.
Describe some of the systems and components that must be monitored during boiler operation under steady
state condit ions.
Describe typical operator concerns associated with the energy losses that occur during normal operation of a
boiler.
Monitoring and Controlling Operations
Describe basic operator responsibilit ies for monitoring a boiler's steam/water circuit .
Describe typical control room instrumentation that is used to monitor a boiler's steam/water circuit.
Describe basic operator responsibilit ies for monitoring combust ion and the air/gas circuit for a boiler.
Describe typical control room instrumentation that is used to monitor combustion and the air/gas circuit for a
boiler.
Describe some of the basic systems and components checks that operators perform during normal boiler
operation.
Describe five methods that are used in power plants for controlling steam temperature.
Ash Handling
Describe the basic procedures for removing bottom ash.
Describe the basic procedures for removing fly ash.
Subjects:
Overview
Steady State Condit ions
Energy Losses
Monitoring and Controlling Operations
The Steam/Water Circuit
The Air/Gas Circuit
Steam Temperature
Ash Handling
Bottom Ash
Fly Ash
Course 66 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT BOILERS: Startup and Shutdown (IHRDC_OM_AOBSS)
Overview:
This is an interactive training module designed to familiarize trainees with basic techniques for start ing up and shutt ing down
drum-type boilers. After completing this module, the t rainees should be able to describe basic procedures for performing a cold
startup of a drum-type boiler, light ing off the furnace, warming up the boiler and establishing the boiler flame. They should also
be able to describe basic procedures for shutt ing down a typical drum-type boiler. In addit ion, the trainees should be able to
compare and contrast the startup and shutdown of a drum-type boiler with the startup and shutdown of a once-through
boiler.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Basic Procedures
Describe basic checks that boiler operators make during an init ial pre-startup walkthrough.
Describe typical procedures for a cold startup of a controlled circulation, drumtype boiler.
Describe basic preparat ions for lighting off the furnace, how light-off is init iated, and how a typical boiler is
warmed up.
Describe how pulverizers are started up and controlled.
Describe how the main coal burners are ignited and controlled.
Describe the basic procedures for shutt ing down a typical drum-type boiler.
Once-Through Boilers
Describe the basic differences and similarit ies between the operation of a oncethrough boiler and a drum-type
boiler.
Describe how a steam/water separation system is used during the startup and the shutdown of a once-through
boiler.
Subjects:
Basic Procedures
Cold Startup
Light-off and Warmup
Establishing a Boiler Flame
Shutdown
Once-Through Boilers
Basic Operations
Steam/Water Separation
Course 67 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT BOILERS: Water and Steam (IHRDC_OM_AOBWS)
Overview:
This unit begins by explaining why water circulates in a boiler, and describes the flow path of water through a typical
drum-type boiler. Differences between natural circulation and controlled circulation are explained, and the components and
functions of a typical boiler drum are examined. The unit goes on to explain how the components found in a steam flow path
affect the production and use of steam. The unit concludes with a look at what the crit ical point is, and why some boilers
operate at or above crit ical condit ions. Also covered is the operator's role in maintaining the correct steam pressure in
drum-type and once-through boilers.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Water
State the purposes of water circulation in a boiler.
Describe the water flow path through a typical drum-type boiler.
Describe the basic principle of natural circulation and two factors that can affect it .
Describe the differences between natural and controlled circulations.
Describe the functions and components of a typical boiler drum.
Steam
Define: boiling, saturation, temperature, and superheat.
Describe the steam flow path from the boiler to the condenser in a typical generating unit.
State the function of a superheater and describe how superheaters can be classified.
State the function of a desuperheater.
State the function of a reheater and describe how reheaters can be classified.
Describe the basic operation of a condenser.
Supercritical Boilers
Define crit ical point .
Explain why some boilers operate above the crit ical point.
Describe the flow path of water in a once-through boiler.
State the advantages and disadvantages of a once-through supercrit ical boiler.
Explain how steam pressure is maintained in drum-type and once-through boilers.
Subjects:
Water
Water Flow Path
Circulation
Boiler Drum
Steam
Introduction
Steam Flow Path
Supercritical Boilers
Crit ical Condit ions
Once-Through Boilers
Boiler Operations
Course 68 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT OPERATION: Basic Principles (IHRDC_OM_AOOBP)
Overview:
At the complet ion of this inst ructional unit, t rainees will be able to describe how plant systems respond to changes in load on a
unit, and list operator responsibilit ies during load changes. In addit ion, trainees will be able to describe the functions of bearings,
operation of sliding surface bearings and rolling contact bearings, operator responsibilit ies associated with bearings, and how
bearings are lubricated.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Load Changes
Describe how a plant responds to changes in load on a unit.
Describe the basic responsibilit ies of an operator during a load change.
Bearings and Lubrication
Describe two major types of bearings.
Describe the basic functions of all bearings.
Describe the operation of a typical sliding surface bearing.
Describe the operation of rolling contact bearings.
Describe some of the basic bearing checks operators perform.
Describe how grease is used as a lubricant.
Describe how oil is used as a lubricant.
Subjects:
Load Changes
Plant Responses
Operator Responses
Bearings and Lubrication
Bearings
Lubrication
Course 69 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT OPERATION: Safety and Pollution Control (IHRDC_OM_AOOSP)
Overview:
Trainees are introduced to plant safety concepts through a discussion of how a combination of plant procedures and common
sense are used to protect operators on the job. They are also introduced to potential pollut ion problems in a power plant and
the equipment used to deal with these potential problems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Plant Safety
Describe some of the basic protect ive equipment that operators commonly use.
Describe how a tagging system is used to provide protection to personnel working on plant equipment.
Pollution Control
Ident ify a source of air pollut ion in a power plant.
Describe some of the techniques used to control air pollut ion released by a plant.
Ident ify a source of thermal pollut ion in a power plant.
Describe operator responsibilit ies for monitoring thermal pollut ion leaving the plant.
Ident ify a major source of water pollut ion in a power plant.
Describe operator responsibilit ies for monitoring wastewater leaving the plant.
Describe some of the equipment that can be used to minimize the effects of noise pollut ion.
Subjects:
Plant Safety
Personal Protection
Plant Safety
Pollution Control
Air Pollut ion
Thermal Pollut ion
Water Pollut ion
Noise Pollut ion
Course 70 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Bearings and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOTBO)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic principles associated with turbine shaft bearing
lubrication, turbine speed control, and turbine operation. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and
describe the functions of the components of a typical turbine lube oil system. They should also be able to describe the basic
components and operat ion of a typical turbine speed control system.
In addit ion, they should be able to describe operator responsibilit ies associated with turbine startup, operation, and shutdown.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Bearing Lubrication
State the functions of the following basic components typically found in a turbine lube oil system: reservoir, main
lube oil pump, booster pump, and lube oil coolers.
State the functions of the following addit ional components typically found in a turbine lube oil system: AC
auxiliary pump, DC emergency pump, AC turning gear pump, and vapor extractor.
Explain why it is important to make sure that the controllers for the standby oil pumps are in the standby or
automatic posit ions.
Describe a situation in which increase in bearing oil temperature could indicate a problem.
Describe a situation in which an increase in bearing oil temperature is considered normal.
Turbine Control
Ident ify two major systems commonly used to control turbine speed.
Describe the basic components of a turbine speed control system.
Describe how turbine speed is controlled by a mechanical-hydraulic control system with a flyweight governor.
Describe what happens when a turbine trip occurs.
Turbine Operation
Explain why the warmup period is important.
Explain why it is important to prevent water buildup and describe how this is done.
Describe the steps involved in a typical shutdown procedure.
Subjects:
Bearing Lubrication
Basic Components
Addit ional Components
Operator Responsibilit ies
Turbine Control
Basics
Example
Turbine Operation
Startup
Normal Operation and Shutdown
Course 71 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Boiler and Turbine Protection (IHRDC_OM_AOPPB)
Overview:
This unit describes the basic operat ion and startup requirements of a balanced-draft, controlled circulation, drum-type boiler. It
also identifies common problems that affect the combustion side of a boiler and the water and steam side of a boiler, and it
describes automatic controls and operator actions that address those problems. The unit goes on to describe common turbine
problems, including temperature- and pressure-related problems, overspeed, vibration and eccentricity. Automatic protective
devices and operator actions that address those problems are also described.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Boilers
Describe the basic operation of a balanced-draft, controlled circulation, drumtype boiler.
Ident ify and describe the basic requirements for start ing up a boiler.
Ident ify common boiler combustion problems.
Describe automatic controls that regulate the combustion process.
Describe actions that operators can take to address combustion problems.
Ident ify automatic protect ive devices associated with the combust ion process.
Ident ify common problems that occur on the water and steam side of a boiler.
Describe actions that operators can take to address water and steam problems.
Ident ify automatic protect ive devices associated with the boiler steam/water cycle.
Turbines
Ident ify common temperature-related and pressure-related turbine problems.
Describe actions that operators can take to address turbine problems related to temperature and pressure.
Ident ify automatic protect ive devices associated with temperature and pressure problems.
Describe turbine problems associated with overspeed, vibration and eccentricity.
Describe actions that operators can take to address overspeed, vibration and eccentricity problems.
Ident ify automatic protect ive devices associated with overspeed, vibration and eccentricity problems.
Subjects:
Boilers
Basic Operation and Startup
Combustion Problems
Water and Steam Problems
Turbines
Temperature and Pressure Problems
Overspeed, Vibration and Eccentricity
Course 72 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Condensate and Feedwater Systems (IHRDC_OM_AOCFS)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic layout of a typical condensate and feedwater
system and the basic operation of the system's individual components. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to
identify the components in a condensate and feedwater system and describe the basic operation of each component. They
should also be able to explain how the system normally operates, describe operator responsibilit ies associated with normal
operation, and identify some common operat ing problems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
System Overview
Describe the basic layout of a typical condensate and feedwater system.
Describe the basic function and operation of the individual components in a typical condensate and
feedwater system.
System Operation
Describe the normal operation of a typical condensate and feedwater system and identify typical operator
responsibilit ies that are associated with normal operation.
Ident ify and describe some common operating problems that may occur in a condensate and feedwater
system and describe basic steps for dealing with these problems.
Subjects:
System Overview
System Layout
System Components
System Operation
Normal Operation
Operating Problems
Course 73 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Condenser and Circulating Water (IHRDC_OM_AOPPC)
Overview:
This training unit provides basic information about the design and function of power plant condensers and circulating water
systems. It describes the operation of a single-pass condenser and a two-pass condenser, as well as various air removal system
components. The unit also covers the basic operation of a once-through circulating water system, and it describes how
mechanical draft cooling towers and natural draft cooling towers work.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Condensers
Describe the basic function of a condenser.
Describe the operation of a single-pass condenser and a two-pass condenser.
Describe the basic function of an air removal system.
Describe the operation of a reciprocating vacuum pump, a rotary vacuum pump and an air ejector.
Ident ify and describe routine checks that operators should perform on a condenser.
Circulating Water Systems
Describe the basic operation of a once-through circulat ing water system.
Describe how mechanical draft cooling towers and natural draft cooling towers function.
Subjects:
Condensers
Function and Design
Air Removal Systems
Condenser Operation
Circulating Water Systems
Once-Through Systems
Cooling Towers
Course 74 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Fundamentals (IHRDC_OM_AOPPF)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with various types of hazards that may exist in a power plant.
After completing this unit, the trainees should be able to identify common types of mechanical and electrical hazards,
temperature and pressure hazards, and fire and chemical hazards. They should also be able to describe devices and
techniques that can be used to prevent or minimize these hazards.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Mechanical & Electrical
Describe condit ions that commonly lead to material and equipment failure.
Ident ify ways to detect equipment failure.
Describe common electrical hazards in a power plant.
Ident ify devices used to prevent or minimize electrical hazards.
Temperature & Pressure
Ident ify devices used to prevent abnormal temperature condit ions.
Ident ify devices used to prevent abnormal pressure condit ions.
Chemical & Fire
Ident ify common chemical hazards in a power plant
Ident ify ways to prevent chemical hazards.
Describe fire protection systems commonly found in power plants.
Subjects:
Mechanical & Electrical
Equipment Failure
Electrical Hazards
Temperature & Pressure
Abnormal Temperature
Abnormal Pressure
Chemical & Fire
Chemical Hazards
Fire Protection
Course 75 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Integrated Systems (IHRDC_OM_AOPPI)
Overview:
In this unit , t rainees will learn what logic diagrams are and how they are used to represent the functions carried out by plant
protection equipment. Common types of logic gates are identified and described, and interlock logic is examined. The unit also
describes how logic diagrams can be used to represent condit ions that cause boiler trips, turbine trips and generator trips, and
it explains how the protection systems for boilers, turbines and generators are interrelated.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Logic Diagrams
Describe what logic diagrams are and how they can be used to represent functions carried out by plant
protection equipment.
Describe the functions of AND gates, OR gates, NOT gates and t ime delay (TD) gates in logic circuits.
Describe what interlocks are and how the actions of interlocks associated with boiler operations are
represented in logic diagrams.
Trip Logic
Describe how logic diagrams can be used to represent condit ions that cause equipment trips.
Ident ify condit ions that can cause a boiler trip and describe how a logic diagram can be used to illustrate
those condit ions.
Ident ify condit ions that can cause a turbine trip and describe how a logic diagram can be used to illustrate
those condit ions.
Ident ify condit ions that can cause a generator trip and describe how a logic diagram can be used to illustrate
those condit ions.
Describe how the protection systems for boilers, turbines and generators are interrelated.
Subjects:
Logic Diagrams
Overview
Logic Gates
Interlock Logic
Trip Logic
Boiler Trips
Turbine Trips
Generator Trips
Integrated Protection
Course 76 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Power and Energy (IHRDC_OM_AOPPE)
Overview:
This unit will introduce trainees to basic components of a power system and describe how these components are arranged to
deliver power to customers. It will also examine the energy conversions that are necessary to produce power in a power plant
and discuss basic principles of how an operator responds to emergency condit ions.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
The Power System
State the function of a generator.
Define the following terms: unit, watt, and megawatt.
Describe how power is typically dist ributed to customers.
Define the following terms: switchyard, substations, and power system.
Define demand.
Describe the function of the load dispatcher.
Explain why there are variat ions in demand.
Explain why supply must always equal demand.
Energy Conversion
Explain how energy is converted to produce electricity in fossil fuel plants.
State some of the advantages and disadvantages of fossil fuel plants.
Explain how energy is converted to produce electricity in gas turbine plants.
State some of the advantages and disadvantages of gas turbine plants.
Explain how energy is converted to produce electricity in nuclear plants.
State some of the advantages and disadvantages of nuclear plants.
Subjects:
The Power System
Generat ing Power
Distributing Power
Demand
Energy Conversion
Fossil Fuel Plants
Gas Turbine Plants
Hydroelectric Plants
Nuclear Power Plants
Course 77 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Power Generation (IHRDC_OM_AOPGE)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion of an AC generator and auxiliary systems
and components associated with it . After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how voltage is induced in an
AC generator, how an AC generator produces current, and how an AC generator can be cooled.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Generating Electricity
Name the basic parts of a generator and describe the function of each in inducing voltage.
Describe the primary difference between a single-phase generator and a threephase generator.
Name two factors that determine the frequency of the current produced by a generator.
Explain why the frequency of a generator's output must be controlled.
Explain the function of the exciter in a generator.
Name the parts of a DC exciter and the parts of a brushless exciter and describe their functions.
Generator Cooling
Explain why a large generator is typically cooled with hydrogen instead of air.
Explain the function of an oil seal in a hydrogen-cooled generator.
Describe how hydrogen is supplied to a generator cooling system.
Explain the purpose of each of the following components in a hydrogen generator cooling system: purity
analyzer, core monitor, hydrogen dryer, liquid detector.
Explain how carbon dioxide and air are used to purge a generator cooling system.
Describe the flow of water in a typical stator cooling system.
Describe the function of each of the following components in a typical stator cooling system: temperature
control valve, pressure control valve, demineralizer.
Subjects:
Generating Electricity
Principles of Induction
Output Frequency
Generator Excitation
Generator Cooling
Hydrogen Cooling
Cooling Auxiliary Systems
Gas Purging
Stator Cooling System
Course 78 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Steam Cycle (IHRDC_OM_AOPSC)
Overview:
In this unit , main components of the steam cycle in a fossil fuel fired power plant will be identified. The unit will also trace the
order in which steam and water flow through these components in order to show how the components are arranged.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Components
Describe how a boiler works.
Describe how fuel and air are supplied to a boiler.
Describe how a turbine works.
Describe how a condenser works.
Describe the function of the condensate-feedwater system.
Describe the function of the circulating water system.
Describe the function of the makeup water system.
Flow
Describe how steam and water move through the steam cycle.
Describe how the flow of steam and the flow of water are controlled.
Describe how the flow of fuel to the boiler can be controlled.
Describe three general actions that must be taken during any emergency.
Describe the emergency act ions that must be taken if there is a loss of flame in the boiler.
Subjects:
Components
Boilers
Turbines
Condensers
Flow
Movement of Steam and Water
Steam and Water Flow Control
Fuel Flow Control
Emergencies
Course 79 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Steam Flow (IHRDC_OM_AOTSF)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with the construction and
operation of steam turbines. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to state the functions of the main parts of a
typical turbine and describe how steam causes impulse blades and reaction blades to turn a turbine's wheels. They should also
be able to describe the purpose and operat ion of a gland steam seal system, a gland steam seal exhaust system, a carbon
seal, and a water seal.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Construction and Rotation
State the functions of the following turbine parts: wheels, blades, diaphragms, steam chest , nozzle block, and
rotor.
State the functions of stop valves and control valves.
Describe how steam causes impulse blades to turn a turbine's wheels.
Describe how steam causes reaction blades to turn a turbine's wheels.
State the functions of reheat stop valves and intercept valves.
Define a turbine trip and describe how it protects a turbine.
Sealing Systems
Describe the purpose for and operat ion of a gland steam seal system.
Describe the purpose for and operat ion of a gland steam seal exhaust system.
Describe the operation of a carbon seal.
Describe the operation of a water seal.
Subjects:
Construction and Rotation
Construction
Rotation
Sealing Systems
Steam Seals
Carbon and Water Seals
Course 80 of 245
Process Operations
POWER PLANT TURBINES: Steam Systems (IHRDC_OM_AOPPS)
Overview:
This is an interactive training module designed to present basic information on the steam/water cycle in a power plant. Specific
attention is directed to the main steam system, the reheat steam system, the extract ion steam system and the auxiliary steam
system. Basic procedures for a plant startup and several operator checks on steam systems and components are also included.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Systems and Components
Describe how steam flows through the various steam systems that make up a typical power plant's
steam/water cycle.
Ident ify the components of a main steam system and describe their functions.
Ident ify the components of a reheat steam system and describe their functions.
Explain why steam piping contains expansion loops and bends.
Ident ify the components of an extraction steam system and describe their functions.
Explain how an extraction steam system improves plant efficiency.
Describe typical uses of auxiliary steam in a power plant.
Ident ify some typical components of an auxiliary steam system and describe their functions.
Describe how the components that control the pressure and temperature of auxiliary steam operate.
Systems Operations
Describe some basic procedures for removing accumulated condensate and gradually warming up steam
systems components during a plant startup.
Describe some basic checks that operators should make to ensure that steam systems and their components
are operating properly.
Subjects:
Systems and Components
Steam/Water Cycle
Main Steam System
Reheat Steam System
Extraction Steam System
Auxiliary Steam System
Systems Operations
Plant Startup
Systems Inspections
Course 81 of 245
Process Operations
PROCESS SAMPLING: Obtaining Samples (IHRDC_OM_AOPOS)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic concepts associated with obtaining samples of
process materials. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe hazards associated with sampling and the
precautions that may be required. They should also be able to take contaminant-free representative samples of process liquids,
solids, and gases.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction
Explain why samples are taken in process systems.
Describe some hazards associated with sampling materials.
Describe protective clothing that should be worn when taking samples of hazardous and non-hazardous
materials.
Describe two types of respirators worn when sampling involves materials that produce harmful dust part icles or
toxic fumes.
Liquids
Describe how to keep liquid samples from being contaminated when they are taken.
Explain how to make sure that a representative sample of a liquid is obtained.
Describe information typically included on a sample label.
Solids and Gases
Describe how to obtain contaminant-free representat ive samples of process solids.
Describe how to obtain contaminant-free representat ive samples of process gases.
Subjects:
Introduction
Basic Principles
Protective Clothing
Respirators
Liquids
Preparing to Sample
Obtaining a Sample
Labeling a Sample
Solids and Gases
Sampling Solids
Sampling Gases
Course 82 of 245
Process Operations
PROCESS SAMPLING: Testing Samples (IHRDC_OM_AOPTS)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic procedures for performing tests on samples of process
materials and products. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how to perform a pH test , a percent
solids test , a specific gravity test , and a t it rat ion. They should also be able to describe the operat ion of a gas chromatograph
and how it is used to perform tests on complex gas mixtures or solut ions.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
pH and Percent Solids
Describe how a pH test is performed.
Describe how a percent solids test is performed.
Specific Gravities and Titrations
Describe how a specific gravity test is performed.
Describe how a t it rat ion is performed.
Gas Chromatographs
Describe how a gas chromatograph operates.
Describe how to perform a gas chromatograph test.
Subjects:
pH and Percent Solids
pH Tests
Percent Solids Tests
Specific Gravities and Titrations
Specific Gravity Tests
Tit rat ions
Gas Chromatographs
Operation
Performing a Test
Course 83 of 245
Process Operations
PUMPS: Basic Types and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOPBT)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic components and operation of posit ive displacement
pumps and centrifugal pumps. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how pumps can be identified,
identify the basic components of a pump, and describe the functions of various types of pump auxiliary equipment and
systems. They should also be able to describe the general operation of reciprocating and rotary posit ive displacement pumps,
and single-stage and mult istage centrifugal pumps.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Pump Fundamentals
Given a simple system diagram, locate each pump, tell what it does, and ident ify it by one or more names.
Ident ify the casing, the inlet , and the out let on a pump.
Name two general categories of pumps.
Explain the functions of the following types of pump auxiliary equipment and systems drivers, couplings, strainers,
lubricating systems, packing, and mechanical seals.
Positive Displacement Pumps
Describe the general operation of a reciprocating posit ive displacement pump.
Describe the general operation of a rotary posit ive displacement pump.
Centrifugal Pumps
Describe the general operation of a single-stage centrifugal pump.
Describe the general operation of a mult istage centrifugal pump.
Subjects:
Pump Fundamentals
Pump Identification
Pump Components
Auxiliary Equipment
Positive Displacement Pumps
Reciprocating Pumps
Rotary Pumps
Centrifugal Pumps
Single-Stage Pumps
Mult istage Pumps
Course 84 of 245
Process Operations
PUMPS: Fundamentals of Centrifugal Types (IHRDC_OM_AOPFC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the fundamental operating principles of single-stage and
mult istage centrifugal pumps. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the general operating principles of
a centrifugal pump. Specifically, they should be able to describe the differences between radial, axial, and mixed flow pumps,
and describe the basic operation of a vert ically-mounted and mult istage pump. Trainees should also be able to describe the
purpose and the basic operation of a mechanical seal flush system.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Centrifugal Pump Operation
Describe general operating principles of a centrifugal pump.
Explain differences between radial flow, axial flow, and mixed flow pumps.
Explain the principles of operation of a vert ically mounted centrifugal pump.
Describe the basic operation of a typical mult istage centrifugal pump.
Describe two ways that mult istage centrifugal pumps can minimize axial thrust.
Centrifugal Pump Components
Explain the differences between an open impeller, a closed impeller, and a semi-open impeller.
Compare and contrast a single-suction impeller and a double-suction impeller.
Describe the general design and function of a diffuser.
Describe the purpose and basic operation of a mechanical seal flush system.
Subjects:
Centrifugal Pump Operation
Principles of Operat ion
Vert ical Pumps
Mult istage Pumps
Centrifugal Pump Components
Impellers and Diffusers
Mechanical Seal Systems
Course 85 of 245
Process Operations
PUMPS: Operation of Centrifugal Types (IHRDC_OM_AOPOC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion of centrifugal pumps. After complet ing
this unit, t rainees should be able to describe techniques for priming a centrifugal pump and explain general procedures for
start ing and shutt ing down a pump. Trainees should also be able to describe some general checks that may be made on an
operating pump and describe operator concerns related to air and vapor binding in a centrifugal pump.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Startup and Shutdown
Describe techniques used to prime a centrifugal pump.
Describe a procedure for start ing up a centrifugal pump.
Describe a procedure for shutt ing down a centrifugal pump.
Pump Operation
Describe checks that should be made on an operating centrifugal pump and its auxiliary equipment.
Describe indications of air binding and vapor binding in a pump and some of the possible sources of in-leakage
to a pump.
Subjects:
Startup and Shutdown
Priming
Pump Startup and Shutdown
Pump Operation
Operator Checks
Air Binding and Vapor Binding
Course 86 of 245
Process Operations
PUMPS: Performance and Inspection (IHRDC_OM_AOPER)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to factors that affect the performance of pumps and some of the
symptoms of improper pump operation. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to ident ify and explain the
relationship between various factors that affect pump performance, and to explain how pump performance can be
evaluated. They should also be able to identify symptoms of some common pump problems and explain how to check a pump
for signs of problems such as leaks and cavitation.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Pump Performance
Define and explain the relat ionship between the following: static head, dynamic head, suction head, discharge
head, and total head.
Describe some basic ways pump performance can be determined.
Explain the relationship between minimum net posit ive suction head and cavitation.
Pump Inspection
Ident ify symptoms that may indicate abnormal pump operation.
Ident ify pump components that should be checked for leaks.
Describe common symptoms of cavitation.
List some ways to stop or minimize cavitation.
Subjects:
Pump Performance
Head
Suction Head and Cavitation
Pump Inspection
Symptoms of Pump Problems
Checking for Leaks
Checking for Cavitation
Course 87 of 245
Process Operations
PUMPS: Reciprocating Positive Displacement Types (IHRDC_OM_AOPRE)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic parts and operation of several types of
reciprocating posit ive displacement pumps. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the general
operation of the following types of pumps: single-acting piston pumps, single-acting plunger pumps, double-acting piston
pumps, duplex piston pumps, motor-driven diaphragm pumps, and air-operated diaphragm pumps. Trainees should also be
able to describe a general procedure for start ing up and shutt ing down a typical reciprocat ing pump, and to explain the
function and operation of a relief valve.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Piston and Plunger Pumps
Describe the general operation of a single-acting piston pump.
Describe the general operation of a plunger pump.
Describe the general operation of a double-acting piston pump.
Describe the general operation and an advantage of a duplex piston pump.
Diaphragm Pumps
Describe the general operation of a motor-driven diaphragm pump.
Describe the general operation of an air-operated diaphragm pump.
Pump Operation
Describe a general procedure for start ing up a reciprocating pump.
Describe a general procedure for shutt ing down a reciprocating pump.
Explain the purpose of a relief valve.
Subjects:
Piston and Plunger Pumps
Single-Acting Pumps
Double-Act ing Pumps
Duplex Pumps
Diaphragm Pumps
Motor-Driven Diaphragm Pumps
Air-Operated Diaphragm Pumps
Pump Operation
Pump Startup and Shutdown
Relief Valves
Course 88 of 245
Process Operations
PUMPS: Rotary Positive Displacement Types (IHRDC_OM_AOPRP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic parts and operation of several types of rotary
posit ive displacement pumps. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the general operation of the
following types of pumps: screw pumps, gear pumps, lobe pumps, vane pumps, and tubing pumps. They should also be able to
describe a general procedure for start ing up and shutt ing down a typical rotary pump, and to explain the function and
operation of a relief valve.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Types of Rotary Pumps
Describe the general operation of a progressive cavity pump.
Describe the general operation of a two-screw pump.
Describe the general operation of an external gear pump and an internal gear pump.
Describe the general operation of a lobe pump.
Describe the general operation of a sliding vane pump and a flexible vane pump.
Describe the general operation of a tubing pump.
Operating Procedures
Describe procedures involved in start ing up a rotary posit ive displacement pump.
Describe procedures involved in shutt ing down a rotary posit ive displacement pump.
Explain the purpose of a relief valve.
Subjects:
Types of Rotary Pumps
Screw Pumps
Gear and Lobe Pumps
Vane Pumps
Tubing Pumps
Operating Procedures
Rotary Pump Startup and Shutdown
Relief Valves
Course 89 of 245
Process Operations
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: Basic Concepts (IHRDC_OM_AORBC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some of the basic principles of refrigeration system operation.
After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain what refrigerat ion is and how heat transfer occurs in a
refrigeration system. They should also be able to describe the basic parts, or steps, of a refrigerat ion cycle and explain how
these steps can be carried out by specific refrigeration system components.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Fundamentals
Define refrigeration.
Explain what a refrigerant is.
Explain the basic difference between sensible heat transfer and latent heat transfer.
Describe how pressure and temperature can affect heat transfer.
Define heat source and heat sink.
Refrigeration Systems
Describe the processes involved in a typical refrigeration cycle.
Describe the devices that accomplish the basic functions of a typical refrigeration cycle.
Explain how a refrigeration system can be used with a secondary cooling system.
Subjects:
Fundamentals
Introduction to Refrigeration
Heat Transfer
Refrigeration Systems
Basic Refrigeration Cycle
Refrigeration Components
Secondary Cooling Systems
Course 90 of 245
Process Operations
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOROP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation of vapor compression refrigeration systems
and absorpt ion refrigeration systems. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to describe the components and
operations of a vapor compression system and an absorption system. They should also be able to describe control devices,
indicat ing inst ruments, and operator checks associated with these systems, and identify some operating problems that may
occur.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Types of Systems
Ident ify the components of a typical vapor compression refrigerat ion system.
Describe the operation of a vapor compression refrigeration system.
Describe the operation of one type of absorption refrigeration system.
System Operation
Describe some control devices commonly used with refrigerat ion systems.
Describe some monitoring and indicat ing inst ruments commonly used with refrigeration systems.
Describe some operator checks commonly performed on a refrigerat ion system.
Ident ify some operating problems that may occur in a typical refrigeration system.
Subjects:
Types of Systems
Vapor Compression System
Absorption System
System Operation
Controls
Indicators and Checks
Operating Problems
Course 91 of 245
Process Operations
STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL: Basic Control Charts (IHRDC_OM_AOSBC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the basic control charts used in Statist ical Process
Control (SPC). After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the characterist ics of X+ charts, R charts, moving
X+ charts, moving R charts, and individual X charts. They should also be able to explain what each chart represents and how to
plot values on each chart.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Control Charts - 1
Describe how SPC is helpful in responding to an out-of-control process.
Explain what X+ charts represent.
Describe how to plot values on an X+ chart.
Explain what R charts represent.
Describe how to plot values on an R chart .
Explain why an X+ and an R chart are commonly used together.
Describe how to recognize abnormal variat ions on X+ charts and R charts.
Control Charts - 2
Describe the characterist ics of moving X+ charts.
Describe how to plot values on a moving X+ chart.
Describe the characterist ics of moving R charts.
Describe how to plot values on a moving R chart.
Describe the characterist ics of individual X charts.
Describe how to plot values on an individual X chart .
Subjects:
Control Charts - 1
SPC and Control Charts
X+ Charts
R Charts
Examples
Control Charts - 2
Moving X+ Charts
Moving R Charts
Individual X Charts
Course 92 of 245
Process Operations
STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOSIN)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of Statist ical Process Control (SPC). After
completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain what SPC is and how it can be applied to a process. They should also be
able to describe the basic elements of an SPC control chart and relate an SPC control chart to an X-Y graph and to a normal
distribution curve.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
What is SPC?
Define quality in terms of the process industry.
Explain what Statist ical Process Control (SPC) is.
Describe the benefits of SPC.
Describe how SPC was developed.
Applying SPC
Describe what a process is.
Ident ify factors that affect a process.
Describe the two basic types of variat ion in a process.
Ident ify factors that affect how SPC is applied to a process.
Charts
Describe how to plot values on a basic X-Y graph.
Explain what a histogram is and how it relates to SPC control charts.
Explain what a standard deviation is.
Ident ify the basic elements of a typical Shewhart control chart.
Relate a Shewhart control chart to a normal distribution curve.
Subjects:
What is SPC?
SPC and Product Quality
Origin of SPC
Applying SPC
Factors Affecting a Process
Application to a Process
Charts
X-Y Graph
Histogram
Shewhart Control Chart
Course 93 of 245
Process Operations
STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL: Process Variations (IHRDC_OM_AOSPV)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some basic techniques for using Statist ical Process Control
(SPC) to recognize and respond to variat ions in plant processes. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe
how plotted values on control charts can be interpreted, describe how an operator can use SPC to recognize and respond to
out-of-control condit ions and process instability, describe basic considerat ions for using SPC with a computer, and explain how
to use various types of attribute charts.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Control Charts
Describe how plotted values on control charts can be interpreted.
Describe common patterns of instability and identify condit ions that can cause these patterns to occur.
Operating with SPC
Describe how an operator can use SPC to recognize and respond to problems in a process.
Define CUSUM and explain how it can be used.
Describe how using CUSUM compares to using control charts.
Describe two common causes of an off-aim condit ion.
Describe how to reset CUSUM and how to set a new aim.
Attribute Charts
Define the terms defect and defective product.
Describe how to use C charts, U Charts, NP charts, and P charts.
Subjects:
Control Charts
Interpreting Charts
Recognizing Patterns
Operating With SPC
Using SPC
CUSUM
Attribute Charts
Types of Charts
Course 94 of 245
Process Operations
TROUBLESHOOTING: Basic Concepts (IHRDC_OM_AOPOB)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with troubleshooting a problem in
a process system. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain what t roubleshooting is, and how it can be
carried out as a systematic, logical procedure. They should also be able to explain how to apply the major steps of a basic
t roubleshooting procedure to a problem in a process.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction
Define t roubleshooting.
Ident ify and describe the main steps involved in troubleshooting.
Ident ify various sources of information that can be used for troubleshooting.
Explain how the following process of elimination methods are applied in troubleshooting: input/output test ing,
bracketing, the serial method, and the half-splitt ing method.
Troubleshooting
Describe a basic wastewater treatment process.
Describe how to troubleshoot a problem in a wastewater treatment process.
Subjects:
Introduction
What is Troubleshooting?
Process of Elimination
Troubleshooting
Process
Problem
Course 95 of 245
Process Operations
TROUBLESHOOTING: Process Examples (IHRDC_OM_AOPOP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with troubleshooting problems in
process systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to follow a logical, systematic troubleshooting procedure to
identify and correct process problems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Exercise 1 - Tank Level
Describe how troubleshooting techniques can be used to find and correct a problem in a process system. The
system in this example transfers liquid from a storage tank to a process feed tank.
Exercise 2 - Fluid Transfer
Describe how troubleshooting techniques can be used to find and correct a problem in a process system. The
system used in this example t ransfers feed material to a dist illat ion process.
Exercise 3 - Process Column
Describe how troubleshooting techniques can be used to find and correct a problem in a process system. The
system used in this example is a dist illat ion process.
Subjects:
Exercise 1 - Tank Level
Exercise 2 - Fluid Transfer
Exercise 3 - Process Column
Course 96 of 245
Process Operations
VALVES: Basic Types and Operation 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOVB1)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic parts and operation of valves commonly used in
process systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the purpose and uses of valves in process
systems, identify the main parts of a typical valve, and describe the function of each part. They should also be able to describe
the specific uses, parts, and operat ion of gate valves, globe valves, plug valves, ball valves, and butterfly valves.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction to Valves
Describe purposes and uses of valves in process systems.
Describe how valves are lined up.
Ident ify main parts of a typical valve and their functions.
Describe flanged, threaded, and welded methods of attaching valves to piping systems.
Describe the locations of typical valve leaks and how to stop a packing leak.
Describe one method of lubricating a typical valve.
Valve Types
Describe the function and operation of gate valves.
Describe typical applications of gate valves.
Describe the functions and operation of globe and needle valves and their typical applicat ions.
Ident ify a plug valve and describe its function and operation.
Ident ify a three-way and a four-way valve and describe their function and operat ion.
Describe typical applications of plug valves.
Ident ify a ball valve and describe its function and operation.
Describe typical applications of ball valves.
Ident ify a butterfly valve and describe its function and operat ion.
Describe typical applications of butterfly valves.
Subjects:
Introduction to Valves
Valves and the Process System
Valve Parts
Valve Problems and Maintenance
Valve Types
Gate Valves
Glove Valves
Plug Valves
Ball Valves
Butterfly Valves
Course 97 of 245
Process Operations
VALVES: Basic Types and Operation 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOVB2)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some valves that are commonly used to isolate components,
to thrott le flow, to prevent reverse flow through a process system, and to protect systems from overpressure condit ions. After
completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and describe the basic functions and operat ion of diaphragm valves,
pinch valves, and check valves. They should also be able to explain how relief valves and safety valves protect system
equipment and piping from excessive pressure.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Valve Types
Ident ify a diaphragm valve and describe its functions and operation.
Ident ify a pinch valve and describe its functions and operation.
Ident ify swing check valves, lift check valves, and ball check valves, and describe their functions and
operation.
Relief and Safety Valves
Describe the function and operation of relief valves.
Describe typical uses of relief valves.
Describe the function and operation of safety valves.
Describe typical uses of safety valves.
Subjects:
Valve Types
Diaphragm Valves
Pinch Valves
Check Valves
Relief and Safety Valves
Relief Valves
Safety Valves
Course 98 of 245
Process Operations
VALVES: Electric and Hydraulic Actuators (IHRDC_OM_AOVEH)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to various types of electric and hydraulic actuators that are used
to control valves in process systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of
solenoid actuators, motor-operated actuators, and various types of hydraulic actuators. They should also be able to explain
the funct ion of a pilot valve and describe problems associated with hydraulic actuators.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Electric Actuators
Describe the basic operation of a solenoid actuator.
Describe the basic operation of a motor-operated actuator.
Describe the function of torque switches.
Describe the function of limit switches.
Hydraulic Actuators
Describe the operation of a single-acting, spring-return hydraulic actuator.
Describe the basic operation of a double-acting hydraulic actuator.
Describe the function of a pilot valve.
Describe some ways to identify actuator problems.
Subjects:
Electric Actuators
Solenoid Actuators
Motor-Operated Actuators
Hydraulic Actuators
Single-Acting Hydraulic Actuators
Double-Act ing Hydraulic Actuators
Pilot Valves
Hydraulic Actuator Problems
Course 99 of 245
Process Operations
VALVES: Introduction of Actuators (IHRDC_OM_AOVIA)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to actuators in general, and pneumatic actuators, in part icular.
After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and describe three basic types of actuators and explain how
actuators posit ion control valves. They should also be able to describe the basic design and operation of single- and double-
acting diaphragm actuators, single- and double-act ing piston actuators, van actuators, and posit ioners. Finally, t rainees
should be able to describe some common actuator problems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Actuators and Control Valves
Define actuator and describe three basic types of actuators.
Describe the function of an actuator.
Describe the function of a controller.
Describe the function of a control valve.
Pneumatic Actuators
Describe the basic design and operation of single-acting diaphragm and double-acting actuators.
Describe the basic operation of single-acting and double-act ing piston actuators.
Describe the basic operation of a vane actuator.
Describe the function and basic operation of a posit ioner.
Describe some ways to identify actuator problems.
Describe some ways that an operator can identify actuator problems.
Describe a general procedure for handling a control valve failure.
Subjects:
Actuators and Control Valves
Types of Actuators
Control Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Single-Acting Diaphragm Actuators
Double-Act ing Diaphragm Actuators
Single- and Double-Act ing Piston Actuators
Van Actuators
Posit ioners
Actuator Problems
Course 100 of 245
MAINTENANCE CURRICULUM
International Human Resources Development Corporation
Operations & Maintenance e-Learning
For The Oi l And Gas Indus t r y
Maintenance
BEARINGS: Fundamentals (IHRDC_OM_AMBIN)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of bearings. After
completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic functions of bearings, the various types of sliding surface and
rolling contact bearings, and the procedures for removing a rolling contact bearing from a shaft . They should also know how to
install a rolling contact bearing on a shaft.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Bearing Basics
State three basic functions of bearings.
Describe two basic categories of bearings.
Describe journal bearings and how they are constructed.
Describe thrust bearings and how they are constructed.
Describe basic methods of lubricating sliding surface bearings.
Describe common types of sliding surface bearing failures.
Describe the basic construction of a typical rolling contact bearing.
Describe each of the following rolling contact type bearings: shallow groove ball bearings, deep groove ball
bearings, spherical race ball bearings, cylindrical roller bearings, t apered roller bearings, barrel roller bearings,
needle roller bearings, rolling contact t hrust bearings, and angular contact bearings.
Explain how rolling contact bearings can be lubricated.
Describe common types of rolling contact bearing failures.
Bearing Maintenance
Describe a procedure for removing a rolling contact bearing from a shaft .
Describe a procedure for cleaning and inspect ing a rolling contact bearing.
Describe a procedure for installing a new rolling contact bearing on a shaft.
Subjects:
Bearing Basics
Operation
Sliding Surface Bearings
Rolling Contact Bearings
Bearing Maintenance
Bearing Removal
Bearing Installat ion
Course 101 of 245
Maintenance
BEARINGS: Rolling Contact (IHRDC_OM_AMBRB)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of rolling contact
bearings. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe common types of rolling contact bearings, and explain
how they can be mounted and lubricated. Trainees should also be able to explain how to remove a failed rolling contact
bearing and how to install a new one.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Basic Concepts
Describe the basic functions of a bearing.
Ident ify the basic parts of a typical rolling contact bearing.
Describe common types of ball bearings.
Describe common types of roller bearings.
Explain the difference between a press fit and a push fit .
Describe common methods of mount ing rolling contact bearings.
Describe types of bearing housings.
Describe a common oil lubrication system for rolling contact bearings.
Describe a common method of greasing a bearing.
Bearing Failure and Removal
Describe symptoms and causes of common types of rolling contact bearing failures.
Describe a procedure for removing a rolling contact bearing from a shaft .
Installation
Describe preparations for installing a new rolling contact bearing.
Describe a procedure for installing a rolling contact bearing.
Subjects:
Basic Concepts
Functions and Features
Types of Bearings
Mountings and Housings
Lubrication
Bearing Failure and Removal
Types of Failures
Removal Technique
Installation
Preparing for Installat ion
Installat ion
Course 102 of 245
Maintenance
BEARINGS: Sliding Surface (IHRDC_OM_AMBSB)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of sliding surface
bearings. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe common types of journal bearings and thrust bearings,
and explain how sliding surface bearings can be lubricated. They should also be able to describe common indications of
bearing performance and common types of sliding surface bearing failures. Addit ionally, they should be able to describe
procedures for disassembling, inspecting, and reassembling journal bearings and thrust bearings.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Basic Concepts
Describe two general categories of sliding surface bearings.
Describe common types of journal bearings.
Describe common types of thrust bearings.
Describe the process of film lubrication.
Describe ways that sliding surface bearings can be lubricated.
Performance
Describe common indications of bearing performance.
Describe inst ruments that can be used to measure indicat ions of bearing performance.
Describe common causes of sliding surface bearing failure.
Maintenance
Describe a procedure for disassembling a journal bearing.
Describe what to look for during an inspection of a disassembled journal bearing.
Describe how to check the total clearance between a journal bearing and a shaft.
Describe a procedure for reassembling a journal bearing.
Describe how to take a thrust reading.
Describe a procedure for disassembling a thrust bearing.
Describe what to look for during the inspection of a disassembled thrust bearing.
Describe a procedure for reassembling a thrust bearing.
Subjects:
Basic Concepts
Types
Lubrication
Performance
Performance Indications
Types of Failure
Maintenance
Journal Bearing
Thrust Bearing
Course 103 of 245
Maintenance
CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Breakers and Switchgear 1 (IHRDC_OM_AECLV)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of low voltage circuit
breakers and switchgear. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of a circuit breaker
and the basic functions of switchgear. They should be able to explain how an arc forms and how arcs can be ext inguished, and
also describe basic procedures for racking out a circuit breaker and performing maintenance and test ing on it .
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Basic Operation
Describe how an electromagnet ic t rip device operates in a typical circuit breaker.
Describe how a thermal element t rip device operates in a typical circuit breaker.
Describe how a dashpot can be used to delay the movement of a trip device.
Describe ways in which circuit breaker contacts can be closed.
Describe the functions of three sections of a typical switchgear assembly.
Describe how a typical circuit breaker is connected to primary power and control power.
Principles of Circuit Interruption
Describe what an arc is and how it forms.
Describe how speed, distance, and cooling affect ext inguishing an arc.
Describe how a metal fin arc chute can be used to ext inguish an arc in a typical circuit breaker.
Explain what current zero is.
Maintenance
Describe a procedure for racking a circuit breaker out for preventive maintenance.
Describe a procedure for cleaning and inspect ing a typical circuit breaker as part of preventive maintenance.
Describe how arc chutes and contacts are inspected and cleaned on a typical circuit breaker.
Describe how to clean a typical circuit breaker during an overhaul.
Describe how primary and secondary disconnect fingers are inspected on a typical circuit breaker.
Describe how to lubricate the moving parts in the operating mechanism of a typical circuit breaker.
Describe three checks that can be performed on the movable and stationary contacts of a typical circuit
breaker.
Describe how to perform an instantaneous trip test and a t ime delay trip test on a typical circuit breaker.
Subjects:
Basic Operation
Circuit Breakers
Switchgear
Principles of Circuit Interruption
Arcs
Ext inguishing an Arc
Maintenance
Prevent ive Maintenance
Overhaul
Test ing
Course 104 of 245
Maintenance
CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Breakers and Switchgear 2 (IHRDC_OM_AECHV)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of high voltage
breakers and switchgear. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of an air-magnetic
circuit breaker and an oil circuit breaker. They should also be able to explain how each type of circuit breaker ext inguishes an
arc, and describe basic procedures for racking out high voltage circuit breakers and performing maintenance and test ing on
them.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Principles of Operation
Describe the main components of a typical air-magnet ic circuit breaker.
Describe how an arc is ext inguished in a typical air-magnet ic circuit breaker.
Describe the main components of a typical oil circuit breaker.
Describe how an arc is ext inguished in a typical oil circuit breaker.
Describe a typical undervoltage and overvoltage protection system used with high voltage circuit breakers.
Maintenance of Air-Magnetic Circuit Breakers
Describe one way to disconnect an air-magnet ic circuit breaker from power.
Describe how to inspect the interior of an empty switchgear cell.
Describe how to inspect the arc chutes and arc runners on a typical air-magnet ic circuit breaker.
Describe how to inspect and clean the stat ionary and movable contacts on a typical air-magnet ic circuit
breaker.
Describe how to inspect the operating mechanism and the primary and secondary disconnects on a typical
air-magnetic circuit breaker.
Describe how to perform electrical tests on a typical air-magnetic circuit breaker.
Maintenance of Oil Circuit Breakers
Describe a procedure for electrically isolating a typical oil circuit breaker.
Explain why an oil sample is typically taken from an oil circuit breaker before maintenance is performed.
Describe a procedure for disassembling a typical oil circuit breaker.
Describe how the contacts and the operating mechanism are maintained on a typical disassembled oil circuit
breaker.
Describe a procedure for reassembling a typical oil circuit breaker.
Subjects:
Principles of Operation
Air-Magnetic Circuit Breakers
Oil Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection
Maintenance of Air-Magnetic Circuit Breakers
Preparations
Inspection and Cleaning
Electrical Tests
Maintenance of Oil Circuit Breakers
Preparations
Inspection, Cleaning, and Reassembly
Course 105 of 245
Maintenance
COMPRESSORS: Centrifugal (IHRDC_OM_AMCCC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to explain centrifugal compressor components and operat ion. It also covers
disassembly and reassembly of a vert ically split compressor and the various checks and measurements that are made to
compressor components.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction
Describe the operation of a centrifugal compressor.
Ident ify the components of a horizontally split centrifugal compressor.
Ident ify the components of a vert ically split centrifugal compressor.
Describe the main components of a compressor lubrication system.
Define surging.
Compressor Overhaul
Describe some common precautions and preparations associated with centrifugal compressor maintenance.
Describe one way to remove intercoolers, diffusers, impellers, diffuser covers, and pinion shaft assemblies from a
vert ically split centrifugal compressor.
Describe some common checks and measurements that are made during a compressor overhaul.
Describe a procedure for reassembling a vert ically split centrifugal compressor.
Subjects:
Introduction
Components and Operation
Support Systems
Compressor Overhaul
Maintenance Practices
Disassembly
Component Inspection
Reassembly
Course 106 of 245
Maintenance
COMPRESSORS: Reciprocating (IHRDC_OM_AMCAC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of reciprocating
compressors. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify the main components of a reciprocating compressor,
explain how the compressor operates, and describe routine maintenance tasks that are commonly performed on reciprocating
compressors. They should also be able to describe tasks generally associated with a compressor overhaul.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Compressor Basics
Ident ify the main components of a reciprocating air compressor.
Describe the general operation of a reciprocating air compressor.
Describe factors that determine air compressor design.
Describe components that are part of lubrication, air flow, cooling, and moisture removal systems in a typical
reciprocating air compressor.
Describe tasks rout inely performed to maintain the efficiency of a reciprocat ing air compressor.
Overhaul
Ident ify and describe components of a reciprocating air compressor that are removed during compressor
disassembly.
Describe a procedure for disassembling a reciprocat ing air compressor.
Describe a procedure for cleaning and inspect ing internal components of a reciprocating air compressor.
Describe a procedure for reassembling a reciprocating air compressor.
Subjects:
Compressor Basics
Components and Operation
Rout ine Maintenance
Overhaul
Disassembly
Cleaning and Inspection
Reassembly
Course 107 of 245
Maintenance
DIAGRAMS: Blueprints (IHRDC_OM_AEDBL)
Overview:
This interactive training unit introduces the basic features of const ruction blueprints. After completing this unit, t rainees should
be able to describe various types of blueprints; identify lines, symbols, and abbreviations that are commonly found in blueprints;
and explain how to properly care for blueprints.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction
Describe what a blueprint is, and identify some of the methods used to create blueprints.
Ident ify two basic types of drawings that can be used to illustrate objects on paper.
Describe the types of drawings typically included in a set of blueprints:
Working Drawings (plan views, elevation drawings, section drawings, detail drawings)
Auxiliary Drawings (electrical plans, HVAC plans, plumbing plans, door and window schedules, framing
plans)
Describe the basic elements of a blueprint, including the design drawing area, t it le block, revision block, legend
and scale.
Scales and Symbols
Describe the Engineer's, Architect's and Metric scales commonly used as measuring tools for blueprints.
Describe the following types of lines commonly used on blueprints:
Property lines
Boundary lines
Main object lines
Hidden lines
Center lines
Dimension and extension lines
Break lines
Section lines
Reference lines for sections
Leader lines
Ident ify examples of building material symbols, electrical symbols, plumbing and piping symbols and door and
window symbols commonly used on blueprints.
Ident ify abbreviations commonly used on blueprints.
Using Blueprints
Describe how dimensions are used on blueprints to show sizes and distances.
Ident ify rules for protecting blueprints during their use.
Subjects:
Introduction
What is a Blueprint?
Working Drawings
Parts of a Blueprint
Scales and Symbols
Types of Scales
Line Scales
Symbols
Abbreviations
Using Blueprints
Dimensions
Care of Blueprints
Course 108 of 245
Maintenance
DIAGRAMS: Electrical (IHRDC_OM_AEDEL)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with various types of electrical diagrams. After completing this
unit, t rainees should be able to explain why symbols are used on electrical diagrams, and how to obtain informat ion from a t it le
block and an equipment location index. They should also be able to explain how to use each of the following types of
diagrams: block, single line, schematic, wiring, connection, interconnection, and raceway.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Diagram Basics
Explain why symbols are used on electrical diagrams.
State the purpose of the American Standard Device Function Numbers Table and the Standard Diagram
Abbreviations Table. State the purpose of legends on electrical diagrams.
Describe information commonly found in t it le blocks on electrical diagrams.
State the purpose of notes on electrical diagrams.
Define equipment locat ion index.
Describe how to use an equipment location index.
Types of Diagrams
State the purpose of a block diagram.
State the purpose of a single line diagram.
Ident ify symbols commonly used on single line diagrams.
Describe information that can be found on single line diagrams.
State the purpose of a schematic diagram.
Describe how to read a schematic diagram.
State the purpose of a wiring diagram.
Describe how to use a wiring diagram to locate components.
State the purpose of a connection diagram.
Describe how to read a connect ion diagram.
State the purpose of an interconnection diagram.
Describe how to read an interconnection diagram.
State the purpose of a raceway diagram.
Describe how to read a raceway diagram.
Explain how to use Raceway Notes, Symbols, and Detail Reference, and a Raceway Schedule.
Subjects:
Diagram Basics
Symbols
Tit le Blocks
Equipment Location Index
Types of Diagrams
Block Diagrams
Single Line Diagrams
Schematic Diagrams
Wiring Diagrams
Connection Diagrams
Raceway Diagrams
Course 109 of 245
Maintenance
DIAGRAMS: Industrial Process Systems (IHRDC_OM_AEDPR)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to plant system diagrams and diagram symbols. After completing
this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and describe the purpose of several kinds of system diagrams, and describe the
information found on each type. Trainees should also be able to identify symbols commonly used on piping and instrumentation
diagrams (P&IDs), describe the types of informat ion typically found on a legend, and use a P&ID to locate the components of a
system.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Types of Diagrams
Ident ify and describe the purpose of equipment arrangement diagrams, elevation drawings, piping system
(flow) diagrams, piping and instrumentat ion diagrams (P&IDs), electrical diagrams, and legends.
Describe, in general terms, the information found on each type of diagram.
Flow Diagram Symbols
Ident ify some of the basic symbols associated with flow diagrams.
Ident ify symbols commonly used to represent components in flow diagrams.
Briefly describe the basic operat ion of the components typically found in a fluid system.
Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams
Ident ify instruments using an identification chart.
Ident ify line symbols and instrument symbols used in piping and instrumentation diagrams.
Using a System Diagram
Describe the types of information typically found on a legend.
Locate the components in a boiler fuel oil system by identifying the symbols used to represent them.
Subjects:
Types of Diagrams
Equipment Location Diagrams
System Diagrams
Flow Diagram Symbols
Tanks, Pumps, and Valves
Actuators
Heat Exchangers
Using a System Diagram
Legends
Using a System Diagram
Course 110 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRIC MOTORS: AC Motor Controllers 1 (IHRDC_OM_AEEA1)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic funct ions and operation of AC motor controllers.
After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how an AC motor controller operates and describe the operation
of master switches and pilot devices that can be used with AC motor controllers. They should also be able to explain how an
AC motor can provide overload protection and low voltage protection, and to describe the operation of special types of AC
motor controllers.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction
Describe how a manual controller can be used to control a motor.
Describe how a magnetic controller can be used to control a motor.
Describe the parts and operation of a typical magnetic contactor.
Describe the operation of a magnetic contactor in a typical AC motor controller.
Describe the operation of maintaining master switches and momentary master switches.
Describe the operation of float switches, pressure switches, limit switches, and flow switches.
Describe the operation of bellows thermostats and bimetallic strip thermostats.
Explain how a mercury switch can be used in a pilot device.
Protective Devices
State the purpose of overload devices.
Describe the parts and operation of two types of thermal overload devices.
Describe the parts and operation of a typical magnetic overload device.
State the purpose of low voltage protection in a magnetic motor controller.
Describe the operation of an LVP and an LVR motor controller.
Explain how a low voltage relay operates.
Special Motor Controllers
Explain how a reduced voltage start motor controller provides protect ion to motors when they are first started.
Describe the operation of a two-speed and a reversible motor controller.
Subjects:
Introduction
Basic Principles
Contactors
Master Switches and Pilot Devices
Protective Devices
Overload Protection
Low Voltage Protection
Special Motor Controllers
Reduced Voltage Start
Two-Speed
Reversible
Course 111 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRIC MOTORS: AC Motor Controllers 2 (IHRDC_OM_AEEA2)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic procedures for troubleshooting and maintaining AC
motor controllers. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to use diagrams and charts to obtain information about
an AC motor controller. They should also be able to explain how to troubleshoot a problem in an AC motor controller and how
to inspect and clean a controller's parts.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction
Explain how to use a schematic diagram to obtain informat ion about the operation of an AC motor controller.
Explain how to use a wiring diagram to locate the components in an AC motor controller.
Describe a typical legend and a typical sequencing chart.
Describe a basic procedure for troubleshooting an AC motor controller.
Ident ify and describe typical sources of information about the normal operat ion of an AC motor controller.
Ident ify and describe possible sources of informat ion about an AC motor controller malfunction.
Describe how to use a schematic diagram to diagnose an AC motor controller malfunction.
Troubleshooting
Describe how a voltage tester can be used to locate a malfunction in an energized AC motor controller.
Describe how to test an AC motor controller to determine if it is de-energized.
Describe how a megohmmeter can be used to test a de-energized AC motor controller for grounds.
Describe how a mult imeter can be used to locate an open and a short in a
de-energized AC motor controller.
Maintenance
Explain why an AC motor controller should be kept clean.
Describe how an AC motor controller can be cleaned.
Describe a basic procedure for inspecting an AC motor controller's magnetic contactor.
Describe how to inspect an AC motor controller's wiring and components.
Subjects:
Introduction
Diagrams and Charts
Procedures
Troubleshooting
Energized Controllers
De-Energized Controllers
Maintenance
Cleaning
Inspection
Course 112 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRIC MOTORS: DC Motors (IHRDC_OM_AEEDM)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of DC motors. After
completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the operation and basic parts of a DC motor. They should also be able
to describe basic procedures for maintaining and overhauling a DC motor.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Motor Principles
Explain what motor action is.
Describe armature reaction in DC motors.
Ident ify the basic parts of a DC motor.
Explain how DC motors can be classified.
Motor Maintenance
Describe problems that can occur with the brushes in a DC motor.
Describe the characterist ics of a good brush.
Explain how to inspect and replace brushes in a DC motor.
Describe how a commutator can be cleaned.
Describe typical commutator problems.
Describe a basic procedure for troubleshooting a DC motor's armature and field windings and their
connect ions.
Describe how to test for grounds, opens, and shorts in a DC motor.
Motor Overhaul
Describe how to disassemble a DC motor.
Describe how to inspect and clean a disassembled DC motor.
Describe how to reassemble a DC motor.
Subjects:
Motor Principles
Motor Action
DC Motors
Motor Maintenance
Brushes and Brush Rigging
Commutators
Troubleshooting
Motor Overhaul
Disassembly
Inspection and Cleaning
Reassembly
Course 113 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRIC MOTORS: Motor Branch Circuit Protection (IHRDC_OM_AEEMB)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of motor branch
circuits. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the components of a typical motor branch circuit,
preventive maintenance procedures, and one way to troubleshoot a problem in a motor branch circuit.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Motor Branch Circuits
Describe a typical motor branch circuit.
Ident ify and describe protect ion devices typically used in motor branch circuits.
Describe a procedure for overriding a safety switch enclosure interlock.
Describe general characterist ics of fuses commonly used in motor branch circuits.
Describe how to determine what size fuse to use when the proper fuse rating for a motor branch circuit is
unknown.
Describe a typical molded-case circuit breaker and explain how it can be reset.
Describe the operation of thermal, magnetic, and thermal-magnetic molded-case circuit breakers.
Maintenance
Describe a low-impedance grounding system typically used with motor branch circuits and explain how it can
be maintained.
Describe a general preventive maintenance procedure for a motor branch circuit.
Describe one way to troubleshoot a motor branch circuit.
Subjects:
Motor Branch Circuits
Circuits
Safety Switches
Circuit Breakers
Maintenance
Prevent ive Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Course 114 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRIC MOTORS: Three Phase (IHRDC_OM_AEETP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with three-phase AC motor operation, inspect ion, test ing, and
maintenance. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to explain the basic principles of three-phase AC motor
operation, how to inspect one, and how to conduct electrical tests on one. They should also be able to explain how to
disconnect, disassemble, clean, reassemble, and reconnect a three-phase AC motor.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Motor Principles
Describe alternating current.
Explain the relationship between the three phases of three-phase alternating current.
Ident ify the basic parts of a three-phase AC motor.
Ident ify and describe common types of three-phase AC motors.
Describe the operation of a typical three-phase AC motor.
Explain what slip is, and describe the effects of increasing load on an AC motor.
Describe how speed control can be accomplished in a three-phase AC motor.
Inspection and Testing
Describe how an operating and non-operating three-phase AC motor can be inspected.
Explain the purpose of an insulation test and describe how it can be conducted on a three-phase AC motor.
Describe how to test for grounds in the stator of a three-phase AC motor.
Describe how to test for opens in a wye-connected stator of a three-phase AC motor.
Describe how to test for opens in a delta-connected stator of a three-phase AC motor.
Describe how to test for shorts in the stator of a three-phase AC motor.
Describe how to test for grounds, opens, and shorts in the rotor circuit of a wound three-phase AC motor.
Motor Maintenance
Describe how to disconnect and disassemble a three-phase AC motor.
Describe how to inspect and clean a disassembled three-phase AC motor.
Describe how to reassemble and reconnect a three-phase AC motor.
Subjects:
Motor Principles
AC Review
Three-Phase AC Motors
Speed Control
Inspection and Testing
Motor Inspection
Insulation Test ing
Stator Test ing
Rotor Test ing
Motor Maintenance
Disconnection and Disassembly
Inspection and Cleaning
Reassembly and Reconnect ion
Course 115 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Battery Systems (IHRDC_OM_AEETM)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to industrial battery systems, and battery cells, and how to
inspect and test batteries. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should know the characterist ics and baic operat ion of a typical
battery system and its components. They should also understand how to inspect and perform basic tests on industrial batteries.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction to Battery Systems
Describe a typical industrial battery system.
List the basic components of a lead-acid cell.
Describe the electrochemical action in a cell that is charging.
Describe the electrochemical action in a cell that is discharging.
State the voltage rating for a typical cell at full charge.
Explain a cell's capacity rat ing.
Briefly describe the relationship of cell capacity, voltage, and specific gravity during discharge and recharge.
Describe the functions of a typical battery system charger.
List the common components of most battery chargers and describe their functions.
Inspection and Testing
List the protective equipment and safety procedures associated with working on batteries.
Describe typical visual inspection checks.
State the purpose of and describe the basic steps for checking intercell and terminal connection resistances.
State the purpose of and describe the basic steps for checking specific gravity.
Explain the effect of temperature on specific gravity.
Subjects:
Introduction to Battery Systems
System Overview
Cell Components
Cell and Battery Ratings
Battery Chargers
Inspection and Testing
Battery System Safety
Battery Inspection
Voltage and Resistance Test ing
Specific Gravity Test ing
Course 116 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Fasteners (IHRDC_OM_AEEFA)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with various types of fasteners used in electrical work. After
completing this unit, the trainees should be able to describe common types of threaded and non-threaded fasteners and
identify applications for which each type might be used. They should also be able to describe basic procedures for installing
fasteners.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Types of Fasteners
Describe some common types of threaded fasteners and identify applications for which these fasteners may be
used.
Describe some common types of non-threaded fasteners and identify applicat ions for which these fasteners
may be used.
Installing Fasteners
Describe general steps for installing threaded fasteners.
Describe a typical procedure for installing a toggle bolt.
Describe a typical procedure for installing an anchor bolt in wet concrete.
Describe a typical procedure for installing an expansion anchor bolt in hardened concrete.
Describe a typical procedure for installing blind rivets.
Subjects:
Types of Fasteners
Threaded Fasteners
Non-Threaded Fasteners
Installing Fasteners
Basic Steps
Installing Toggle Bolts
Installing Anchor Bolts
Installing Blind Rivets
Course 117 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Introduction to the NEC (IHRDC_OM_AEEIN)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the organizat ion and layout of the National Electrical Code.
After completing this unit, the trainees should be able to use the NEC to locate specific types of information.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Overview
Explain the purpose and describe the history of the NEC.
Describe how the NEC was developed and revised.
Describe the role of test ing laboratories in developing the NEC.
Describe the purpose of the NFPA and the NEMA.
Explain the difference between mandatory rules and advisory rules.
Describe the kinds of informat ion found in Art icles 90, 100, and 110 of the NEC.
Define the terms labeled and listed.
Describe how the chapters of the NEC are organized.
Describe the different types of text used in the NEC.
Using the NEC
Explain how to locate information for a part icular procedure in the NEC.
Ident ify and describe key sections of the NEC that are often used as references for servicing electrical systems.
Describe how the NEC can be used as a reference for installing electrical systems.
Subjects:
Overview
Purpose and History
Layout
Using the NEC
Navigating
Examples
Course 118 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Relays 1 (IHRDC_OM_TDRE1)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to teach the basic principles of protect ive relays and to introduce directional and nondirectional
relays. The unit begins with the basic theory of protective relays, commonly used types of relays, and a brief explanation of how
these relays are used. Addit ional details and examples are provided for directional and nondirectional relays. At the conclusion
of this unit , the trainees should have a basic understanding of how protective relays work. They should be able to explain the
need for protective relays and to list commonly used types of relays and their functions. They should also be able to explain how
directional and nondirect ional relays work and give examples of how they are used.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction to relays
Explain the purpose of protective relays in a T&D system and describe how they are used. Describe five common
relay elements and how they work.
Overcurrent relays
Describe the basic operating principles of overcurrent relays and the condit ions that cause them to operate.
Directional overcurrent relays
Ident ify T&D equipment typically protected by directional overcurrent relays.
Describe the basic operating principles of directional overcurrent relays and the condit ions that cause them to
operate.
Reclosing relays
Describe the basic function and operating principles of reclosing relays.
Voltage relays
Ident ify the type of equipment that voltage relays typically protect.
Describe the basic operating principles of voltage relays and the condit ions that cause them to operate.
Auxiliary relays
Describe the basic function and operatiing principles of auxiliary relays.
Solid-state relays
Describe the basic operating principles of solid-state relays.
Define the terms analog signal, digital signal and logic circuit .
Subjects:
Introduction to relays
Purpose and use of relays
Relay elements: plunger element, clapper element, induct ion disc element, induction cup element and
solid-state circuitry.
Overcurrent relays: Instantaneous overcurrent relays; t ime-delay overcurrent relays
Directional overcurrent relays: Usage and operation; three-phase directional relays
Reclosing relays: function, components and operat ion
Voltage relays
Overvoltage and undervoltage relays with plunger elements; overvoltage relay with an induction disc element;
overvoltage/undervoltage relay
Auxiliary relays
Function of auxiliary relays
Auxiliary relay used to trip mult iple breakers
Auxiliary relay used to trip mult iple overcurrent relays
Solid-state relays
Operating principles of solid state relays; Logic gates
Course 119 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Relays 2 (IHRDC_OM_TDRE2)
Overview:
This unit continues the development begun in Relays 1 by introducing differential and pilot relays and discussing routine relay
maintenance. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how differential and pilot relays work and give
examples of situations where they are used. They should also be able to describe how to approach routine inspection and
maintenance and how to put a relay in or out of service.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction to relays
Ident ify five common relay elements. Describe the funct ions of overcurrent, direct ional overcurrent, reclosing,
voltage, and auxiliary relays.
Differential relays
Ident ify what different ial relays typically protect. Describe the basic operating principles of different ial relays
and the condit ion that causes a differential relay to operate.
Transfer tripping
Describe the function of a transfer tripping system and identify its main components.
Ident ify four communication channels used for transfer tripping and explain how they work.
Ident ify the main equipment components associated with transfer tripping communication channels and
describe their funct ions.
Distance relays
Ident ify what distance relays typically protect.
Describe the basic operating principles of distance relays and the condit ion that causes a distance relay to
operate.
Pilot wire relaying
Describe the function of a pilot wire relaying system.
Ident ify the main components of a pilot wire relaying system and describe its basic operating principles.
Breaker failure relaying
Ident ify the function and the main components of a breaker failure relaying system.
Describe the general operation of a breaker failure relaying system.
Describe the basic operating principles of (1) a breaker failure relay and (2) a t iming relay in a breaker failure
relaying system.
Subjects:
Introduction to relays
Relay elements (plunger element, clapper element, iInduction disc element, induction cup element and
solid-state circuitry)
Basic protect ive relay functions (overcurrent relays, directional overcurrent relays, reclosing relays, voltage relays
and auxiliary relays)
Differential relays
Different ial relay operation; current backfeed and different ial relay operation; types
Transfer tripping
Function of transfer tripping; transfer tripping example; communication channels and equipment
Distance relays
Function of distance relays; zoned protection; construction and operation of a distance relay
Pilot wire relaying
Pilot wire relaying system components and operation; pilot wire relay components and operation
Breaker failure relaying system components and operation
Timing relay components and operation
Course 120 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Troubleshooting Electrical Circuits (IHRDC_OM_AEETA)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the use of basic troubleshooting procedures to troubleshoot
problems in electrical circuits. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and describe the mainsteps of a
basic troubleshooting procedure and use the procedure to t roubleshoot problems in electrical equipments and electrical
systems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Troubleshooting Fundamentals
Explain what troubleshooting is.
Ident ify and describe the main steps of a basic t roubleshooting procedure.
Describe how electrical tests can be used in the process of eliminat ion.
Describe two basic ways that the process of elimination can be used in t roubleshooting.
Troubleshooting Examples
Describe how to troubleshoot a problem in a piece of electrical equipment.
Describe how to troubleshoot a problem in an electrical system.
Subjects:
Troubleshooting Fundamentals
What is Troubleshooting?
The Process of Elimination
Troubleshooting Examples
Electrical Equipment
Electrical Systems
Course 121 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL THEORY: AC Circuits (IHRDC_OM_AEEAC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the operation of AC circuits.
After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how current flows through AC circuits and how AC current and
voltage are affected by inductance and capacitance. They should also be able to define t rue power, reactive power,
apparent power, and power factor, and to identify various types of single-phase and three-phase systems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Alternating Current
Explain the difference between direct current and alternating current.
Explain how current flow and polarity change in AC circuits.
Describe a sine wave that represents AC voltage.
Explain what frequency is, and how it is measured.
Define peak value, peak-to-peak value, and effective value with respect to AC voltage and current.
Inductance
Define inductance and inductive reactance.
Explain how inductive reactance limits current flow.
Explain how the inductive reactance in a circuit can be increased.
Describe the effects of inductance on current and voltage.
Capacitance
Define capacitance and capacit ive reactance.
Explain how a capacitor is charged.
Describe the effects of capacitance on current and voltage.
AC Power
Different iate between true power, reactive power, and apparent power.
Explain how power factor is used in calculating true power in AC circuits.
Explain how a three-wire single-phase AC system supplies two different voltages.
Different iate between delta-connected and wye-connected three-phase AC systems.
Subjects:
Alternating Current
Current Flow
Sine Waves
Peak Values and Effective Values
Inductance
Inductance and Induct ive Reactance
Factors That Affect Inductive Reactance
Inductance, Current, and Voltage
Capacitance
Capacitance and Capacit ive Reactance
Capacitance, Current and Voltage
AC Power
True Power, Reactive Power, and Apparent Power
Single Phase and Three-Phase Systems
Course 122 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL THEORY: Basic Electricity Review (IHRDC_OM_AEBER)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the basic principles associated with electricity and
electrical circuits. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain where electricity comes from; what voltage,
current, and resistance are; and how their values can be calculated for various types of circuits. They should also be able to
explain how electrical circuits are affected by induct ion, inductance, and capacitance.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Basic Concepts
Explain what atoms are, and how they are constructed.
Explain what voltage is, and how it can be produced.
Explain what current is, and state the basic difference between direct current and alternating current.
Explain what resistance is, and state the basic difference between a conductor and an insulator.
Explain how voltage, current, and resistance can be measured.
Explain what power and electrical energy are and how they can be measured.
Explain how Ohm's Law relates to current, voltage, and resistance.
Explain how to use Ohm's Law to calculate current, voltage, or resistance when the other two values are
known.
Circuit Types
Describe the basic operating principles of a series circuit.
Explain how to calculate values for current, voltage, and resistance in a series circuit.
Describe the basic operating principles of a parallel circuit.
Explain how to calculate values for current, voltage, and resistance in a parallel circuit.
Describe the basic operating principles of a series-parallel circuit .
Explain how to calculate values for current, voltage, and resistance in a series-parallel circuit.
Circuit Characteristics
Explain what induction is and how voltage can be induced in a conductor.
Describe the basic operation of a transformer.
Explain what inductance is and how it affects electrical circuits.
Explain how the inductance of an inductor can be increased.
Explain what capacitance is and how it affects electrical circuits.
Describe the basic operation of a capacitor.
Subjects:
Basic Concepts
Where Does Electricity Come From?
Basic Electrical Quantit ies
Ohm's Law
Circuit Types
Series
Parallel
Series-Parallel
Circuit Characteristics
Induction
Inductance
Capacitance
Course 123 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL WIRING: Cables and Conductors (IHRDC_OM_AEECC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic construction and installat ion of electrical cables
and conductors. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to describe the basic const ruction of cables and
conductors, and how conductors are classified and rated. They should also be able to describe factors that affect the
installat ion of a conductor for a specific application, and how to make splices and terminations.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Basic Concepts
Describe the basic construction of conductors.
Describe how the physical characterist ics of a conductor's wires affect how the conductor is classified and
rated.
Describe how the physical characterist ics of a conductor's insulation affect how the conductor is classified and
rated.
Installation Requirements
Describe factors that determine the current requirements of a circuit.
Describe factors that determine the voltage requirements of a circuit.
Describe characterist ics in an environment that affect the type of conductor that should be installed.
Explain how environmental temperatures affect the type of conductor that should be installed.
Electrical Connections
Describe factors that should be considered when a mechanical connector is selected.
Describe factors that should be considered when replacement insulat ion is selected.
Describe how to make a splice.
Describe how to make a termination.
Subjects:
Basic Concepts
Construction
Classifications and Rat ings
Installation Requirements
The Circuit
The Environment
Electrical Connections
Connectors and Replacement Insulation
Splices and Terminations
Course 124 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL WIRING: Conduit Installation (IHRDC_OM_AEECI)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic concepts of conduit and conduit fitt ings, and
typical methods of cutt ing, bending, and installing conduit . After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the
basic types of metallic and nonmetallic conduit, common types of conduit fitt ings, and procedures for cutt ing, bending, and
installing metallic and nonmetallic conduit.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Materials
Define terms that are commonly used to describe conduit and conduit installat ions.
Describe common types of metallic conduit .
Describe common types of nonmetallic conduit .
Fittings
Describe types of couplings that are used to connect conduit in a straight line.
Describe types of fit t ings that are used to change the direction of a conduit run.
Describe types of fit t ings that are used to secure conduit when it is installed.
Cutting
Describe a method for cutt ing rigid types of metal conduit.
Describe a method for cutt ing flexible types of metal conduit.
Describe methods for cutt ing nonmetallic conduit.
Bending
Describe different types of conduit bends and explain where they might be used in an installat ion.
Explain how bends affect conduit measurements.
Describe how rigid-type metal conduit can be bent.
Describe how rigid PVC can be bent.
Installing
Describe tasks associated with terminating conduit to an electrical control box.
Describe how conductors can be installed in conduit.
Subjects:
Materials
Overview
Metallic Conduit
Nonmetallic Conduit
Fittings
Making Straight Connections
Changing Run Direction
Securing Conduit
Bending
Bend Types
Measurements
Demonstrations
Installing
Termination to a Box
Pulling Conductors
Course 125 of 245
Maintenance
ELECTRICAL WIRING: Splices and Terminations (IHRDC_OM_AESAT)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with splices and terminations used in electrical systems of less than
600 volts. After completing this unit, the t rainees should be able to identify basic types of electrical wiring, conductor terminals,
and connectors; describe tools and materials required to make conductor splices and terminations; explain what makes a
good electrical connection; describe common types of splices; and explain how to connect conductors to a terminal box on a
3-phase AC motor.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Hardware and Accessories
Ident ify and describe basic types of electrical wiring.
Ident ify types of conductor terminals and connectors and describe the applications for which they are suitable.
Ident ify and describe tools and materials typically used in making conductor splices and terminations.
Making Connections
Ident ify the basic requirements for a good electrical connection.
Describe how to make some common types of splices and identify the applications for which each type of splice
is suitable.
Ident ify requirements for terminating conductors in enclosures.
Describe how to make up connections to a terminal box on a 3-pnase AC motor.
Subjects:
Hardware and Accessories
Types and Sizes of Conductors
Terminals
Solder Connectors
Solderless Connectors (Compression and Mechanical)
Ring Terminal
Spade (Fork) Terminal
Quick Disconnect Terminals
Butt Splice and Reducing Connectors
Compression Connector Variat ions
Mechanical Connectors
Dual-Rated Connectors
Wire Connectors
Strippers and Crimpers
Solder and Soldering Tools
Insulation (Tubing and Tapes)
Cable Ties and Cable Clips
Making Connections
De-energizing Electrical Systems
Stripping Insulation
Selecting Connectors, Materials
Common Splicing Methods (Western Union Splice, Rattail Joint, Fixture Joint ,
and Knotted Tap Joint)
Enclosures
Motor Connect ions
Course 126 of 245
Maintenance
FORKLIFTS: Operation (IHRDC_OM_AMFOO)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic design and operation of forklifts. After completing
this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how forklift s can be classified and identify the major features and common working
dimensions of a forklift . They should also be able to explain how to inspect a forklift , how to recharge or refuel a forklift , and how
to operate a forklift safely.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Basics
Describe ways in which forklifts can be classified and identify the types of forklifts that are most appropriate for
use in specific working condit ions.
Ident ify the major features of most forklifts.
Describe the common working dimensions of a forklift .
Describe how to operate a typical forklift .
Describe general safety considerations associated with forklift operation.
Routine Tasks
Describe tasks that are performed during typical forklift startup and prevent ive inspect ions.
Describe basic procedures and safety precautions associated with recharging electric forklifts and refueling
forklifts that have internal combustion engines.
Forklift Stability and Loads
Explain the basic principles of forklift stability and describe how they affect forklift operation.
Describe general guidelines for handling loads safely with a forklift .
Subjects:
Basics
Types of Forklift s
Major Features
Basic Forklift Operation
Forklift Traffic Safety
Routine Tasks
Inspections
Recharging and Refueling
Forklift Stability and Loads
Stability
Handling Loads
Course 127 of 245
Maintenance
GEARS: Overhauls (IHRDC_OM_AMGG1)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to explain major tasks involved in gearbox overhauls. Trainees learn about disassembly
and reassembly procedures for two types of gearboxes: a double action unit and a worm gear unit. Trainees will also learn
typical checks and measurements performed during gearbox overhauls.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Disassembly and Reassembly
Describe precautions associated with the disassembly of a double-reduction gearbox.
Describe one way to remove the upper housing of a double-reduction gearbox.
Describe how to remove the bearing endcaps and internal components of a double-reduction gearbox.
Describe common methods of removing and installing a gear on its shaft.
Describe precautions associated with gearbox reassembly.
Describe the installat ion of the gears and endcaps in a typical double-reduction gearbox.
Describe how to complete the reassembly of a typical double-reduction gearbox.
Ident ify differences in preparing a unit to be stored and preparing a unit to be returned to service.
Checks and Measurement
Describe the procedure to check for shaft endplay.
Describe the procedure to check for backlash and tooth contact.
Describe the procedure to check for shaft runout.
Worm Gearset
Ident ify the main components of a motor actuator that uses a worm gearset.
Describe one way to disassemble a worm gearbox.
Describe one way to reassemble a worm gearbox.
Explain how tooth contact checks are made on a worm gear arrangement.
Subjects:
Disassembly and Reassembly
Disassembly
Gear Removal and Replacement
Reassembly
Checks and Measurements
Endplay
Backlash and Tooth Contact
Shaft Runout
Worm Gearsets
Basic Components
Disassembly
Reassembly
Course 128 of 245
Maintenance
GEARS: Types and Characteristics (IHRDC_OM_AMGG2)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to gears and gear arrangements. After completing this unit ,
t rainees should know how a gearset basically works. They should be familiar with different types of gears and gear
arrangements, and understand commonly used gear terminology. They should also be able to identify common gear problems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Fundamentals
Describe the function of gears.
Describe how power, speed, and torque are involved in the operation of gears.
Describe characterist ics of spur gears.
Describe characterist ics of bevel gears.
Describe characterist ics of spiral bevel gears.
Describe characterist ics of helical gears.
Describe characterist ics of hypoid gears.
Describe characterist ics of worm gears.
Define the term backlash.
Define the term endplay.
Define the term tooth contact.
Gearsets
Ident ify the components of a typical gearbox.
Describe characterist ics of a mechanical differential gearset arrangement.
Gear Problems
Ident ify some problems that can cause bearing failure.
Describe gear tooth breakage and some condit ions that can cause it .
Describe some gear lubricat ion problems.
Describe how scoring affects gears.
Describe how pitt ing affects gears.
Subjects:
Fundamentals
Speed and Torque
Basic Types of Gears
Worm Gears
Backlash, Endplay, and Tooth Contact
Gearsets
Basic Gearbox Components
Mechanical Differentials
Gear Problems
Bearing Failures
Tooth Breakage
Improper Lubrication
Scoring and Pitt ing
Course 129 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Actuators (IHRDC_OM_AHHAC)
Overview:
This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation of various types of cylinders and hydraulic motors in hydraulic
systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic components and common types of single-
acting cylinders and double-acting cylinders. They should also be able to describe the basic components and operation of
common types of vane motors, gear motors, piston motors, and part ial rotation actuators.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Cylinders
Describe the basic components and operation of a single-acting load-return cylinder.
Describe the basic components and operation of a single-acting spring return cylinder.
Describe the basic components and operation of a telescoping cylinder.
Describe the basic components and operation of a double-acting cylinder.
Describe the basic components and operation of a double-rod cylinder.
Describe the basic functions of piston rings, rod seals, rod wipers, and cylinder cushions.
Describe how fixed and pivoting cylinder mountings can be used to mount linear actuators.
Motors
Describe the basic components and operation of a vane motor.
Explain what a balanced vane motor is.
Describe the basic components and operation of an external gear motor.
Describe the basic components and operation of an internal gear motor.
Describe the basic components and operation of a gerotor motor.
Describe the basic components and operation of an in-line piston motor.
Describe the basic components and operation of a variable displacement in-line piston motor.
Describe the basic components and operation of a bent-axis piston motor.
Describe the basic components and operation of a vane type rotary actuator.
Describe the basic components and operation of a crank type piston actuator.
Describe the basic components and operation of a rack type piston actuator.
Subjects:
Cylinders
Single-Acting
Double-Act ing
Features
Motors
Vane
Gear
Piston
Part ial Rotation Actuators
Course 130 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Component Inspection and Replacement (IHRDC_OM_AHHCI)
Overview:
This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with typical procedures for removing, inspecting, reassembling, and reinstalling
hydraulic system components. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe typical procedures for
disassembling, inspecting, recondit ioning, reassembling, and reinstalling valves, pumps, and cylinders.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Removal and Inspection
Describe general precaut ions and preparations for safely removing and disassembling components from a
hydraulic system.
Describe typical procedures for disassembling and inspecting valves that are commonly used in hydraulic
systems.
Describe typical procedures for disassembling and inspecting a fixed displacement vane pump.
Describe typical procedures for disassembling and inspecting a hydraulic cylinder.
Reassembly and Reinstallation
Describe general procedures for reassembling and reinstalling hydraulic system components.
Describe typical procedures for recondit ioning, reassembling, and reinstalling valves that are used in a hydraulic
system
Describe typical procedures for recondit ioning and reassembling a fixed displacement vane pump.
Describe typical procedures for reinstalling a pressure compensated, variable displacement piston pump.
Describe typical procedures for recondit ioning, reassembling, and reinstalling a hydraulic cylinder.
Subjects:
Removal and Inspection
Basic Preparations
Valve Inspection
Pump Inspection
Cylinder Inspection
Reassembly and Reinstallation
General Guidelines
Valve Recondit ioning and Reinstallat ion
Pump Recondit ioning and Reinstallat ion
Cylinder Recondit ioning and Reinstallat ion
Course 131 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Diagrams (IHRDC_OM_AHHDI)
Overview:
This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with hydraulic system schematic diagrams. After completing this unit, t rainees should
be able to interpret symbols that are used in hydraulic system schematic diagrams and use schematic diagrams to trace fluid
flow through various types of hydraulic circuits.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Symbols
Ident ify symbols used to represent the basic parts of a hydraulic circuit.
Ident ify types of lines represented on a hydraulic schematic diagram.
Ident ify symbols used to represent the following pumps: unidirectional fixed displacement, bi-directional fixed
displacement, unidirectional variable displacement, bi-directional variable displacement.
Ident ify symbols used to represent the following components: reservoirs, accumulators, heaters, coolers, and
filters.
Ident ify symbols used to represent the following linear actuators: single-act ing, double-act ing, fixed cushion
cylinder and adjustable cushion.
Ident ify symbols used to represent the following hydraulic motors: unidirectional, fixed displacement,
bi-directional, fixed displacement, unidirectional, variable displacement, bi-directional, variable displacement.
Ident ify symbols used to represent the following valves: pressure relief valve, flow control valve, and directional
control valve.
Reading Diagrams
Describe basic guidelines for reading hydraulic schematic diagrams.
Use a schematic diagram to describe how fluid flows through an automatic venting circuit .
Use a schematic diagram to describe how fluid flows though an accumulator circuit.
Use a schematic diagram to describe how fluid flows through a regenerat ive circuit.
Subjects:
Symbols
Overview
Pumps
Fluid Storage and Fluid Containers
Actuators
Valves
Reading Diagrams
Diagram Reading Basics
Automatic Venting Circuit
Accumulator Circuit
Regenerative Circuit
Course 132 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Fluid and Reservoirs (IHRDC_OM_AHHFS)
Overview:
This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the fluid used in hydraulic systems and with the basic functions and uses of filters
and st rainers, reservoirs, conductors, and accumulators. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the
functions, characterist ics, and types of fluid that may be used in hydraulic systems. They should also be able to describe typical
uses of filters and strainers, the components and accessories of typical reservoirs, the various types of conductors and fit t ings,
and the basic functions and common uses of accumulators in hydraulic systems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Hydraulic Fluid
Describe the functions of the fluid in a hydraulic system.
Describe propert ies that are considered when hydraulic fluid is selected for a specific application.
Describe the basic characterist ics of various types of hydraulic fluid.
Explain how filters and strainers can be classified.
Describe typical uses of strainers and filters in hydraulic systems.
Reservoirs and Conductors
State the function of a reservoir in a hydraulic system.
Describe the components and accessories of a typical hydraulic fluid reservoir.
Describe various types of heat exchangers that may be used with hydraulic fluid reservoirs.
Describe types of conductors and fitt ings that are used in hydraulic systems.
Accumulators
Describe the basic function and common uses of accumulators in hydraulic systems.
Describe the components and operat ion of various types of accumulators.
Subjects:
Hydraulic Fluid
Types of Fluid
Filters and St rainers
Reservoirs and Conductors
Reservoirs
Conductors
Accumulators
Function and Applications
Types of Accumulators
Course 133 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Principles and Circuits (IHRDC_OM_AHHPC)
Overview:
This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the principles of hydraulic system operation and the components and operation
of some typical hydraulic circuits. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how force is transmitted through
a liquid and how pressure and flow are related in a hydraulic system. They should also be able to describe the main concepts
and basic operation of several types of hydraulic circuits.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Principles
Explain what a liquid is and how liquids differ from solids and gases.
Explain how force is transmitted through a liquid.
Define the following terms: pressure, head, atmospheric pressure, vacuum, laminar flow, turbulent flow, velocity,
and flow rate.
Describe the relationship between pressure and flow in a hydraulic system.
Circuits
List the main components of a basic hydraulic circuit and describe the funct ion of each component.
Describe the basic operation of an automatic vent ing circuit.
Describe the basic operation of an accumulator circuit.
Describe the basic operation of a regenerative circuit.
Subjects:
Principles
Characterist ics of Liquids
Pressure and Flow
Circuits
Circuit Components
Typical Hydraulic Circuits
Course 134 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Pumps (IHRDC_OM_AHHPU)
Overview:
This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation of various types of pumps in hydraulic systems. After completing
this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of common types of gear pumps, vane pumps, radial piston
pumps, axial piston pumps, and pressure compensated piston pumps.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Types of Pumps
Describe the basic operation of a hydraulic power circuit .
Describe the role of a pump in a typical hydraulic power circuit.
Describe how posit ive displacement pumps work and explain why they are used in hydraulic power circuits.
Describe the differences between a fixed displacement pump and a variable displacement pump.
Rotary Pumps
Describe the basic operation of an external gear pump.
Describe the basic operation of an internal gear pump.
Describe the basic operation of a gerotor pump.
Describe the basic operation of an unbalanced vane pump.
Describe the basic operation of a pressure compensated vane pump.
Describe the basic operation of a balanced vane pump.
Piston Pumps
Describe the basic operation of a fixed displacement radial piston pump.
Describe the basic operation of a variable displacement radial piston pump.
Describe the basic operation of a fixed displacement axial piston pump.
Describe the basic operation of a variable displacement axial pump.
Describe the basic operation of a fixed displacement bent-axis pump.
Describe the basic operation of a variable displacement bent-axis pump.
Describe the basic operation of a pressure compensated axial piston pump.
Subjects:
Types of Pumps
Pump Basics
Posit ive Displacement Pumps
Rotary Pumps
Gear Pumps
Vane Pumps
Piston Pumps
Radial Piston Pumps
Axial Piston Pumps
Pressure Compensated Piston Pumps
Course 135 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Routine Maintenance (IHRDC_OM_AHHRM)
Overview:
This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with tasks associated with the regular or routine maintenance of hydraulic systems.
After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe general considerations and safety precautions associated with
routine maintenance. They should also be able to describe procedures for performing external inspect ions and for maintaining
the hydraulic fluid, the reservoir, filters and strainers, accumulators, and heat exchangers.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
General Recommendations
Describe what routine maintenance is, and state its purpose.
Describe four steps involved in establishing a rout ine maintenance program.
Describe personal protective equipment and clothing that should be worn by personnel performing routine
maintenance tasks.
Ident ify hazards of hydraulic fluid spills and describe one method of cleaning up a spill.
Describe what is generally meant by lock out and tag out and describe the purpose of such a procedure.
System Inspections
List components that are typically checked during a visual inspection and explain why they are checked.
Describe problems to look for during a visual inspection of fluid lines on an operating hydraulic system.
Ident ify areas where fluid leaks are commonly found, and describe possible causes.
Describe the term starving the pump and identify one possible cause.
Explain what a sounding rod is, and describe specific condit ions or malfunctions that can cause components to
make unusual sounds.
Define the term hot spot and explain how hot spots can be detected in a hydraulic system.
List possible causes of excessive vibration in a hydraulic system and list some possible results of this problem.
Component Maintenance
Describe two types of contaminants that are typically found in hydraulic fluid, and identify likely causes of each.
Describe how filters and strainers are maintained and explain why they must be maintained.
Describe a procedure for cleaning a hydraulic reservoir and explain the purpose of this task.
Explain the purpose of checking the charge of a nitrogen-charged accumulator.
Describe a procedure for cleaning an air-cooled heat exchanger, and explain why this is necessary.
Subjects:
General Recommendations
Establishing a Program
Safety
System Inspections
Visual Inspections
Other External Inspections
Component Maintenance
Fluid and Reservoir
Accumulators and Heat Exchangers
Course 136 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_AHHTR)
Overview:
This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with general steps for analyzing problems in hydraulic systems. After completing this
unit, t rainees should be able to explain how to ident ify problems in hydraulic systems and describe common problems
associated with hydraulic system components.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Problem Analysis
Ident ify prerequisite knowledge and skills that mechanics should have in order to troubleshoot hydraulic systems
effectively.
Ident ify the basic steps of the troubleshooting process.
Describe the process of identifying a problem and taking prevent ive action in immediate response to a
hydraulic system operating problem.
Describe how to evaluate common general symptoms of problems in a hydraulic system.
Describe common methods for applying the process of elimination to troubleshoot problems in hydraulic
systems.
Describe major concerns associated with correcting problems and safely returning a hydraulic system to service.
Component Problems
Describe common problems that may be associated with the hydraulic fluid, hoses, and accumulators in a
hydraulic system.
Describe common problems that may be associated with the valves in a hydraulic system.
Describe common problems that may be associated with the cylinders in a hydraulic system.
Describe common problems that may be associated with the pumps and hydraulic motors in a hydraulic
system.
Subjects:
Problem Analysis
Basics
Immediate Response
Problem Correct ion
Component Problems
Fluid, Hose, and Accumulator Problems
Valve Problems
Cylinder Problems
Pump and Hydraulic Motor Problems
Course 137 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Valves 1 (IHRDC_OM_AHHV1)
Overview:
This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic design and operation of various types of valves used in hydraulic
systems. After completing this unit, t rainees will be able to describe the functions of flow and pressure in a hydraulic system, and
identify and describe various types of manually adjusted valves, sliding spool valves, and spring-biased valves. They should also
be able to describe various ways in which valves can be actuated.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Valve Basics
Define flow and describe its function in a hydraulic system.
Define pressure and describe its funct ion in a hydraulic system.
Explain the functions of valves in a hydraulic system.
Explain the term thrott ling.
Ident ify and describe a typical needle valve.
Ident ify and describe a typical globe valve.
Ident ify and describe a typical plug valve.
Ident ify and describe a typical ball valve.
Ident ify and describe a typical gate valve.
Actuated Valves
Ident ify and describe the main components of a typical directional control, sliding spool valve.
Explain posit ioning of a directional control sliding spool valve.
Ident ify and describe a typical check valve.
Ident ify and describe a typical relief valve.
Ident ify and describe a typical pressure reducing valve.
Define cracking pressure and pressure override.
Describe three methods of valve actuat ion.
Explain what a solenoid does, and describe two different types of solenoids.
Describe a servo system and explain what it does.
Describe what a pilot-operated valve is and how it works.
Subjects:
Valve Basics
Basic Principles
Manually-Adjusted Valves
Actuated Valves
Sliding Spool Valves
Spring-Biased Valves
Methods of Actuation
Course 138 of 245
Maintenance
HYDRAULICS: Valves 2 (IHRDC_OM_AHHV2)
Overview:
This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the functions performed by various types of valves in hydraulic systems. After
completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how valves control flow rate, flow direction, and pressure in a hydraulic
system. They should be able to describe the basic operat ion of a pressure-compensated flow control valve, a temperature-
compensated flow control valve, various types of flow control circuits, a pressure reducing valve, a relief valve, a sequence
valve, and a counterbalance valve.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Flow and Directional Control
Describe what a non-adjustable orifice is and what it does.
List three factors that affect thrott led flow through a valve.
Describe how a pressure-compensated flow control valve works.
Describe how a temperature-compensated flow control valve works.
Ident ify three different flow control circuits.
Describe a bleed-off circuit and how it is used.
Describe a meter-in circuit and how it is used.
Describe a meter-out circuit and how it is used.
Explain how a directional control sliding spool valve controls fluid direction in a hydraulic system.
Pressure Control
Explain what a pressure reducing valve does and how it works.
Explain what a relief valve does and how it works.
Explain what a sequence valve does and how it works.
Explain what a counterbalance valve does and how it works.
Subjects:
Flow and Directional Control
Flow Control Valves
Flow Control Circuits
Directional Control
Pressure Control
Pressure Reduction and Relief
Sequencing and Counterbalancing
Course 139 of 245
Maintenance
LUBRICATION: Lubrication Basics (IHRDC_OM_AMLBA)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the propert ies and uses of various types of lubricants. After
completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain why lubricants are used and describe some characterist ic propert ies of
lubricants. They should also be able to describe procedures for storing, handling, and applying lubricants.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction to Lubrication
Describe three types of frict ion, three types of lubricants, and three levels of lubrication.
Describe some of the characterist ic propert ies of lubricants.
Ident ify factors that usually affect the selection of a lubricant for a specific situation.
Explain how to use a typical lubrication chart.
Storing and Handling Lubricants
Describe proper procedures for, and safety concerns associated with the storage of lubricants.
Describe common types of lubricant equipment.
Describe common safety concerns and precautions that are associated with the handling of lubricants.
Describe common procedures for handling, dispensing, and applying lubricants.
Oils and Greases
Describe some of the typical groups of general oils.
Describe common methods of oil lubrication.
Describe some unique propert ies of greases.
Compare the uses of greases and oils for lubrication.
Describe some common methods of applying grease.
Subjects:
Introduction to Lubrication
Frict ion and Lubrication
Propert ies of Lubricants
Lubricant Selection
Storing and Handling Lubricants
Lubricant Storage
Lubrication Equipment
Lubricant Handling
Oils and Greases
Types of Oils
Oil Lubrication
Propert ies of Grease
Applying Grease
Course 140 of 245
Maintenance
MATH: Basics of Math (IHRDC_OM_AMMBA)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic mathematical applications that can be used on the
job. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to interpret measurements that include fractions and decimal values,
measurements in English and metric units, and perform mathematical applications involving fractions and decimals. They
should also be able to calculate dimensions associated with rectangles, t riangles, and circles.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Working With Numbers
Interpret measurements that include fract ions.
Add and subtract fractional measurements.
Mult iply and divide fractional measurements.
Convert a fraction to a decimal, and a decimal to a fraction.
Convert a decimal to a percent, and a percent to a decimal.
Perform mathematical operations with decimal numbers.
Use a calculator to perform mathematical operations.
Round off a decimal to a specific number of places.
Interpret measurements in metric units.
Angles and Shapes
Explain what an angle is, and how angles are measured.
Explain what a rectangle is, and define the terms length and width.
Explain what a t riangle is, and define the terms base and height.
Explain what a circle is, and define the terms diameter and radius.
Calculate the perimeter of a rectangle.
Calculate the length of the hypotenuse of a right angle.
Calculate the circumference of a circle.
Areas and Volumes
Calculate the area of a rectangle, a right triangle, and a circle.
Calculate the volume of a rectangular solid.
Calculate the volume of a cylinder.
Subjects:
Working With Numbers
Fractions and Measurements
Working With Fractions
Decimals
Using a Calculator
Metric Measurements
Angles and Shapes
Angles
Rectangles, Triangles, and Circles
Working With Shapes
Areas and Volumes
Areas
Volumes
Course 141 of 245
Maintenance
PIPES AND VALVES: Motor Operators (IHRDC_OM_AMPMO)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of motor operators.
After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify the main parts of a motor operator and explain how a motor
operator opens and closes a valve. They should also be able to describe the parts and operation of limit and torque switches,
and explain how these switches can be replaced and adjusted. In addit ion, they should be able to describe preventive
maintenance procedures for a motor operator and explain how to troubleshoot a motor operator problem.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Mechanical Components
Name the basic parts of a typical motor operator and describe the function of each part .
Describe how the gears in a typical motor operator work during motor-driven operation and during manual
operation.
Electrical Controls
Describe the parts and operation of a typical rotary drum limit switch, and explain how the switch is replaced
and adjusted.
Describe the parts and operation of a typical torque switch, and explain how the switch is replaced and
adjusted.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Describe preventive maintenance procedures for a typical motor operator.
Explain how to troubleshoot a typical motor operator.
Subjects:
Mechanical Components
Basic Components
Motor and Gear Operation
Electrical Controls
Limit Switches
Torque Switches
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Prevent ive Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Course 142 of 245
Maintenance
PIPES AND VALVES: Pipes and Pipe Fittings (IHRDC_OM_AMPPP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with common types of pipes, pipe joints, and pipe fit t ings, and to
provide general guidelines for working with pipes. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to identify common
materials used to make pipes, and explain how pipes are identified and sized. They should also be able to identify common
types of pipe joints and pipe fitt ings, and describe procedures for calculating pipe lengths, cutt ing pipe, and threading pipe.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Basics
Ident ify some common materials used to make pipe and describe characterist ics of those materials.
Describe how pipes are usually sized and explain how they are marked for identification.
Describe some common signs of wear and damage to look for during a pipe inspection.
State some basic guidelines for handling and storing pipes.
Joints and Fittings
Ident ify some common types of pipe joints and describe their characterist ics.
Ident ify some common types of pipe fit t ings and describe their funct ions.
Installation
Describe some basic methods for calculating the length of pipe needed between fitt ings.
Ident ify some common tools used to cut pipe and explain how they operate.
Explain how to use a pipe die to cut threads in a pipe.
Subjects:
Basics
Pipe Materials
Sizes and Identification
Inspection, Handling, and Storage
Joints and Fittings
Joints
Fitt ings
Installation
Calculating Pipe Length
Cutt ing Pipe
Threading Pipe
Course 143 of 245
Maintenance
PIPES AND VALVES: Safety Valves (IHRDC_OM_AMPSV)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of types of safety
valves commonly found in indust rial facilit ies. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the parts and
operation of a huddling chamber safety valve, a safety-relief valve, and a pilot-actuated relief valve. They should also be able
to describe procedures for inspecting, disassembling, reassembling, and test ing a safety valve.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Types of Safety Valves
Describe the parts and operation of a typical huddling chamber safety valve.
Describe the parts and operation of a typical safety-relief valve and a typical pilot-actuated valve.
Safety Valve Maintenance
Describe the procedure for performing an external inspect ion on a safety valve.
Describe procedures for disassembling a safety valve and inspecting its internal components.
Describe procedures for reassembling and test ing a safety valve before putt ing it in service.
Subjects:
Types of Safety Valves
Huddling Chamber Safety Valves
Specialized Relief Valves
Safety Valve Maintenance
External Inspection
Disassembly and Inspection
Reassembly and Test ing
Course 144 of 245
Maintenance
PIPES AND VALVES: Steam Traps (IHRDC_OM_AMPST)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of types of steam
traps commonly found in industrial facilit ies. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe functions commonly
performed by steam traps, describe common types of steam traps, and describe procedures for performing steam trap surveys
and replacing worn or damaged steam trap components.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Basics
Describe functions typically performed by steam traps.
Describe the components of a typical steam trap station.
Types of Steam Traps
Describe the basic operation of two common types of mechanical steam traps: inverted bucket and float, and
thermostatic.
Describe the basic operation of two common types of thermostatic steam traps: bellows and
bi-metallic.Describe the basic operation of a typical thermodynamic disc-type steam trap.
Inspecting and Replacing
Describe what to check for during a survey or inspection of a steam trap stat ion.
Describe typical procedures for performing a temperature inspection, a sound inspection, and a visual
inspection of a steam trap.
Describe a typical procedure for replacing worn or damaged steam trap components.
Subjects:
Basics
Functions of Steam Traps
Steam Trap Stat ions
Types of Steam Traps
Mechanical Traps
Thermostatic Traps
Inspecting and Replacing
Surveying Steam Trap Stations
Surveying Steam Traps
Replacing Steam Traps
Course 145 of 245
Maintenance
PIPES AND VALVES: Valve Maintenance (IHRDC_OM_AMPV2)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic procedures for performing routing maintenance on
a valve and for performing a valve overhaul. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe tasks involved in
preparing for valve maintenance and explain how to adjust and replace valve packing. They should also be able to describe
how to disassemble a valve, inspect its parts, perform maintenance on it , and reassemble it .
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Routine Maintenance
Describe tasks typically completed in preparation for performing maintenance on a valve.
Describe how to adjust packing in a valve.
Describe how to remove packing from a valve.
Describe how to replace the packing in a valve.
Valve Overhaul
Describe a basic procedure for disassembling a valve.
Describe tasks associated with inspecting the parts of a valve.
Explain how lapping and spott ing-in are performed on a valve seating area.
Describe a basic procedure for reassembling a valve and returning it to service.
Subjects:
Routine Maintenance
Maintenance Preparations
Adjust ing and Replacing Packing
Valve Overhaul
Disassembly and Inspection
Maintenance
Reassembly
Course 146 of 245
Maintenance
PIPES AND VALVES: Valve Types and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AMPV1)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic components and operation of valves commonly
found in industrial sites. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how valves can be classified, describe the
parts and operation of various types of valves, and describe how valves can be operated.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Valve Fundamentals
Describe the basic purpose of a valve.
Ident ify the basic components of a valve.
Ident ify the valves that are commonly classified.
Valve Types
Describe the basic components and operation of a gate valve.
Describe the basic components and operation of common types of globe valves.
Describe the basic components and operation of a plug valve, a ball valve, and a butterfly valve.
Describe the basic components and operation of a diaphragm valve.
Describe the basic components and operation of a swing check valve, a lift check valve, and a ball check
valve.
Valve Operation
Describe how a handwheel is used to operate a valve.
Describe how a handle is used to operate a valve.
Ident ify and describe common types of pneumatically, hydraulically, and electrically powered mechanical
operators for valves.
Subjects:
Valve Fundamentals
Valve Characterist ics
Valve Classificat ions
Valve Types
Gate Valves
Globe Valves
Plug, Ball, and Butterfly Valves
Diaphragm Valves
Check Valves
Valve Operation
Manual Operation
Mechanical Operators
Course 147 of 245
Maintenance
PUMPS: Centrifugal Pump Basics and Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_AMPC1)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion of centrifugal pumps and general
procedures for troubleshooting centrifugal pump problems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the
basic operation of a centrifugal pump, explain how centrifugal pumps can be classified, identify the main parts of a centrifugal
pump, and describe problems that can occur in them.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Pump Basics
Name the two most common types of pumps and describe the differences between them.
Describe the basic operation of a centrifugal pump.
Ident ify and describe characterist ics that are used to classify centrifugal pumps.
Describe advantages and applications of various types of centrifugal pumps.
Pump Parts
Name the main external parts of a centrifugal pump and describe the function of each.
Name the main internal parts of a centrifugal pump and describe the function of each.
Troubleshooting
Describe some general considerations associated with troubleshooting a centrifugal pump.
Describe symptoms of a centrifugal pump problem that can be heard, and list the probable causes of those
symptoms.
Describe the causes and effects of cavitation, and explain how it can be eliminated.
Describe symptoms of a centrifugal pump problem that can be seen, and list the probable causes of those
symptoms.
Describe symptoms of a centrifugal pump problem that can be felt , and list the probable causes of those
symptoms.
Describe some general preparations for working on a pump.
Describe some problems that can be detected by inspecting the internal parts of a centrifugal pump.
Subjects:
Pump Basics
Types of Pumps
Centrifugal Pump Operat ion
Classification of Centrifugal Pumps
Pump Parts
External Parts
Internal Parts
Troubleshooting
General Considerations
Common Symptoms
Internal Problems
Course 148 of 245
Maintenance
PUMPS: Centrifugal Pump Overhaul (IHRDC_OM_AMPC2)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic procedures for overhauling a centrifugal pump. After
completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe preparations for a centrifugal pump overhaul, procedures for
disassembling a centrifugal pump, inspecting its parts, and reassembling it .
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Preliminary Steps
Describe general preparations for a centrifugal pump overhaul.
Describe safety precautions that should be taken as part of preparing to work on a centrifugal pump.
Describe a procedure for removing the upper half of a horizontally split centrifugal pump casing.
Describe a procedure for preliminary inspection of the internal parts of a centrifugal pump.
Disassembly and Assembly
Describe a procedure for disassembling the internal parts of a centrifugal pump.
Ident ify the parts of a centrifugal pump to be inspected and state what to look for in each part.
Describe how to measure the clearance between a casing wearing ring and an impeller.
Explain how to determine if casing wearing rings are round.
Describe the procedure for performing a shaft runout test .
Reassembly
List steps that are commonly taken in preparing to reassemble a centrifugal pump.
Describe a procedure for reinstalling an impeller.
Describe a procedure for reassembling and reinstalling a rotor.
Describe a procedure for reassembling the casing of a centrifugal pump.
Subjects:
Preliminary Steps
Preparation
Casing Removal
Preliminary Inspect ion
Disassembly and Inspection
Disassembly
Inspection
Wearing Ring Measurements
Shaft Tests
Reassembly
Reinstalling the Impeller
Reassembling and Reinstalling the Rotor
Reassembling the Casing
Course 149 of 245
Maintenance
PUMPS: Multistage Centrifugal (IHRDC_OM_AMPMC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion, disassembly, and reassembly of a typical
mult istage centrifugal pump. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the components and operation of
a mult istage centrifugal pump and explain how this kind of pump can be disassembled and reassembled when necessary.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Basic Concepts
Ident ifyand describe the components of a typical mult istage centrifugal pump.
Describe the operation of a typical mult istage centrifugal pump.
Describe techniques that are commonly used to minimize axial thrust in a mult istage centrifugal pump.
Describe techniques that are commonly used to minimize radial thrust in a mult istage centrifugal pump.
Ident ify problems commonly found in mult istage centrifugal pumps.
Describe techniques used to ident ify problems in a mult istage centrifugal pump.
Pump Assembly
Describe tasks that are commonly part of preparing for a pump disassembly.
Describe a general procedure for disassembling an axially split mult istage centrifugal pump.
Describe tasks that are commonly performed when a radially split mult istage centrifugal pump is disassembled.
Describe tasks that are commonly performed as part of removing components from a pump shaft assembly.
Pump Reassembly
Describe tasks that are commonly performed when pump shaft assembly components are installed.
Describe a general procedure for reassembling an axially split mult istage centrifugal pump.
Describe tasks that are commonly performed when a radially split mult istage centrifugal pump is reassembled.
Describe tasks that are commonly performed when a mult istage centrifugal pump is returned to service.
Subjects:
Basic Concepts
Types of Mult istage Centrifugal Pumps
Components and Operation
Minimizing Axial and Radial Thrust
Ident ifying Common Problems
Pump Disassembly
Preparations
Axially Split Pumps
Radially Split Pumps
Shaft Assemblies
Pump Reassembly
Shaft Assemblies
Axially Split Pumps
Radially Split Pumps
Return to Service
Course 150 of 245
Maintenance
PUMPS: Positive Displacement (IHRDC_OM_AMPPD)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of posit ive
displacement pumps. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of various types of
reciprocating and rotary posit ive displacement pumps. They should also be able to describe how to prepare for overhauling a
posit ive displacement pump, disassemble the pump, clean and inspect its parts, and then reassemble it .
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Types and Operation
Describe the basic operation of a piston pump.
Describe the basic operation of a plunger pump.
Describe the basic operation of a diaphragm pump.
Describe the basic operation of a double-acting pump.
Explain what a duplex pump is.
Describe the basic operation of a screw pump.
Describe the basic operation of a gear pump.
Describe the basic operation of a lobe pump.
Describe the basic operation of a sliding vane pump.
Describe the basic operation of a flexible member pump.
Overhaul Preparations and Pump Assembly
Describe general preparations for a pump overhaul.
Describe basic tasks associated with disconnecting a pump from its motor and bedplate.
Explain how to remove the t iming gears and the outboard bearing bracket from a two-screw rotary pump.
Describe a basic procedure for removing mechanical seals from a two-screw rotary pump.
Describe basic guidelines for removing the rotors from a two-screw rotary pump.
Cleaning, Inspection, and Reassembly
Describe precautions associated with cleaning pump components.
Describe basic steps for inspect ing the components of a two-screw rotary pump.
Describe general preparations that should be made before a pump is reassembled.
Describe a basic procedure for reassembling a two-screw rotary pump.
Subjects:
Types and Operation
Reciprocating Pumps
Rotary Pumps
Overhaul Preparations and Pump Assembly
Overhaul Preparations
Init ial Disassembly
Final Disassembly
Cleaning, Inspection and Reassembly
Cleaning and Inspection
Reassembly
Course 151 of 245
Maintenance
RIGGING: Basic Lifting (IHRDC_OM_AMRLL)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the proper use of devices designed to lift and move loads.
After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how to use a simple block and tackle, a compound block and
tackle, a hoist, a jack, a winch, a turnbuckle, and a load leveler. They should also be able to describe the effects of sling angles
and hitch patterns on a sling's lift ing ability.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Block and Tackle
Ident ify the parts of a simple block and tackle.
Describe the proper use of a simple block and tackle.
Ident ify the parts of a typical compound block and tackle.
Describe inspections that are typically performed before a compound block and tackle is used.
Explain what is involved in reeving a block and tackle.
Describe the proper use of a compound block and tackle.
Define mechanical advantage.
Explain how to use a formula to select the appropriate block and tackle needed to lift a given weight.
Hoists, Jacks, and Winches
Describe the basic operation of a chain hoist.
Describe the basic operation of a come-along.
Describe the basic operation of a ratchet jack.
Describe the basic operation of a screw jack.
Describe the basic operation of a hydraulic jack.
Describe basic safety precautions associated with using a jack.
Describe the basic operation of a winch.
Slings and Levelers
Describe the effects of sling angles on a sling's lift ing capacity.
Describe the effects of hitch patterns on a sling's lift ing capacity.
Describe how a turnbuckle can be used to adjust sling length.
Describe how a load leveler can be used to balance a load.
Subjects:
Block and Tackle
Simple Block and Tackle
Compound Block and Tackle
Mechanical Advantage
Hoists, Jacks and Winches
Hoists
Jacks
Winches
Slings and Levelers
Slings
Leveling Devices
Course 152 of 245
Maintenance
RIGGING: Heavy Lifting (IHRDC_OM_AMRHL)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with equipment and procedures used for lift ing and moving
heavy objects. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe various types of rigging hardware and cranes.
They should also be able to explain how to use lift ing capacity charts and how to balance loads.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Heavy Lifting Equipment
Describe the following rigging components and identify basic inspect ion checks that should be made to them:
Shackles
Hooks
Swivels
Turnbuckles
Rigging links and equalizer plates
Lift ing lugs and eyebolts
Spreader beams and lift ing beams
Tag lines
Heavy Lifting Procedures
Describe how to read and interpret lift ing capacity charts.
Describe load balancing techniques commonly used during heavy lift ing.
Describe basic procedures involved in planning and completing a heavy lift ing job using a crawler crane.
Subjects:
Heavy Lifting Equipment
Hardware
Bridge Cranes
Boom Cranes
Crane Inspections
Heavy Lifting Procedures
Capacity Charts
Load Balancing
Crawler Crane Job
Course 153 of 245
Maintenance
RIGGING: Ladders and Scaffolds (IHRDC_OM_AMRLS)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with various types of ladders and scaffolds that enable personnel
to work at elevated heights. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how to select the proper ladder for
a job and then use the ladder safely. They should also be able to describe general safety precautions associated with using
scaffolds, and the basic operat ion and use of various types of fixed and powered scaffolds.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Ladders
Describe various types of ladders and their rat ings.
Explain how to select the proper ladder for the job.
Explain how to use a ladder safely.
Fixed Scaffolds
Describe general safety precautions associated with stationary, or fixed scaffolds.
Describe the assembly, use, and disassembly of a systems scaffold.
Describe the assembly, use, and disassembly of a tubular welded frame scaffold.
Powered Scaffolds
Describe the basic components and operation of a pneumatic scaffold.
Describe the basic components and operation of a hydraulic scaffold.
Subjects:
Ladders
Types of Ladders
Ladder Safety
Fixed Scaffolds
Scaffold Safety
Systems Scaffolds
Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds
Powered Scaffolds
Pneumatic Scaffolds
Hydraulic Scaffolds
Course 154 of 245
Maintenance
RIGGING: Overview (IHRDC_OM_AMROV)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles involved in moving materials and
equipment from one place to another. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the funct ions of various
types of rigging equipment and explain how to select and inspect equipment for a job that involves rigging.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction to Rigging
Describe the basic characterist ics of fiber rope, wire rope, and chain.
Ident ify and describe the functions of the following end fitt ings and connectors: eye splices, thimbles, wire rope
clips, shackles, sockets, wedge sockets and hooks.
Ident ify and describe the uses bridle slings, choker hitch slings and basket hitch slings.
Explain how to inspect wire rope, chains, synthetic web slings, hooks, shackles and sockets, and equipment to
be rigged.
Derricks and Cranes
Ident ify the following types of derricks:
A-frame and Gin pole derricks
Guy derricks and St iffleg derricks
Chicago boom derricks
Ident ify the following types of cranes:
Crawler cranes
Truck-mounted cranes
Truck-mounted hydraulic cranes
Gantry-mounted cranes
Tower-mounted cranes
Hammerhead cranes
Rough-terrain cranes
Carrydeck cranes
Describe hand signals commonly used for different types of cranes.
Rigging and Moving Loads
Explain how to est imate the size and weight of a load.
Explain how to find a load's center of gravity.
Ident ify the following types of knots: bowline, running bowline, t imber hitch, half hitch, square know, clove hitch
and barrel hitch.
Describe the basic rigging safety precautions.
Describe basic steps involved in planning a rigging job.
Describe how to select the proper equipment for a rigging job.
Subjects:
Introduction to Rigging
Ropes and Chains
End Fitt ings, Connectors, and Slings
Equipment Inspections
Derricks and Cranes
Derricks and Cranes
Crane Hand Signals
Rigging and Moving Loads
Est imating Size, Weight, and Center of Gravity
Tying Knots
Rigging and Moving Materials and Equipment
Course 155 of 245
Maintenance
SAFETY: Basics (IHRDC_OM_AMSBA)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with hazards they may encounter on the job, and ways in which
they can protect themselves from these hazards. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe causes of
on-the-job accidents, explain how company safety policies can help prevent accidents, describe actions that can be taken to
make a work site safe, and explain how workers can protect themselves from electrical hazards and fire hazards.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Preventing Accidents
Describe causes of on-the-job accidents.
Explain how good housekeeping can prevent accidents.
Explain why it is important to follow all company safety policies.
Explain why it is important to report on-the-job injuries, accidents, and near misses.
Explain why it is important for workers to know and follow company evacuation procedures.
Work Site Safety
Describe typical personal protective equipment, and explain when and why each type of equipment is used.
Describe how to inspect and care for personal protect ive equipment.
Describe safe procedures for lift ing heavy objects.
Describe common workplace hazards.
Describe rules and guidelines for general work site safety.
Describe safety requirements for working in confined spaces.
Describe safe pract ices for operating or working near motorized vehicles.
Describe safe lockout/tagout procedures.
Describe safe pract ices for working around barriers and barricades.
State the purpose of the OSHA Hazard Communicat ion Standard and the function of Material Safety Data
Sheets.
Describe rules and guidelines for working safely around hazardous substances.
Describe how to inspect and work safely with ladders.
Describe how to inspect and work safely with scaffolds.
Electrical and Fire Safety
Describe typical work site electrical hazards.
Describe safe pract ices for working around electrical hazards.
Describe actions that should be taken when an electrical shock occurs.
Explain how fires start.
Describe common fire prevent ion practices.
Ident ify the classes of fires and the type of ext inguisher to use for each class.
Describe actions that should be taken if a fire occurs.
Subjects:
Preventing Accidents
Accidents; Safety Policies
Work Site Safety
Personal Protection; Safe Work Practices
Equipment and Materials
Ladders and Scaffolds
Electrical and Fire Safety
Course 156 of 245
Maintenance
SAFETY: Chemical Health Hazards (IHRDC_OM_AMSHS)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with chemical health hazards that might be present in the
workplace. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify various types of physical hazards and health hazards
associated with chemicals and describe how they can protect themselves from those hazards.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Identification
Define the terms physical hazard and health hazard and identify examples of each.
Define the term route of entry and describe three examples.
Define the terms acute effects and chronic effects and describe examples of each.
Describe information that is provided on Material Safety Data Sheets.
Explain what the colors and numbers represent in the NFPA fire diamond.
Explain what the colors and numbers represent in the HMIS labeling system.
Explain what the colors and numbers represent in the DOT labeling system.
Protection
Describe two types of respirators.
Describe how to determine if a respirator is in safe working condit ion.
Describe how to properly select and use goggles.
Describe how to properly select and use chemical-resistant clothing.
Describe two propert ies of a chemical that can indicate a hazardous situation.
Describe general steps for responding to a chemical emergency.
Subjects:
Identification
Types of Hazards
Documents and Labels
Protection
Respirators
Clothing and Equipment
Emergency Response
Course 157 of 245
Maintenance
SAFETY: Electrical (IHRDC_OM_AMSEL)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles of electricity and electrical safety. At the
conclusion of ht is unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of various aspects of working safely around electrical
equipment
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Electrical Concepts
Describe the basic electrical quantit ies of current, voltage, and resistance.
Shock
State what an electrical shock is.
Describe factors that affect the severity of an electrical shock.
Describe the physical effects of current passing through the human body.
Hazards
Describe hazards associated with working near electrical equipment.
Protection
Describe ways of providing protect ion to personnel from hazards associated with electricity.
Emergencies
Describe how to safely give aid to an electrical shock vict im.
Describe how to safely respond to an electrical fire.
Subjects:
Electrical Concepts
Friend or Foe?
Current
Voltage
Resistance
Shock
What Is Shock?
Amount of Current
Length of Time
Path Through the Body
Effects
Hazards
High Voltage Area
Overloaded Circuits
Damaged Cords
Bare Connectors
Long and Tall Objects
Mobile Equipment
Standing Water
Course 158 of 245
Maintenance
SEALS: Gaskets and Packing (IHRDC_OM_AMMSG)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the use of gaskets and packing to prevent or minimize
leakage from equipment such as pumps and valves. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify various types
of gaskets and explain how to cut and install gaskets. They should also be able to identify the components of a packing gland
and explain how to remove and install packing.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Gaskets
Explain how gaskets work.
Describe common types of gaskets.
Describe a procedure for using a gasket cutter.
Describe a procedure for cutt ing a gasket by hand.
Describe a procedure for installing a basic flat gasket on a pump casing.
Describe a procedure for installing an "O" ring on a flange.
Packing
Describe packing and explain how it works.
Describe components of a typical packing gland.
Describe compression and hydraulic packing.
Describe a procedure for removing old packing from a pump.
Describe a procedure for installing new packing on a pump.
Subjects:
Gaskets
Operation
Cutt ing Gaskets
Installing Gaskets
Packing
Operation
Packing Removal
Packing Installat ion
Course 159 of 245
Maintenance
SEALS: Mechanical (IHRDC_OM_AMMES)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the use and installat ion of various types of mechanical seals.
After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify the components of commonly used types of mechanical seals,
explain why mechanical seals can fail, and identify causes of seal failures by examining seal components. They should also be
able to disassemble a pump to remove a mechanical seal, take the appropriate installat ion measurements, and install a new
mechanical seal.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction
Ident ify the components of a typical mechanical seal.
Describe how a typical mechanical seal operates.
Ident ify commonly used types of mechanical seals.
Describe some common causes of mechanical seal failures.
Explain how to identify causes of seal failures by examining seal components.
Preparations for Seal Installations
Describe one way to disassemble a pump to remove a mechanical seal.
Describe checks and measurements commonly made during and after the pump disassembly to prepare for a
mechanical seal installat ion.
Seal Installations
Explain how certain pump components are temporarily reassembled so that preliminary measurements can be
taken before a new mechanical seal is installed.
Describe one way to install an inside pusher seal.
Describe one way to install an elastomer bellows seal.
Describe one way to install a metal bellows seal.
Describe one way to install an outside seal.
Describe one way to install a cartridge seal.
Subjects:
Introduction
Seal Components
Types of Mechanical Seals
Mechanical Seal Failures
Preparations for Seal Installations
Pump Disassembly
Pump Component Checks
Seal Installations
Installat ion Measurements
Inside Pusher Seal Installat ion
Non-Pusher Seal Installat ion
Outside and Cartridge Seals
Course 160 of 245
Maintenance
SHAFT ALIGNMENT: Fundamentals (IHRDC_OM_AMSAF)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with measuring and
correcting shaft misalignment. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic types of misalignment,
condit ions that may affect shaft alignment, and how to perform a rough alignment.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction
Describe the basic types of misalignment.
Describe how a proper orientation to equipment should be established prior to alignment procedure.
Describe basic measurements that are necessary for determining misalignment.
Describe how misalignment is corrected.
Describe the basic operation of two types of dial indicators commonly used for alignment work.
Conditions Affecting Alignment
Ident ify common foundation problems and describe preparations performed on equipment foundations.
Describe what a soft foot is.
Describe a procedure for measuring and correcting a soft foot condit ion.
Describe what pipe st rain is, and how it can affect shaft alignment.
Describe a procedure for measuring pipe strain.
Describe how a bent shaft or bad bearings can affect shaft alignment.
Describe a procedure for measuring shaft runout.
Describe what thermal growth is and how it can affect shaft alignment.
Describe procedures for measuring thermal growth.
Rough Alignment Procedure
Describe a procedure for measuring and sett ing the mechanical center of a pump's shaft.
Describe a procedure for determining the magnetic center of an electric motor.
Describe a rough alignment procedure using the straightedge and feeler gage method.
Subjects:
Introduction
Types of Misalignment
Alignment Orientation
Basic Measurements and Corrections
Conditions Affecting Alignment
Foundat ion Problems
Soft Foot
Pipe Strain
Shaft and Bearing Problems
Thermal Growth
Rough Alignment Procedure
Basic Preparations
Straightedge and Feeler Gage Method
Course 161 of 245
Maintenance
SHAFT ALIGNMENT: Reverse Dial and Laser (IHRDC_OM_AMSRD)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with equipment and procedures for aligning shafts using the
reverse dial method and using a laser system. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to prepare and set up
equipment for a reverse dial and laser-based alignment. They should also be able to measure shaft misalignment and
determine how it should be corrected so that the alignment is within specified tolerances.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Preparing for a Reverse Dial Alignment
Review the basic types of shaft misalignment.
Describe the arrangement of instruments used to perform a reverse alignment.
Describe the general types of preparations required for a shaft alignment using the reverse dial method.
Performing a Reverse Dial Alignment
Explain how to measure misalignment in the vert ical plane using the reverse dial method.
Explain how to construct a graph representing misalignment in the vert ical plane that is measured by the
reverse dial method.
Describe how to correct misalignment in the vert ical plane.
Explain how to measure misalignment in the horizontal plane using the reverse dial method.
Explain how to construct a graph representing misalignment in the horizontal plane that is measured by the
reverse dial method.
Describe how to correct misalignment in the horizontal plane.
Explain how to determine if a shaft alignment is within tolerances.
Laser Alignment
Describe the basic parts and operation of a laser alignment system.
Subjects:
Preparing for a Reverse Dial Alignment
Fundamentals
Equipment Preparations
Performing a Reverse Dial Alignment
Overview
Measuring Vert ical Plane Alignment
Measuring Horizontal Plane Alignment
Graphing and Correct ing Horizontal Misalignment
Alighment Tolerances
Laser Alignment
System Parts and Operation
Course 162 of 245
Maintenance
SHAFT ALIGNMENT: Rim and Face (IHRDC_OM_AMSRF)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with measuring and
correcting shaft misalignment using the rim and face method. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe
the basic types of misalignment, general preparations for a rim and face shaft alignment procedure, and explain how to use
the rim and face shaft alignment procedure. They should also be able to explain how to use the rim and face method to
measure and correct misalignment on horizontally mounted equipment and on vert ically mounted equipment.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Getting Started
Review the basic types of shaft alignment.
Describe the arrangement of dial indicators and their mount ing brackets for a rim and face shaft alignment.
Describe equipment checks and adjustments that are generally made before alignment readings are taken
using the rim and face method.
Aligning Horizontally Mounted Equipment
Explain how to take measurements on horizontally mounted equipment for a rim and face alignment.
Explain how to measure misalignment in the vert ical plane using the rim and face method.
Explain how to construct a graph representing misalignment in the vert ical plane that is measured by the rim
and face method.
Describe how to correct a misalignment in the vert ical plane.
Explain how to measure misalignment on the horizontal plane using the rim and face method.
Explain how to construct a graph representing misalignment in the horizontal plane that is measured by the rim
and face method.
Describe how to correct misalignment in the horizontal plane.
Aligning Vertically Mounted Equipment
Explain how to take measurements on vert ically mounted equipment for a rim and face alignment.
Explain how to measure misalignment on vert ically mounted equipment using the rim and face method.
Explain how to construct graphs representing misalignment measured by the rim and face method.
Describe how to correct misalignment on vert ically mounted equipment.
Subjects:
Getting Started
Fundamentals
General Preparations
Aligning Horizontally Mounted Equipment
Preliminary Measurements
Vert ical Plane Misalignment
Horizontal Plane Misalignment
Aligning Vertically Mounted Equipment
Preparations
Measuring Misalignment
Correcting Misalignment
Course 163 of 245
Maintenance
TOOLS: Introduction to Hand Tools (IHRDC_OM_AMTIH)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the proper use of hand tools. After completing this unit ,
t rainees should be able to explain how to properly use hammers, punches, prying tools, screwdrivers, wrenches, measuring tools,
cutt ing tools, vises and clamps.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Hammers, Punches, and Prying Tools
Explain how to properly use a hammer. Describe the difference between a claw hammer and a ball peen
hammer. Explain how to properly use a sledgehammer.
Explain how to properly use a wedge.
Explain how to properly use a punch. Identify two types of punches.
Explain how to properly use a ripping bar.
Explain how to properly use a nail puller.
Screwdrivers and Wrenches
Explain how to properly use a screwdriver. Describe the difference between a straight-blade screwdriver and a
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Explain the proper use of non-adjustable, socket and torque wrenches.
Measuring Tools
Define the terms level and plumb. Explain the proper uses of a level, a plumb bob and a chalk line.
Explain how to properly use a framing square and a combination square.
Explain how to properly use a steel rule, a measuring tape and a wooden folding rule.
Cutting Tools
Explain how to properly use a hand saw. Describe the differences between a crosscut saw and a rip saw.
Explain how to properly use a file. Describe four types of files: a single-cut file, a double-cut file, a curved tooth
file, and a rasp-cut file.
Explain how to use a wire brush to clean tools such as files.
Explain how to properly use a chisel. Dist inguish between a wood chisel and a cold chisel.
Explain how to properly use a ut ility knife.
Gripping and Holding Tools
Explain how to properly use slip joint, long nose, and lineman pliers.
Explain how to properly use a bench vise and a C-clamp.
Subjects:
Hammers, Punches, and Prying Tools
Hammers and sledgehammers
Wedges and punches
Ripping Bars and nail pullers
Screwdrivers and Wrenches
Screwdrivers
Wrenches and socket wrenches
Measuring Tools
Levels, plumb bobs and chalk lines
Squares, rulers and measuring tapes
Cutting Tools
Saws, files and chisels
Utility knives
Course 164 of 245
Maintenance
TOOLS: Introduction to Power Tools (IHRDC_OM_AMTIP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the proper use of various types of power tools. After
completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how to properly use and maintain power drills, power saws, power
grinders, jackhammers, and hydraulic jacks.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Types of Power Tools
Ident ify and describe some common ways of classifying power tools.
Ident ify and describe commonly used types of power drills.
Ident ify and describe commonly used types of power saws.
Ident ify and describe commonly used types of power grinders.
Ident ify and describe common examples of jackhammers and hydraulic jacks.
Power Tool Safety
Describe safety procedures associated with the use of power tools in general.
Describe safety procedures associated specifically with the use of electric power tools.
Describe safety precautions and procedures associated specifically with the use of pneumatic power tools.
Power Tool Operation and Maintenance
Describe the basic procedures for the safe operation and proper maintenance of different types of power drills.
Describe the basic procedures for the safe operation and proper maintenance of different types of power saws.
Describe the basic procedures for the safe operation and proper maintenance of different types of power
grinders.
Describe the basic procedures for the safe operation and proper maintenance of a typical jackhammer and a
typical hydraulic jack.
Subjects:
Types of Power Tools
Power Tool Classifications
Power Drills
Power Saws
Power Grinders
Jackhammers and Hydraulic Jacks
Power Tool Safety
General Safety Concerns
Electric Tool Safety
Pneumatic Tool Safety
Power Tool Operation and Maintenance
Using Power Drills
Using Power Saws
Using Power Grinders
Using Jackhammers and Hydraulic Jacks
Course 165 of 245
Maintenance
TOOLS: Precision Measurement Instruments (IHRDC_OM_AMTMI)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with use of vernier calipers, different types of micrometers, dial
indicators, and fixed gauges. This program also describes basic calibrat ion procedures for several types of instruments and some
basic guidelines for caring for precision measurement tools.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Vernier Caliper
Ident ify the purpose and parts of a vernier caliper.
Explain the procedures for using a vernier caliper properly.
Demonstrate how to read a vernier scale.
Micrometers
Demonstrate the procedure for using an outside micrometer.
Explain how to read an outside micrometer's scale.
Demonstrate the procedure for using an inside micrometer.
Demonstrate the procedure for taking measurements with a telescoping gauge.
Demonstrate the procedure for using a micrometer depth gauge.
Dial Indicators
Describe how to use a dial indicator.
Fixed Gauges
Explain how measurements are taken with feeler gauges.
Explain how measurements are taken with a taper gauge.
Calibration and Care
Describe general procedures for calibrating several precision measurement instruments.
Describe some basic guidelines for caring for precision measurement tools.
Subjects:
Vernier Caliper
Basics
Reading a Vernier Caliper
Micrometers
Outside Micrometers
Inside Micrometers
Telescoping Gauges
Depth Micrometers
Dial Indicators
Features
Fixed Gauges
Feeler Gauge
Taper Gauge
Calibration and Care
Calibration
Care
Course 166 of 245
Maintenance
VIBRATION ANALYSIS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AMVAI)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with measuring and analyzing
vibration in rotating equipment. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain what vibration is and why it
occurs in rotating equipment. They should also be able to describe how to measure vibration using a transducer, a vibration
meter, and a vibration analyzer. Addit ionally, they should be able to explain how to analyze vibration using baseline data,
vibration severity charts, and vibrat ion signatures.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Fundamentals
Define vibration.
Define terms associated with vibration.
Describe characterist ics of rotating equipment that are associated with vibration.
Describe causes of vibration in rotating equipment.
Measuring Vibration
Define t ransducer.
Describe considerations associated with using a transducer.
Describe how a typical vibration meter can be used in vibration analysis.
Describe how a typical portable vibration analyzer can be used in vibration analysis.
Describe how a typical computer-based vibration analyzer can be used in vibrat ion analysis.
Analyzing Vibration
Describe how informat ion about a vibration's characterist ics can be used to analyze the vibration.
Describe how baseline data can be used in vibration analysis.
Describe how to use a vibration severity chart .
Describe how a vibration signature can be used in vibration analysis.
Subjects:
Fundamentals
Characterist ics of Vibration
Vibration and Rotating Equipment
Measuring Vibration
Basic Concepts
Vibration Severity Charts
Vibration Signatures
Course 167 of 245
Maintenance
WELDING: Arc Welding (IHRDC_OM_AEEDC)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic concepts associated with arc welding. After
completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe various hazards associated with arc welding and what can be done
to protect personnel from those hazards, identify and describe the parts and operation of a basic arc welding machine, and
describe basic tasks involved in preparing for a welding job. They should also be able to identify and describe the equipment
used for three common arc welding methods: shielded metal arc welding, metal inert gas arc welding, and tungsten inert gas
arc welding.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Fundamentals
Describe hazards associated with welding.
Describe ways of providing basic protection to personnel from hazards associated with welding.
Describe precautions that should be taken when an arc welding unit is set up.
Describe the basic process of arc welding.
Ident ify and describe the parts of a basic arc welding unit.
Describe the basic operation of an arc welding unit.
Describe basic tasks involved to prepare for a welding job.
Welding Methods
Ident ify and describe the equipment used for shielded metal arc welding.
Ident ify and describe the equipment used for metal inert gas arc welding.
Ident ify and describe the equipment used for tungsten inert gas arc welding.
Subjects:
Fundamentals
Safety
Welding Equipment
Preparations
Welding Methods
Shielded Metal Arc Welding
Metal Inert Gas Welding
Tungsten Inert Gas Welding
Course 168 of 245
Maintenance
WELDING: Oxy-Fuel Gas Welding (IHRDC_OM_AMWIG)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic parts and safe operation of oxy-fuel gas welding
rigs. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe common oxy-fuel gas welding applications and safety
concerns associated with the use of oxy-fuel gas welding equipment. They should also be able to describe the parts of a typical
oxy-fuel gas welding rig and explain how to assemble a rig, light the torch, and then disassemble the rig.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Basics
Describe common oxy-fuel gas welding applicat ions.
Describe characterist ics of oxygen and acetylene.
Describe safety concerns associated with oxy-fuel gas welding and identify precautions that can be taken.
Parts and Maintenance
Describe characterist ics of oxygen and acetylene cylinders.
State precautions associated with properly storing and transport ing oxygen and acetylene cylinders.
Describe oxygen and acetylene regulator types and gauges.
State some basic guidelines for handling regulators.
Describe oxygen and acetylene hoses.
State some basic guidelines for handling hoses.
Describe characterist ics of welding and cutt ing torches and t ips.
Assembly, Lighting and Disassembly
Describe tasks associated with assembling an oxy-fuel gas welding rig.
Describe three types of oxy-fuel flames.
Explain how to light a torch and adjust a flame.
Describe a procedure for shutt ing down and disassembling an oxy-fuel gas welding rig.
Subjects:
Basics
Applications
Oxygen and Acetylene
Safety
Parts and Maintenance
Assembly
Lighting
Disassembly
Course 169 of 245
HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT CURRICULUM
International Human Resources Development Corporation
Operations & Maintenance e-Learning
For The Oi l And Gas Indus t r y
Health, Safety & Environment
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION: Air Pollution (IHRDC_OM_AOEAP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with what air pollut ion is and how
it can be controlled. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to explain what air pollut ion is, where it comes from, and
how it can be monitored. They should also be able to explain how air pollut ion from industrial facilit ies can be controlled.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction to Pollution
Explain what air pollut ion is and how it can be harmful.
List two sources of air pollut ion and name one way in which air pollut ion is monitored.
Give an example of a unit used to measure pollutant concentrat ions in the air.
Controlling Air Pollution
Describe one way of preventing part iculates from gett ing into the air.
Provide a basic descript ion of how a process can be modified to reduce air pollut ion from gases.
Explain how material subst itut ion can reduce air pollut ion.
Ident ify four devices that can be used to remove part iculates from a stream of exhaust of air or gases.
Explain how an electrostatic precipitator can capture part iculates and remove them from a stream of exhaust
gases.
Give a basic descript ion of a method to capture a potent ially pollut ing vapor for reuse in a process.
Name two ways to destroy waste gases.
Explain how a scrubber that captures gases operates.
Subjects:
Introduction to Pollution
What is Pollut ion?
Sources of Air Pollut ion
Controlling Air Pollution
Prevent ion
Removal of Part iculates
Removal of Gases
Course 170 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION: Water Pollution and Waste Disposal
(IHRDC_OM_AOEWP)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of preventing pollutants from gett ing
into plant wastewater and removing pollutants from plant wastewater before the water is released into the environment. Also
covered are methods of waste disposal and general considerations associated with hazardous wastes. After completing this
unit, t rainees should be able to identify sources of water pollut ion and explain how pollutants are kept out of plant wastewater.
They should also be able to describe wastewater treatment methods and waste disposal methods.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction to Water Pollution
List two sources of water pollut ion.
Name one way that water pollut ion is monitored.
Name a unit used to measure pollutant concentrations in water.
List two ways to keep pollutants from gett ing into wastewater.
Explain the purpose of a retention pond.
Wastewater Treatment
Explain why removing inorganic chemicals from wastewater requires flocculation and sett ling.
List how bacteria use oxygen to break down organic chemicals.
Describe a typical organic waste treatment facility that includes biological (bacterial) treatment.
Explain what happens in anthracite and activated carbon filters used to remove organic chemicals from
wastewater.
Describe the flow of air and water through a typical cooling tower.
Waste Disposal
List two ways of disposing of wastes.
List why hazardous waste disposal must be carefully controlled.
Explain what a manifest is and how using a manifest helps keep hazardous wastes out of the environment.
Subjects:
Introduction to Water Pollution
Sources of Water Pollut ion
Containment
Wastewater Treatment
Treatment Methods
Filters
Cooling Towers
Waste Disposal
Disposal
Hazardous Waste
Course 171 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
FIRE SAFETY: Classes of Fires and Extinguishers (IHRDC_OM_BBCOF)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles of fire, types of fire ext inguishers, and how
to identify different types of fire ext inguishers.
At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of three elements of combustion, four classes of fires,
common types of fire ext inguishers and extinguishing agents, and ways of ident ifying different types of fire ext inguishers.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Fire Basics
Name three elements of combustion.
Describe the four classes of fires.
Extinguishers & Extinguishing Agents
Describe common types of fire ext inguishers and extinguishing agents.
Extinguisher Identification
Describe several ways of identifying different types of fire ext inguishers.
Subjects:
Fire Basics
Elements of Combustion
Classes of Fires
Extinguishers & Extinguishing Agents
Water
Mult ipurpose Dry Chemicals
Carbon Dioxide
Foam
Class D Agents
Extinguisher Identification
Ident ification
Symbols
Pictures
Course 172 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
FIRE SAFETY: Fire Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBFSA)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles associated with fire, fire prevention, and
managing fire situat ions.
At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of how fires start, general categories of fire prevention
methods, common workplace evacuation procedures, and how to select and use common types of portable fire ext inguishing
equipment.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
How Fires Start
Explain how fires start.
Preventing Fires
Describe two general categories of fire prevention methods and list examples of each.
Managing Fire Situations
Describe some common workplace evacuation procedures.
Explain how to select and use common types of portable fire ext inguishing equipment.
Subjects:
How Fires Start
Basic Elements of Fire
Ignit ing a Fire
Preventing Fires
Controlling Sources of Heat
Controlling Sources of Fuel
Managing Fire Situations
Evacuation Procedures
Emergency and Fire Prevention Plans
Fire Types and Fire Ext inguishers
Using a Fire Ext inguisher
Using a Fire Hose/Standpipe System
Course 173 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
FORKLIFT SAFETY: Forklift Safety Checks (IHRDC_OM_BBFSC)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of performing safety checks on a forklift .
At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of tasks performed as part of a structural check of a
forklift , tasks performed as part of a power system check of a forklift , and tasks that can be performed as part of an operational
check of a forklift .
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Structural Checks
Describe tasks that can be performed as part of a structural check of a forklift .
Power System Checks
Describe tasks that can be performed as part of a power system check of a forklift .
Operational Checks
Describe tasks that can be performed as part of an operational check of a forklift .
Subjects:
Structural Checks
Preparation
Major Components
Safety Components
Power System Checks
Hydraulic System
Electrical System
Internal Combustion Engines
Propane Gas Cylinders
Operational Checks
Before-Use Checks
During-Use Checks
After-Use Checks
Course 174 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
FORKLIFT SAFETY: Safe Forklift Operation (IHRDC_OM_BBSFO)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of various aspects of operating a forklift safely. At the
conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of some techniques that are commonly used to maneuver a
forklift including some special situations they will probably encounter, traffic safety issues associated with forklift operation, and
how to safely handle loads using a forklift .
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Maneuvering a Forklift
Describe how to maneuver a forklift .
Traffic Safety
Describe how to drive a forklift to protect yourself, others and property from injury or damage.
Handling Loads
Describe general guidelines associated with handling loads safely with a forklift .
Subjects:
Maneuvering a Forklift
Rear Wheel Steering
Turning a Corner
Turning in an Aisle
Turning Around
Entering Trucks/Trailers/Rail Cars
Driving on Slopes
Elevators
Traffic Safety
Personal Preparedness
In Case of a Tipover
Pedestrians and Other Vehicles
Obstacles and Hazards
Parking a Forklift
Handling Loads
Visual Inspection
Weights of Loads
Preparing to Move a Load
Moving a Load
Placing a Load
Disengaging the Forks
Other Considerations
Course 175 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
FORKLIFT SAFETY: Understanding Forklifts (IHRDC_OM_BBUFL)
Overview:
The training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some basic information about forklifts.
After completing this unit, the trainees should be able to describe the various types of forklifts and some differences between
forklifts and cars, the standard components of most forklifts, and the principles of forklift safety.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Forklift Basics
Describe the various types of forklifts.
Describe the differences between a forklift and a car.
Forklift Components
Describe the basic components of a forklift .
Describe a forklift 's operat ing controls and gauges.
Principles of Stability
Describe the factors that affect the stability of a forklift .
Subjects:
Forklift Basics
How Forklifts are Powered
Forklift Sizes and Capacit ies
Forklift Attachments
Forklift Components
Major Sections of a Forklift
Forklift Operating Controls
Principles of Stability
Three-Point Suspension Systems
Center of Gravity
Load Center
Course 176 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
HAZARDOUS WASTE OPERATIONS: Hazard Communication (IHRDC_OM_BBHAC)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to provide trainees with a basic understanding of what hazard communication is and how to use it .
At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a general understanding of the types of hazards associated with hazardous
substances, safety guidelines that reduce the risks of working with hazardous substances, and various ways to obtain
information about hazardous substances.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Types of Hazards
Define the term "physical hazard" and identify examples of physical hazards.
Define the term "health hazard" and identify examples of health hazards.
Define the terms "acute effects" and "chronic effects," and identify examples of each.
Operations and Emergency Response
Describe information that should be included in a facility's standard operating procedures for working with
hazardous substances.
Describe information that should be included in a facility's emergency response plan.
Warning Labels
Describe labeling requirements for hazardous substances in the workplace.
Explain what the colors, numbers, and symbols represent on an NFPA fire diamond.
Explain what the colors, numbers, and symbols represent on an HMIS label.
Material Safety Data Sheets
Describe information that can be found on Material Safety Data Sheets.
Written Training Plan
Describe requirements of hazard communication training and what informat ion it must contain.
Subjects:
Types of Hazards
Physical Hazards
Health Hazards
Acute Effects
Chronic Effects
Operations and Emergency Response
Standard Operating Procedures
Emergency Response Plan
Warning Labels
Labeling Requirements
NFPA Fire Diamond
HMIS Labels
Material Safety Data Sheets
Types of Information
Written Training Plan
Requirements
Types of Information
Course 177 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
HAZARDOUS WASTE OPERATIONS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_BBWOP)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of what "HAZWOPER" means, the purpose of the OSHA
HAZWOPER Standard, and the requirements associated with safety and health training and medical surveillance. At the
conclusion of this unit, t rainees will know what "HAZWOPER" means and the purpose of the OSHA HAZWOPER Standard. They
will also have a general understanding of chemical hazards, control measures, and the basic requirements of emergency
response t raining.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
What is HAZWOPER?
Explain what "HAZWOPER" means and explain the purpose of the OSHA HAZWOPER Standard.
List the two general areas of informat ion contained in the Safety and Health Plan as required by HAZWOPER.
List the two general goals of the safety and health training program.
Explain the purpose of the HAZWOPER medical surveillance program.
Chemical Hazards
List the two general types of chemical hazards and describe the risks associated with each type.
Describe the four routes of chemical exposure.
Control Measures
List three general types of control measures to reduce exposure to hazardous chemicals.
Describe the four levels of personal protect ive equipment.
Emergency Response
List the five levels of emergency response training and describe the general requirements of each level.
Subjects:
What is HAZWOPER?
What "HAZWOPER" Means
Safety and Health Program
Training
Medical Surveillance
Chemical Hazards
Physical Hazards
Health Hazards
Routes of Exposure
Control Measures
Engineering Controls and Work Practices
Personal Protective Equipment
Emergency Response
Emergency Response Training
Course 178 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
HAZARDOUS WASTE OPERATIONS: First Responder - Awareness Level
(IHRDC_OM_BBHFR)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to provide trainees with a general understanding of what hazardous materials are and how to
respond to a hazardous materials emergency. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of what
hazardous materials are, how hazardous materials can be ident ified, and what to do if they are first on the scene of a
hazardous materials incident.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Hazardous Materials
Explain what hazardous materials are.
List the two general types of hazards associated with hazardous materials and describe the general risks
associated with each type.
Hazardous Materials Emergencies
Describe some of the potential outcomes of an emergency when hazardous materials are present.
Identifying Hazardous Materials
List some ways that the presence of hazardous materials can be recognized.
List some ways that hazardous materials can be ident ified.
First on the Scene
Describe some general procedures to follow if you are first on the scene of a hazardous materials incident.
Describe some roles that a first responder "Awareness Level" may be required to fill in a hazardous materials
emergency.
Describe the general contents of the DOT Emergency Response Guidebook.
Subjects:
Hazardous Materials
What is a HAZMAT?
Physical Hazards
Health Hazards
Hazardous Materials Emergencies
Fire and Explosion Hazards
Corrosive Materials
Toxic Materials
Hazards Not Directly Related to Chemical Hazards
Identifying Hazardous Materials
Recognizing Hazardous Materials
Ident ifying Hazardous Materials
First on the Scene
First on the Scene - What to Do
The Roles of a First Responder
The DOT Emergency Response Guidebook
Course 179 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
HEALTH: Bloodborne Pathogens (IHRDC_OM_BBBPA)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of hazards associated with exposure to blood in the
workplace and basic methods to help minimize exposure. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic
understanding of the potential hazards of exposure to blood, how to minimize the risk of exposure, and basic principles of the
OSHA bloodborne pathogen standard.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Blood as a Hazardous Material
Explain what bloodborne pathogens are.
Describe the general effects of exposure to the HIV virus.
Describe the general effects of exposure to the HBV virus.
The Risks of Occupational Exposure
List some job categories in the healthcare indust ry that are potentially at risk for exposure to bloodborne
pathogens.
List some job categories outside the healthcare industry that are potentially at risk for exposure to bloodborne
pathogens.
Describe some situations that are not directly related to a job where someone might be at risk for exposure to
bloodborne pathogens.
Minimizing the Risk of Occupational Exposure
Describe the four routes of exposure for bloodborne pathogens, and describe some ways to protect yourself
from exposure through each route of exposure.
The OSHA Bloodborne Pathogens Standard
List the general requirements of the OSHA Bloodborne Pathogens Standard, including the Exposure Control
Plan.
Explain the meaning of the term "exposure incident."
Subjects:
Blood as a Hazardous Material
What are Bloodborne Pathogens?
HIV
HBV
The Risks of Occupational Exposure
Healthcare Industry
General Industry
Other Exposure Risks
Minimizing the Risk of Occupational Exposure
Routes of Exposure
Personal Protection
Other Protective Measures
The OSHA Bloodborne Pathogens Standard
General Requirements
Exposure Control Plan
Exposure Incident
Course 180 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
HEALTH: Hearing Conservation (IHRDC_OM_BBHCO)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a basic understanding of how to protect themselves from hazardous levels of noise in
the workplace. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a general understanding of when noise levels are hazardous,
the basic requirements of the OSHA regulation on hearing conservation, and devices that are used to provide hearing
protection.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Hazardous Noise Levels
Define the following terms: sound, sound wave, and noise
Describe two propert ies of sound waves: intensity and frequency
OSHA Standard
Describe the OSHA regulations for hearing conservat ion.
Hearing Protection Equipment
Describe how ear plus and earmuffs provide hearing protection.
Subjects:
Hazardous Noise Levels
Sound
Sound Waves
Noise
Action Level
OSHA Standard
Requirements
Hearing Conservation Program
Hearing Tests
Hearing Protection Equipment
Ear Plugs
Ear Muffs
Noise Reduct ion Rating
Course 181 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
HEALTH: Workplace Ergonomics (IHRDC_OM_BBWPE)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of ergonomics in the workplace. At the conclusion of this
unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of how ergonomics can prevent MSDs; be able to identify ergonomic risk factors
and work activit ies associated with MSD hazards; describe some common MSDs, including their signs and symptoms and the
importance of report ing them early; and describe the actions that they can take to control ergonomic hazards.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Ergonomics Basics
Describe musculoskeletal disorders.
Explain the term "ergonomics."
Ergonomic Risk Factors
Describe ergonomic risk factors associated with MSDs.
Describe work activit ies that involve ergonomic risk factors.
Common MSDs
Describe common MSDs.
Explain the importance of report ing signs and symptoms early.
Controlling Ergonomic Hazards
Explain what a job hazard analysis is.
Describe some things you can do to reduce MSD hazards.
Raynaud's Phenomenon
Recognize Signs and Symptoms of MSDs
Subjects:
Ergonomics Basics
Musculoskeletal Disorders
Ergonomics Explained
Ergonomic Risk Factors
Awkward Postures
Force
Repetit ion
Contact Stress
Vibration
Static Postures
Cold Temperatures
Mult iple Risk Factors
Common MSDs
Tendinit is and Tenosynovit is
Carpal Tunnel Syndrome
Epicondylit is
Shoulder and Neck Pain
Low Back Pain
Raynaud's Phenomenon
Recognize Signs and Symptoms of
MSDs
Controlling Ergonomic Hazards
Job Hazard Analysis
Things You Can Do to Reduce
Ergonomic Hazards
Course 182 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
MATERIAL HANDLING: Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) (IHRDC_OM_BBMSD)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of the types of information that can be found in Material
Safety Data Sheets. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will know why an MSDS is important and what types of information
an MSDS provides. They will also know how to find specific types of information in an MSDS.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
MSDS Overview
Describe types of information contained in the product identificat ion sect ion of an MSDS.
Characteristics and Physical Hazards
Describe types of information contained in an MSDS about a chemical's characterist ics.
Describe types of information contained in an MSDS about a chemical's physical hazards.
Health Hazards
Describe types of information contained in the health hazards section of an MSDS.
How to Protect Yourself
Describe types of information contained in an MSDS on how to protect yourself from hazardous chemicals.
Subjects:
MSDS Overview
What an MSDS IS
Why an MSDS Is Important
Product Ident ification Section
Characteristics and Physical Hazards
Chemical Ingredients
Physical Data
Fire and Explosion Data
Reactivity Data
Health Hazards
Exposure Limits
Routes of Entry
Effects of Exposure
First Aid
How to Protect Yourself
Spills
Waste Disposal
Storage and Handling
Course 183 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
MATERIAL HANDLING: Tank Trucks (IHRDC_OM_AOMTT)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts of material handling using tank trucks. After
completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe characterist ics of liquids that can affect liquid handling operations.
They should also be able to describe precautions, procedures, and equipment associated with handling hazardous liquids.
Trainees should also be able to describe features of a typical tank truck and typical procedures for its loading and unloading.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
General Concerns
Explain how toxicity, viscosity, volatility, temperature, and pressure can affect liquid handling operations.
Describe how static electricity can affect the handling of bulk liquids.
Describe how operators can identify hazardous materials.
Ident ify precaut ions, procedures, and equipment associated with handling hazardous chemicals.
Loading and Unloading
Describe the major features of a typical tank truck.
Ident ify associated equipment used with tanks during liquid transfers.
Ident ify equipment commonly associated with tank trucks.
Ident ify methods of transferring bulk liquids.
Describe the basic tasks involved in transferring bulk liquids.
Ident ify items that should be checked during pre-t ransfer and post-t ransfer inspections.
Describe typical procedures for top-loading a tank truck.
Describe how bottom-loading a tank truck differs from top-loading a tank truck.
Describe typical procedures for pressurized top unloading from a tank truck by pressurizing with air.
Describe common safety concerns and regulations associated with tank t rucks.
Subjects:
General Concerns
Characterist ics of Liquids
Handling Hazardous Materials
Loading and Unloading
Tank Truck Features
Loading a Tank Truck
Unloading a Tank Truck
Course 184 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
MATERIAL HANDLING: Transporting Hazardous Materials (IHRDC_OM_BBTHM)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of the requirements associated with transport ing hazardous
materials.
At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of how hazardous materials and their containers are
prepared for t ransport, what types of documentation are required, and how hazardous materials are ident ified according to
DOT requirements.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Classifications
Define the term "hazardous materials," and identify the Department of Transportation regulations that control
the shipment of these materials.
Ident ify and describe the different classes of hazardous materials.
Ident ify and describe terms and symbols used to identify hazardous materials.
Documentation and Packaging
Describe documentation that is needed to transport hazardous materials.
Describe types of packaging used to t ransport hazardous materials.
Describe markings used to ident ify hazardous materials contained in packaging.
Labels and Placarding
Ident ify and describe labels and placarding used to identify hazardous materials.
Subjects:
Classifications
What are Hazardous Materials?
Classes of Hazardous Materials
Terms and Symbols
Documentation and Packaging
Documentation
Packaging
Labels
Labels and Placarding
Labels
Course 185 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
MATERIAL HANDLING: Warning Signs and Labels (IHRDC_OM_BBWST)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of the purpose and use of warning signs and various types of
labels.
At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of government regulations that deal with labeling. They
will also have a general understanding of the types of information that can be obtained from hazardous product labels,
shipping labels and warning signs.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Overview
Ident ify government regulations regarding labeling.
Hazardous Product Labels
Describe types of information that can be found on hazardous product labels.
Shipping Labels
Describe types of information that can be found on DOT shipping labels and markings.
Warning Signs
Describe types of information that can be found on warning signs.
Subjects:
Overview
Resource Conservat ion and Recovery Act
OSHA Hazard Communication Standard
DOT Regulations
Examples of Warning Signs and Labels
Hazardous Product Labels
NFPA Hazard Rating System
HMIS Rating System
Shipping Labels
DOT Shipping Labels and Markings
Warning Signs
Types of Information
Protection
Informing Workers
Prevent ing Exposure
Prevent ing Accidental Operation
Tools
Equipment
Personal Gear
Emergencies
Aiding a Shock Vict im
Fighting an Electrical Fire
Course 186 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT : Respirator Fit Testing (IHRDC_OM_BBRFT)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of respirator fit factors and methods for performing basic
respirator test ing.
At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will understand how to select a respirator of the proper size, and how to perform fit
checks and test ing to ensure that the respirator will protect the user from airborne contaminants.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Fittings
Explain how proper respirator fit is determined, and ident ify factors that may prevent s respirator from properly
fitt ing an individual.
Disposable Respirators
Describe how to ensure a proper fit with a disposable filter mask respirator.
Fit Checks
Describe basic procedures for performing exhalation and inhalat ion fit checks.
Testing
Describe basic procedures for performing qualitat ive test ing.
Describe basic procedures for performing quantitat ive test ing.
Subjects:
Fittings
Proper Fit
Fitt ing Factors
Disposable Respirators
Types of Disposable Respirators
Selecting the Proper Size
Ensuring the Proper Fit
Fit Checks
Checking General Condit ion
Posit ive Pressure Check
Negative Pressure Check
Testing
Qualitat ive Test ing
Quantitat ive Test ing
Course 187 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: Personal Protection Equipment
(IHRDC_OM_BBPPE)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic types of personal protection equipment.
At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of personal protective clothing and equipment,
including respiratory protection and fall protection.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Protective Clothing
Describe basic clothing that can be worn to protect against job related hazards.
Describe types of gloves worn to protect the hands from job related hazards.
Describe types of work shoes worn to protect the feet from job related hazards.
Protective Equipment
Describe a typical hard hat and other head protection used to protect the head from job related hazards.
Describe types and uses of protective equipment commonly used to protect eyesight and hearing.
Respiratory Protection
Describe equipment used for respiratory protection.
Fall Protection
Describe typical equipment used for fall protection.
Subjects:
Protective Clothing
Protective Clothing
Wearing Clothing Properly
Protecting Hands and Feet
Protective Equipment
Head Protection
Eye Protection
Hearing Protection
Respiratory Protection
Types of Respirators
Fall Protection
Fall Protection Equipment
Course 188 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: Respiratory Protection (IHRDC_OM_BBRPR)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic types of respirators and proper methods for the use
and care of respirators.
At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of air purifying respirators, air supplied respirators, and
how to properly use and care for respirators.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Air Purifying Respirators
Describe what an air purifying respirator is and identify common types of air purifying respirators.
Describe a typical disposable filter mask and explain how it can be used.
Describe a typical chemical cartridge mask and explain how it can be used.
Explain how to choose the proper cartridge for a chemical cartridge respirator.
Describe a typical gas mask and explain how it can be used.
Air Supplied Respirators
Ident ify basic types of air supplied respirators.
Describe a typical air line respirator and explain how it can be used.
Describe a typical self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) and explain how it can be used.
Describe a typical portable escape respirator and explain how it can be used.
Use and Care of Respirators
Ident ify factors that affect respirator selection.
Describe general rules for the inspection and safe use of respirators.
Describe general rules for the cleaning and storage of respirators.
Subjects:
Air Purifying Respirators
What is an Air Purifying Respirator?
Disposable Filter Masks
Chemical Cart ridge, Filter and Canister Masks
Gas Masks
Air Supplied Respirators
What is an Air Supplied Respirator?
Types of Air Flow
Air Line Respirators
SCBAs
Portable Escape Respirators
Use and Care of Respirators
Selecting a Respirator
Inspection
Proper Use
Cleaning and Disinfecting
Reassembly and Test ing
Course 189 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
SAFETY: Back Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBBBA)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to provide trainees with a general understanding of how to minimize their chances of sustaining a
back injury. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will know how to maintain good posture as they go about their daily
activit ies, how to safely lift and move loads, and how to perform some simple exercises that are helpful in maintaining a healthy
back.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Posture
Explain what is meant by the term "good posture."
Describe techniques for maintaining good posture during various activit ies.
Safe Lifting
Describe the proper technique for lift ing and moving an object.
Describe proper techniques for carrying a long load, stacking a load, and performing activit ies that involve
twist ing or turning.
Back Exercises
Describe basic exercises that can be done in an office.
Describe basic exercises that can be done at home or at a gym.
Subjects:
Posture
"Good Posture"
Sitt ing
Standing
Walking and Turning
Reaching Overhead
Picking Up an Object from the Floor
Safe Lifting
"Mental Lifts"
Lift ing an Object
Lowering an Object
Carrying a Long Load
Stacking a Load
Turning a Valve Wheel
Back Exercises
At the Office
At Home or at the Gym
Course 190 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
SAFETY: Confined Space Entry (IHRDC_OM_BBCSE)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a basic understanding of confined space hazards and the general requirements of
the OSHA Confined Space Standard. At the conclusion of this unit , t rainees will know the difference between a confined
space and a "permit-required" confined space. They will also have a general understanding of the hazards associated with
working in confined spaces and how to protect themselves from these hazards.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Confined Space Characteristics
Describe the characterist ics of a confined space.
List some examples of confined spaces.
Explain how a "permit-required" confined space differs from one that does not require a permit.
Confined Space Hazards
Describe the main types of hazards found in "permit-required" confined spaces.
OSHA Confined Space Standard
Describe the general requirements of the OSHA "Permit-Required" Confined Space Standard.
Describe the general requirements for a written Permit Space Program.
Describe the general requirements of a typical entry permit.
Protective Measures
Describe some general protective measures used to protect workers in confined spaces.
The Attendant
Describe general responsibilit ies of the confined space attendant.
Subjects:
Confined Space Characteristics
Confined Spaces
"Permit-Required" Confined Spaces
Confined Space Hazards
Hazardous Atmospheres
Engulfment Hazard
Configurat ion Hazard
Other Hazards
OSHA Confined Space Standard
General Requirements
Written Permit Space Program
A Typical Entry Permit
Protective Measures
Preparing the Space
Personal Protective Equipment
Other Safety Equipment
The Attendant
The Attendant's Responsibilit ies
Course 191 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
SAFETY: Driving Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBDRS)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of driving safety. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will
have a basic understanding of the general circumstances that cause vehicle accidents, the role of defensive driving and
space management in preventing accidents, the importance of the mental and physical condit ion of the driver, and how
proper vehicle maintenance and use of the car's safety features can minimize or prevent accidents.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Understanding Motor Vehicle Accidents
Explain the factors typically involved in motor vehicle accidents.
Explain the difference between "not at fault " and "accident-free."
Defensive Driving
Explain the terms "defensive driving" and "space management."
Discuss specific defensive driving and space management techniques.
Condition of the Driver
Explain error-prone states of mind: frustrat ion/anger, rushing, distracted and drowsy.
Discuss the role of alcohol in motor vehicle accidents.
Vehicle Condition and Safety Features
Discuss the importance of the condit ion of the vehicle.
Discuss safety belts, air bags, and antilock braking systems.
Subjects:
Understanding Motor Vehicle Accidents
Typical factors in motor vehicle accidents
The difference between "not at fault" and "accident-free"
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving defined
Delayed start
Changing lanes on a highway
Space management defined
Managing space in front
Managing space to the side and rear
Space management when not moving
Condition of the Driver
Frustration and anger
Rushing
Distracted
Drowsy
Alcohol
Vehicle Condition and Safety Features
Condit ion of the vehicle
Safety belts
Air bags
Antilock braking systems
Course 192 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
SAFETY: Electrical Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBESA)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles of electricity and electrical safety.
At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of various aspects of working safely around electrical
equipment.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Electrical Safety
Describe the basic electrical quantit ies of current, voltage and resistance.
Shock
State what an electrical shock is.
Describe factors that affect the severity of an electrical shock.
Describe the physical effects of current passing through the human body.
Hazards
Describe hazards associated with working near electrical equipment.
Protection
Describe ways of providing protect ion to personnel from hazards associated with electricity.
Emergencies
Describe how to safely give aid to an electrical shock vict im.
Describe how to safely respond to an electrical fire.
Subjects:
Electrical Concepts
Friend or Foe?
Current
Voltage
Resistance
Shock
What is Shock?
Amount of Current
Length of Time
Path Through the Body
Effects
Hazards
High Voltage Area
Overloaded Circuits
Damaged Cords
Bare Connectors
Long & Tail Objects
Mobile Equipment
Standing Water
Protection
Warning Tape, Signs, Locks and Tags
Compressed Air Tools
Battery Powered Tools
Proper Grounding
Emergencies
Electrical Shock Vict im
Electrical Fire
Course 193 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
SAFETY: Fall Protection (IHRDC_OM_BBFPR)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of when fall protection is required and how to select and use
a personal fall arrest system. At the conclusion of this unit , t rainees will have a basic understanding of condit ions in which fall
protection is required, how fall protection can be achieved, how to identify the basic parts of a typical fall arrest system, and
how to select, use, and care for a personal fall arrest system.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Introduction
Describe working condit ions in which fall protection is required and the purposes served by fall protection.
Ident ify the basic means by which fall protect ion can be achieved.
Ident ify the major topics that must be covered to provide personnel with adequate fall protection training.
Describe the difference between fall prevention and fall arrest.
Ident ify and describe typical equipment used to prevent falls.
Fall Protection Equipment
Ident ify and describe the basic parts of a typical fall arrest system.
Selection, Use and Care
Describe the proper selection, use, and care of a personal fall arrest system.
Subjects:
Introduction
Condit ions in Which Fall Protection Is Required
Purposes of Fall Protection
Basic Means of Achieving Fall Protect ion
Fall Protection Training
Fall Prevention and Fall Arrest
Fall Protection Equipment
Parts of a Typical Fall Arrest System
Selection, Use and Care
Selecting a Personal Fall Arrest System
Using a Personal Fall Arrest System
Caring for a personal Fall Arrest System
Course 194 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
SAFETY: Laboratory Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBLSA)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles of safety in a laboratory sett ing.
At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of general hazards that exist in laboratories, basic
personal protection equipment to protect from those hazards, how to locate information about chemicals, basic standard
operating procedures and chemical hygiene practices, and how to respond in emergency situations.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Hazards in the Laboratory
Describe two broad categories of chemical hazards
Explain the difference between acute and chronic health effects from chemical exposure.
Describe the four routes of chemical exposure.
Minimizing the Risks
Describe the four basic principles of safety in the laboratory
Describe three main types of personal protect ive equipment used in the laboratory.
The OSHA Lab Standard
State the primary requirements of the OSHA Lab Standard and describe some methods of meeting that
requirement.
Describe the general requirements of the written Chemical Hygiene Plan and explain some ways those
requirements can be met.
Chemical Hygiene Practices
Describe some basic chemical hygiene practices that will help minimize exposure to hazardous chemicals in the
lab.
Chemical Storage
Describe some general guidelines for chemical storage and list five classes of chemicals that should be
considered for storage purposes.
Emergency
Explain some general procedures to follow in the event of an emergency in the lab.
Subjects:
Hazards in the Laboratory
Physical Hazards
Health Hazards
Routes of Exposure
Minimizing the Risks
Four Basic Safety Principles
Personal Protective Equipment
The OSHA Lab Standard
General Requirements
The Chemical Hygiene Plan
Chemical Hygiene Practices
Safety Awareness
Minimizing Exposure
Chemical Storage
General Storage Requirements
Five Classes of Chemicals
Emergency
Emergency Response Plan
Emergency Equipment/In Case of Exposure
Course 195 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
SAFETY: Lockout/Tagout (IHRDC_OM_BBLOT)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of standards governing the control of hazardous energy. At
the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of various aspects of lockout/tagout, including safe
lockout/tagout techniques.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
What is Lockout/Tagout?
Define "hazardous energy."
Explain why standards governing the control of hazardous energy are necessary. Describe the purpose and
scope of the OSHA standard that governs the control of hazardous energy.
Hazardous Energy
Ident ify various types of hazardous energy.
Requirements
Ident ify and describe the basic contents of an energy control program.
Describe the protective materials and hardware required by the OSHA energy control standard to perform
lockout/tagout.
Describe the differences between a lockout and a tagout procedure.
Procedures
Describe the basic steps of a typical lockout/tagout procedure.
Special Situations
Describe special situations that can occur during lockout/tagout.
Subjects:
What is Lockout/Tagout?
Accidents
Guidelines
Purpose, Scope and Benefits
Hazardous Energy
Types; Active Energy and Residual Energy
Variat ions
Effects
Requirements
Energy Control Programs and Procedures
Materials & Hardware
Lockout/Tagout Procedures
Training
Inspection
Procedure
Shutdown and Removal of Energy
Applying of Lockout/Tagout Devices
Verification of Safe Condit ion and Preparation for Startup
Removal of Lockout/Tagout Devices and Return to Service
Special Situations
Introduction
Energizing Equipment
Contractors
Group Lockout/Tagout
Shift/Personnel Changes
Course 196 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
SAFETY: Safety Orientation (IHRDC_OM_BBSOR)
Overview:
The purpose of this unit is to provide trainees with a brief overview of common safety issues that are associated with safety in
the workplace.
At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees with have a general understanding of workplace safety issues that are associated with
safe work habits, personal protective equipment, hazard communication, and fire prevention.
Duration:
0.75 hrs
Objectives:
Safe Work Habits
Define fitness for duty and identify condit ions that can affect a worker's fitness for duty.
Describe good housekeeping practices that are associated with workplace safety.
Describe safety concerns and procedures that are associated with the proper use of tools.
Describe safety concerns and procedures that are associated with the energy sources that are used to operate
industrial equipment.
Personal Protective Equipment
Ident ify and describe basic types of personal protect ive equipment that are commonly required for workplace
safety.
Ident ify and describe common types of personal protective equipment that may be required for special
hazards.
Hazard Communication
Describe the types of information that may be obtained from Material Safety Data Sheets.
Describe common types of warning signs, tags, and labels that may be used to communicate information
about hazards in a workplace.
Describe safety concerns and procedures that are commonly associated with hazardous waste operations
(HAZWOPER).
Fire Prevention
Describe basic concerns and procedures that are associated with fire safety.
Ident ify the different classes of fire ext inguishers and the types of fires on which each class of fire ext inguisher is
designed to be used.
Subjects:
Safe Work Habits
Fitness for Duty
Housekeeping
Tool Use
Energy Sources
Personal Protective Equipment
Basic Types
Specialized Types
Hazard Communication
Material Safety Data Sheets
Warning Signs, Tags, and Labels
Introduction to HAZWOPER
Fire Prevention
Fire Safety
Classes of Fire Ext inguishers
Course 197 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
WATER TREATMENT: Wastewater 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOWT1)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with treating industrial
wastewater to prepare it for safe discharge and reuse. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to describe processes
and equipment typically used for wastewater collection and primary treatment, describe the use of chemical precipitat ion
and dissolved air flotation in intermediate treatment, and describe the use of activated sludge in secondary treatment.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Primary Treatment
Explain what wastewater is, where it comes from, and why it must be treated.
Define the following terms: sewer, sewage, and effluent.
Describe processes and equipment typically used in wastewater collection and primary treatment.
Explain why the pH of water may have to be adjusted.
Describe the process of clarification and explain how an upflow clarifier works.
Intermediate Treatment
Describe how clarification is used with chemical precipitation to remove some types of dissolved materials.
Describe the principles of operation for dissolved air flotation.
Secondary Treatment
Define the following terms: micro-organisms, return act ivated sludge, waste activated sludge, and mixed liquor.
Describe the activated sludge process.
Explain the basic requirements that must be met in order for micro-organisms to work efficiently in the activated
sludge process.
Define sludge handling.
Describe some typical methods of sludge handling.
Subjects:
Primary Treatment
Introduction to Wastewater
Wastewater Flow and Screening
Equalization and pH Adjustment
Clarification
Intermediate Treatment
Chemical Precipitation
Dissolved Air Flotation
Secondary Treatment
The Activated Sludge Process
Sludge Handling
Course 198 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
WATER TREATMENT: Wastewater 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOWT2)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with treating industrial
wastewater so that it can be safely reused or discharged into the environment. After completing this unit , t rainees should be
able to describe how filt rat ion and activated carbon adsorption can be used in tert iary treatment, and how final effluent
quality standards affect the discharge of wastewater from an industrial facility. They should also be able to describe general
operator responsibilit ies associated with wastewater treatment and specific operator responsibilit ies associated with activated
sludge systems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Tertiary Treatment
Explain how filt rat ion can be used in tert iary treatment.
Explain how activated carbon adsorption can be used in tert iary treatment.
Describe how established quality standards affect the discharge of wastewater from an indust rial facility.
Operator Responsibilities
Describe tasks that an operator routinely performs to make sure that equipment used in wastewater treatment
is funct ioning properly.
Describe the purpose of sampling and analysis programs for wastewater treatment units.
Describe the role of safety in wastewater treatment unit operations.
Ident ify process variables that operators monitor and adjust when operat ing wastewater treatment systems.
Define the following terms: sludge blanket level, biochemical oxygen demand, food to micro-organisms ratio,
mean cell residence t ime, and shock.
Subjects:
Tertiary Treatment
Filt rat ion and Activated Carbon Adsorption
Final Effluent Quality Standards
Operator Responsibilities
General Responsibilit ies
Secondary Treatment Responsibilit ies
Course 199 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
WATER TREATMENT: Water for Plant Systems 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOWW1)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with primary water t reatment
and chlorination. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe problems that can be caused by impurit ies in
the water used in plant systems and explain how some of these impurit ies can be removed by screens, clarifiers, and filters. They
should also be able to explain why and how chlorine is used in water treatment.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Primary Water Treatment
Describe primary and secondary water treatment and the uses of water after each treatment.
Describe problems with plant equipment that can be caused by dissolved solids, dissolved gases, and
suspended solids.
Describe organic and inorganic suspended solids.
Describe the function and operation of screens.
Describe the function and operation of clarifiers.
Describe the coagulat ion, flocculation, and sett ling stages of clarification.
Describe the function and operation of filters.
Chlorination
Describe some of the effects that micro-organisms can have on plant equipment.
Describe the functions and operation of a typical chlorine evaporator and a typical chlorinator.
Describe safety precautions associated with operations involving chlorine.
Subjects:
Primary Water Treatment
Introduction
Screens
Clarifiers
Filters
Chlorination
Micro-Organisms
Chlorine Addit ion Equipment
Safety Precaut ions
Course 200 of 245
Health, Safety & Environment
WATER TREATMENT: Water for Plant Systems 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOWW2)
Overview:
This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the process of removing dissolved solids and gases from
water, and with the safe use of chemicals in water treatment. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe
ways in which dissolved solids and gases can cause problems in plant equipment. They should also be able to describe how
these impurit ies can be removed by devices such as water softeners, demineralizers, activated carbon filters, aerators, and
de-aerators. In addit ion, t rainees should be able to explain how chemicals are used in water treatment and identify safety
precautions for the use of chemicals.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Dissolved Solids Removal
Describe ways in which dissolved solids can cause problems in plant equipment.
Describe the general function and operat ion of a water softener.
Describe the general function and operat ion of a demineralizer.
Dissolved Gas Removal
Describe ways in which dissolved gases can cause problems in plant equipment.
Describe how gases such as oxygen, carbon dioxide, and hydrogen sulfide become dissolved in water.
Describe ways that corrosion can be prevented or controlled.
Describe the general function and operat ion of an activated carbon filter.
Describe the general function and operat ion of an aerator.
Describe the general function and operat ion of a de-aerator.
Chemical Treatment
Describe how corrosion inhibitors, scale inhibitors, and other chemicals are used in t reating water.
Describe the general operation of a chemical injection pump.
Describe safety precautions that should be taken when working around chemicals.
Subjects:
Dissolved Solids Removal
Dissolved Solids
Water Softeners
Demineralizers
Dissolved Gas Removal
Dissolved Gases
Carbon Filters
Aerators
De-aerators
Chemical Treatment
Chemicals in Water Treatment
Chemical Safety
Course 201 of 245
CONTROL SYSTEMS CURRICULUM
International Human Resources Development Corporation
Operations & Maintenance e-Learning
For The Oi l And Gas Indus t r y
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Analog Configuration (IHRDC_OM_ACPCA)
Overview:
The CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices - Analog Configuration t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees
with basic procedures for configuring tradit ional and "smart" analog field devices. After completing this program, the trainees
should be able to explain how to set zero and span and perform a calibration procedure on a tradit ional analog transmitter.
They should also be able to explain the basics of how to configure a smart analog field device using a portable communicator
or a laptop PC.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Define "analog" as it relates to process control signals.
Explain how analog field devices function in process control systems.
Explain how to set zero and span on a tradit ional electronic transmitter.
Explain how to perform a calibrat ion procedure on a non-smart transmitter.
Explain the relationship between the value of a process variable and a transmitter's 4-20 milliamp output signal.
Ident ify the basic configuration parameters for smart transmitters.
Calculate a process measurement from a smart transmitter's analog signal output.
Explain how to configure a smart field devices with a portable communicator.
Explain how to configure a smart field device with a laptop PC.
Subjects:
Analog Field Devices
Analog Field Devices
Tradit ional Electronic Devices
Configuring Smart Devices
Configuration Methods
Portable Communicators
Laptop PCs
Course 202 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Analytical (IHRDC_OM_ACPAF)
Overview:
The Field Devices - Analyt ical t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with input field devices that perform
online analyses. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to describe common applications and procedures
that are associated with the use of online analyzers. They should also be able to describe some of the many different types of
online analyzers that are used in cont inuous process systems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Describe common applications of online analyt ical field devices in continuous process systems.
Describe the essent ial components of most online process analyzers.
Describe general concerns associated with the installat ion, operation, and maintenance of online analyzers.
Describe common types of electrochemical analyzers that use property- or compound-specific sensors for online
analyses in continuous process systems.
Describe one type of flammable vapor analyzer that is commonly used in continuous process systems.
Describe common maintenance concerns associated with electromagnet ic analyzers.
Describe optical analyzers that are commonly used for online analyses in continuous process systems.
Describe mass spectrometers that are commonly used for online analyses in continuous process systems.
Describe nuclear devices that are commonly used for online analysis of density.
Describe common maintenance concerns associated with electromagnet ic analyzers.
Describe chromatographs that are commonly used for online analyses in continuous process systems.
Describe common maintenance concerns associated with gas chromatographs.
Subjects:
Introduction
Typical Applicat ions
Basic Concerns
Types of Online Analyzers
Electrochemical Analyzers
Electromagnetic Analyzers
Chromatographs
Course 203 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Configuring with a Laptop PC
(IHRDC_OM_ACPCL)
Overview:
The Field Devices - Configuring with a Laptop PC training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with basic
procedures for using a laptop PC to configure analog field devices. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able
to explain how to configure an input device such as a transmitter and an output device such as a control valve.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Use Foxboro's PC-10 program to configure a transmitter.
Use Foxboro's PC-20 program to configure a control valve.
Subjects:
Configuring Input Field Devices
Configuring a Transmitter
Configuring Output Field Devices
Configuring a Control Valve
Course 204 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Digital Configuration with a DCS
(IHRDC_OM_ACPCD)
Overview:
The CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices - Digital Configurat ion with DCSs training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize
t rainees with basic procedures for using a distributed control system (DCS) to configure digital field devices. After completing
this program, the trainees should be able to explain how to use the Honeywell TDC 3000 and the Fisher-Rosemount DeltaV to
configure a digital field device.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain how digital field devices differ from analog field devices.
Describe how a DCS is used to monitor and control a process.
Ident ify and describe the information that is provided on the point detail screens of a typical DCS.
Describe a basic procedure for using a DCS to configure a digital field device.
Describe the basic operating principles and architecture of fieldbus technology.
Describe a basic procedure for using the DeltaV to configure a field device.
Subjects:
The DCS
Digital Field Devices
Distributed Control Systems
Honeywell TDC 3000
Point Details
Configurat ion of Digital Field Devices
Fisher Rosemount DeltaV
Fieldbus Technology
DeltaV Digital Configuration
Course 205 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Level and Flow (IHRDC_OM_ACPLF)
Overview:
The Field Devices - Level and Flow t raining program is designed to familiarize trainees with input field devices that sense and
monitor level or flow. After completing this program, the t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of various
types of level measurement and flow measurement devices.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Define the following terms: level, point level measurement, continuous level measurement, direct level measurement,
and indirect level measurement.
Ident ify common examples of point, continuous, direct, and indirect level measurement devices.
Ident ify factors that determine the type of level measurement device used for a part icular application.
Define the termsdensity, specific gravity, and hydrostat ic pressure.
Describe how pressure gauges, differential pressure transmitters, bubblers, and displacers provide level measurements.
Describe common applications and limitations associated with pressure gauges, differential pressure transmitters,
bubblers, and displacers.
Describe factors that must be considered during the configuration of pressure gauges, differential pressure transmitters,
bubblers, and displacers.
Describe how capacitance, or radio frequency (RF) devices, and conductance devices measure level.
Describe common applications and limitations associated with capacitance and conductance devices.
Describe factors that must be considered during the configuration of capacitance and conductance devices.
Describe how radar, ultrasonic, laser, and nuclear level measurement devices work.
Describe common applications and limitations associated with radar, ultrasonic, laser, and nuclear level measurement
devices.
Describe how tuning fork sensors and weight devices provide level measurements. Describe common applications and
limitat ions associated with tuning fork sensors and weight devices.
Describe how different ial pressure flowmeters provide flow measurements. Identify common primary flow elements that
are used in differential pressure measurement.
Describe common problems that can affect the operation of differential pressure flowmeters.
Describe how posit ive displacement flowmeters measure flow.
Describe how turbine flowmeters measure flow.
Describe applications and limitations associated with posit ive displacement flowmeters and turbine flowmeters.
Describe how magnetic, vortex, and ultrasonic flowmeters measure flow. Describe applications and limitat ions
associated with magnetic, vortex, and ultrasonic flowmeters.
Describe operating principles and applications, limitations, and installat ion considerations for Coriolis flowmeters and
thermal flowmeters.
Subjects:
Level Measurement
Types of Level Measurement
Pressure- and Density-Based Devices
Capacitance and Conductance Devices
Non-Contact Devices
Tuning Fork Sensors and Weight Devices
Flow Measurement
Different ial Pressure Flowmeters
Mechanical Flowmeters
Electronic Flowmeters
Mass Flowmeters
Course 206 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Pressure,Temperature & Weight
(IHRDC_OM_ACPPT)
Overview:
The Field Devices - Temperature, Pressure, and Weight t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with input
field devices that sense and monitor temperature, pressure, or weight. After completing this program, the t rainees should be
able to describe the basic operation of various types of temperature, pressure, and weight transducers and transmitters.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
List typical temperature, pressure, and weight applications.
Explain how thermocouples, RTDs, and thermistors work.
Explain reference junction compensat ion.
Explain RTD lead length compensat ion.
Explain how load cells work.
Explain absolute, gauge, and differential pressure measurement.
Explain the function of set points.
Describe transmitter operating parameters, and define the following terms: range, LRL, URL, LRV, URV, span, turndown
ratio, engineering units, PV, and SV.
Explain how transmitter accuracy can be specified.
Ident ify and describe common transmitter configurat ion options.
Describe the ways that transmitters communicate signal information.
Describe how to set up a tradit ional t ransmitter.
Explain how to communicate with, configure, and test a smart transmitter.
Subjects:
Temperature, Pressure, and Weight Inputs
Applications
Temperature Transducers
Pressure and Weight Transducers
Sensor Switches
Signal Equipment
Transmitter Characterist ics
Transmitter Procedures
Course 207 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Using Field Communicators
(IHRDC_OM_ACPFC)
Overview:
The CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices - Using Field Communicators training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize
t rainees with basic procedures for using field communicators to configure "smart " analog field devices. After completing this
program, the trainees should be able to explain how to configure smart analog transmitters using a HART communicator, a
Honeywell communicator, a Yokogawa communicator, and the Foxboro Local Display Module.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain how to use the HART communicator to perform the basic configurat ion of a magflow transmitter.
Explain how to use a Honeywell SFC to perform the basic configurat ion of a differential pressure t ransmitter.
Explain how to use the Yokogawa BT200 to perform the basic configuration of a pressure transmitter.
Explain how to use the Foxboro Local Display Module to perform the basic configurat ion of a transmitter.
Subjects:
HART Protocol - Magnetic Flow Transmitter
Using the HART Communicator
Honeywell Protocol - Pressure (DP) Transmitter
Using the Honeywell Communicator
Yokogawa Protocol - Pressure Transmitter
Using the Yokogawa Communicator
Foxboro - Local Display Module
Using the Foxboro Local Display Module
Course 208 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Introduction to Distributed Control Systems
(IHRDC_OM_ACPID)
Overview:
The Introduction to Distributed Control Systems training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with DCS
architecture and basic tasks that DCS technicians may be asked to perform. After completing this program, the trainees
should be able to describe the architectural organizat ion of DCS field components, central components, and control loops.
They should also be able to describe ways that a DCS technician typically works with a DCS.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain the functions of input and output devices.
Describe the difference between digital and analog I/O devices.
List examples of I/O field devices.
Describe how I/O devices communicate.
Ident ify I/O devices from a piping and instrument diagram.
Describe typical I/O field termination equipment.
Describe typical I/O and control processor cards and functions.
Explain the data functions of the system server.
Explain how to use a DCS user interface for basic informat ion retrieval.
Describe DCS networks.
Explain why and how PLCs are sometimes part of a DCS.
Describe typical control loops.
Describe the information that can be obtained from loop sheets.
Describe preparations for working on a field device.
Describe basic service operations that may have to be performed on a field device.
Ident ify troubleshooting tasks that can be performed in a rack room.
Ident ify tasks that can be performed at a DCS user interface.
Subjects:
DCS Architecture
Field Components
Central Components
Control Loops
Working with a DCS
Field Device Tasks
Rack Room Tasks
At the User Interface
Course 209 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Multiple Loop Control (IHRDC_OM_ACPML)
Overview:
The Mult iple Loop Control training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and use of
mult iple loop control. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to explain the basic operation of mult iple
single loops, cascade control, rat io control, feedforward control, and special connections that are used with mult iple loop
control. They should also be able to use a P & ID to trace boiler control functionality.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain typical interactions between single control loops.
Explain several types and applications of cascade control.
Explain several types and applications of rat io control.
Describe computational components that are typically used in mult iple loop control.
Explain how limiters, interlocks, override controls and selective controls are used.
Explain the difference between feedback control and feedforward control.
Describe the advantages, problems, and applications of feedforward control.
Ident ify the main boiler control components and connections on a P & ID.
Trace boiler control functionality.
Subjects:
Multiple Loop Applications
Mult iple Single Loops
Cascade Control
Ratio Control
Special Mult iple Loop Connections
Feedforward Control
Boiler Master Controls
P & ID Conventions and Symbology
Boiler Control Operation
Course 210 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Pneumatic Controls (IHRDC_OM_ACPPC )
Overview:
The Pneumatic Controls training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with the basic operation, maintenance,
and calibrat ion of components in a pneumatic control system. After completing this program, the trainees should be able
describe to how to service the various devices that help dry and filter the air and how to check pressure control devices in the
system for proper operation. They should also be able to describe the basic operation and maintenance of some typical control
components in a pneumatic system.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Describe the operation and maintenance of air supply components that dry and filter compressed air in a pneumatic
control system.
Describe the operation and maintenance of pressure control components in a pneumatic control system.
Describe the operating principles of pneumatic control components.
Ident ify the basic types of pneumatic sensor-transmitters.
Describe the operation and maintenance of sensor-transmitters.
Ident ify and describe common types of pneumatic receiver-controllers.
Describe basic calibration procedures for a typical receiver-controller.
Ident ify and describe common types of pneumatic actuators.
Describe procedures involved in test ing, calibrating, and maintaining pneumatic actuators.
Subjects:
Air Supply Maintenance
Air Filtering
Pressure Control
Control Components
Basic Operation
Sensor-Transmitters
Receiver-Controllers
Actuators
Course 211 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Principles (IHRDC_OM_ACPCR)
Overview:
The Principles training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the basic material, process, and system
characterist ics that can affect process control. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to identify and
describe some basic factors that affect process control. They should also be able to describe common process control methods
and the operat ion of loops that control crit ical process variables.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Ident ify variables that are routinely monitored and controlled by process control systems.
Describe basic material propert ies and fluid flow characterist ics.
Describe the relationship between temperature and pressure in fluids.
Describe the basic principles and methods of heat transfer.
Ident ify and describe some basic factors that affect process control.
Describe on/off, proport ional, integral (reset), derivat ive (rate), and PID control algorithms.
Ident ify and describe pressure, temperature, level, flow, and pH control loops in a typical boiler system.
Subjects:
Process Characterist ics
Example System Layout
Material Attributes
Control Systems
Basic Control Factors
Process Control Methods
Process Control Loops
Course 212 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Single Loop Control (IHRDC_OM_ACPSL)
Overview:
The Single Loop Control training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operation and use of single
control loops. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to explain the basic operation of a feedback control
loop, describe how the proport ional-integral-derivative (PID) control algorithm works, and ident ify and describe features that
may be used to enhance the performance of a PID controller.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Describe a typical feedback control loop.
Describe how the proport ional-integral-derivative (PID) control algorithm works.
Ident ify and describe features that are commonly used to enhance the performance of a PID controller.
Describe a typical single-loop pressure control system.
Describe a typical single-loop temperature control system.
Describe a typical single-loop level control system.
Describe a typical single-loop flow control system.
Describe a typical single-loop pH control system.
Subjects:
Control Basics
Feedback Control Loop
PID Control
Controller Enhancements
Course 213 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Smart Controllers (IHRDC_OM_ACPSC)
Overview:
The Smart Controllers t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation and use of smart controllers.
After completing this program, the trainees should be able to describe basic procedures for installing, configuring, operating,
and tuning smart controllers.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Describe the purpose of a smart controller.
Describe a smart controller's common control options.
Explain how to install and wire a new or replacement smart controller.
Explain how to configure a smart controller.
Explain how to operate a smart controller.
Explain how to tune a smart controller for optimum performance.
Describe the procedures for troubleshooting a single loop process controlled by a smart controller.
Describe the procedures for tuning a single loop process controlled by a smart controller.
Subjects:
Setting Up Smart Controllers
Characterist ics
Installat ion and Configurat ion
Using Smart Controllers
Operation and Tuning
Demonstration
Course 214 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Troubleshooting DCS I/Os: Practices (IHRDC_OM_ACPTP)
Overview:
The Troubleshooting DCS I/Os: Practices t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with some practical
applicat ions of basic procedures for troubleshoot ing the inputs and outputs of a distributed control system. After completing
this program, the trainees should be able to explain how to troubleshoot problems in digital I/O devices that are part of a DCS,
analog I/O devices that are part of a DCS, and miscellaneous I/O components of a DCS.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Describe basic steps for troubleshoot ing a problem in a digital I/O device that is part of a DCS.
Describe basic steps for troubleshoot ing a problem in an analog I/O device that is part of a DCS.
Describe basic steps for troubleshoot ing a problem in a miscellaneous I/O component of a DCS.
Subjects:
Troubleshooting Practices
Troubleshooting Digital I/O Devices
Troubleshooting Analog I/O Devices
Troubleshooting Miscellaneous I/O Components
Course 215 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Troubleshooting DCS I/Os: Procedures (IHRDC_OM_ACPTD)
Overview:
The Troubleshooting DCS I/Os: Procedures training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with basic procedures for
t roubleshooting the inputs and outputs of a distributed control system. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be
able to explain how to gather information about a DCS I/O problem, identify possible causes of the problem, test the possible
causes, and finish up the troubleshooting procedure.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain how to gather information about a DCS I/O problem.
Explain how to eliminate possible causes of a DCS I/O problem.
Explain how to priorit ize possible causes of a DCS I/O problem.
Explain how to test possible causes of a DCS I/O problem in a logical order.
Explain how to complete the procedures for troubleshooting a DCS I/O problem.
Subjects:
Troubleshooting Procedures
Invest igating Symptoms
Ident ifying Possible Causes
Test ing Possible Causes
Finishing Up
Course 216 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Troubleshooting Loops (IHRDC_OM_ACPTS)
Overview:
The Troubleshooting Loops training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with basic procedures for troubleshooting
control loop problems. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain how to use a systematic
t roubleshooting procedure to t roubleshoot problems in control loops.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain how to gather information about a control loop problem.
Explain how to eliminate components or functional elements as possible causes of a control loop problem.
Explain how to priorit ize possible causes of a control loop problem.
Explain how to test possible causes of a control loop problem in a logical order.
Describe the steps that should be taken to complete the troubleshooting of a control loop problem.
Describe a basic procedure for troubleshooting a discrete control loop.
Describe a basic procedure for troubleshooting a single analog control loop.
Describe considerations in t roubleshooting a mult iloop control system.
Subjects:
The Troubleshooting Procedure
Invest igating Symptoms
Ident ifying Possible Causes
Test ing Possible Causes
Finishing Up
Loop Troubleshooting Examples
Discrete Loop
Single Control Loop
Mult iloop Control
Course 217 of 245
Control Systems
CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Tuning Loops (IHRDC_OM_ACPTL)
Overview:
The Tuning Loops training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of tuning control loops.
After completing this program, the trainees should be able to describe how to prepare for tuning a loop and how to tune a
loop manually using a systematic trial and error method, the Ziegler-Nichols open loop method, and the Ziegler-Nichols closed
loop method. They should also be able describe how tuning can be accomplished by the auto-tune function, by art ificial
intelligence features, and by tuning software.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Describe tuning in relation to loop response.
Describe the types of process upsets.
Explain process delays.
Describe the effects of gain, reset , and rate on response curves.
Explain how to identify and assess asymmetry, non-linearity, and noise.
Explain how to correct or reduce hysteresis, st ict ion, and noise.
Dist inguish between random tuning and systematic trial and error tuning.
Describe the precautions necessary when tuning by trial and error.
Explain the procedure for tuning using the Z-N open loop method.
Explain the procedure for tuning using the Z-N closed loop, or ult imate gain, method.
Describe how the auto-tune function tunes.
Describe art ificial intelligence (fuzzy logic) tuning features.
Explain how to connect and run tuning programs.
Describe the options tuning programs may provide.
Subjects:
Closed Loop Operation
Control Loop Response
Before Tuning
Manual Tuning
Trial and Error Tuning
Ziegler-Nichols Tuning Methods
Automated Tuning
Self-Tuning
Software Tuning
Course 218 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: Basic Electrical Test Equipment (IHRDC_OM_ACCBE)
Overview:
The Basic Electrical Test Equipment training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with various types of electrical
test instruments. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to follow safe work pract ices and procedures while
properly using circuit testers, mult imeters, ammeters, megohmmeters, and digital low resistance ohmmeters.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Follow safe work practices and procedures while using electrical test equipment.
Use circuit testers to indicate the presence of energized electrical circuits.
Use an analog mult imeter to measure voltage, resistance, and current in AC and DC circuits.
Use a digital mult imeter to measure voltage, resistance, and current in AC and DC circuits.
Ident ify in-line and clamp-on ammeters.
Use an analog ammeter to measure current through a conductor.
Use a digital ammeter to measure current through a conductor.
Use a megohmmeter to test the insulation resistance of a conductor, transformer, and motor.
Explain how to measure the resistance of electrical circuits and equipment with a DLRO.
Subjects:
Test Equipment Safety
Safe Work Practices
Circuit Testers
Basic Operation
Multimeters
Basic Operation
Ammeters
Basic Operation
Megohmmeters
Basic Operation
DLRO
Basic Operation
Course 219 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: Digital and Analog Oscilloscopes (IHRDC_OM_ACCDA)
Overview:
The Digital and Analog Oscilloscopes training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operation and
use of digital and analog oscilloscopes. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain what an
oscilloscope does, explain how to set up an oscilloscope for use, identify the controls used to adjust an oscilloscope display, and
explain how to use an oscilloscope to make voltage measurements and t ime measurements.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Briefly explain how an oscilloscope converts a voltage input to an on-screen trace.
Describe how an oscilloscope display is graduated.
Explain why proper grounding is important.
Explain how to set the controls to "standard posit ion" for the init ial setup of an oscilloscope.
Explain how to select, compensate, and use oscilloscope probes.
Ident ify the controls used to adjust an oscilloscope display and explain their functions.
Explain what an oscilloscope's vert ical controls do and how to use them.
Explain what an oscilloscope's horizontal controls do and how to use them.
Determine an applied voltage by counting oscilloscope screen divisions.
Determine frequency by measuring the period on an oscilloscope screen.
Determine a pulse width and rise t ime.
Subjects:
Fundamentals
Basic Operating Theory
Display Fundamentals
Setting Up
Grounding and Safety
Controls
Probes
Control Use
Display
Vert ical
Horizontal
Measurement Techniques
Voltage
Time
Course 220 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: Introduction to Control and Data Systems (IHRDC_OM_ACCIC)
Overview:
The Introduction to Control and Data Systems training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the role of
information systems in plant operations and the elements of modern information systems. After completing this program, the
trainees should be able to identify the information needs of typical plant functional elements and explain how information gets
into an information system. They should also be able to describe system architecture and explain how to use environment
software and applicat ion software.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
List the information needs of typical plant functional elements.
Explain how alarms work in modern plants.
List the routes by which information gets into the system.
Explain I/O bus, LAN, WAN, client-server, and the role of network standards.
Explain the function of an operating system.
Describe the characterist ics of common operat ing systems.
Explain the role of operating system and network software.
Explain virtual instrumentation.
Explain programmable logic controller (PLC) program creation.
Describe how to use graphical objects to create the system data structure and HMI.
Describe password hierarchy and the need for security.
Describe the functions and architecture of a SCADA system.
Subjects:
Information and Plant Operations
Information Needs
Information Sources
Information Systems
System Architecture
Environment Software
Application Software
Course 221 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: Introduction to Process Control (IHRDC_OM_ACCIN )
Overview:
The Introduction training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic elements, terminology, and functions
of control systems. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to identify and describe various types of input
and output devices that are commonly used with automated control systems. They should also be able to identify and
describe common types of control devices and control loop arrangement
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Define terms commonly associated with the input side of a control system.
Ident ify and describe common types of temperature sensors that provide input information to a control system.
Ident ify and describe common types of posit ion sensors.
Ident ify and describe common types of pressure sensors, flow sensors, and level sensors.
Ident ify and describe common types of electric instruments, t imers, counters, recorders, and pneumatic sensors.
Ident ify and describe common actuating devices used in the output side of a control system.
Describe common decision-making devices that connect the input and output elements in a control system.
Describe common control loop arrangements used in automatic control systems.
Subjects:
Input Elements
Terminology
Temperature Sensors
Posit ion Sensors
Pressure, Flow, and Level Sensors
Other Input Devices
Output Elements
Actuating Devices
Control Elements
Decision-Making Devices
Control Loops
Course 222 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: Principles of Calibration (IHRDC_OM_ACCCA )
Overview:
The Principles of Calibration t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with
the calibration of input field devices and control loops. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain
how to test, adjust , and calibrate various types of gauges and transmitters. They should also be able to explain how to test , set
up, and adjust input field devices and calibrate control loops.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain how to decide the best t ime to test and calibrate.
Describe the proper steps involved in a lockout/tagout procedure.
Describe how to perform basic calibrat ion procedures on a typical pressure gauge, pressure transmitter, and
thermocouple.
Describe how to adjust a typical sensor that switches in response to discrete posit ion.
Describe how to test and adjust a typical sensor that switches at a temperature, pressure, or control signal set point .
Describe how to test and calibrate a typical sensor that responds to concentrations.
Describe how to test, set up, and adjust a typical sensor that responds to flow.
Describe how to perform basic calibrat ion procedures on a typical output field device.
Describe how to perform basic calibrat ion procedures on a typical control loop.
Subjects:
Gauges and Transmitters
Preparation
Pressure Gauge
Pressure Transmitter
Temperature Devices
Field Devices and Control Loops
Input Field Devices
Output Device and Loop Calibration
Course 223 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: Principles of Control (IHRDC_OM_ACCCO)
Overview:
The Principles of Control training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operating principles of
controllers used with discrete input/output devices and analog input/output devices. After completing this program, the
trainees should be able to explain the control logic used in systems with discrete (digital) I/O, describe how to troubleshoot
systems that use individual relays and solid state controllers, and describe how to program a PLC and troubleshoot PLC system
problems. They should also be able to explain how analog variables can be converted to digital data and vice-versa, describe
PID control, describe common controller options and applications, and describe how to diagnose problems in single and
mult iple control loops.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain the control logic used in systems with discrete (digital) I/O.
Describe how to troubleshoot systems that use individual relays and solid state controllers.
Describe how to program a PLC, test the program, run and adjust the program, and troubleshoot PLC system problems.
Explain how analog variables can be converted to digital data and vice-versa.
Describe proport ional control, derivative control, and integral control.
Describe common controller options and applications.
Diagnose problems in single and mult iple control loops.
Subjects:
Controllers Used with Discrete I/O
Digital Logic
Individual Relays
PLC Applications
Controllers Used with Analog I/O
Analog/Digital Conversion
PID Control
Special Controller Features
Troubleshooting Control Loops
Course 224 of 245
Control Systems
CORE: The Human-Machine Interface (IHRDC_OM_ACCHM)
Overview:
The The Human-Machine Interface t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the different types of HMIs
that are likely to be found in a modern plant. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to obtain process
information using typical instruments, operate typical switch controls, use smart I/O devices and controller interfaces, and
perform common computer operations.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Read typical instruments.
Use typical switch controls.
Configure smart I/O devices.
Operate portable instruments.
Operate and program a variable frequency drive.
Take readings from and program a loop controller.
Use dedicated graphics terminals.
Describe the role of software in computer operation.
Describe the main funct ional components of a computer.
Use common DOS and character-based keyboard/screen functions.
Use common GUI keyboard/screen functions.
Turn a computer on and log on.
Find and run a program, enter data, save, print , exit , and shut down a computer.
Subjects:
Traditional Equipment Interfaces
Instruments
Controls
Microprocessor-Based HMIs
Smart I/O Interfaces
Controller Interfaces
The Computer Interface
Basic Computer Hardware and Operation
The Human-Computer Interface
Common Computer Operations
Course 225 of 245
Control Systems
NETWORKS: Fiber Optic Systems (IHRDC_OM_ACNFO )
Overview:
The NETWORKS: Fiber Optic Systems training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with the basic operating
principles of fiber optic systems and some of the basic installat ion and test ing methods. After completing this program, the
trainees should be able to describe characterist ics of glass fibers and describe the function and types of fiber optic connectors.
They should also be able to describe basic procedures for installing and test ing fiber optics.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Describe the composit ion of a common glass fiber.
Describe characterist ics of mult i-mode fiber.
Describe characterist ics of single-mode fiber.
Describe characterist ics of optic fibers and cables.
Describe the function and types of fiber optic connectors.
Describe hazards and work precaut ions associated with fiber optics.
List the main steps associated with running a new fiber optic drop.
Describe steps that are commonly used to terminate fiber.
Describe steps that are commonly used to make fiber splices.
Describe steps that can be used to check newly installed fibers.
Subjects:
Operating Principles
Glass Fibers
Basic System Hardware
Installation Tasks
Safety
Installing Cable
Terminations and Splices
Course 226 of 245
Control Systems
NETWORKS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_ACNIN )
Overview:
The NETWORKS: Introduction training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with some different types of control
systems and some basic concepts that apply to control system networks. After completing this program, the trainees should be
able to describe the layout and operation of tradit ional non-networked control systems and the layout and operation of some
common networked control systems. They should also be able to describe factors that can affect the speed at which signals
can be sent across a network, describe the various levels of network protocol, and describe common physical network layouts,
or topologies.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Describe the layout and operation of tradit ional non-networked control systems.
Describe the layout and operation of some common networked control systems.
Describe how informat ion is coded as digital data for network transmission.
Ident ify and describe factors that can affect the speed at which signals can be sent across a network.
Ident ify and describe the various levels, or layers, of network protocol (the rules that govern how a network functions).
Ident ify and describe common physical network layouts, or topologies
Ident ify common protocols used in network control systems.
Subjects:
Control Systems Overview
Non-Networked Systems
Networked Systems
Basic Network Concepts
Digital Data
Network Speed and Traffic
Network Protocol and Topology
Common Protocol Types
Course 227 of 245
Control Systems
NETWORKS: Setting Up and Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_ACNST )
Overview:
The NETWORKS: Sett ing Up and Troubleshooting training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with basic concepts
that apply to sett ing up and troubleshooting control networks. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to
describe different types of cables and connectors that are used to link together devices in control networks. They should also
be able to describe basic procedures for installing, test ing, and troubleshooting control networks.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Describe coaxial cable and explain how to install a connector onto the cable.
Describe common types of twisted pair cable and explain how to install connectors onto the cables.
Ident ify and describe factors that must be considered when cable is routed.
Describe how to connect and use a cable tester to perform various tests on network cabling.
Describe common hardware configuration procedures that need to be performed during network installat ion.
Describe common troubleshooting techniques that are helpful for ident ifying problems with network cabling and
devices.
Subjects:
Cables and Connectors
Coaxial Cable
Twisted Pair Cable
Network Installation
Cable Routing
Circuit Test ing
Hardware Configuration
Troubleshooting
Course 228 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Architecture, Types and Networks (IHRDC_OM_ACLAT)
Overview:
The PLCs: Architecture, Types and Networks t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operation
and components of programmable logic controllers (PLCs). After completing this program, the trainees should be able to
explain what a PLC does, identify and describe PLC components, and explain how PLCs communicate.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain how PLCs can be used to replace conventional, hard-wired ladder diagrams.
Explain how PLC programs can be used to control machines and processes.
Ident ify the three main parts of a PLC system.
Recognize a processor for a PLC and describe its functions.
Recognize different types of input modules.
Explain how to wire input devices into input modules.
Recognize different types of output modules.
Explain how to wire output devices into output modules.
Recognize power supplies.
Recognize different types of programming terminals.
Ident ify the three main t ime periods of the PLC scan cycle.
Ident ify factors that can affect the scan cycle t ime of a PLC.
Recognize different types of PLC networks.
List devices that typically communicate across different types of PLC networks.
Recognize that automated networks may include methods of machine control other than PLCs.
Subjects:
PLC Operations
Basic PLC Concepts
System Components
The Processor
The Input System
The Output System
Other Components
The PLC Scan
The PLC Scan Cycle
Scan Time
How PLCs Communicate
Networking PLCs
Other Methods of Machine Control
Course 229 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Human Machine Interface and Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_ACLMT)
Overview:
The PLCs: HMIs and Troubleshooting training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with human-machine interfaces
and how they can be used in the troubleshoot ing of programmable logic controller system problems. After completing this
program, the trainees should be able to identify various types of HMIs and explain how they are connected and used. They
should also be able to describe the five steps of troubleshooting and explain how to use those steps and an HMI to
t roubleshoot a problem in a PLC system.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Ident ify common types of HMIs.
List different ways to connect an HMI to a PLC.
Describe some basic factors involved in using a PC-based HMI.
Explain why it is important to know the equipment before you start to troubleshoot.
List the aids available to you in invest igating the symptoms.
Explain how to use the half-splitt ing method of identifying symptoms.
Explain how to priorit ize and eliminate possible causes.
Explain the importance of determining root causes of malfunct ions.
Explain how to use an HMI and the five-step troubleshoot ing process to troubleshoot a PLC-controlled system.
Subjects:
The Human-Machine Interface
Types of HMIs
Connection to the PLC
Using an HMI
The Five Steps of Troubleshooting
Know the Equipment
Invest igate Symptoms
List Probable Causes
Test Probable Causes
Discover Root Causes
A Troubleshooting Case Study
Course 230 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: I/O Communication (IHRDC_OM_ACLIO)
Overview:
The PLCs: I/O Communication training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the various ways in which
real-world devices can be connected to the input and output systems of a programmable logic controller. After completing
this program, the trainees should be able to identify various types of I/O modules and field devices, and explain how direct I/O
connect ions are made. They should also be able to ident ify some common device networks and ident ify some devices, other
than PLC devices, that you might find on a typical device network.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Ident ify the pieces of hardware that make up a PLC rack.
Different iate between serial and parallel communication between racks.
Ident ify the three types of I/O modules.
Describe a typical I/O addressing scheme.
Describe the differences between discrete, or bit , devices; word devices; and analog field devices.
Describe the difference between sinking and sourcing I/O modules.
Explain why proper fusing, shielding and grounding are important when field devices are wired.
Relate I/O modules to the input and output image tables, and to the scan cycle.
Ident ify some common proprietary and non-proprietary device networks.
Ident ify some devices, other than PLC devices, that you might find on a typical device network.
Subjects:
Direct I/O Connections
How I/O Modules Are Mounted
I/O Module Types
I/O Module Addressing
Field Devices
Field Wiring
I/O Data Processing
Networked I/O Modules
Types of Device Networks
Devices
Course 231 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Installing and Maintaining (IHRDC_OM_ACLIM)
Overview:
The PLCs: Installing and Maintaining t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic procedures
involved in installing and sett ing up PLC equipment. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain how
to mount and wire up PLC hardware. They should also be able to describe how to establish communications between a PC
and a PLC, clear the processor memory, and init ially configure the processor.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Describe what must be taken into consideration when mounting PLC hardware.
Describe how to connect various types of PLC power supplies.
Explain why emergency stop circuits must be hardwired.
Explain what to be aware of when populating PLC chassis.
Describe what to be aware of when wiring I/O field devices.
Describe what to be aware of when making network connections.
Explain how to establish communication between a PLC and a PC.
Explain the steps necessary to clear the memory of a PLC.
Explain the steps necessary to perform the init ial configurat ion of a PLC.
Subjects:
Installing the PLC
Mounting PLC Chassis
Power Supplies and Connections
E-Stop Circuits
Configuring and Populating the Chassis
I/O Wiring
Network Connections
Initial Configuration
Establishing Communications
Clearing Memory
Performing Init ial Configuration
Course 232 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Introduction to Programming (IHRDC_OM_ACLIP)
Overview:
The PLCs: Int roduction to Programming training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basics of
programming a programmable logic controller. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to enter a simple
ladder diagram program into the memory of a PLC.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain how to start programming software and verify proper drivers, connections, and node addresses.
Name the two main file types in PLC memory.
Explain how to clear PLC memory.
Ident ify PLC bit and word I/O addresses.
Explain how to use RSLogix to insert a rung into a PLC.
Ident ify input and output inst ructions and explain how to add them to a rung.
Explain how to use RSLogix to add instruct ions and branches to a rung in a PLC.
Different iate between the inst ructions for a discrete input device and the inst ructions for input-type contacts on an
output device.
Different iate between the inst ructions for real I/O devices and the instructions for virtual I/O devices.
Explain how to connect real, discrete I/O devices to a PLC.
Explain how to determine input and output addresses for PLC screw terminals.
Explain how to use RSLogix to program a PLC to emulate a hard-wired program.
Subjects:
Establishing Communications
Programming with a PC
The PLC Memory Model
Preparing to Program the PLC
Programming a Rung
Basic Rung Using Discrete I/O
Complex Rungs
Complex Discrete I/O Inst ructions
A Real System Example
The Hardware
The PLC Program
Course 233 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Ladder Logic and Symbology (IHRDC_OM_ACLLL)
Overview:
The PLCs: Ladder Logic and Symbology training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with how PLCs use ladder
diagrams and what the symbols used on ladder diagrams mean. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to
identify common ladder diagram symbols, explain how a ladder diagram rung performs the logic functions necessary to
determine whether the rung is true or false, and interpret the meaning of some common PLC instructions.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Ident ify the major parts of a ladder diagram.
Describe how a ladder diagram forms a parallel circuit.
Ident ify the NEMA symbols for common input devices.
Ident ify the NEMA symbols for common output devices.
Different iate between the Boolean AND, OR and NOT functions for mult iple devices on a rung.
Ident ify how each rung performs the logic functions necessary to determine whether the rung is t rue or false.
Recognize rung numbers on a ladder diagram.
Interpret cross references on a ladder diagram.
Explain the PLC mode of operation with the Run-Rem-Prog key switch in each of it s posit ions.
Ident ify the typical symbols used in a PLC ladder program and explain the function of mnemonics.
Ident ify each of the three parts of the PLC scan cycle.
Interpret the meaning of some common complex instructions.
Ident ify several things that may interrupt the normal scan cycle.
Subjects:
The Ladder Diagram Rung
The Ladder Diagram as a Parallel Circuit
Ladder Diagram Symbols
Mult iple Devices on a Rung
Complete Ladder Diagrams
The Mult iple Rung Control Program
Rung Numbers and Cross References
Ladder Logic Execution
PLC vs. Hardwired Program Execution
Complex Instructions
Interruptions to the Scan Cycle
Course 234 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Numerics (IHRDC_OM_ACLNU)
Overview:
The PLCs: Numerics t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with numbering systems and codes commonly
used by programmable logic controllers (PLCs). After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to interpret place
values for decimal, binary, octal, and hexadecimal numbers and convert numbers from one numbering system to another. They
should also be able to explain what BCD and ASCII codes are and how they are used.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Ident ify commonly used numbering systems.
Explain the organization of a posit ional numbering system.
Interpret place values for binary numbers.
Describe ways that signed binary numbers may be represented in a PLC.
Convert between binary and decimal numbers.
Interpret place values for octal numbers.
Convert between octal, binary, and decimal numbers.
Interpret place values for hexadecimal numbers.
Convert between hexadecimal, octal, binary, and decimal numbers.
Explain what BCD code is.
Express and interpret information in BCD code.
Explain what ASCII code is.
Subjects:
Numbering Systems
Numbering System Basics
Posit ional Systems
Binary Numbering
Place Values
Signed Binary Numbers
Conversions
Octal Numbering
Place Values
Conversions
Hexadecimal Numbering
Place Values
Conversions
Codes
BCD Code
BCD Conversions
ASCII Code
Course 235 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Program Entry, Testing and Modification (IHRDC_OM_ACLPE)
Overview:
The PLCs: Program Entry, Test ing, and Modification training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with the
techniques used to install, test, and modify a PLC program, or project. After completing this program, the t rainees should be
able to explain how to prepare a system for program entry and how to download or enter the program. They should also be
able to explain how to test and debug the program and make changes to the program in various processor modes.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain how to establish communication between a PLC and a PC.
Explain the steps necessary to clear the memory of a PLC.
Explain how to install a project in a PLC.
Explain some common techniques used in test and debug operations.
Explain what must be done when a PLC's hardware or software configuration is changed.
Explain how to use the PLC EEPROM for program backup.
Explain how to use a PC hard drive for program backup.
Explain the differences between online and offline programming.
Describe the process for changing the PLC program while the system is in the program mode.
Describe the process for changing the PLC program while the system is in the run mode.
Subjects:
Entering and Testing the Program
Preparing for Program Entry
Downloading or Entering a Project
Test ing and Debugging
Configuration and Program Changes
Configurat ion Changes
Uploading and Downloading Projects
Changes While in Program Mode
Changes While in Run Mode
Course 236 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Programming Common Functions (IHRDC_OM_ACLCF)
Overview:
The PLCs: Programming Common Functions training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with the basics of
programming common functions for a programmable logic controller. After completing this program, the trainees should be
able to identify common non-I/O PLC inst ructions and explain how they are used.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Different iate between bit addresses and word addresses.
Explain the function of each part of a t imer.
Explain the function of each part of a counter.
Explain how to use word addresses to send data to and from analog I/O modules.
Explain how program control instructions modify the normal program scan sequence.
Explain how immediate instructions interrupt the normal program scan cycle.
Explain how data comparison instructions are used to make program decisions.
Explain how math instructions are used to perform calculat ions and modify data.
Explain how registers and sequencers are used to emulate motor-driven cam switches.
Explain how file instructions are used to move and manipulate data.
Explain the operating concept of a PID feedback loop.
Explain how to connect real, word I/O devices to a PLC.
Explain how to use RSLogix to program a PLC with some common functions.
Subjects:
Simple Word Instructions
Word Addresses
Timers
Counters
Analog I/O
Program Control Instructions
Modifying the Scan Sequence
Modifying the Scan Cycle
Comparison and Math Instructions
Data Comparison Instructions
Math Instructions
Data Manipulation Instructions
Registers and Sequencers
File Instructions
PID Loop Instruction
A Real System Example
The Hardware
The PLC Program
Course 237 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Troubleshooting Hardware (IHRDC_OM_ACLTH)
Overview:
The PLCs: Troubleshoot ing Hardware training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with tools and procedures for
t roubleshooting hardware-related PLC problems. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain how to
isolate a PLC problem to either hardware or software and network and how to use PLC hardware indicators, programming
software, and appropriate test equipment to troubleshoot processor faults and I/O problems.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain how to isolate a problem to hardware vs. software and network.
Explain how to identify a software and network problem.
Explain the meanings of common processor indicators.
Describe common I/O problems.
Ident ify the troubleshoot ing aids commonly found on a PLC power supply.
Ident ify the indicators commonly found on a PLC processor module.
Ident ify the indicators commonly found on a PLC I/O module.
Explain how to go on-line using RSLogix.
Explain how to use common search functions.
Explain how to force an input or output instruction.
Describe how cross references and I/O monitors can be used in troubleshooting.
Ident ify the three main parts of a typical I/O system.
Different iate between test equipment that is and is not appropriate for t roubleshooting PLC systems.
Use the appropriate programming software and test equipment to troubleshoot a typical input system.
Use the appropriate programming software and test equipment to troubleshoot a typical output system.
Subjects:
Isolating PLC Problems
Isolat ing the Problem
Software and Network Problems
Hardware Problems
Hardware Indicators
Power Supply
Processor
I/O Modules
Troubleshooting with Programming Software
Start ing the Software
Using the Search Functions
Using the Force Functions
Using Cross References and I/O Monitors
Troubleshooting I/O Systems
I/O System Organization
Using Test Equipment on I/O Systems
Troubleshooting an Input System
Troubleshooting an Output System
Course 238 of 245
Control Systems
PLCs: Troubleshooting Software and Networks (IHRDC_OM_ACLSN)
Overview:
The PLCs: Troubleshoot ing Software and Networks training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with how to use
PLC programming software to isolate software and network problems. After completing this program, the trainees should be
able to go on-line to connect to a PLC network and be able to identify and describe the major parts of the PLC memory and
some memory protection options. They should be able to explain how to diagnose t imer, counter, and sequencer problems and
how to use PLC indicators, processor status information, TND and SUS instructions, Custom Data Monitors, and histograms to
troubleshoot software problems. They should also be able to explain how to use processor indicators and communications
software to isolate network problems, how to isolate network media problems, how to find and fix a network configuration
problem, and how to connect to a PLC across a network and then troubleshoot a problem.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain how to start software and select drivers.
Explain how to use a browser to connect to a stand-alone or networked PLC.
Describe the major parts of the PLC memory.
Describe some major memory protection options.
Explain how to use the five-step troubleshoot ing process to troubleshoot a PLC-controlled system.
Explain how to isolate a problem to software and network vs. hardware.
Explain how to isolate a problem to software vs. network.
Explain how the fault indicat ion in the processor status box can be used for troubleshooting.
Explain how to use processor status table information to isolate problems.
Explain how to check I/O configuration.
Explain how to use the TND and SUS instructions to monitor program control instructions.
Explain how to diagnose t imer, counter, and sequencer problems.
Explain how to use the Custom Data Monitor.
Explain how to use histograms.
Explain how to isolate a problem to a specific network node on DH+.
Explain how to isolate a problem to a specific network node on Rem I/O.
Explain how to isolate an HMI communication problem.
Explain how to isolate network media problems.
Explain how to find and fix network configuration problems.
Explain how to connect to a PLC across a network.
Explain how the key switch affects programming across a network.
Subjects:
Connecting to the PLC Network
Start ing the Software
Examining the PLC Memory
Troubleshooting Software Problems
Isolat ing Problems
Using PLC Status and Configuration Files
Program Control Problems
Timer, Counter, and Sequencer Problems
Using Data Monitors
Troubleshooting Network Problems
Isolat ing the Problem
Problems with Network Media
Problems with Network Configuration
Troubleshooting PLCs Across a Network
Course 239 of 245
Control Systems
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Applications (IHRDC_OM_ACVDA)
Overview:
The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES - Applicat ions training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with common
applicat ions of variable speed drives and basic procedures for variable speed drive installat ion. After completing this program,
the trainees should be able to describe ways in which variable speed drives are used and ways in which they are set up and
tested.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Ident ify common applications for variable speed drives.
Describe typical network configurations for drives
Ident ify common problems associated with the installat ion of variable speed drives.
Set up a variable speed drive for operation.
Test the operation of a variable speed drive.
Create checkpointing documentation for a variable speed drive installat ion.
Subjects:
Common Applications
Selecting Drives
Networking Drives
Ident ifying Problems
VSD Installation
Sett ing Up
Test ing the Setup
Creating Checkpointing
Course 240 of 245
Control Systems
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Controllers and Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_ACVCT)
Overview:
The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Controllers and Troubleshooting training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with
general procedures for using a variable speed drive controller to troubleshoot system problems and for troubleshooting
problems in the controller itself. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to describe how to safely use a
variable speed drive controller to locate basic system problems. They should also be able to explain how to use a test point
checklist to troubleshoot a variable speed drive controller and how to test the major components of the controller.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Describe safe work practices for troubleshooting a variable speed drive.
Ident ify and describe the four basic categories of electrical test equipment.
Explain how to use a controller display to locate operat ing problems in a variable speed drive.
Explain how to set up, interpret, and use a key test point checklist to troubleshoot a variable speed drive controller.
Explain how to check the major components of a variable speed drive controller.
Subjects:
Troubleshooting with the Controller
Safety Basics
Common Drive Problems
Troubleshooting the Controller
Test Point Checking
Component Checking
Course 241 of 245
Control Systems
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Introduction to VSDs (IHRDC_OM_ACVSD)
Overview:
The Introduction to Variable Speed Drives training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation and
use of variable speed drives. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to identify different types of DC and
AC drives and explain how they control motor operation.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Ident ify different types of variable speed DC drives.
Explain the operation of a DC motor controlled by a variable speed controller.
Ident ify the major components of a variable speed controller operating a DC motor.
Explain the operation of a variable speed controller operating a DC motor.
Ident ify different types of inverter drives.
Explain the operation of a AC motor controlled by an inverter.
Ident ify the major components of a PWM inverter operating an AC motor.
Explain the operation of a PWM inverter operating an AC motor.
Ident ify the major components of a flux vector drive.
Explain the operation of an AC motor controlled by a flux vector drive.
Ident ify different types of flux vector drives.
Explain the operation of a flux vector drive.
Subjects:
DC Drives
Control of DC Motors
DC Controller Components
DC Controller Operation
Inverter Drives
Inverter Control of AC Motors
AC Inverter Components
PWM Controller Operat ion
Flux Vector Drives
Flux Vector Control of AC Motors
Flux Vector Controller Operation
Course 242 of 245
Control Systems
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Programming Controllers (IHRDC_OM_ACVPC)
Overview:
The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Programming Controllers training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic
principles of programming controllers for variable speed DC and AC motors. After completing this program, the t rainees should
be able to identify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed for a DC variable speed controller
and for an AC variable speed controller. They should also be able to describe addit ional programming that may be required
when an AC variable speed controller is set up for flux vector operat ion.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Ident ify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed during the setup of a DC variable speed
drive controller.
Ident ify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed when configuring the I/O for a DC
variable speed drive controller.
Ident ify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed in order to monitor the operation of a
DC variable speed drive controller.
Ident ify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed during the setup of an AC variable
speed drive controller.
Ident ify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed when configuring the I/O for an AC
variable speed drive controller.
Ident ify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed in order to monitor the operation of an
AC variable speed drive controller.
Describe addit ional programming that may be required when an AC variable speed controller is set up for flux vector
operation.
Subjects:
Programming DC Controllers
Setup
I/O Configurat ion
Monitoring
Programming AC Controllers
Setup
I/O Configurat ion
Monitoring
Flux Vector Programming
Course 243 of 245
Control Systems
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: System Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_ACVST)
Overview:
The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: System Troubleshoot ing training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the use of
a basic five-step troubleshooting method to troubleshoot a variable speed drive system. After completing this program, the
trainees should be able to describe problems associated with a variable speed drive system's motor, wiring, and electrical
supply. They should also be able to describe each step of the five-step troubleshoot ing process and explain how to use those
steps to troubleshoot a problem in a variable speed drive system.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Explain how to locate and correct loose motor connections.
Explain how to detect condit ions that could lead to motor winding failure, and suggest remedies for those condit ions.
Explain how to detect condit ions that could lead to motor bearing failure, and suggest remedies for those condit ions.
Explain how to detect motor leakage currents, and suggest remedies for the problem.
Explain how to locate and correct loose wiring connections.
Ident ify and suggest modifications to variable speed drives affected by improper shielding and grounding.
Explain how to check and monitor control system feedback.
Ident ify and suggest modifications to variable speed drives affected by overvoltage reflect ions.
Explain how to locate and correct loose wiring connections.
Ident ify and suggest methods for correcting voltage imbalance in variable speed drive systems.
Explain how to detect single phasing in variable speed drive applications.
Explain how to detect harmonic anomalies, and suggest remedies for those condit ions.
Explain why it is important to know the equipment before you start to troubleshoot.
List the aids available to you in invest igating the symptoms.
Explain how to identify probable causes.
Explain how to priorit ize probable causes.
Explain why it is important to determine the root causes of malfunctions.
Explain how to use the five-step troubleshoot ing method to troubleshoot a variable speed drive.
Subjects:
Troubleshooting a VSD System
Troubleshooting the Motor
Troubleshooting the Wiring
Troubleshooting the Electrical Supply
Five-Step Troubleshooting Method
Know the Equipment
Invest igate Symptoms
List Probable Causes
Test Probable Causes
Discover Root Causes
Troubleshooting Case Study
Course 244 of 245
Control Systems
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Systems and Integration (IHRDC_OM_ACVSI)
Overview:
The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: System Integration t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with several
common ways in which variable speed drives and automated systems are linked together. After completing this program, the
trainees should be able to describe how variable speed drives are integrated into distributed control systems and
programmable control systems. They should also be able to describe the operation of tachometers, encoders, and resolvers,
and explain how to install field devices for variable speed drives.
Duration:
2 hrs
Objectives:
Describe how variable speed drives are integrated into distributed control systems.
Ident ify the network connect ions between a variable speed drive and a distributed control system.
Explain how to install a variable speed drive in a distributed control system.
Describe how variable speed drives are integrated into programmable control systems.
Ident ify the network connect ions between a variable speed drive and a programmable control system.
Explain how to install a variable speed drive in a programmable control system.
Describe the operation of a tachometer used to control a variable speed drive.
Explain how to install and set up tachometers for variable speed drives.
Describe the operation of an encoder used to control a variable speed drive.
Explain how to install and set up encoders for variable speed drives.
Describe the operation of a resolver used to control a variable speed drive.
Explain how to install and set up resolvers for variable speed drives.
Explain how to install field devices for variable speed drives.
Subjects:
Control System Integration
DCS Integrat ion
PLC Integration
Feedback and Field Device Integration
Tachometers
Encoders and Resolvers
Field Devices
Course 245 of 245
Recommended